Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutResolution - 5452 - Contract - Parkhill, Smith, & Cooper Inc - Fire Station #4 Construction - 03_27_1997FOR RESOLUTION REFERENCE PERMANENT MINUTES DATE: CITY OF LUBBOCK SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF FIRE STATION #4 FACILITY BID #97048 x N V V .� 0t6p !� CITY OBE LUBBOCK Lubbock, Togas ?57 h I. • PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER, INC. ENGINEER ■ ARCHITECTS ■ PLANNERS 4010 AVENUE R, LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79412 (806) 747-0168 is FAX (806) 747-7146 ADDENDUM NO. 1, March 5, 1997 RE: Fu a Station No. 4 Lubbock, Texas TO: Prospective Bidders ��. r C U11 in 14144 ' �co �9TE OF, �0%rrs a-;L5-` ,5 This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Bidding Documents dated 24-97 as noted below. Acknowledge receipt of this Addendum in the space provided on the Bid Form. Failure to do so may subject the Bidder to disqualification. This Addendum consists of 16 page(s) and the attached supplemental drawings 1-6, and 4 pages of Bid Submittal, Lump Sum Bid Contract. Also two (2) 24" x 36" drawings are included. I. CHANGES TO BID PROPOSAL A. See attached Bid Submittal, Lump Sum Bid Contract. H. CHANGES TO SPECIFICATIONS A. Section 01031, Alternates: 1. Paragraph 1.2 alternate list. Delete item A. in its entirety; Alternate No. 1: Flagpole. r' B. Section 06410, Custom Cabinetwork: 1. Add 2.4.M; Magnetic Catches: BHMA A156.16 Type B03162. 2. Add 3.4.13; under single and double door cabinet to provide one magnetic catch. C. Section 08710, Hardware: 1. Paragraph 3.3 hardware set #3, delete door 04B from door number list. D. Section 09220, Portland Cement Plaster: 1. Delete Section 09220 in its entirety from specification body and replace with the attached new specification 09220, Portland Cement Plaster. E. Section 09900, Painting: 1. Revise paragraph 2.3.13.10 to read as follows: "10. 1600 Woodmaster Oil Wood Stain Alkyd/Oil" 2. Revise paragraph 2.3.13.13 to read as follows: "13. 5295 DuraMaster Pro -Epoxy Epoxy" 3. Add paragraph 2.3.B.17 to read as follows: "17. 5116 Insul-Aid Primer Sealer Latex" r I 03860296/96 ADDENDUM NO. I Page 1 of 16 r" 4. In paragraph 3.7.13, revise 2nd coat for concrete masonry from 5024 to 8200. 5. In paragraph 3.7.13, add the following under concrete masonry (CMU): r "Room No.'s 5320 Varies 5295 (4.0) 12 and 18" 6. In paragraph 3.7.13, revise 1st coat for exposed roof deck, beams and joists under Ferrous Metals from 5210 to UH405. 7. In paragraph 3.7.13, revise 2nd coat for Galvanized Metal from 5024 to UH8000. r. 8. In paragraph 3.7.13, add the following under Gypsum Drywall: "Room No.'s 5116 (1.4) 5295 (4.0) 13 and 28" 9. In paragraph 3.7.13, revise 1st coat for cabinets, exterior and interiors opaque finish from 555 to UH405, 2nd coat from 460OX to UH8000 and 3rd coat from 460OX to U148000. F. Section 02830, Chain Link Fences and Gates: 1. Add paragraph 1.1.A.4, keyed pad locks. 2. Add paragraph 2.3.E.3, at each swing gate provide keyed pad lock. Padlock to be keyed with building entrance lock hardware. r G. Section 09910, Graffiti Resistant Coating 1. Revise paragraph 1.2.E.1 to read "Section 04200 UNIT MASONRY". ^ 2. Revise paragraph 1.2.E.2 to read "Section 07180 WATER REPELLANTS". 4 . 3. Under paragraph 3.4 APPLICATION, add paragraph 3.4.13 to read as follows: "B. Apply over water repellant specified in Section 07180". H. Section 15500 1. Delete all of paragraph 2.11, Vehicle Exhaust Extraction System Equipment, and replace with paragraph 2.11, Vehicle Exhaust Extraction System Equipment on the attached pages. Section 16470 1. Paragraphs 2.02.0 and 2.03.11, add Cutler -Hammer (Westinghouse) as an acceptable manufacturer. GENERAL NOTE: Contractor will pay for all permits and water and sewer taps. III. CHANGES TO DRAWINGS A. Sheet C2, Site Demolition and Grading Plan 1. On North side of building where sidewalk at yard storage intersects driveway, change the elevation noted from 214.4' to 214.9'. B. Sheet C3, Site Layout Plan 1. On Site Layout Plan, add a new 3'-0" personnel gate per note 20 at fence on west property line next to alley. Locate south edge of gate 3'-0" north of the new gas meter. Hinge side is to be on south most edge of gate. 2. Eliminate alternate ##1, Flagpole. Site layout note #5 will now read "NOT USED". Eliminate half circle portion of concrete walk at this area. C. Sheet S1, Foundation Plan 1. On Foundation Plan, north arrow is to point toward top of page, not the right as indicated. 03860296/96 ADDENDUM NO. 1 Page 2 of 16 6; r 2. On Foundation Plan, elevations of concrete trench in Apparatus Bay will change. Elevation r' at north end of trench (refer to previous paragraph for proper north arrow orientation) is to read "98%3" trench", elevation at south end of trench is to read "99%0" trench". r D. Sheet A2, Floor Plan 1. Provide a 6" filled concrete block curb at west and north walls of women's shower, 6" metal stud is to set on top of CMU curb. �• 2. Delete door 04B from floor plan. E. Sheet A3, Exterior and Interior Elevations 1. On the south elevation, eliminate the 24" x 16" upper louver required for vehicle exhaust rsystem. F. Sheet A6, Reflected Ceiling Plan and Enlarged Plans 1. Under appliance schedule, Item 4 Vent Hood, the control housing model shall be VTR1400Q. G. Sheet A8, Door Window and Finish Schedule 1. Finish schedule, room 28, water heater, change west and north walls from W2 finish to W4 finish. 2. At door type, the door light to door type 1 is to be 2'-8" tall in lieu of 3'-4" tall. The lite is to be 8" from top of door. 3. Delete door 04B from door schedule. H. Sheet A9, Millwork Elevations and Details 1. Elevation 12/A9; all paired doors at top of wardrobe are to be locked per note 19. 2. At details 14/A9 and 16/A9, the expanded metal lockers are to have expanded metal floors and sides. I. Sheet All, Millwork and Wall Sections 1. On Section 9/All, provide continuous soffit vents around perimeter of stucco soffit. Sheet MPE-1, Site Utilities 1. Replace sheet dated 2-24-97 with new sheet MPE-1 dated 3-3-97. 2. The following is changed: a. Relocate grease trap to south side of building. b. Relocate sewer tap to west side of building. c. Delete one 2" c. for traffic signal controller. d. Relocate traffic signal controller pullbox to the southeast corner of site. K. Sheet M-1, Floor Plan -Mechanical 1. RTU #2-97 shall be located on roof and ductwork routed as indicated on Supplemental Drawing No. 1. 2. TE #1-97 shall be located on roof, as indicated on Supplemental Drawing No. 1, in lieu of being suspended in Apparatus Bay 12. 3. Delete vehicle exhaust louver, L-6. Louvers L-7, L-8 and L-9 shall be renumbered to L-6, L-7 and L-8 as indicated on Supplemental Drawing No.l. 4. In the Apparatus Bay 12, Vehicle Exhaust System shall be routed and installed as indicated on Supplemental Drawing No.2. 5. On the Truck Exhaust Schedule, schedule shall be revised as indicated on Supplemental Drawings No. 3. E 03860296/96 ADDENDUM NO. 1 Page 3 of 16 r- r r L 6. On the Louver Schedule, schedule shall be revised as indicated on Supplemental Drawing No. 3. L. Sheet M-2, Details 1. Section - 1/M2, Vehicle Exhaust System shall be installed as indicated on Supplemental Drawing No. 4 in lieu of plan section. 2. Supplemental Drawing No. 5, Equipment Curb Detail shall become a part of the contract plans. 3. On the Exhaust Fan Mounting Detail, exhaust fans shall be mounted as indicated on Supplemental Drawing No. 6. M. Sheet P-1, Floor Plan -Plumbing 1. Replace sheet dated 2-24-97 with new P-1 sheet dated 3-3-97. 2. The following is changed: a. Provide floor drain below ice machine. b. Relocated grease trap and reroute building sewer lines. c. Relocate gas line to enter building at yard Storage Room 15, run exposed up exterior wall thru roof. N. Sheet E-2, Floor Plan -Power 1. Plan note #19 shall serve only one 2" conduit. 2. Plan note #20 shall serve south overhead door. 3. Plan note #21.shall serve north overhead door. 4. Revise plan note #27 to read: "27. Mount switches in vent hood as directed by the Architect." r. �. 03860296/96 ADDENDUM NO. 1 Page 4 of 16 r LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 SECTION 09220 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 900-9268 A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal furring and lathing. B. Portland cement plaster system. C. Smooth surface finish. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS r A. Section 05400 - Cold Formed Metal Framing: Structural metal studding and framing behind plaster base. B. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. r. C. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Systems: Metal Studding and Framing. D. Section 09900 - Painting: Applied surface finish. f r I fr- i 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM B 221 - Aluminum and Aluminum - Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wires, Shapes and Tubes. B. ASTM C150 - Portland Cement. C. ASTM C206 - Finishing Hydrated Lime. D. ASTM C847 - Metal Lath. E. ASTM C897 - Aggregate for Job -Mixed Portland Cement -Based Plasters. F. ASTM C926 - Application of Portland Cement -Based Plaster. G. ASTM C954 - Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs from 0.33 inches to 0.112 inches in thickness. H. ASTM C1002 - Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases. I. ASTM C1063 - Installation of Lathing and Furring for Portland Cement -Based Plaster. J. PCA (Portland Cement Association) - Plaster (Stucco) Manual. 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Fabricate vertical elements to limit finish surface to 1/240 deflection under lateral point load of 100 lbs. B. Fabricate horizontal elements to limit finish surface to 11360 deflection under superimposed dead load and wind uplift loads. 03860296/96 ADDENDUM NO. 1 Page 5 of 16 r l� LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 1.6 SUBMITTALS 900-9268 A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data 1. Provide product data on furring, lathing components, structural characteristics, plaster materials, characteristics and limitations of products specified. 2. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. C. Certificates 1. Submit manufacturer's certificate that products meet or exceed specified requirements. D. Samples 1. Submit two samples, 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating finish color and texture. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Lather 1. Company specializing in metal furring and lathing work with 3 years documented experience. 2. Perform work in accordance with ASTM C 1063. B. Plasterer 1. Company specializing in cement plaster work with 3 years documented experience. 2. Apply cement plaster in accordance with ASTM C926. C. Mock-up 1. Construct mockup, 2 feet long by 2 feet wide, which includes furring, lathing, plaster finish, color, substrate, incidental flashings, sealants, and other components. Coordinate with installation of associated work of Sections 05400 and 09260. 2. Locate where directed. 3. Accepted sample shall be kept at project site until completion of all work of this section. 4. Mockup may not remain as part of the Work. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply plaster when substrate or ambient air temperature is less than 50 degrees F nor more than 80 degrees F. B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees F during installation of plaster and until cured. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Finish Stucco 1. El Rey Stucco Co., Inc.; Albuquerque, NM. 2. La Habra Products, Inc.; Anaheim, CA. 3. United States Gypsum; Chicago, IL. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 03860296/96 ADDENDUM NO. 1 Page 6 of 16 r c LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 2.2 MATERIALS 900-9268 A. Studs, and Tracks: As specified in Section 05400 - Cold Formed Metal Framing and 09260 - Gypsum Board Systems. B. Furring Channels: ASTM C1063, hot or cold rolled steel; rust inhibitive paint finish, 3/8 inch deep x 3/4 inch high; length as required. C. Lateral Bracing: Formed steel, rust inhibitive paint finish; minimum 16 gage thick; size and length as required. D. Metal Lath: ASTM C847; Rust inhibitive primer, self furring mesh 2.5 lb/sq yd backed with treated paper at horizontal surfaces only. E. Wire Mesh Reinforcement: 2 x 2 inch galvanized steel 24 gage wire, woven mesh, self -furring type. F. Casing Bead: Formed sheet steel zinc coated, minimum 26 gage; depth governed by plaster thickness; maximum possible lengths; expanded metal flanges, with square edges. G. Corner Bead: Formed zinc, minimum 26 gage thick; depth governed by plaster thickness; maximum possible lengths; expanded metal flanges, with radiused edge. H. Base Screed: Formed zinc; minimum 26 gage thick; depth governed by plaster thickness; maximum possible lengths; expanded metal flanges, with beveled edge. I. Corner Mesh: Formed zinc, minimum 26 gage thick; expanded flanges shaped to permit complete embedding in plaster; minimum 2 inches wide. J. Control Joint: Formed zinc, minimum 26 gage thick; accordion profile, 2 inch expanded metal flanges each side; zinc finish. K. Reveal Molding: Formed zinc„ minimum 26 gage thick; of profile indicated on drawings, expanded flanges shaped to permit complete embedding in plaster; minimum 2 inches wide; galvanized finish. L. Vent Screed: Formed zinc, minimum 26 gage thick, solid keying flanges, depth governed by plaster thickness; maximum possible lengths; with integral vent slots; acceptable Product: Delta Star Inc. model #SVV. M. Anchorage Methods: Nails, staples, or other approved metal supports, of type and size to suit application, galvanized to rigidly secure lath and associated metal accessories in place. N. Cement: ASTM C150, Type I Portland. O. Lime: ASTM C206, Type S. P. Aggregate: In accordance with ASTM C897. Q. Color Pigment: Mineral oxide type. R. Water: Clean, fresh, potable and free of mineral or organic matter which can affect plaster. 2.3 PLASTER MIXES A. Mix and proportion base -coat cement plaster in accordance with ASTM C926, Type P, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Finish Coat 1. Premix in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Add color pigments to finish coat in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Ensure uniformity of mix and coloration. C. Mix only as much plaster as can be used prior to initial set. D. Mix materials dry, to uniform color and consistency, before adding water. E. Protect mixtures from freezing, frost, contamination, and evaporation. 03860296/96 ADDENDUM NO. 1 Page 7 of 16 r 4 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 r* F. Do not retemper finish coat mixes after initial set has occurred. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify surfaces and site conditions. B. Masonry: Verify joints are cut flush and surface is ready to receive work of this Section. Verify no bituminous or water repellent coatings exist on masonry surface. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Dampen masonry surfaces to reduce excessive suction. B. Clean concrete surfaces of foreign matter. Clean surfaces using acid solutions, solvents, or detergents. Wash surfaces with clean water. C. Roughen smooth concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Install lathing and furring for Portland cement plaster work in accordance with r ASTM C 1063 and the following: B. Wall and Furred Space Framing 1. Specified in Sections 05400 and 09260. 2. Erect wall furring by directly attaching to concrete masonry. j 3. Establish control joints with specified joint device. C. Ceiling and Soffit Framing 1. Install furring to height indicated after above ceiling work is complete. �- 2. Install ceiling furring independent of walls, columns, and above ceiling work. 3. Place furring channels perpendicular to carrying studs, not more than 2 inches from perimeter walls, and rigidly secure. 4. Reinforce openings in suspension system which interrupt main carrying channels or furring channels with lateral channel bracing. Extend bracing minimum 24 inches past each opening. r 5. Laterally brace suspension system. 6. Establish contraction and control joints with specified joint device. 7. Splice laps in main and furring in conformance with ASTM C1063. r D. Lathing 1. Apply metal lath taut, with long dimension perpendicular to supports. 2. Lap ends minimum 1 inch. Secure end laps with tie wire where they occur between supports. r3. Lap sides of diamond mesh lath minimum 1-1/2 inches. ` 4. Attach metal lath to metal soffit framing in accordance with ASTM C 1063. Space attachments at maximum 6 inches on center. 5. Attach metal lath to metal studs with Type S, corrosion resistant, pancake head screws complying with ASTM C954. Space screws at maximum 8 inches on center. r` is 03860296/96 ADDENDUM NO. 1 Page 8 of 16 M 1 ' ti. ` LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 7. , E. Accessories 1. Continuously reinforce internal angles with corner mesh, return metal lath 3 inches from corner to form the angle reinforcement; fasten at perimeter edges only. 2. Place corner bead at external wall corners; fasten at outer edges of lath only. �., 3. Place strip mesh diagonally at corners of lathed openings. Secure rigidly in place. 4. Place 4 inch wide strips of metal lath centered over junctions of dissimilar backing ` materials. Secure rigidly in place. 5. Place casing beads at terminations of plaster finish. Butt and align ends. Secure r rigidly in place. F. Control Joints 1. Locate exterior control joints as indicated on reflected ceiling plan and elevations. 2. Establish control joints with specified joint device. k . 3. Coordinate joint placement with other related work. 3.4 PLASTERING A. Apply plaster in accordance with ASTM C926 and manufacturer's instructions. B. Apply scratch coat to a nominal thickness of 3/8 inch, brown coat to a nominal thickness of 3/8 inch, and a finish coat to a nominal thickness of 1/8 inch over metal lathed surfaces. �•. C. Moist cure brown coats. Apply brown coat immediately following initial set of scratch i coat. ` D. After curing, dampen base coat prior to applying finish coat. * E. Apply finish coat and wood float to a smooth and consistent finish. F. Avoid excessive working of surface. Delay troweling as long as possible to avoid drawing excess fines to surface. G. Moist cure finish coat for minimum period of 48 hours. H. Tempering of finish -coat plaster is prohibited. 3.5 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet. END OF SECTION r i 03860296/96 ADDENDUM NO. 1 Page 9 of 16 r r LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 2.11 VEHICLE EXHAUST EXTRACTION SYSTEM EQUIPMENT A. Scope of System Operation: The vehicle exhaust removal system shall capture 100% of the exhaust emissions directly at the tailpipe of the vehicle and exhaust those emissions to a ` specified area safely outside the building. The operating logic shall be designed to complete �,,, this cycle. A pneumatically operated collection nozzle is connected to a motor vehicle's exhaust tailpipe when the vehicle is started by the driver, the exhaust fan will automatically energize and vent toxic gases directly to the outside of the building. This automatic feature is achieved by means of pressure sensor located inside the exhaust ducting, this pressure sensor senses the engine's output pressure upon the first stroke of the engine piston and energizes the fan starter. The automatic controller uses an adjustable timer to keep the contactors energized for a designated interval of. Should the operating vehicle not exit the station in less than the r"` r designated time period, a temperature override switch can be incorporated to override the timer relay. The override is achieved by means of an adjustable temperature (heat) sensor has a range of 90 - 130 degrees. If the vehicle is still running inside the station longer than Flo anticipated, the heat sensor will override the timer relay. The exhaust system will stay connected to the vehicle tailpipe as it travels to the exit door by means of a pneumatic connection device that slides on a specially designed track system. The sliding track is �• securely attached to the building structure and supports a flexible hose assembly that moves with vehicle inside the station. As the vehicle nears the exit door, the connection nozzle is ` automatically released from the tailpipe by means of an uncoupling valve strategically located on the track. After the system releases the vehicle tailpipe at the door, it retracts passively and smoothly into a convenient storage position. When the vehicle returns to the station, a system operator manually pulls the flexible hose assembly to the entrance door. The system operator, without bending over, attaches the pneumatic connection device just inside the door threshold +� as the vehicle enters the station, at which time the exhaust fan motor energizes. The vehicle driver momentarily stops the vehicle when the tailpipe is just inside the door threshold (a backup man will notify the driver when it is time to stop the vehicle). The system operator, r standing erect with pneumatic slide valve in his left hand, slides the connection deice up against the flanged adapter attached to the vehicle tailpipe, the operator will then inflate pneumatic nozzle around tail pipe. The cycle is completed as the exhaust fan vents the toxic " gases with the connection nozzle firmly attached. The vehicle then proceeds to the designated - parking position. r- B. Sliding Balancer Track: Sliding track shall be a one piece continuous extruded track in a minimum length of 20 feet. Construction profile shall be of a Boxloc type profile, which adheres to the following dimensional data. Track height 3 1/8", width 1 1/2", thickness 1/8". The track material shall be aircraft aluminum alloy type AA-06063. The track is designed with three separate and functioning compartments. The mounting compartment, trolley ` compartment, and the boxloc compartment. Each of these compartments performs a specific r function to make the system work effectively. The mounting compartment is designed to accept slider bars (which are provided with factory supplied vertical support legs and riser clamp duct connection) and allow positioning along the full length of slotted track mounting compartment. Mounting compartment shall also accommodate compressed airlines for purposes of a safe storage and appearance. The trolley compartment conveys the trolley/balancer/hose assembly to the door threshold in a safe and effective manner. The r boxloc compartment allows the whole track to remain rigid as it hangs from factory -supplied F 03860296/96 ADDENDUM NO. 1 Page 10 of 16 7 r LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 leg supports and to provide an area to attach bolts for splicing additional tracks together for systems over 20 feet long. The overall track lengths shall be 20 foot standard and weight no more than 35 lbs. The track system shall be equipped with end stops that limit travel of flex hose as the vehicle leaves the building. The end stops shall be fabricated of zinc plated steel in U-shape form with rubber end stop on the impact end of the end stop. It is attached by using a 1/4" molded locking bolt. End stop shall be secured to track with no less than (2) 1/4" bolts and locking nuts located on the underside of the track. For security, a 1/4" bolt shall be drilled through the ends of each track system to insure that the trolleylbalancer assembly(s) roll no further than the end of the track system. C. Support Legs: Support legs shall be manufactured and provided by the supplier of primary exhaust system. (Equipment manufacturer). Supports shall be zinc -plated telescopic type and shall be capable of telescopic travel form 6 inches to 13 feet. A minimum of one support with appropriate bracing shall be provided for every 10 linear feet of track profile. The support leg shall consist of a square outer profile with dimensions no less than 1 3/4" OD. With 3/8" fastening hardware provided. Inner leg shall be C profile type with continuous slot along its traveling length. Welded securely to bottom of C profile shall be a mounting foot complete with slider bar and 3/8" hardware necessary for mounting horizontal track to mounting compartment system. The support leg shall be equipped with round tubular zinc -plated steel with pressed ends. Angle shall be completely adjustable to the leg support and mounted perpendicular and parallel to direction of the track. Typical support angle shall be 451 from center line of manufacturer provided support leg. The standard leg shall meet the Seismic 4 requirement needed to meet the specifications. r- D. Double Track Joiner Plate: Shall be constructed from a minimum of 1/4" thick zinc -plated t material and designed to connect two parallel tracks to make a double track system to accommodate bays over 40 feet in depth. The joiner plate shall be 10" x 8" flat zinc -plated rsteel and designed to attach the two tracks to a single support leg. The steel plate shall have (6) 3/8" holes drilled 6 7/8" apart to accommodate the slider bar provided with manufacturers support leg. The joiner plate shall have two slider bars attached to the plate and shall be r located on the outside edges of plate, these slider bars will fit into the boxloc tracks mounting t ' compartment for a simple and secure attachment of plate to boxloc track. The center portion of the joiner plate shall provide attachment for factory -supplied support. E. Track Splicing Assembly: Shall be fabricated for the sole function of connecting two boxloc sliding tracks end -to -end. Track splice shall be manufactured of galvanized steel in two parts as a clamping device. This clamp shall accurately secure both tracks in a fashion, which shall eliminate any possibility of snagging trolley assembly as it passes through connection point of track system. Connecting length of splice shall be a minimum of 15 3/4" long and fabricated of 14 gauge material. Four 1/4" bolts with lock nuts shall pass directly through internal partition of boxloc track.. The splicing sleeve shall fit externally around the outside dimension of track profile. F. Riser Clamp Assembly: Riser clamp shall be fabricated as a one piece welded assembly and manufactured to create transfer of hard spiral pipe joining at the top and flexible duct connection at the bottom. Riser clamp shall be pre -drilled to mount air regulator to riser clamp assembly and to accept airlines that pass through air tight seals mounted to riser pipe. Slider bar and associated hardware shall be provided with riser clamp assembly. Sizes of the r t 03860296/96 ADDENDUM NO. 1 Page 11 of 16 r, r r LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 riser clamp will range from 3" - 6" diameter to match the output velocity of the vehicles that will park in that station. G. Accutrack Trolley/ Balancer Assembly: Trolley assembly shall be manufactured as a two piece galvanized steel assembly including bumper stops at each end. Fixed to the side of the trolley are solid steel pins which shall be four load carrying bearings that are sealed and permanently lubricated. Load carrying bearings shall travel internally in track trolley compartment. Two additional permanently lubricated trolley wheels shall be provided on bottom side of track to reduce wobble of trolley as it conveys the hose assembly to the door threshold. Release plate shall be attached to chassis of trolley to smoothly energize uncoupling release valve when trolley -balancer assembly passes to door threshold. System balancer shall be a self-adjusting weight spring tension balancer with a lifting capacity of no less than 31 lb. Balancer shall have a minimum diameter stainless steel cable of .080 and safety link connection.. The system supplier shall manufacture balancer for the sole purposed of conveying flexible hose to door threshold of automatic release system. Balancer block shall bear the name of manufacture on the outside of spring balancer casing. No exceptions will be taken on this matter. H. Regulator Assembly: Regulator assembly shall be constructed of cast aluminum and refinished with black epoxy coating. Regulator shall safely operate with an input pressure of 0-200 psi, it's output pressure shall be preset at 15 psi. The regulator shall be attached to each Riser Assembly/Hose Drop or to the boxloc track to allow for independent adjustment of each pneumatic nozzle. Regulator shall also be provided with needle type adjustment gauge that clearly shows proper operating range of system, and which can be visibly read from floor. I. Uncoupling Valve Assembly: Provided for active release of connection nozzle from moving exhaust pipe. Valve shall be single direction action and affixed to a mounting bracket, which can be easily positioned along the full length of track profile. Mounting bracket shall be formed from a minimum of 16 gauge galvanized steel and designed to fit snugly over top of boxloc track system. A 1/4" opening shall be centered to top side of bracket to accommodate 1" x 1/4" bolt with 1/2" PLT-plated 1 1/2" long bar providing the secure attachment of Uncoupling Valve when system is put into service. Release valve shall be set for the maximum exiting speed of the vehicle. ]. Upper Flexible Hose: Hose shall be flexible exhaust hose manufactured for the sole purpose of venting high temperature exhaust gases, which are produced by internal combustion engines. Flexible hose shall be designed strictly for the harsh environment of rapid response auto - release of vehicle tailpipe. Hose shall range from 3 - 5" diameter with varying lengths depending on system length ranging from 20 - 43' without joining of splicing connections. Hose material shall be high temperature synthetic rubber impregnated into a high temperature laminated fabric with a minimum overlapping thickness of 2 7/16". This construction of hose must be capable of operating at continuous temperatures of 400°F and intermittent temperatures of 500OF such as are experienced when pump engines are tested inside the station. Independent testing by a recognized UL laboratory must accompany this bad as proof performance claim. Wire Helix shall be bound and protected in laminations of hose winding. This shall be accomplished in a fashion, which eliminates any possibility of personnel coming in contact with exposed hot metal helix. The hose shall further protect internal wire helix from heat buildup and in turn add increased visibility to personnel. Wear strip shall be 9/16" wide and provided as a safety yellow color. The bend radius of the high temperature hose 03860296196 ADDENDUM NO. I Page 12 of 16 Pi" 7 r r LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 shall be no lesser than 1.5 times the diameter of hose to insure that hot gases be restricted as they pass through the system. K. Lower Hose Assembly: Shall be a rigid 3-5" diameter by 2 foot long section of yellow and black hose identical in appearance to the upper hose assembly. Lower hose shall support connection nozzle and chrome reducing elbow in a rigid fashion as to allow for operator to place hose collection nozzle onto tailpipe without bending over. Lower hose is the only section of hose which shall release from hose assembly in the event of safety disconnect from the system. L. Hose Saddle: Hose suspension saddle shall be fabricated of a rubber molded cushion specifically manufactured for the sole purpose of suspending exhaust ventilation hose in a rapid response and auto -release application. Design of saddle shall smoothly transition direction of hose during its operating travel. Securing clamps shall be provided including all link fasteners, which will mount to balancer safety link. M. Safety Disconnect Coupling: Rubber coupling shall be incorporated n the design of system enabling the lower tow foot hose assembly to separate from the upper hose assembly thus reducing the possible chance of damage to system, in the event the exhaust connection nozzle assemble may become entangled in wheels or under carriage of vehicles. This device shall consist of two spun aluminum collars connected by a reusable rubber band. The release tension of this device to separate shall be no greater than 88 lbs. One collar shall house an expanded secondary metal debris screen. Since this item is a point of safety for both personnel and the system itself, no exception may be taken to this on this point. N. Manual Fill Valve: Connection valve located 1 foot above safety release coupling approximately 4 feet from floor and shall be of the sliding/push button type for manual or automatic release. This valve shall incorporate in its design a handle, which the operator may easily operate in a standing position. The attachment of connection nozzle shall not position operator's breathing zone closer than 44" from the exhaust tail pipe. Automatic release of connection valve shall be no greater than 3 psi. shift pressure to activate automatic nozzle deflation. Primary air supply shall be accomplished by means of compression type fitting. Regulated air supply line to connection nozzle shall be designed to safety release from upper hose at a release pressure no greater than 80 lbs. No exception shall be taken to this feature. O. Connection Nozzle Assembly: Nozzle shall provide a substantially air tight seal around exhaust tail pie when connected. Seal shall not allow for escape of life threatening exhaust gases which may be present during the following conditions. If vehicle's engine is accelerated above normal idle resulting in an exhaust velocity greater than 5000 feet/minute or in the event that the output velocity or CFM of the exhaust exceeds manufacturer's normal capture velocity or CFM of exhaust system. Nozzle shall automatically adjust its internal orifice to accept any tail pipe ranging from one inch through six inch diameter. Manufacturer of nozzle shall offer, if required, both maximum diameter nozzles ranging from 4.75" diameter to 8.25" diameter. The nozzle pressure shall not exceed 15 psi. when connected to vehicle tailpipe. Nozzle construction shall be high temperature synthetic rubber, vulcanized to a high temperature synthetic fabric. A NOMEX inner liner shall be provided as a primary temperature and also act as a friction barrier. The chrome reducing elbow which connects the pneumatic grabber shall be fabricated using continuous welded construction. This important feature eliminates the escape of any potentially lethal exhaust gases and must provide for a smooth air flow 03860296/96 ADDENDUM NO. 1 Page 13 of 16 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 C' F transition from connection nozzle to the high temperature flexible hose. Angle of transition shall be less than or greater than 670 from center line of reducer. Chrome reducer shall incorporate a primary expanded metal debris screen, which is permanently affixed by welded seams to the inside opening of exhaust fitting. P. Compressed Air Features: Airlines shall be 1/4" (6mm) OD tubing capable of exposure of high temperature air stream inside ventilation hose and duct. And shall be fed through exterior of hose and duct by the use of substantially air tight chrome fittings. Manufacturer will provide quiet operating compressor to be located in an accessible to the vehicle bay and located so that preventative maintenance can be performed quickly and effectively. The operation of compressor running inside station shall not generate sound decibels in excess of 25 Dba. The compressor shall be equipped with filter/dryer to insure the conveyance of clean dry to the pneumatic controls incorporated in the auto -release ventilation system. Q. Special Features: System must be designed to expand to tandem vehicle arrangement (one vehicle behind the other) by adding to the proposed system. Systems that rgquire replacement of existing system or major components to meet a tandem vehicle arrangement. shall not be gccotable. Upon request, emergency disconnect feature shall be provided to enable the vehicle to back off the system through a rear exit door. Unique occasions may require the emergency vehicle to depart from the back door in a drive through station. Also a malfunction of the front over -head door may force the vehicle to exit from station outside the confines of normal operation. Overall system design shall be for both back -in and drive -through configurations when applicable, this assures door to door coverage and collection of exhaust gases from point of connection at doorway of either exit or entrance of facility. R. Vehicle Tailpipe Modification: Manufacturer drawing must accompany system for the precise modification procedure for vehicles attached to extraction system. The modification shall bent the exhaust gases at a 901 angle on passenger side of vehicle. Tailpipes requiring a 451 angle of exhaust venting shall not be acceptable, so to prevent exhaust blow back into station after the auto -release system disengages the tailpipe. A connection flange shall be provided by manufacturer as a precisely located stop point for the connection nozzle. The manufacturers supplied adapter shall securely attach to the vehicle tailpipe. Connection flange shall be fabricated from 14 gauge aluminized steel. Two section (or) half shall be provided for simple attachment to vehicle tailpipe. The sections shall be bolted together with four (4) 3/4" x 1 1/2" long PLT-plated bolts and nuts assemblies. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Exhaust System: The exhaust removal system shall be installed as indicated and recommended by the manufacturer. Welding and brazing shall conform to AMSE-17. Slip joints shall be sealed. Riser duct shall be supported to the structure as indicated on the drawing. Main duct shall be attached to building structural members. B. Building Surface Penetrations: All penetrations to interior and exterior walls shall be core rdrilled. All penetrations shall be sealed using a clear waterproof sealant. Where core drilling is not possible, penetrations shall be framed and sealed using sheet metal collar. The owner shall approve all framing of duct penetrations around exterior and interior walls. r i 0 03860296/96 ADDENDUM NO. 1 Page 14 of 16 r". r LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 3.2 EXHAUST SYSTEM SUSPENSION 900-9268 A. Guide Track: Installation height of sliding balancer track shall a minimum of 10' and a maximum of 14' off the finished floor, or as otherwise indicated on the drawings. The sliding balancer track shall be installed approximately 20" from the side of the vehicle and maximum of 7' from door threshold. The sliding balancer track for the exhaust system shall include the highest quality of corrosion resistance supports and shall be supplied by the manufacturer of exhaust system for ease of mounting to structural channel, trusses, or angle iron. Brackets shall be a minimum of 0.125" thickness. Mounting bolts to be no less than 0.375" diameter (structural grade 8) for connection to steel frame. Bolts required for masonry installation shall be 0.5 x 3.5" expansion bolts, or 0.375" x 4" sleeve anchors for wall mount masonry connection. 03860296/96 ADDENDUM NO. 1 Page 15 of 16 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 3.3 TESTING 900-9268 A. Tests: Each exhaust system and inlet shall be balanced to produce the indicated air quantities within 10 percent at conditions shown. Control devices shall be set to control at the points indicated or directed. Any fans with beatings shall be lubricated, and the speed, direction and rotation of each fan shall be checked and verified as correct. Upon completion and prior to acceptance of the installation, the exhaust system shall be tested at the operating conditions to demonstrate satisfactory functional and operating efficiency. Operating tests shall cover a period of not less than 2 hours for each system, and all tests will, if requested, be conducted in the presence of the Owner or his designated representative. If tests do not demonstrate satisfactory operation of the exhaust system, deficiencies shall be corrected and tested. All instruments, facilities, and labor required to properly conduct the tests shall be provided by the Contractor. In addition, the vehicles to be attached to the exhaust system shall flow tested to determine the maximum output velocity of exhaust gases. Consideration shall be made for static regain made possible by a substantially airtight connection to the vehicle tailpipe. 3.4 TRAINING A. The Contractor, or authorized approved personnel, shall provide training to the Owner (or appointed representatives of the Owner) in the daily use of and maintenance of the vehicle exhaust removal system installed and specified herein. The Owner shall be notified at least 7 days prior to the date scheduled for the training course. Training shall be for all personnel involved with the operation of exhaust system including all shifts required to man the facility. Training session shall be in person by a duly recognized representative of the manufacturer of exhaust system, furthermore, an up-to-date training video will be provided to the owner before project is signed off as completed. 03860296/96 ADDENDUM NO. 1 Page 16 of 16 r ra t E I�I f' r r r 2-97 `ITED L�WE R1AL I r t - PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER 4010 Ave. R Lubbock,. Texas 79412 Project No. 03860296 RANGE HOOD. SEE ARCHITECTURAL SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWING NO. 1 3 March 1997 Lubbock Fire Station No. 4 l O NTED AFF r IPER R r� t r f r r— PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER 4010 Ave. R Lubbock, Texas 79412 Project No. 03860296 MULTI-PUF 4 SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWING NO. 2 3 March 1997 Lubbock Fire Station No. 4 bM O Q A CD Cr O r+ 0 > o m rr— ...I . O x mCn 0 y N (D CD R° O N (i 0 0 'a m :o r m c 'S Cr m o Z D 7 r CD wcn D c o o co 0 co P v W TRUCK EXHAUST SCHEDULE MARK TOTAL CFM CFM EACH DROP SP HP RAIL LENGTH FAN-ELEC. DATA FAN MODEL NO. EXAMPLE TE #1-97 1000 500 7.7" 5 30' 200 V/3 PH M3613T PLYMOVENT EXHAUST SYSTEM Notes: 1. Install as per manufacturer's directions. LOUVER SCHEDULE MARK SIZE TYPE FREE AREA FRAME EXAMPLE L-1 8OX56 DRAINABLE 16.5 S.F. CHANNEL RUSKIN L6375D L-2 16X16 DRAINABLE 0.62 S.F. CHANNEL RUSKIN L6375D L-3 16X16 DRAINABLE 0.62 S.F. CHANNEL RUSKIN L6375D •L-4 16X16 DRAINABLE 0.62 S.F. CHANNEL RUSKIN L6375D L-5 16X16 DRAINABLE 0.62 S.F. CHANNEL RUSKIN L6375D L-6 66X24 DRAINABLE 5.22 S.F. CHANNEL RUSKIN L6375D L-7 66X24 DRAINABLE 5.22 S.F. CHANNEL RUSKIN L6375D L-8 66X24 DRAINABLE 5.22 S.F. CHANNEL RUSKIN L6375D Notes: ' 1. Louver construction shall be as described in 2. Sizes are expressed in inches. 3. See Architectural plan for exact location of section louvers. 10200. v R -J I g� rLrL �wn V ~ PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER 4010 Ave. R Lubbock, Texas 79412 18 SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWING NO. 4 3 March 1997 Project No. 03860296 Lubbock Fire Station No. 4 o Q- - D o� 0 z <� o _,5 O x o `j 2 (D co A go N 0 O a m C -o V r, m c 'S v- m o A C w a z o c o c. v cl GALVANIZED SHEET METAL FLASHING 2' RIGID INSULATION ROOF INSULATION o.J•.❖. :•-•D ROOFING '-Ti 1•t•� �.•�•i i�i�i�w�i �i i�i�i�i i�i�i�i�i�i�it..l:•:•�� � SUBCONTRACTOR 314, PLYWOOD 20X4' NAILER COUNTERFLASHING - BY ROOFING 4-1� z SUBCONTRACTOR ROOFING RIGID INSULATION \\ `-46 GA. FORMED CHANNEL STEEL CK CURB // SIDES \\ JOIST EQUIPMENT CURB DETAIL NO SCALE SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWING NO, 5 CANT - STRIP BY ROOFING SUBCONTRACTOR FACTORY FABRICATED CURB BACKDRAFT DAMPER ROOF --% EXHAUST FAN INTEGRAL FLASHING BASE ROOFING EXHAUST DUCT SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWING NO. 6 PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER 4010 Ave. R Lubbock, Texas 79412 Project No. 03860296 SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWING NO. 6 3 March 1997 Lubbock Fire Station No. 4 r i I BID SUBMITTAL LUMP SUM BID CONTRACT PLACE: DATE: PROJECT NUMBER: 97048 - CONSTRUCTION OF FIRE STATION #4 FACILITY Bid of (hereinafter called Bidder) To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner) Gentlemen: The Bidder, in compliance with your invitation for bids for the construction of a having carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to bidders, notice to bidders and all other related contract documents and the site of the intended work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of the intended project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby intends to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, within the time set forth therein and at the price stated below. The price to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required under the contract documents. MATERIALS: ($ ) SERVICES: ($ ) TOTAL BID: ($ ) Alternate No. 2: Emergency Generator, 1. Provide Emergency Generator, transfer switch, connections, etc., complete & ready to use. Some Light Fixture changes are also a part of this alternate. See fixture schedule. 2. As specified in Electrical Specification Sections. 3. As shown on Electrical Sheets. 4. NOTE: Emergency Panel in in the Base Bid. MATERIALS: ($ ) SERVICES: ($ ) TOTAL ALTERNATE BID NO. 2 (Add) ($ ) Alternate No.3: Additional (12) Metal Lockers 1. Add 12 additional lockers identical to the 12 in the Base Bid. 2. As Specified in Section(s) 10505. r 3. As shown on Architectural Sheets. MATERIALS: ($ ) SERVICES: ($ ) e TOTAL ALTERNATE BID NO. 3 (Add) ($ ) L Alternate No. 4: Graffiti Resistant Coating 1. Add graffiti resistant coating 2. As specified in Section 09910. 4 MATERIALS: ($ ) r 1 SERVICES: ($ ) TOTAL ALTERNATE BID NO. 4 (Add) ($ ) r Alternate No. 5: Concrete Sidewalk at Property Perimeter 1. Add concrete sidewalk as indicated on Sheet C3. 7 MATERIALS: ($ ) SERVICES: ($ ) TOTAL ALTERNATE BID NO. 5 (Add) ($ ) ,., (Amount shall be shown in both words and numerals. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.) Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on or before a date to be specified in a written "Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to fully complete the project within 250 (TWO HUNDRED FIFTY) consecutive calendar days thereafter as stipulated in the specifications and other contract documents. Bidder hereby further agrees to pay to Owner as liquidated damages the sum of $300.00 (THREE HUNDRED) for each consecutive calendar day in excess of the time set forth hereinabove for completion of this project, all as more fully set forth in the general conditions PM of the contract documents. ` Bidder understands and agrees that this bid submittal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with instruction number 21 of the General Instructions to Bidders. Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any formality in the bidding. r The Bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) calendar days after the scheduled closing time for receiving bids. The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the plans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this bid, and he further agrees to commence work on or before the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work .- on which he has bid; as provided in the contract documents. r r- Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's check or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than five percent (5% ) of the total amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within (ten) 10 days after notice of award of the contract to him. Enclosed with this bid is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for Dollars ($ ) or a Bid Bond in the sum of Dollars ($ ), which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the event the bid is accepted by the Owner and the undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents and the required bond (if any) with the Owner within ten (10) days after the date of receipt of written notification of acceptance of said bid; otherwise, said check or bond shall be returned to the undersigned upon demand. Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Bidder shall be bound and include all contract documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. (Seal if Bidder is a Corporation) ATTEST: Secretary Authorized Signature (Printed or Typed Name) Company Address City, County State Zip Code Telephone: Fax: r. LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS Minority Owned Yes No 0 0 ❑ 0 ❑ 0 0 ❑ 0 ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ 0 ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ FIRE STATION NUMBER 4 FUND PROJECT NO. 900-9268 DWAYNE R. AGNW-0 February 4th, 1997 •.�-,'�� -City of Lubbock Fire Department Public Safety Improvement Program 1995-2005 Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc. g Engineers Architects Planners E D ARC, a � � 14144 �CIO 9TE OF, . �......i......... :.. JOSEPH R. RAP! ............ nA AGNEW ASSOCIATES, INC. AMLCXA - . ILICTM i COKKX ao c WMS 700 i,� deb �� !99l ■ CITY OF LUBBOCK INVITATION TO BID FOR TITLE: CONSTRUCTION OF FIRE STATION 04 FACILITY ADDRESS: LUBBOCK, TEXAS BID NUMBER: 97048 PROJECT NUMBER: 9268.9211 CONTRACT PREPARED BY: PURCHASING DEPARTMENT LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 TABLE OF CONTENTS BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, CONTRACT FORMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT Notice to Bidders General Instructions to Bidders _ Bid Submittal - Bid for Lump Sum Contracts Payment Bond - - Performance Bond Certificate of Insurance Contract General Conditions of the Agreement Current Wage Determinations DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01010 Summary of Work 01031 Alternates 01200 Progress Documentation and Procedures 01300 Submittals 01400 Quality Control Procedures 01600 Product Requirements 01700 Construction Procedures 01800 Project Record Documents DIVISION 2 - SITEWORK 02200 Earthwork 02280 Soil Treatment 02520 Portland Cement Concrete Paving 02830 Chain Link Fences and Gates DMSION 3 - CONCRETE 03300 Cast -In -Place Concrete DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 04200 Unit Masonry DMSION 5 - METALS 05120 Structural Steel 05210 Steel Joists 05313 Steel Roof Deck 05315 Steel Form Deck 05400 Cold Formed Metal Framing 03860296/96 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 1 of 3 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 05500 Metal Fabrications 05530 Gratings DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS 06100 Rough Carpentry 06410 Custom Cabinetwork DIVISION 7 - MOISTURE PROTECTION 07180 Water Repellents 07410 Manufactured Metal Roof and Wall Panels 07525 Modified Bituminous Sheet Roofing 07600 Flashing and Sheet Metal 07700 Roof Specialties and Accessories 07900 Joint Sealers DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 08110 Steel Doors and Frames 08211 Flush Wood Doors 08364 Steel Sectional Overhead Doors 08415 Aluminum Storefront 08520 Aluminum Windows 08710 Door Hardware 08800 Glazing DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09220 Portland Cement Plaster 09260 Gypsum Board Systems 09300 Tile 09511 Acoustical Lay -In Ceilings 09650 Resilient Flooring 09651 Resilient Tile Flooring 09680 Carpet 09900 Painting 09910 Graffiti Resistant Coating DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10162 Baked Enamel Steel Toilet Compartments 10200 Louvers and Vents 10350 Flagpoles 10425 Signs 10505 Metal Lockers 10521 Fire Extinguishers 10810 Toilet Accessories 10820 Shower Doors/Enclosures 03860296/96 TABLE OF CONTENTS 900-9268 Page 2 of 3 ILL- LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT - NOT USED DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 12511 Horizontal Louver Blinds 12621 Marker Boards DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION NOT USED DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS NOT USED DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL 15000 General Provisions for Mechanical and Electrical 15100 Site Utilities -- 15200 Piping and Accessories 15210 Plumbing Systems 15280 Fire Protection Sprinkler System .- 15320 Air Distribution 15330 Hangers and Supports 15400 Insulation 15550 Equipment 15600 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Mechanical Systems DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL ^, 16000 General Provisions For Electrical 16110 Raceways and Fittings 16115 Underfloor Electrical Duct 16120 Conductors 16140 Wiring Devices 16180 Equipment Controls and Wiring Systems 16195 Electrical Identification 16400 Electrical Service 16441 Circuit and Motor Disconnect Switches 16450 Grounding and Bonding 16470 Panelboards -- 16475 Circuit Disconnect and Overcurrent Protective Devices 16481 Motor Controllers 16500 Lighting 16721 Fire Alarm Systems 16915 Lighting Control Systems 900-9268 03860296/96 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 3 of 3 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 INDEX OF DRAWINGS (Bound Separately) Civil Cl Site Survey C2 Demolition and Grading Plan C3 Site Layout Plan C4 Jointing Layout/Details C5 Misc. Details Structural S 1 Foundation Plan S2 Framing Plan S3 Foundation Details S4 Framing Details S5 General Notes Architectural Al Abbreviations and Legends A2 Floor Plan A3 Exterior & Interior Elevations A4 Wall Sections A5 Wall Sections A6 Reflected Ceiling Plan & Enlarged Plans A7 Roof Plan, Building Section and Details A8 Door & Finish Schedules A9 Millwork Elevations and Details A10 Wall Sections and Details All Millwork and Wall Sections Mechanical MPE Utilities M1 Floor Plan Mechanical M2 Details Plumbing P1 Floor Plan Plumbing P2 Details 900-9268 03860296/96 INDEX OF DRAWINGS Page 1 of 2 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 Electrical E1 Floor Plan - Lighting E2 Floor Plan - Power E3 Floor Plan - HVAC Power E4 Floor Plan - Communications and Fire Alarm E5 Details APPENDIX Soil Boring Log 900-9268 03860296/96 INDEX OF DRAWINGS Page 2 of 2 No Text I t, ` NOTICE TO BIDDERS BID #97048 s Sealed bids addressed to Victor Kilman, Purchasing Manager, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be received in the office of the Purchasi ana uilding, 1625 13th Street, Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas, 79401, until 2:00 o'clock .m. on th of March 199 or as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all planholders, to furnish all labor and materials an worts for the construction of the following described project: "CONSTRUCTION OF FIRE STATION 94 FACILITY" t t After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed bids will be opened in the office of the Purchasing Manager and publicly read aloud. It is the sole responsibility of the bidder to insure that his bid is actually in the office of the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock, prior to the expiration of the date above first written. The City of Lubbock will consider the bids on the 27th day of March. 1997, at the Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Lubbock, Texas, or as soon thereafter as may be reasonably convenient, subject to the right to reject any or all bids and waive any formalities. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $100,000 and the successful bidder will be required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, '! Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000. Said statutory bonds should be issued by a company carrying a current Best Rating of B or superior, as the rating of the bond company is a factor that will be considered in determination of the lowest responsible bidder. Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than 5% of the total amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within 10 days after notice of !`l award of the contract to him. It shall be each bidders sole responsibility to inspect the site of the work and to inform himself regarding all local conditions under which the work is to be done. It shall be understood and agreed that all such factors have been r�ghly invPstiaated and considered in the preparation of the bid submitted. There will be a pre -bid conference on av of Februanr.J�I. at 10:00 o'clock a.m., in the Purchasing Conference Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas The plans, specifications, bid forms and contract documents may be examined at the office of Parkhill, Smith & Cooper. 4010 Avenue R. Lubbock. Texas 79412, (806)747-0161 r Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in the contract documents on file in the office of the Purchasing Manager of the City of Lubbock, which document is specifically referred to in this notice to bidders. Each bidder's attention is further directed to provision of 3 Article 5159a, Vernon's Ann. Civil St., and the requirements contained therein concerning the above wage scale and payment by the contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as heretofore established by owner in said wage scale. r i The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all bidders that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, sex, disability, or national origin in consideration for an award. The City of Lubbock does not discriminate against persons with disabilities. City of Lubbock pre -bid meetings and bid openings are available to all persons regardless of disability. If you would like bid information made available in a more accessible format or if you require assistance, please contact the City of Lubbock Human Relations Office at (806) 767-2281 at least 48 hours in advance of the meeting. Cl OF LUBBOCK VICTOR KILMAN PURCHASING MANAGER 77777 Bid documents may be obtained upon request from the Purchasing Department at 1625 13th Street, Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas 79401; Telephone (806)767-2167/Fax (806)767-2164. r No Text r GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS s•. 1. SCOPE OF WORK ` The contractor shall furnish all labor, superintendence, machinery, equipment and all materials necessary to complete this project in accordance with contract documents for the CONSTRUCTION OF FIRE STATION #4 r FACILITY. 2. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS All work covered by this contract shall be done in accordance with contract documents described in the General Conditions. All bidders shall be thoroughly familiar with all of the requirements set forth on the contract documents for the construction of this project and shall be responsible for the satisfactory completion of all work contemplated by said contract documents. I" i 3. PLANS FOR USE BY BIDDERS It is the intent of the City of Lubbock that all parties with an interest in submitting a bid on the project covered by the contract documents be given a reasonable opportunity to examine the documents and prepare a bid without charge of forfeiture of deposit. The contract documents, may be examined without charge as noted in the Notice to Bidders. a 4. BIDDER INQUIRIES No bidder shall request any information verbally. All written requests for additional information or clarification concerning this bid must be addressed to: RON SHUFFIELD SENIOR BUYER CITY OF LUBBOCK P.O. BOX 2000 LUBBOCK, TX 79457 FAX (806)767-2164 5. TIME AND ORDER FOR COMPLETION The construction covered by the contract documents shall be fully completed withi(25 HUNDRED FIFTY) consecutive calendar days from the date specified in the Notice to Proceed the City of Lubbock to the successful bidder. The Contractor will be permitted to prosecute the work in the order of his own choosing, provided, however, the City reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a progress schedule of the work contemplated by the r contract documents. In the event the City requires a progress schedule to be submitted, and it is determined by the City that the progress of the work is not in accordance with the progress schedule so submitted, the City may direct the Contractor to take such action as the City deems necessary to insure completion of the project within the time specified. r 6. PAYMENT All payments due to Contractor shall be made in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions of the t contract documents. c l: 7 7. AFFIDAVITS OF BILLS PAID The City of Lubbock reserves the right, prior to final acceptance of this project to require the Contractor to execute an affidavit that all bills for labor, materials and incidentals incurred in the construction of the r improvements contemplated by the contract documents have been paid in full and that there are no claims l pending, of which the Contractor has been notified. 7 8. MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP The intent of these contract documents is that only materials and workmanship of the best quality and grade will r` be furnished. The fact that the specifications may fail to be sufficiently complete in some detail will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for providing materials of high quality and for protecting them adequately until incorporated into the project. The presence or absence of a representative of the City on the site will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility of complying with this provision. The specifications for materials and methods set forth in the contract documents provide minimum standards of quality which the Owner believes necessary to procure a satisfactory project. f- 9. GUARANTEES All equipment and materials incorporated in the project and all construction shall be guaranteed against defective materials and workmanship. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner, a written r general guarantee which shall provide that the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work, and pay for any and all damages of any nature whatsoever resulting in such defects, when such defects appear within ONE year ` from date of final acceptance of the work as a result of defective materials or workmanship, at no cost to the Owner (City of Lubbock). 1 10. PLANS FOR THE CONTRACTOR The contractor will be furnished one set of plans and specifications, and related contract documents for his use ° during construction. Plans and specifications for use during construction will only be furnished directly to the Contractor. The Contractor shall then distribute copies of plans and specifications to suppliers, subcontractors or r others, as required for proper prosecution of the work contemplated by the Contractor. 11. PROTECTION OF THE WORK The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, and protection of all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, and all means of construction, and any and all parts of the work whether the Contractor has been paid, partially paid, or not paid for such work, until the date the City issues its certificate of completion to Contractor. The City reserves the right, after the bids have been opened and before the contract has been awarded, to require of a bidder the following information: (a) The experience record of the bidder showing completed jobs of a similar nature to the one covered by the intended contract and all work in progress with bond amounts and percentage completed. (b) A sworn statement of the current financial condition of the bidder. (c) Equipment schedule. 12. TEXAS STATE SALES TAX This contract is issued by an organization which qualifies for exemption provisions pursuant to provisions of Article 20.04 of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax Act. r-, The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit which shall enable him to buy the materials to be incorporated into the work without paying the tax at the time of purchase. r* r {-13. PROTECTION OF SUBSURFACE LINES AND STRUCTURES ` It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to prosecute the work contemplated by the contract documents in such a way as to exercise due care to locate and prevent damage to all underground pipelines, utility lines, conduits or other underground structures which might or could be damaged by Contractor during the construction of the i project contemplated by these contract documents. The City of Lubbock agrees that it will furnish Contractor the location of all such underground lines and utilities of which it has knowledge. However, such fact shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities aforementioned. All such underground lines or structures cut or damaged by Contractor during the prosecution of the work contemplated by this contract shall be repaired immediately by Contractor to the satisfaction of the City of Lubbock, Texas, at Contractor's expense. 14. BARRICADES AND SAFETY MEASURES The contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish and erect such barricades, fences, lights and danger signals, and shall take such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons, property and the work as may be necessary. The Contractor will be held responsible for all damage to the work due to failure of barricades, signs, and lights to protect it, and when damage is incurred, the damaged portion shall be immediately removed and replaced by Contractor at his own cost and expense. The Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of barricades, signs, and lights shall not cease until the date of issuance to Contractor of City's certificate of acceptance of the project. 15. EXPLOSIVES The use of explosives will not be permitted unless written permission to do so is obtained by the Contractor from the City. in all cases where written permission is obtained for the use of explosives, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for all damage which may occur as a direct or indirect result of the blasting. In addition, in all ! cases where explosives are authorized to be used, the Contractor shall use utmost care so as not to endanger life or property and the Contractor shall further use only such methods as are currently utilized by persons, firms, rr or corporations engaged in similar type of construction activity. Explosive materials shall not be stored or kept at the construction site by the Contractor. r� In all cases where explosives are to be used during the construction of the project contemplated by this contract, it shall be the duty of the Contractor to notify each utility company having structures (above or below the ground) in proximity to the site of the work of Contractor's intention to use explosives, and such notice shall be given " sufficiently in advance to enable the companies to take such steps as they may deem necessary to protect their property from injury. Such notice, however, shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any damage resulting from his blasting operations. 16. CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE 6 , The successful bidder shall be required to have a responsible local representative available at all times while the work is in progress under this contract. The successful bidder shall be required to furnish the name, address and telephone number where such local representative may be reached during the time that the work contemplated by this contract is in progress. 17. INSURANCE The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) days in advance of cancellation or change. All r,. policies shall contain an agreement on the part of the insurer waiving the right to subrogation. The Contractor shall procure and carry at his sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverage's shall be submitted prior to contract execution. The Insurance certificates furnished shall name the City as an additional insured, or in the alternative, shall be accompanied by a statement from the Contractor to the effect that no work on this particular project shall be subcontracted. It shall be the contractors responsibility to provide to the owner all proof of coverage insurance documents including workers compensation coverage for each subcontractor. P�, 18. LABOR AND WORKING HOURS 1 Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. The wage rate which must be paid on this project shall not be less than specified in the schedule of general prevailing rates of per diem wages as above mentioned. The bidders' attention is further directed to the requirements of Article 5159a, Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes providing for the payment of the wage schedules above mentioned and the bidders obligations thereunder. The inclusion of the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages in these contract documents does not release the Contractor from compliance with any wage law that may be applicable. Construction work under this contract requiring an inspector will not be performed on weekends or holidays unless the following conditions exist: (1) The project being constructed is essential to the City of Lubbock's ability to provide the necessary service to its citizens. (2) Delays in construction are due to factors outside the control of the Contractor. The Contractor is approaching the penalty provisions of the contract and Contractor can show he has made a diligent effort to complete the contract within the allotted time. Before construction work requiring an inspector is to be performed on weekends or holidays, the Contractor must notify the Owners Representative not less than three full working days prior to the weekend or holiday he desires to do work and obtain written permission from the Owners Representative to do such work. The final decision on whether to allow construction work requiring an inspector on weekends or holidays will be made by the Owners Representative. t" In any event, if a condition should occur or arise at the site of this project or from the work being done under this contract which is hazardous or dangerous to property or life, the Contractor shall immediately commence work, + regardless of the day of the week or the time of day, to correct or alleviate such condition so that it is no longer r" dangerous to property or life. G C 19. PAYMENT OF EMPLOYEES AND FILING OF PAYROLLS The contractor and each of his subcontractors shall pay each of his employees engaged in work on the project under this contract in full (less mandatory legal deductions) in cash, or by check readily cashable without discount, not less often than once each week. The Contractor and each of his subcontractors engaged at the site of the work shall not later than the seventh day following the payment of wages, file with the Owners Representative, or Engineer, a certified, swom, legible copy of such payroll. This shall contain the name of each employee, his classification, the number of hours worked on each day, rate of pay, and net pay. The affidavit shall state that the copy is a true and correct copy of such payroll, that no rebates or deductions (except as shown) have been made, or will in the future be made from the wages paid as shown thereon. The Contractor must classify employees according to one of the classifications set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages, which schedule is included in the contract documents. 20. 21. r 22. r 1 The Contractor shall forfeit as a penalty to the City of Lubbock on whose behalf this contract is made, ten dollars for each laborer, workman, or mechanic employed for each calendar day, or portion thereof, such laborer, workman or mechanic is paid less than the wages assigned to his particular classification as set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. PROVISIONS CONCERNING ESCALATION CLAUSES Bids submitted containing any conditions which provide for changes in the stated bid price due to increases or decreases in the cost of materials, labor or other items required for the project will be rejected and returned to the bidder without being considered. PREPARATION FOR BID The bidder shall submit his bid on forms furnished by the City. All blank spaces in the form shall be correctly filled in and the bidder shall state the price both in words and numerals, for which he intends to do the work contemplated or furnish the materials required. Such prices shall be written in ink, distinctly and legibly, or typewritten. In case of discrepancy between the price written in words and the price written in figures, the price written in words shall govern. If the bid is submitted by an individual, his name must be signed by him or his duly authorized agent. If a bid is submitted by a firm, association, or partnership, the name and address of each member must be given and the bid signed by a member of the firm, association or partnership, or person duly authorized. If the bid is submitted by a company or corporation, the company or corporate name and business address must be given, and the bid signed by an official or duly authorized agent. Powers of attorney authorizing agents or others to sign bids must be properly certified and must be in writing and submitted with the bid. The bid shall be executed in ink. Each bid shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope, addressed as specified in the Notice to Bidders, and endorsed on the outside of the envelope in the following manner: (a) Bidder's name (b) Bid for (description of the project). Bid submittals may be withdrawn and resubmitted at any time prior to the time set for opening of the bids, but no bid may be withdrawn or altered thereafter. BOUND COPY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by bidder shall be bound and include the following: (a) Notice to Bidders. (b) General Instructions to Bidders. (c) Bidder's Submittal. (d) Statutory Bond (if required). (e) Contract Agreement. (0 General Conditions. (g) Special Conditions (if any). (h) Specifications. (i) Insurance Certificates. 0) All other documents made available to bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. If Plans and Specifications are too bulky or cumbersome to be physically bound, they are to be considered incorporated by reference into the aforementioned contract documents. 23. QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS �.- The bidder may be required before the award of any contract to show to the complete satisfaction of the City of Lubbock that it has the necessary facilities, ability, and financial resources to provide the service specified therein in a satisfactory manner. The bidder may also be required to give a past history and references in order to satisfy the City of Lubbock in regard to the bidder's qualifications. The City of Lubbock may make reasonable r investigations deemed necessary and proper to determine the ability of the bidder to perform the work, and the bidder shall furnish to the City of Lubbock all information for this purpose that may be requested. The City of Lubbock reserves the right to reject any bid if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, the bidder fails to �- satisfy the City of Lubbock that the bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the contract and to complete the work described therein. Evaluation of the bidder's qualifications shall include: 1. The ability, capacity, skill, and financial resources to perform the work or provide the service required. 2. The ability of the bidder to perform the work or provide the service promptly or within the time specified, r•• without delay or interference. 3. The character, integrity, reputation, judgment, experience, and efficiency of the bidder. 4. The quality of performance of previous contracts or services. 7, No Text BID SUBMITTAL LUMP SUM BID CONTRACT 7 PLACE: Lubbock, Texas i DATE: March 12, 1997 r PROJECT NUMBER: 97048 - CONSTRUCTION OF FIRE STATION #4 FACILITY Bid of Pharr Construction Co., Inc. d/b/a Phan & Company (hereinafter called Bidder) To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner) Gentlemen: The Bidder, in compliance with your invitation for bids for the construction of a Fire Station 14 Facility r f Bid #97048 Project #9268.9211 having carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to bidders, notice to bidders and all other related contract documents and the site of the intended work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of the intended project Including the availability of materials and labor, hereby intends to fumish all labor, materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, rwithin the time set forth therein and at the price stated below. The price to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required under the contract documents. 7 MATERIALS: Four Hundred Twenty -Eight Thousand One Hundred Fifty-($ 4289158.00 ) Eight & no/100 SERVICES: Two Hundred Eighty -Five Thousand Four Hundred Thirty-($ 285,439.00 ) Seven Hundred Thirteen Thoudand Five Hundredn inety- ($ � TOTAL BID: Y- 713,597.00 Seven & no 10 Alternate No. 2: Emergency Generator. r 1. Provide Emergency Generator, transfer switch, connections, etc., complete & ready to use. Some Light Fixture changes are also a part of this alternate. See fixture schedule. 2. As specified in Electrical Specification Sections. �^ 3. As shown on Electrical Sheets. 4. NOTE: Emergency Panel in in the Base Bid. MATERIALS: One Thousand Nine Hundred Fifty -Three and no/100 ($ 1,953.00 ) SERVICES: One Thousand Three Hundred Two and no/100---------- ($ 1,302.00 R'- TOTAL ALTERNATE BID NO.2 (Add) Three Thousand Two Hundred Fifty- ($ 3,255.00 ) Five & no/100 r-- F Alternate No.3: Additional (12) Metal Lockers 1. Add 12 additional lockers identical to the 12 in the Base Bid. 2. As Specified in Section(s) 10505. 3. As shown on Architectural Sheets. MATERIALS: Three Thousand Five Hundred Seventy-one & no/100 ($ 3,571.00 ) SERVICES: Two Thousand Three Hundred Eighty -One & no/100 ($ 2,381.00 ) TOTAL ALTERNATE BID NO. 3 (Add) Five Thousand Nine Hundred Fifty- ($ 5,952.00 ) Two & no/100 Alternate No. 4: Graffiti Resistant Coating 1. Add graffiti resistant coating 2. As specified in Section 09910. MATERIALS: Three Hundred Seventy -Eight and no/100 ($ 378.00 ) SERVICES: Two Hundred Fifty -Two and no/100 ($ 252.00 ) r^ TOTAL ALTERNATE BID NO.4 (Add) Six Hundred Thirty & no/100 ($ 630.00 ) e Alternate No. 5: Concrete Sidewalk at Property Perimeter r.. 1. Add concrete sidewalk as indicated on Sheet C3. MATERIALS: Five Thousand Five Hundred Ninety -One & no/100 ($ 5,591.00 ) 7 SERVICES: Three Thousand Seven Hundred Twenty -Eight & no/100 ($ 3,728.00 ) TOTAL ALTERNATE BID NO. 5 (Add) Nine Thousand Three Hundred ($ 9,319.00 ) r Nineteen & no/100 7 (Amount shall be shown in both words and numerals. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.) Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on or before a date to be specified in a written "Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to fully complete the project within 250 (TWO HUNDRED FIFTY) consecutive calendar days thereafter as stipulated in the specifications and other contract documents. Bidder hereby further agrees to pay to Owner as liquidated damages the sum of $300.00 (THREE HUNDRED) for each consecutive calendar day in r excess of the time set forth hereinabove for completion of this project, all as more fully set forth in the general conditions of the contract documents. r,,., Bidder understands and agrees that this bid submittal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with instruction number 21 of the General Instructions to Bidders. Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any formality in the bidding. The Bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) calendar days �•• after the scheduled closing time for receiving bids. r The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the plans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this bid, and he further agrees to i� commence work on or before the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work on which he has bid; as provided in the contract documents. I+" LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS Minority Owned Yes No �' / /- �l"r ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑❑ ❑❑ ❑ ❑ ❑❑ ❑ ❑ 7 r i t Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's check or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than five percent (5% ) of the total amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within (ten) 10 days after notice of award of the contract to him. Enclosed with this bid Is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for N/A Dollars ($ ) or a Bid Bond in the sum of 5% of total amount bid Dollars 5% ), which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the event the bid is accepted by the Owner and the undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents and the required bond (if any) with the Owner within ten (10) days after the date of receipt of written notification of acceptance of said bid; otherwise, said check or bond shall be returned to the undersigned upon demand. Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Bidder shall be bound and include all contract documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. Bidder acknowledges addendum #1. (Seal if Bidder is a Corporation) A ST: Seci ary Jackie Norrell thorized Sigyature Jimm arr (Printed or Typed Name) Pharr Construction Co., Inc. d/b/a Pbarr & Company Company P.O. Box 2791 Address Lubbock. , Lubbock City, County Texas , 79408 State Zip Code Telephone: 806 - 763-5263 Fax: 806 - 763-5843 7 • ,. i5^,, '. . sii'-'f •. 1, t?it ; :5ii'„ ' .iiif . ti lit,,,•'! •' , ,;t i. ': . 1. i;{ , i% ., TIFF'.55iie;:N �A ITY A - UNITED STATES FIDEARANTY COMPANY �= � • tes� (A S c any) BID BOND BOND NUMBER KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: THAT Co., Inc-...d.,P? :...CaT a?Y... »»..».... »........... ».......... ...»Phi.»Construction .......»..... ..................... .....................................................................»............................... of »..»..... k r....:............... »..... ............ » .....»»......»»....»....» ►� :. ..................................................................».....».........................................»»............»..................... as Principal , and UNITED STATES FIDELITY AND - - GUARANTY COMPANY, a Maryland corporation, as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto ...... ............ _.............................. »..... ............ »........ »».» Cit of Lubbock Y............................................................ ................................ .................................. ............. .......... ».............. ... ....... ......... .......... .............. ... ..... » .»..» as Obligee, in the full and just sum of........FIVE PERCERT OF AMOUNT BID BY PRINCIPAL................. -------- "` .. .... "" ... 5� of id ..........................................)......................... ...».». ._.. Dollars, lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum, well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. •• WHEREAS, the said Principal is herewith submitting its proposal Construction of Fire Station #4 Facility Bid # 97048 Project #9268.9211 THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that if the aforesaid Principal shall be awarded the contract the said Principal will, within the time required, enter into a formal contract and give a good and sufficient bond to secure the performance of the terms and conditions of r the contract, then this obligation to be void; otherwise the Principal and Surety will pay unto the Obligee the difference in money between '. the amount of the bid of the said Principal and the amount for which the Obligee legally contracts with another party to perform the work cx ' if the latter amount be in excess of the former, but in no event shall liability hereunder exceed the penal sum hereof. _ Signed, sealed and delivered .......... 4=12.-97 ........................... (Date) Pharr Construction CO., Inc. dba Pharrany..........»............»»».._»»»» »...... »..»..(BEAU /e- ... ...... ....»....».................. ....... .» ...... ..»........»»»......»»»(SEAL) R. Ph rr, President ED STAT IIDEUTY AND GUARANTY COMPANY Laura Espinoza Attorney In fact •' � .:::s::., ,.;.• �:::t;,, `.: � , ! iltiti llRililN itii`"u l/iil�l\� iJ�liCNlll#ls:t',�. if}>,°�C�� •����`i `':`i ,rq• ...., ,.:�:5� rris'`:>;, ,.r.' h n ; ik � ii',: ..r,'.... ,: :::... G ,. ;,_i �•i: . a 1474102 l UNITED STATES FMELIT!' AND GUARANTY COM ANY POWER OF ATTORNEY [J S F+G` ^" NO. 108673 ItSIIIICI KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: Ila UNTIED STATES FME 17Y AND GUARANTY COMPANY, a corpontiou orpnized and existing r under the lawn of the State of Maryland and having its principal office at &a City of Baltimore. in the State of Maryland, does kreby eoastittte and appoint Donal Boley, Steve Deal, Laura Espinoza and Staci Gross of the city of Wichita Falls . State of Texas its true and lawful AUoray(s)io-Fad. each in their separate capacity if saws than one is named above, to sip its same as surety to, sad to execute, seal ad acknowledge any and all bonds, midetsHugs, eostrams and other wriam instruments in the msdse tbanof ea behalf of the Company in its business of guaranteeing the fidelity ofpenons; guaranteeing tha persotmana of contracts; and exectting or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or permitted in say actions or proceedings allowed by Inv. la Wifam Whereof: the said UNIT® STATES TMEIStY AND GUARANTY COMPANY has caned This instatsmat to be seabd with its corporate seal, duly attested by the sipatuns of its senior Vine President and Assistant Secretary. this 5 th day of August , A.D.19 94. �^ UNITED STATES FMELT Y AND GUARANTY COMPANY 4"�"k,6 f (Signed) By... . . .. .................. ... B f � Senior Vice President F (Signed) By........ . S Ash Secretary STATE OF MARYLAND) SS: BAL-nmoRE CITY ) On this 5 t h day of August ,AIX 19 94,before mepersonally cam Robert J. Lamendola Senior Vice President of the UNITED STATES FTDIIITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY and Paul D . Sims Asustaat Secretary of said Company, with both of whom I am personally acquainted, who being by me severally duly sworn. said. that they, the said Robert J . Lamendo la ad Paul D . Sims wen respectively the Senior Vice President and the Assistant Secretary of the said UNITED STATES FME UTY AND GUARANTY COMPANY, the corporation described in and conch executed the foregoing Power of Attorney; that they each knew the seal of said corporation; that the seal affixed to said Power of Attorney was such corporate seed, that it was so affix by order of the Board of Directors �+ of said corporation. and that they signed their names thereto by like order as Senior Via President and Assistant Secretary. respectively, of the Company. Il My Commission expires the llth day inMarch 'f O A.D*19 95 . (Signed) 44an� NOTARY PUBLIC This Power of Attorney is granted under and by authority of the following Resolutions adopted by the Board of Directors of the UNITED STATES FIDEUTY AND GUARANTY COMPANY on September 24. 1992: RESOLVED. that in connection with the fidelity and surety insurance business oftbe Company, all bonds, undertakings, contracts and other instruments relating to said business may be signed, executed. and acknowledged by persons or entities appointed as Attomey(s)-in-Fact pursusat to a Power of Attorney issued in accordance with these resolutions. Said Power(s) of Attorney for and on behalf of the Company may and thall be executed in the tame and on behalf of the Company, either by the Chairman, or the President, oraa Executive Vice President, or a Senior Vice PresideoL ors, Vice President oran Assistant Vice President, jointly with the Secretary or an Assistam Secretary, under their respective designations. The signature of such officers may be engraved. printed or lithographed. The signature of each of the foregoing of icen and the seal of the Company may be affxcd by facsimile to any Power of Attorney or to any certificate relating thereto appointing Attomey(s)-in-Fact for purposes only ofexecuting and attesting bonds and undertakings and other writings obligatory in the tutus thereof. and, unless subsequently revoked and subject to any limitations set forth therein, any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signature or fapimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company and any such power so executed and certified by such facsimile signature and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company with respect to any bond or undertaking to which it is validly attached. 1 RESOLVED. that Attorney(s)-in-Fad shall have the power and awboriry, unless subsequently revoked and, in any ease, subject to the terms and limitations of the Power of Attorney issued to them to execute and deliver on behalf of the Company and to attach the seal of the Comrpaay to any sad all bonds and undertakings. and other writings obligatory in the Cama thereof; and any such instrument executed by such Attorneys) in -Fact shall be as binding upon the Company as if signed by an Executive Officer and sealed and attested to by the Secretary of the Company. X Paul D . Sims , an Assistant Secretary of the UNITED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY. do hereby certify that the foregoing is a true excerpt from the Resolution of the said Company as adopted by its Board of Dimaon on September 24. 1992 and that this Resolution is in lira force and effect L the undersigned Assistant Secretary of the UNITED STATES FMEL IY AND GUARANTY COMPANY do b.mby certify that the foregoing Power of Attorney is in full force and effect and has not been revoked. In Testimony Whereof: I have hereunto set my rand and the seal of STATES FIDIIITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY on this12th day Of March .19 r- .................'............................. sersaan ritlob �Q� Assistant Secretary tMtlF FS 3 (10-92) No Text f" L Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. Baltimore, Maryland A Stock Company Texas Statutory Payment Bond (Penalty of the bond must be 100% of Contract amount) State of Texas County of Bond Number ........................ Know All Men By These Presents: ....................................... ..................... That ...Pharr.Construction Co. Inc. dba Pharr & Company ....... ................ .... ... .... . (hereinafter called the Principal), as Principaland Rdelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc., a corporation organized under the laws of the State of Wisconsin, a Corporate Surety authorized and admitted to do business in the State of Texas and licensed by the State of Texas to execute bonds as Surety, (hereinafter called the Surety), as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto ... Ci.ty. of . Lubhock............................................................... . ........................................... ..................... (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the penal sum of SEVEN HUDNRED NINETEEN THOUSAND FOUR HUNDRED r' .NINETY.EI.GH..T..AKR.KQ,IIQO------........................................................ Dollars (S 7.19.,498.,00....... ) for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, r administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. Whereas, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee dated the .. 27th day of ........... March. , . ,19 R. ; a copy of which is hereto attached and made apart hereof, for Bid 197048 — Construction of Fire Station #4 Facility Now, Therefore, The Condition Of This Obligation Is Such, that if the said Principal shall pay all claimants supplying labor and material to him or a subcontractor in the prosecution of the work provided for in said contract, then, this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect Provided However, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code and all liabilities on this bond to all such claimants shall be determined in accordance with the provisions thereof to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. In Witness Whereof, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument this ......... 4th..... dayof ...April......... 19 .97 .......... . . . . . .............. r ........................................... r- I Pharr Construction Co., Inc. dba a • & -Company.. Iseao p � tt (Sean i� i and artaitiy InFr� nce �Inderwriters, Inc. le Wisc m Corporation By .. .... ... .�..4�....... Laura Espinoza Attomey4n4act r Contract 507 (Texas) (8-94) APR-10-97 THU 11:06 AM PHARR & COMPANY FAX NO. 8067635843 P.02 FROM = Panasonic FAX SYSTBI PHONE NO. Apr. 10 1997 10:31AM P1 G ' The undersigned surety company represents that it is duly qualified to do business In Texas, and hereby designates nt resident in Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices may be delivered and on whom service of proc ss ay Ve had in matters arising out of such suretyship. Alan Henry Agency surety *By:. (Title) Approved as to Form CitYAWL--ubbock 1 n t By: v l.1pQ b tt ttomey • Note: It signed by an officer of the Surety Company, there must be on file a certified extract from the by-laws showing that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy of power of attorney for our files. i f r PERFORMANCE BOND I j BOND CHECK BEST RATING LICEN D! '�" 44T+CXAS' Dr Y, . Rdel'rty and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. Baltimore, Maryland A StoCk Company Texas Statutory Performance Bond (Penalty of the bond must be 100% of Contract amount) State Of Texas County Of Bond Number ........................ Know All Men By These Presents: ............................................................... That „Pharr„Construction Co., Inc., dba,Pharr.&.Company,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, ,,,,,,, �....................................................................................................... E (hereinafter called the Principal), as Principal, and Fdelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters. Inc. a corporation organized under the laws of the State of Wisconsin, a Corporate Surety authorized and admitted to do business in the State of Texas and licensed by the State of Texas to execute bonds as Surety, (hereinafter called the Surety), as Surety, are held and firmlybound unto...................................................................................... . r" City of Lubbock ...................................................................................................... l (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the penal sum of . SEVEK .HUNDRED. NINETEEN. THOUSAND . EO1JR. HUNDRED.. pow .NI-NETY . E1GH.T .AND. K0/1-OO:,-----....................................................... Dollars IS 7.19,.49a.00 ....... ) for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, r administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. Whereas, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee dated the . 27th. , , , , , , , _ , r- day of ..... Ma r0i .............. .1g .97.. , a copy of which is hereto attached and made apart hereof, for F Bid #97048 — Construction of Fire Station #4 Facility Now, Therefore, The Condition Of This Obligation Its Such, that if the said Principal shall faithfully perform the work in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect Provided However, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions thereof to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. In Witness Whereof, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument this ...... 4th......... dayof . Apr.il .......... , ig .97.... r Construction Co. Inc. dba ? ...... ...... ............... h;i4* ............. Isaao Z7 ✓; es'ideriv • (seaq surance Underwriters, Inc. .0 auin corporation► .......................................... By .J! ........�....... y................. Aftomey-iifact Laura Espinoza Contract 506 (Texas) (8-94) APR-10-97 THU 11:06 AM PHARR & COMPANY FROM : Panasonic FAX SYSTEM PHONE NO. t: FAX NO. 8067635843 P.02 Apr. 10 1997 10:31AM PI The undersigned surety company represents that it is duly qualified to do business in Texas, and hereby designates nt resident In Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices may be delivered and on whom service of proc ss sy Me had in matters arising out of such suretyship. r Alan Henry Agency surety (TRIO) r' Approved as to Form Clty of bock r• By. ttom y • Note: If signed by an officer of the Surety Company, there must be on file a cerlifled extract from the by -taws showing that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy of power of attorney for our files_ F r OFM rr RdeI4 and Guaranty insurance Underwr tern, Inc. Power of AttoroeY No. 474 M: , Jlwor all men by these presents: That Fidelity sad Oversell Insurance Underwriters lac. a corporation organized and wristing under to of 1Arisc�in and having Its p ftpal office at tte Ch of Baltimaa. in the State of Maryland, does hereby catstiatte and appoint Donal Bo ley, Steve Deal, Laura Espinoza and Staci Gross a of the City of Wichita Falls , State of Texas its we and lawhd Attaney(s)+nfact each in ureic separate cs an is mmed above, to sign its name as surety U and to execute, seal and ad wledge any and all bonds, undertakings. tor== and other written nature thereof on behalf of the Company in its business of Worante" the fidelity of person tluararnesi g the performance of cameos; and euoec 11b 'bads and randertaking required or permitted in any actions or proceedings allowed by law. In Witness Whereof. the said Fidafity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters. Im has caused this instrument to be sealed with itt a itoested by the signatures of its Yice President and Assistant Secretary. this 8th day of . De eember :, AD.19 95 . ' IidaRga O liaaea.allfadenerlten.bc. `'_ atcalronam :.By _ ......... ' i951 f/ Yoe President !S`o" By .. ....................... • .� AssistafhtSeuetary that of IlAaryfand 1 Biellioora etty ^,4. N ! R 1�/ !. •1 C"• On this 8th day of December : A0.19 before me A Wilsm Y President of Rrdersp and Gm Uctdervrriters, ire. and Thtxnas J FitzgenlQ Assstanrt t�rytof sand Company, ant wham I am pers�uairded who being by me sev said, that they, the said Gary A. Wilsm and Thomas '�- yt�a d were respecti,ce President a tarmt Secretary of the said Fidere lawraacs Underwriters, hhc_ the caporetiOn�eCo n and which 'faepaing Paver that they each knew the seal of said w seal WTuced to said Power of Attorney was seal, that it �byorder of t1� Directors of said corporation, and that they a - .hereto by like order as Vice President and tart Secretary, of the Company. ` x" My Commission expires the 1st day of t.� { i B This Power of Attorney is granted r wodear iNmorrty of the foiloMng Ilesolubans adopted by the Board of Directors of the f•rdalb Ins rance Underwriters.laa September 24,1992 Resolved, that in connection with the fidelity and surety inaitrance business of the Company. all bonds, undertakings, rcrttracts and other instrm said bnsinss may be signed. exeurted, and ackrh Wedged by persons or entities appointed as Attorney(s)-in•fact pursuant to a Power of Attorney issued u these resolutions. Said PoweQs) of Attorney for and on behalf of the Company may and shall be executed in the name and on behalf of the Company. eidhec or the President, or an Executive Vice President, or a Senior Vice Presiden or a Vice President or an Assistant Vice President jointly with the Seaeta, Secretary, under their respective designations. The signaattre of such otfxers may be engraved, prft1d or lithographed. The signature of each of the foregoir seal of die Company may be affixed by facsimile to any Power of Atmmey or to any certificate relatiig thereto appointing Attomey(sHahct for purposes a and attesting bands and undertakings and other writings obligatory it the mature thereof. and, urdess subsequently revoked and subject to any limitations any such Prover of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company and any such pawn ratified by such facsimile signature and facsimile seal stall be valid and binding upon the Company with respect to any bond or undertaking to which it is ri Resohnd. That Attrxny(sHn-Fact shall have the power and authority. unless subsequently revolted and. in any case. subject to the terms and Power of A=mey issued to them, to execute and deliver an behalf of the Company and to attach the seal of die Company to any and all bonds and under writings obligatory in the nature thereof. and any such instrument t muted by such Attorney(s)win Fact shall be as binding upon the Company as if sign Officer and sealed and attested to by the secretary of the Conpam. i, Thanes J. Fageraid, an Assistant Secretary of the Fidelity and Guaranty Insunice Underwriters. Inc. do hereby certify that the f excerpts from the Resolutions of the said Company as adopted by its Board of Directors an September 24.1992 and that these Resolutions are it full force ai 1, the undersigned Assistant Secretary of the Fidelity and Gwrntty Insurance Underwriters. lac. do hereby certity that the foregoing Powe full fore and effect end has rot been revoked. In Testimmy Whereof, I have hereunto set my hand and the =W_gf the Fidelity and Gawa ity Insurance Underwriters, I= onthis 4th dayof April .19 97 .. r ............................. Assistant Secretary 1851 r IS 81") No Text APR-24-97 THU 03:56 PH PnARR & COMPAW . FAX NO, 8067635843 P.02 APR-24-1997 15.*49 BOLF-Y-FEATHERSTON INS P.01i01 r— F r k ttR'aeueeR ' 04/10/97 TINS CERTIFICATE N 13SUEV A S'& MATTEMOf 9INFORIVIAT&ON ONLY AND CONFERS NO MOMS UPON THE CERTFICATE 8olty rtathereten lanuzaaaa V. O. =Drawer 10 MOLDER. wit CUMMCATE DOES NOT ALWM, iXTM OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDE[►DY THE POLMS BELOW. COMPAN192APORDING CCVLAAGE VLOhLta Valle T7C 76307 COMPANY A Q 0 Fidelity and guaranty SWIVy T*Atuoreton Taanrance /tgne Mo._._617_-J23 -T111 ru R� COM►ArW it Twme Workers Comp =Ae load • . aauRtc Pharr Construction Ccm£,any Inc COMPANY C American watimal fire :oM►aaY p P Q SOX 2791 Lubbock TX 79408 ,,,4,��/�.�a �•Q i,��F ^rDv�i n ��.�rnvM.wYiy��M.�•w^4Y�.N•.M� .�lw L ... Y4� .� G ��.,.....„.,.,�..... . „._....,.w.. ,n. 7+W9�-.iM��!.- �••Y .Y� /Yw.I+rNil9rffM'~M.M�MfNk . .E+✓w1+ah�� V. ��..'. �. .. �..,'.�Y."�.. �`Y++IW TNIS IS TC CERTIFY THAT THE POUClS Of NSURaNm usTYD EaLaw MAYS mN DS3Um TO T71Z R WVRiO PNMLv AtOYe FON"►OILY ►ERIOD INDICATiG. morolTHSTANOING AW P4QUIREMENT, TiRM OR COMMON OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER OCCUMEVT WffH RESPECT TO WHIM TNIS CERTIFICAT'Q MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY TH[ POQCMl OE=MD HlRM IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TEAMS. EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH FOL,CIM UMRS SHOWN MAY HAVC BEIN RSDUCIM BY PAID CLJUMS. C�op VVVt Of INSUiANCS PaDSY mukda t FOUCY VFW MS FQ= OOIRATNgi LdPm LN DA'IVIN Ml2eTT) DATI MRVD2" I1 muLaLLuwur► OVOIALAOMUT9 44 000,coo PROsUM-COMnorAM 11,000,000 a x COMM FRCLuwtms-uw-'TY jCLOMSwAot omm SMPl2e7{69s2 ! 04/ot/9T 04J01/98 ►MONALaADVRLu1RY 61,000,600 2 OW NEA4aCON7T{ACTORSFR4Tl i'8O i 1 MULL AGO/1 WILL O= 04/SO/9T Oi/10/98 EArHoeeLARo+e: f 1,000,60C PeeOAMAOtIAfYlrnmu :4 30,000 mwZXPwrvw„NW4 . 1,000 AUTOPACOAX Ua1LLKY ANYAk-o LT81335.assa4 ' 04/Cl/97 04/01191 CCUCINED aWaLE LDaIr 21,000,000 x —.,...__ *=LY INA" I►vpourl t «••�....• t I` j, • 't AIL MINIM A=ff tCh©ULLo AVTOS HUMIDAVf05 w4-awhAV701 Ca I ' t0.7ILYPI Y" IryrICCCa1Q RMFINTY DAMA01 4 - $mni=Numm AU70ONLY .EAACCIDENT t ANI AUTO OT7 E1l YFIAN AU -NC ONLY: w"2."^• tACHACCI0Q4T 0 AMMIATII 10 M LAANUM ` /AW OCCURADM 82, AuMeaaLAPaw h*CTM pLC74T663240 04/Ol/99 04/O.L/98 •2,004,000 .. _ . �a+�+Tt THAN UL MUU A FORM • WORKOO COMP&N"TrM AND IMPLOYtlxl'uaeMM i • • lY CAM, iY:`"...i4. :;£r w,�,c•'v..«ir.i IMEAMACCICENT 11,000,000,+ 8 "4"Ooamk 7L' "a PAATN0S,lXtCVTM OFNCERSARm EYt1: taT0001050714 11/01/!6 il/01/97 aoausE.PDLICYLaIIr 41,00c,000 EDLSLA3E•EAEMFLDTt� 41,oOO,000 omen � A $pQX>l M= lLQATSR CM176i1Z39 04/01/97 04/01/91 BCBEDDZ.=D 451950 C I MLDIKRS RISK T=9139346 11/01/96 11/01/97 REPORTZIM 2 =LL IO►S ofscmpron of ar4vRAnvpmv&%kpeAAvwrrs=ti�ngar�asp— trwf Tri O ALYi3t$iSYOCCSS BXC�PT+i1 pBFXZRip :�8 IC1Q 71T Y3VOR-Oi CiSYR� LP(T�LgpCy i '!O ALL CCV'8R7L .... , illy:/h'fF. - LTJn>E002 stroLnD ANY OFTIOt aROV/ OfzOlO[f0 POLfC11t ji •'dam'*••+*• aQ011ETNe . EJVIBATION DATE 7hM*F,TM XFJW9 COMPAXV. WILL LUSAVOR TO "L CITT Cr L49a000 B=ZM=G uv9a3cz=att P O MID OO 3,4_oaiiweRTalpD 7oTNas A7rMOLoaRwwmlor>,rur=r. � PA"MYC MAL LUCN NOTICT OMU FiRMt4 NO Vn4AMN OR LLUNITY L9h>SOCA TZ 71457 OF AM IMO UFOX THE OOIRPAIM IN ACAMi 00 RDtI WrATMt. AT{Vi hoi TOTAL P.01 RODUCER Holey Featherston Insurance 1. 0. Drawer 10 +ichita Falls TX 76307 Boley Featherston Insurance W. A17-771-77» a..Ra ISURED Pharr Construction Company Inc P O Box 2791 Lubbock TX 79408 DATE IMMIDDIYYI 04/10/97 ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER: THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE COMPANY A u s Fidelity aad Guaranty COMPANY B Texas Workers Comp Ins Fund COMPANY C COMPANY D THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED, NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. R I TYPE OF INSURANCEI POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFFECTIVI DATE (MMJDDIYYE) 1PDATE (MM OLICY DIYY) I LIMITS GENERAL LIABILITY x COMMERCIALGENERALLIABILITY 1MP126745982 CLAIMS MADE K OCCUR x OWNER'S & CONTRACTOR'S PROT TBD 1 MILL AGG/1 MILL OCC AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY X ANY AUTO ALL OWNED AUTOS SCHEDULED AUTOS X HIRED AUTOS X NON -OWNED AUTOS GARAGE LIABILITY 7 ANY AUTO EXCESS LIABILITY A x UMBRELLA FORM OTHER THAN UMBRELLA FORM WORKERS COMPENSATICN AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY 1 ITBI31508564 ULC147661240 B THE PROPRIETORI INCL I TSF0001050714 PARTNERSIMCUTIVE[AlOFFICERS ARE EXCL 04/01/97 04/10/97 04/01/98 01/10/98 GENERAL AGGREGATE s2,000,000 PRODUCTS -COMPIOPAGG • 1, 000, 000 PERSONAL & ADV INJURY • 1, 000, 000 EACH OCCURRENCE 41,000,000 FIRE DAMAGE (Arty one fire) $ 50,000 MED EXP (" one person) $ 51000 04/01/97 04/01/98 COMBINED SINGLE UNIT $1,000,000 BODILY INJURY (Per person) BODILY INJURY (Par accident) $ PROPERTY DAMAGE 1 AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT t OTHER THAN AUTO ONLY: EACH ACCIDENT t AGGREGATE EACH OCCURRENCE s2,000,006 04/01/97 04/01/98 AGGREGATE s2,000,000 EL EACH ACCIDENT $ 1, 000, 000 11/01/96 11/01/97 ELDISEASE- POLICY LIAR $ 1, 000, 000 EL DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE 1111,000,000 OTHER �A EQUIPMENT FLOATER CZK147661239 04/01/97 04/01/98 SCHEDULED 45,950 ESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS!LOCATIONS/VEHICLESISPECIAL ITEMS 44Ee BID #97048—CONSTRUCTION OF FIRE STATION #4 FACILITY WAIVER OF SUBROGATION APPLIES TO ALL COVERAGES. ADDITIONAL INSURED APPLIES R0I ALL COVERAGES EXCEPT WORKERS COMPENSATION IN FAVOR OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK LUBB 0 02 SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAR. 10 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, CITY OF LUBBOCK 1625 13TH STREET RM L— 04 BUT FAILURE TO MAIL SUCH NOTICE BIiALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY LUBBOCK TX 79401 OF ANY KIND UPON THE COMPANY, ITS AGENTS OR REPRESENTATIVES. RODUCER �Boley Featherston Insurance 0. Drawer 10 Iichita Falls T8 76307 k. +Boley Featherston Insurance iSURED Pharr Construction Company Inc P 0 BOX 2791 Lubbock T8 79408 IN l ANC.# csR BI DATEBNMfDDm) :.PRARC 04/04/97 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. COMPANY A G S Fidelity and Guaranty COMPANY B Texas Workers Comp Ins Fund COMPANY C COMPANY D THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED, NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. .01 TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFFECTIVE POLICY EXPIRATION ,m I DATE (MMIDDIYY) I DATE (MMIDDIYYI GENERAL LIABILITY X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CLAIMS MADE E OCCUR OWNER'S & CONTRACTOR'S PROT i AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY X ANY AUTO I ALL OWNED AUTOS SCHEDULED AUTOS X HIRED AUTOS X NON -OWNED AUTOS GARAGE LIABILITY 7 ANY AUTO EXCESS LIABILITY A $ UMBRELLA FORM OTHER THAN UMBRELLA FORM WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY i. QETIERAL AGGREGATE s2,000,000 1HP126745982 04/01/97 04/01/98 PRODUCTS -COMPIOPAGG $ 1, 000, 000 PERSONAL &ADV INJURY $ 1, 000, 000 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1, 000, 000 FIRE DAMAGE (Any one fire) $ 50,000 MED EXP (Any one Person) E 51000 iT8131508564 04/01/97 04/01/98 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT $1,000,000 BODILY INJURY (Pei' person) BODILY INJURY (Pa•eccident) ULC147661240 B THE PROPRIETOR/ INCL I TSFOOOIOS0714 PARTNERSIEXECUTIVE • OFFICERS ARE: EXCL. LA I EQUIPUM FLOATER I CIM147661239 PROPERTY DAMAGE 14 AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT 4 OTHER THAN AUTO ONLY: EACH ACCIDENT AGGREGATE EACH OCCURRENCE s2,000,000. 04/01/97 04/01/98 AGGREGATE $ 2, 000, 000 EL EACH ACCIDENT 141,000,000 11/01/96 11/01/97 EL DISEASE -POLICY LIMIT 41,000,000 EL DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE 141,000,000 04/01/971 04/01/981 SCSEDDLED 45,950 CITY OF LUBBOCK INSURANCE REQUIREMENT AFFIDAVIT To Be Completed by Appropriate Insurance Agent/Broker Prior to Award of Contract I, the undersigned Agent/Broker, certify that the insurance requirements contained in this bid document have been reviewed by me with the below identified Contractor. If the below identified Contractor is awarded this contract by the City of Lubbock, I will be able to, within ten (10) days after being notified of such award by contractor, furnish a valid insurance certificate to the City meeting all of the requirements defined in this bid/proposal. 7 F , r Agent (Signature) Agent (Print) �. Name of Agent/Broker: Address of Agent/Broker: r City/State2ip: 7 Agent/Broker Telephone Number: ( ) Date: CONTRACTOR'S NAME: (Print or Type ) CONTRACTOR'S ADDRESS: is NOTE TO AGENT/BROKER If this time requirement is not met, the City has the right to reject this bid/proposal and award the contract to another contractor. If you have any questions concerning these requirements, please contact the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock at (806)767-2165. I" I ' BID #97048 - CONSTRUCTION OF FIRE STATION #4 FACILITY r 0 CONTRACTOR CHECKLIST A CONTRACTOR SHALL: (1) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements; (2) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project; (3) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (4) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: (A) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (B) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (5) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (6) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within ten (10) days after rthe contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; m post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Act or other commission rules. This notice must be printed in at least 19 point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words or changes: REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE r, "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must (see reverse) be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment and materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee." "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at (512)440- 3789 to receive information on the legal requirement for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage." and i (8) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: (A) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (B) provide a certificate of coverage to the contractor prior to that person beginning work on the project; (C) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the language in subsection (e) (3) of this rule; (D) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (E) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor: (i) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (ii) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (F) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter, (G) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within (ten) 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (H) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (A) - (H), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. ❑ No Text I^ CONTRACT STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF LUBBOCK THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this 27th day of March, 1997, by and between the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock, State of Texas, acting by and through Windy Sitton, Mayor, thereunto authorized to do so, hereinafter referred to as OWNER, and PHARR & COMPANY of the City of Lubock, County of Lubbock and the State of Texas hereinafter termed CONTRACTOR. WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and performed by the OWNER and under the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith (if any) the �• CONTRACTOR hereby agrees with OWNER to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: BID 997048 - CONSTRUCTION OF FIRE STATION 94 FACILITY - $719,498.00 t and all extra work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in the contract documents and at his (or their) own proper cost and expense to furnish all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, 7 insurance and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction in accordance with the I contract documents as defined in the General Condition of Agreement. r,. The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work within ten days after the date written notice to do so shall have been given to him and to substantially complete same within the time specified in the contract documents. The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds for the performance of the contract in accordance with the bid submitted therefore, subject to additions and deductions, as provided in the contract documents and to make payment on account thereof as provided therein. �- IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed this agreement in Lubbock, Lubbock County, Texas in the year and day first above written. r ATTEST: - r Secre ty �. A PROVED AS TO ONTENT: s r Owner' Re r sent tive APPROVED A TO F M: ttom, GPIN ATTEST: Co orate Secretary 6 r 1., 6 1 ZCI UU E63 B; K, T YE (0 c MAYOR CONTRACTOR: PHAR COMPANY By: - /! r2,-I� ZIED E: JiMMY �� (1A1ZrL TITLE: 'PRol f*A-r COMPLETE ADDRESS: Pharr Company P.O. Box 2791 Lubbock, Texas 79408 r No Text 7 14. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE'S AUTHORITY AND DUTY Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the Owner's Representative shall review all work included herein. He has the authority to stop the work whenever such stoppage may be necessary to insure the proper execution of the contract. In order to permit delays and disputes and to discourage litigation, it is further agreed that the Owner's Representative shall, in all cases, determine the amounts and quantities of the several kinds of work which are to be paid for under this contract. He shall determine all questions in relation to said work and the construction thereof, and shall, in all cases, decide every question which may arise relative to the execution of this contract on the part of said Contractor. The Owner's Representatives' estimates and findings shall be conditions precedent to the right to any action on the contract, and to any rights of the Contractor to receive any money under this contract. The Owner's Representative shall, within a reasonable time, render and deliver to both the Owner and the Contractor a written decision on all claims of the parties hereto and on all questions which may arise relative to the execution of the work or the interpretation of the contract, specifications and plans. 15. SUPERINTENDENCE AND INSPECTION It is agreed by the Contractor that the Owner's Representative shall be and is hereby authorized to appoint from time to time such subordinate engineers, supervisors, or inspectors as the said Owner's Representative may deem proper to inspect the materials furnished and the work done under this Agreement, and to see that said material is furnished and said work is done in accordance with the specifications therefore. The Contractor shall furnish all reasonable aid and assistance required by the subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors for the proper inspection and examination of the work. The Contractor shall regard and obey the directions and instructions of any subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors so appointed, when such directions and instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and accompanying plans and specifications provided, however, should the Contractor object to any orders by any subordinate engineer, supervisor or inspector, the Contractor may within six (6) days make written appeal to the Owner's Representative for his decision. r 16. CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE The Contractor shall give personal attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this contract and shall keep on the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory r to Owner's Representative. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in his absence and all directions given to him shall be binding as if given to the Contractor. Adequate supervision by competent and reasonable representatives of the Contractor is essential to the proper performance of the work and lack of such supervision ' shall be grounds for suspending operations of the Contractor. r The work, from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the Contractor and all risk in connection therewith shall be bome by the Contractor. The Owner or Owner's Representatives will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, or any subcontractors, or any of his agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the work. I 17. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING r It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied himself as to the nature and « location of the work, the confirmation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of materials to be encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, and the general and local conditions, and all other matters which in any way effect the work under this contract. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the Owner, either before or after the execution of this contract, shall effect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. i' GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT r 1. OWNER Whenever the word Owner, or the expression Party of the First Part, or First Party, are used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to the City of Lubbock, Texas. r 2. CONTRACTOR i Whenever the word Contractor, or the expression Party of the Second Part, or Second Party, is used, it shall be understood to mean the person, persons, co -partnership or corporation, to wit: PHARR & COMPANY, who has agreed to perform the work embraced in this contract, or to his or their legal representative. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE Whenever the word Owner's Representative or representative is used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to, City of Lubbock, under whose supervision these contract documents, including plans and specifications, were prepared, and GARY SMITH, FACILITIES MANAGER, who will inspect constructions; or to such other representative, supervisor, or inspector as may be authorized by said Owner to act in any particular under this agreement. Engineers, supervisor or inspectors will act for the Owner under the direction of Owner's Representative, but shall not directly supervise the Contractor or persons acting on behalf of the Contractor. r 4. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The contract's documents shall consist of the Notice to Bidders, General Instructions to Bidders, Bid, Signed Agreement, Statutory Bonds (if required), General Conditions of the Agreement, Special Conditions of the Agreement (if any), Specifications, Plans, Insurance Certificate, and all other documents made available to Bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. r t 5. INTERPRETATION OF PHRASES Whenever the words "Directed," "Permitted," "Designated," "Required," "Considered Necessary," "Prescribed," or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order, designation or prescription of the Owner's Representative is intended; and similarly, the words "Approved," "Acceptable," "Satisfactory," or words of like import shall mean approved by or acceptable or satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. 6. SUBCONTRACTOR The term Subcontractor, as employed herein, includes only those having a direct contract with the Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents. Owner shall have no responsibility to any Subcontractor employed by Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents, but said Subcontractors will look exclusively to Contractor for any payments due Subcontractor. 7. WRITTEN NOTICE Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent certified mail to the '" last business address known to him who gives the notice. r 8. WORK Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work covered by the contract documents. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both workmanship and materials shall be of a good quality. The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials or work described In words which so applied have well known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer such recognized standards. All work shall be done and all materials furnished in strict conformity with the contract documents. 9. SUBSTANTiALLY COMPLETED The term "Substantially Completed" is meant that the structure or project contemplated by the contract documents has been made suitable for use or occupancy or the facility is In a condition to serve its intended purpose, but still may require minor miscellaneous work and adjustment. 10. LAYOUT Except as specifically provided herein, the Contractor shall be responsible for laying out all work and shall, accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative will check the Contractor's layout of all major structures and any other layout work done by the Contractor at — Contractor's request, but this check does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of correctly locating all work in accordance with the Plans and Specifications. 11. KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE The Contractor shall be furnished with one copies of all Plans, Profiles and Specifications without expense to him and he shall keep one copy of same consistently accessible on the job site. 12. RIGHT OF ENTRY The Owner's Representative may make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress of quality of the executed work and to determine, in general, If the work Is proceeding In accordance with the contract documents. He will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous onsite inspections to check the quality or quantity of the work, nor will he be responsible for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or the safety precautions incident thereto. His efforts will be directed towards providing assurances for the Owner that the completed project will conform to the requirements of the contract documents, but he will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. On the �- basis of his onsite observations, he will keep the Owner informed of the progress of the work and will endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the work of the Contractor. 13. LINES AND GRADES All lines and grades shall be furnished by the Owner's Representative whenever necessary for the commencement of the work contemplated by these contract documents or the completion of the work contemplated by these contract documents. Whenever necessary, Contractor shall suspend his work in order to permit Owner's Representative to comply with this requirement, but such suspension will be as brief as practical and Contractor shall be allowed no extra compensation therefore. The Contractor shall give the Owner's — Representative ample notice of the time and place where lines and grades will be needed. All stakes, marks, etc., shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor, and in case of careless destruction or removal by him, his Subcontractors, or his employees, such stakes, marks, etc., shall be replaced by the Owner's Representative at Contractor's expense. r 18. 18. 20 21 CHARACTER OF WORKMEN The Contractor agrees to employ only orderly and competent men, skillful in the performance in the type of work required under this contract, to do the work; and agrees that whenever the Owner's Representative shall inform him in writing that any man or men on the work, are, in his opinion, incompetent, unfaithful, or disorderly, such man or men shall be discharged from the work and shall not again be employed on the work without the Owner's Representative's written consent. CONSTRUCTION PLANT The Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment, machinery and materials necessary in the prosecution and completion of this contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that Owner shall furnish same, and It is also understood that Owner shall not be held responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, or protection of any materials, tools, equipment or machinery or any part of the work until it is finally completed and accepted. The building of structures for the housing of men or equipment will be permitted only at such places as the Owner's Representative shall direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such structure shall at all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. SANITATION Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers on the work site, properly secluded from public observation, shall be constructed and maintained by the Contractor in such manner and at such points as shall be approved by the Owner's Representative and their use shall be strictly enforced. OBSERVATION AND TESTING The Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right at all reasonable times to observe and test the work. Contractor shall make necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and access for such observation and testing at any location wherever work is in preparation or progress. Contractor shall ascertain the scope of any observation which may be contemplated by Owner or Owner's Representative and shall give ample notice as to the time each part of the work will be ready for such observation. Owner or Owner's Representative may reject any work found to be defective or not in accordance with the contract documents, regardless of the stage of its completion or the time or place of discovery of such errors and regardless of whether Owner's Observer has previously accepted the work through oversight or otherwise. If any work should be covered without approval or consent of the Owner, it must, if requested by Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for examination at Contractor's expense. In the event that any part of the work is being fabricated or manufactured at a location where it is not convenient for Owner or Owner's Representative to make observations of such work or require testing of said work, then in such event Owner or Owner's Representative may require Contractor to furnish Owner or Owner's Representative certificates of inspection, testing or approval made by persons competent to perform such tasks at the location where that part of the work is being manufactured or fabricated. All such tests will be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and Materials or such other applicable organization as may be required by law or the contract documents. If any work which is required to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered up without written approval or consent of the Owner or Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by the Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for observation and testing at the Contractor's expense. The cost of all such inspections, tests and approvals shall be bome by the Contractor unless otherwise provided herein. Any work which fails to meet the requirements of any such tests, inspections or approval, and any work which meets the requirements of any such tests or approval but does not meet the requirements of the contract documents shall be considered defective. Such defective work shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense. 7 Neither observations by the Owner or Owner's Representative, nor inspections, tests, or approvals made by Owner, Owner's Representative, or other persons authorized under this agreement to make such inspections, tests, or approvals shall relieve the Contractor from his obligation to perform the work in accordance with the ` requirements of the contract documents. r 22. DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES It is further agreed that if the work or any part thereof, or any material brought on the site of the work for use in r" the work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the Owner or Owners' Representative as unsuitable or not in conformity with plans, specification and contract documents, the Contractor shall, after receipt of written notice thereof from the Owner's Representative, forthwith remove such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy such work so that it shall be in full accordance with this contract. It is further agreed that any remedial action contemplated as hereinabove set forth shall be at Contractor's expense. 23. CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS The Contractor further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations as the Owner may see fit, in the line, grade, form dimensions, plans or materials for the work herein contemplated, or any part thereof, either before or after the beginning of the construction, without affecting the validity of this contract and the accompanying bond. If such changes or alterations diminish the quantity of the work to be done, they shall not constitute the basis for a claim for damages, or anticipated profits on the work that may be dispensed with. If they increase the amount of work, and the increased work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such increase shall be paid according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price established for such work under this contract; r, otherwise such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Extra Work. In case the Owner shall make such changes or alterations as shall make useless any work already done or material already furnished or used in G said work, then the Owner shall recompense the Contractor for any material or labor so used, and for any actual loss occasioned by such change, due to actual expenses incurred in preparation for the work as originally -^ planned. 24. EXTRA WORK The term "extra work" as used in this contract shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be required by the Owner or Owner's Representative to be done by the Contractor to accomplish any change, alteration or addition to the work as shown on the plans and specifications or contract documents and not covered by Contractor's bid, except as provided under Changes and Alterations herein. It is agreed that the Contractor shall perform all extra work under the direction of the Owner's Representative when presented with a written work order signed by the Owner's Representative; subject, however, to the right of the Contractor to require written confirmation of such extra work order by the Owner. It is also agreed that the compensation to be paid to the Contractor for performing said extra work shall be determined by the following methods: Method (A) - By agreed unit prices; or Method (B) - By agreed lump sum; or Method (C) - If neither Method (A) or Method (B) be agreed upon before the extra work is commenced, then the Contractor shall be paid the actual field cost of the work, plus fifteen (15%) percent. raw In the event said extra work be performed and paid for under Method (C), then the provisions of this paragraph shall apply and the "actual field cost" is hereby defined to include the cost of all workmen, such as foremen, timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, materials, supplies, teams, trucks, rentals on machinery and equipment, for the time actually employed or used on such extra work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incurred, together with all expenses incurred directly on account of such extra work, including Social Security, Old Age Benefits, Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workers' Compensation and all s r other insurances as may be required by law or ordinances or directed by the Owner or Owner's Representative, or by them agreed to. Owner's Representative may direct the form in which accounts of the actual field cost r shall be kept and records of these accounts shall be made available to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise, these matters shall be determined by the Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be Vr determined by using 100%, unless otherwise specified, of the latest Schedule of Equipment and Ownership 1 Expenses adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America. Where practical, the terms and prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be incorporated in the written extra work order. The fifteen percent r (15%) of the actual field cost to be paid to Contractor shall cover and compensate him for his profit, overhead, general superintendence and field office expense, and all other elements of cost and expense not embraced within the actual field cost as herein defined, save that where the Contractor's Camp or Field Office must be maintained primarily on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall be included in the "actual field cost." No claim for extra work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered in writing by Owner's Representative. In case any orders or instructions appear to the Contractor to involve extra work for which he should receive compensation or an adjustment in the construction time, he shall make written request to the Owner's Representative for a written order authorizing such extra work. Should a difference of opinion arise as to what does or does not constitute extra work or as to the payment therefore, and the Owner's Representative insists upon its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the work after making written request for written order and shall keep adequate and accurate account of the actual field cost thereof, as provided under Method (C). The Contractor will thereby preserve the right to submit the matter of payment to arbitration as herein below provided. 25. DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS It is further agreed that it is the intent of this contract that all work described in the bid, the specifications, plans and other contract documents, is to be done for the prices quoted by the Contractor and that such price shall include all appurtenances necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent of these contract r documents as interpreted by Owner's Representative. If the Contractor finds any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents, he should notify the Owners' Representative and obtain a clarification before the bids are received, and if no such request is received by the Owner's Representative prior r to the opening of bids, then it shall be considered that the Contractor fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in his bid to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications. It is further understood that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than five days prior to the opening of bids. r 26. RIGHT OF OWNER TO MODIFY METHODS AND EQUIPMENT If at any time the methods or equipment used by the Contractor are found to be inadequate to secure the quality of work with the rate of progress required under this contract, the Owner or Owner's Representative may order the Contractor in writing to increase their safety or improve their character and efficiency and the Contractor shall comply with such order. If, at any time, the working force of the Contractor is inadequate for securing the progress herein specified, the Contractor shall, if so ordered in writing, increase his force or equipment, or both, to such an extent as to give reasonable assurance of compliance with the schedule of progress. 27. PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC The Contractor shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workers' Compensation Insurance with an insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the Workers' Compensation laws of the State of Texas. The Contractor shall at all times exercise reasonable precaution for the safety of employees and others on or near the work and shall comply with all applicable provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and e equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" of Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state or municipal laws or regulations. The Contractor, his sureties and insurance carriers shall defend, indemnify and save harmless the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees from all suits, actions, or claims of any f character whatsoever, brought for or on account of any injuries or damages received or sustained by any person or persons or property, on account of any negligent act or fault of the Contractor or any subcontractor, their agents or employees, in the execution and supervision of said contract, and the project which is the subject matter of this contract, on account of the failure of Contractor or any subcontractor to provide necessary f barricades, warning lights, or signs and will be required to pay any judgment with costs which may be obtained against the Owner or any of its officers, agents, or employees including attorney's fees. The safety precautions taken shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, in his sole discretion as an Independent Contractor, inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as well as any notice which may be given by the Owners or the Owner's Representative concerning omissions under this paragraph as the work progresses, are intended as reminders to the Contractor of his duty and shall not be construed as any assumption of duty to supervise safety precautions by either the Contractor or any of his subcontractors. p-' 28. CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of r Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of i cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies shall contain an agreement on the part of the insurer waiving the right to subrogation. The Contractor shall procure and carry at his sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection.with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverages shall be submitted prior to contract execution. The insurance certificates furnished shall name the City as an additional insured, or in the alternative, shall be accompanied by a statement from the Contractor to the effect that no work on this particular project shall be subcontracted. It shall be the contractors responsibility to provide to the owner all proof of coverage insurance documents including workers compensation coverage for each subcontractor. A. Comprehensive General Liability Insurance The contractor shall have Comprehensive General Liability Insurance with limits of $1.000.000 Combined Single Limit in the aggregate and per occurrence to include: Premises and Operations Explosion & Collapse Hazard Underground Damage Hazard Products & Completed Operations Hazard Contractual Liability Independent Contractors Coverage �+ Personal Injury i i Advertising Injury B. Owner's Protective or Contingent Public Liability Insurance and Property Damage Liability Insurance. For bodily injuries, including accidental death and or property damage, $1.000.000 Combined Single Limit. This policy shall be submitted prior to contract execution. C. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance The Contractor shall have Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance with limits of not less than; Bodily Injury/Property Damage, $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit, to include all owned and nonowned cars including: Employers Nonownership Liability Hired and Nonowned Vehicles. The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job and copy of the endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance. D. Builder's Risk Insurance Policy The Contractor shall obtain a Builder's Risk policy in the amount of 100% of the total contract price (100% of potential loss) naming the City of Lubbock as insured. E. Umbrella Liability Insurance The Contractor shall have Umbrella Liability Insurance in the amount of $1.000.000 on all contracts with coverage to correspond with Comprehensive General Liability and Comprehensive Automobile Liability coverages. F. Worker's Compensation and Employers Liability Insurance Worker's Compensation Insurance covering all employees whether employed by the Contractor or any Subcontractor on the job with Employers Liability of at least $500.000. 1. Definitions: Certificate of coverage ("certificate") - A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self -insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC-81, TWCC- 82, TWCC-83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project. Duration of the project - includes the time from the beginning of the work on the project until the contractor's/person's work on the project has been completed and accepted by the governmental entity. Persons providing services on the project ("subcontractor" in ❑ entities performing all or part of the services the contractor has undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner -operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. 2. The contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the contractor providing services on the project, for the duration of the project. r` a ' 3. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded the contract. 4. If the coverage period shown on the contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project, the contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended. 5. The contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on the project, and provide to the governmental entity: (a) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (b) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project. 6 The contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter. 7. The contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project. 8. The contractor shall post on each project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. 9. The contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on the project, to: PM (a) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (b) provide to the contractor, prior to that person beginning work on the project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (c) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor: (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (2) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; f i °4 (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (g) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to perform as required by paragraphs (1) - (7), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. 10. By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the contractor who will provide services on the project will be covered by worker's compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the commission's Division of Self - Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. 11. The contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the contract void if the contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity. G. Proof of Coverage Before work on this contract is commenced, each Contractor and subcontractor shall submit to the Owner for approval five Certificates of Insurance covering each insurance policy carried and offered as evidence of compliance with the above insurance requirements, signed by an authorized representative of the insurance company setting forth: (1) The name and address of the insured. (2) The location of the operations to which the insurance applies. (3) The name of the policy and type or types of insurance in force thereunder on the date bome by such certificate. (4) The expiration date of the policy and the limit or limits of liability thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (5) A provision that the policy may be canceled only by mailing written notice to the named insured at the address shown in the bid specifications. (6) A provision that written notice shall be given to the City ten days prior to any change in or cancellation of the policies shown on the certificate. (7) The certificate or certificates shall be on the form (or identical copies thereof) contained in the job specifications. No substitute of nor amendment thereto will be acceptable. (8) If policy limits are paid, new policy must be secured for new coverage to complete project. (9) A Contractor shall: (a) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of �^ the project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements; F F (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project; provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: (i) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (ii) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter, notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; (g) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Act or other commission rules. This notice must be printed in at least 19 point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words or changes: REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must be covered by workers' compensation Insurance. This Includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment and materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee." "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at 5121440-3789 to receive Information on the legal requirement for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's (allure to provide coverage." and (h) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: (i) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (i) provide a certificate of coverage to the contractor prior to that person beginning work on the project; I 7 t (iii) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the language in subsection (e) (3) of this rule; (iv) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (v) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor. (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (2) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (vi) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (vii) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and �.. (viii) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (A) - (H), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. ` 29. DISABLED EMPLOYEES l Contractors having more than 15 employees agree to comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, Polk and agree not to discriminate against a qualified individual with a disability because of the disability of such individual in regard to job application procedures, the hiring, advancement, or discharge of employees; employee compensation, job training, and other terms, conditions, and privileges of employment. 30. PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS LABORERS MATERIALMEN. AND FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY, EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES The Contractor agrees that he will indemnify and save the Owner harmless from all claims growing out of any demands of subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen and furnishers of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, all suppliers, including commissary, incurred in the furtherance of the performance of this contract. When Owner so desires, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or waived. If during the progress of the work, Contractor shall allow any indebtedness to accrue for work furnished by any of those designated in the preceding paragraph and shall fail to pay and discharge any such indebtedness within five (5) days after demand is made, then Owner may, during the period for which such indebtedness shall remain unpaid, withhold from the unpaid portion of this contract, a sum equal to the amount of such unpaid indebtedness or may apply the sum so withheld to discharge any such indebtedness. Any and all communications between any party under this paragraph must be in writing. r r-e d b 31. PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENT INVENTION r The contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, and shall provide for the use of any design, device, material or process covered by letters patent or copyright by suitable legal agreement with the Patentee or ` Owner thereof. The Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent or copyrights and shall indemnify and save the Owner harmless from any loss on account thereof, except that Owner shall defend all such suits and claims and shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular design, device, material or process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified or required in these contract documents by Owner; provided, however, if choice of alternate design, device, material or process is allowed to r^ the Contractor, then Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner harmless from any loss on account thereof. If the material or process specified or required by Owner Is an infringement, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless he promptly gives written notice to the Owner of such infringement. r 32. LAWS AND ORDINANCES The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances and r regulations, which in any manner effect the contract or the work, and shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner against any claims arising from the violation of any such laws, ordinances, and regulations, whether by the Contractor or his employees. If the Contractor observes that the plans and specifications are at variance therewith, he shall promptly notify the Owners' Representative in writing and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in the contract for changes in the work. If the Contractor performs any work knowing it to be contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice to the Owner's Representative, he shall bear all costs arising therefrom. The Owner is a municipal corporation of the State of Texas and the law from which it derives its powers, insofar as the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the Owner may enter into contracts, shall be controlling, and shall be considered as part of this contract to the same effect as though embodied herein. 33. ASSIGNMENT AND SUBLETTING The Contractor further agrees that he will retain personal control and will give his personal attention to the fulfillment of this contract. The Contractor further agrees that subletting of any portion or feature of the work, or materials required in the performance of this contract, shall not relieve the Contractor from his full obligations to the Owner, as provided by this contractual agreement. 34. TIME FOR COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES It is hereby understood and mutually agreed by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of beginning and time for completion as specified in the contract of work to be done hereunder are essential conditions of this contract; and it is further mutually understood and agreed that the work embraced in this contract shall be commenced on a date to be specified in the Notice to Proceed. If the Contractor should neglect, fail, or refuse to complete the work within the time herein specified, or any proper extension thereof granted by the Owner, then the Contractor does hereby agree as part of the consideration for the awarding of this contract, the Owner may withhold permanently from Contractor's total compensation, the sum of $300.00 (THREE HUNDRED DOLLARS) PER DAY, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages for the breach of the contract as herein set forth for each and every calendar day that the Contractor shall be in default after the time stipulated for completing the work. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between Contractor and the Owner, that the time for the completion of the work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into i consideration the average climatic change and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality. 6' The amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the Owner because of the impracticability and extreme difficulty in fixing and ascertaining actual damages the Owner would in such event sustain, and the amount is agreed to be damages the Owner would sustain and shall be retained by the Owner from current periodical estimates for payments or from final payment. rIt is further agreed and understood between the Contractor and Owner that time is of the essence of this contract. 35. TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION �^ It is the meaning and intent of this contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the Contractor shall be allowed to prosecute his work at such time and sessions, in such order of precedence, and in such manner as shall be most conductive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the order and time of prosecution shall be such that the work shall be substantially completed as a whole and in part, in accordance with this contract, the plans and specifications, and within the time of completion designated in the bid; provided, also, that when the Owner is having other work done, either by contract or by his own force, the Owners Representative may direct the time and manner of constructing work done under this contract so that conflicts �^ will be avoided and the construction of the various works being done for the Owner shall be harmonized. The Contractor shall submit, at such times as may reasonably be requested by the Owners Representative, schedules which shall show the order in which the Contractor intends to carry on the work, with dates at which the Contractor will start the several parts of the work and estimated dates of completion of the several parts. 36. EXTENSION OF TIME The Contractor agrees that he has submitted his bid in full recognition of the time required for the completion of this project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in this locality, and has considered the liquidated damage provisions of paragraph 33 hereinabove set forth and that he shall not be entitled to, nor will he request, an extension of time on this contract, except when his work has been delayed by an act or neglect of the Owner, Owners Representative, employees of the Owner or other contractors employed by the owner, or by changes ordered in the work, or by strike, walkouts, acts of God or the public enemy, fire or flood. The Contractor may apply in writing for an extension of time, submitting therewith all written justification as may be required by Owners Representative for such an extension as requested by Contractor. The Owners Representative within ten (10) days after receipt of a written request for an extension of time by the Contractor supported by all requested documentation shall then consider such written request and respond to Contractor in writing granting or rejecting the request for an extension of time to complete the project. 37. HINDRANCE AND DELAYS In executing the contract agreement, the Contractor agrees that in undertaking to complete the work within the time herein fixed, he has taken into consideration and made allowances for all hindrances and delays incident to such work, whether growing out of delays in securing material or workmen or otherwise. No charge shall be made by the Contractor for hindrance or delays from any cause during the progress of any part of the work embraced in this contract except where the work is stopped by order of the Owner or Owners Representative for the Owners convenience, in which event, such expense as in the judgment of the Owners Representative that is caused by such stoppage shall be paid by Owner to Contractor. 38. QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured or computed length, area, solid contents, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided. In the event this contract is let on a unit price basis, then Owner and Contractor agree that this contract, including the r" specifications, plans and other contract documents are intended to show clearly all work to be done and material G to be furnished hereunder. Where the estimated quantities are shown for the various classes of work to be done and material to be furnished under this contract, they are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for r., estimating the probable cost of the work and for comparing their bids offered for the work. It is understood and agreed that the actual amount of work to be done and the materials to be furnished under this contract may differ I r somewhat from these estimates, and that where the basis for payment under this contract is the unit price method, payment shall be for the actual amount of work done and materials furnished on the project. 39. PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY The Contractor shall take proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way encountered, which may be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under this agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and he shall be liable for any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent property. The Contractor agrees to indemnify, save and hold harmless the Owner against any claim or claims for damages due to any injury to any adjacent or adjoining property, arising or growing out of the performance of this contract, but such indemnity shall not apply to any claim of any kind arising out of the existence or character of the work. r 40. PRICE FOR WORK In consideration of the furnishing of all necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all work !` by the Contractor, and on the delivery of all materials embraced in this contract in full conformity with the specifications and stipulations herein contained, the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor the price set forth in the bid attached hereto, which has been made a part of this contract, and the Contractor hereby agrees to receive such price in full for furnishing all materials and all labor required for the aforesaid work, also, for all expenses incurred by him and for well and truly performing the same and the whole thereof in the manner and according to this agreement, the attached specifications, plans, contract documents and requirements of Owner's Representative. r 41. PAYMENTS No payments made or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the contract, either wholly or in part, nor shall any certificate or payment be considered as acceptance of defective work. Contractor shall at any time requested during the progress of the work furnish the Owner or Owners Representative with a verifying certificate showing the Contractors total outstanding indebtedness in connection with the work. Before final payment is made, Contractor shall satisfy Owner, by affidavit or otherwise, that there are no outstanding liens against Owners premises by reason of any work under the contract. Acceptance by Contractor of final payment of the contract price shall constitute a waiver of all claims against Owner which have not theretofore been timely filed as provided in this contract. 42. PARTIAL PAYMENTS On or before the tenth day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to Owners Representative an application for partial payment. Owners Representative shall review said application for partial payment and the progress of the work made by the Contractor and if found to be in order shall prepare a certificate for partial payment showing as completely as practical the total value of the work done by the Contractor up to and including the last day of the preceding month; said statement shall also include the value of all sound materials delivered on site of the work that are to be fabricated into the work. The Owner shall then pay the Contractor on or before the fiftee f the current month the total amount of the Owners Representative's Certificate of Partial Payment ess ° amount thereof, which 5% shall be retained until final payment, and further, less all previous p all further sums that may be retained by Owner under the terms of this agreement. It is understood, however, that in case the whole work be near to completion, and this fact is certified to by Owners Representative and some unexpected and some unusual delay occurs due to no fault or negligence on the part of the Contractor, the Owner may upon written recommendation of Owners Representative pay a reasonable and equitable portion of the retained percentage due Contractor. I f r 7 43. FINAL COMPLETION AND ACCEPTANCE Within thirty-one (31) days after the Contractor has given the Owner's Representative written notice that the work has been completed or substantially completed, the Owner's Representative and the Owner shall inspect the work and within said time, if the work be found to be completed or substantially completed in accordance with the contract documents, the Owner's Representative shall issue to the Owner and Contractor his certificate of completion, and thereupon it shall be the duty of the Owner within thirty-one (31) days to issue a certificate of �^ acceptance of the work to the Contractor. I 44. FINAL PAYMENT r Upon the issuance of the certificate of completion, the Owner's Representative shall proceed to make final t measurement and prepare a final statement of the value of all work performed and materials fumished under the terms of the agreement, and shall certify same to the Owner, who shall pay to the Contractor on or before the 31st day after the date of certificate of completion, the balance due Contractor under the terms of this agreement, provided he has fully performed his contractual obligations under the terms of this contract; and said payment shall become due in any event upon said performance by the Contractor. Neither the certificate of acceptance nor the final payment, nor any provisions in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of the obligation for fulfillment of any warranty which may be required in the special conditions (if any) of this contract or required in the specifications made a part of this contract. 45. CORRECTION OF WORK BEFORE FINAL PAYMENT FOR WORK Contractor shall promptly remove from Owners' premises all materials condemned by the Owner's Representative on account of failure to conform to the contract, whether actually incorporated in the work or not, and Contractor shall at his own expense promptly replace such condemned materials with other materials conforming to the requirements of the contract. Contractor shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of other contractors damaged by any such removal or replacement. If Contractor does not remove and replace any such condemned work within a reasonable time after a written notice by the Owner or the Owner's Representative, Owner may remove and replace it at Contractor's expense. 46. CORRECTION OF WORK AFTER FINAL PAYMENT Neither the final payment nor certificate nor any provision in this contract shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship, and he shall remedy any defects due thereto and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom, which shall appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of substantial completion. The Owner or the Owner's Representative shall give notice of observed defects with reasonable promptness. 47. PAYMENT WITHHELD The Owner may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the whole or part of any j` certificate to such extent as may be necessary to protect himself from loss on account of: (a) Defective work not remedied. (b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating possible filing of claims. (c) Failure of the Contractor to make payments promptly to subcontractors or for materials or labor. (d) Damage to another contractor. When the above grounds are removed, or the Contractor provides a surety bond satisfactory to the Owner, which will protect the Owner in the amount withheld, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them. i 1. r 48. TIME OF FILING CLAIMS �^ It is further agreed by both parties hereto that all questions of dispute or adjustment presented by the Contractor l shall be in writing and filed with the Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) days after the Owners Representative has given any directions, order or instruction to which the Contractor desires to take exception. The Owners' Representative shall reply to such written exceptions by the Contractor and render his final decision in writing. In case the Contractor should appeal from the decision of the Owners Representative, any demand for arbitration shall be filed with the Owners Representative and the Owner in writing within ten (10) days after the date of delivery to Contractor of the final decision of the Owners Representative. It is further agreed that �^ final acceptance of the work by the Owner and the acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment shall be a bar to any claim by either party, except where noted otherwise in the contract documents. 49. ABANDONMENT BY CONTRACTOR In case the Contractor should abandon and fail or refuse to resume work within ten (10) days after written notification from the Owner or the Owners Representative, or if the Contractor fails to comply with the orders of the Owners Representative, when such orders are consistent with this contract, this Agreement, or the Specifications hereto attached, then the Surety on the bond shall be notified in writing and directed to complete the work and a copy of said notice shall be delivered to the Contractor. After receiving said notice of abandonment, the Contractor shall not remove from the work any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies then on the job, but the same, together with any materials and equipment under the contract for work, may be held for use on the work by the Owner or the Surety of the Contractor, or another contractor, in completion of the work; and the Contractor shall not receive any rental or credit therefore (except when used in connection with Extra Work, where credit shall be allowed as provided for under paragraph 24 of this contract); it being understood that the use of such equipment and materials will ultimately reduce the cost to complete the work and be reflected in the final settlement. '' In case the Surety should fail to commence compliance with the notice for completion hereinbefore provided for within ten (10) days after service of such notice, then the Owner may provide for completion of the work in either of the following elective manners; (a) The Owner may employ such force of men and use of machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies as said Owner may deem necessary to complete the work and charge the expense of such labor, machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies to said Contractor, and the expense so charged shall be deducted and paid by the Owner out of such moneys as may be due, or that may thereafter at any time become due to the Contractor under and by virtue of this Agreement. In case such expense is less than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by the Contractor, then said Contractor shall receive the difference. In case such expense is greater than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by said Contractor, then the Contractor and/or his Surety shall pay the amount of such excess to the Owner, or (b) The Owner, under sealed bids, after notice published as required by law, at least twice in a newspaper having a general circulation in the County of location of the work, may let the contract for the completion l of the work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this contract. In case of any increase in cost to the Owner under the new contract as compared to what would have been the cost under this contract, such increase shall be charged to the Contractor and the Surety shall be and (j remain bound therefore. However, should the cost to complete any such new contract prove to be less than that which would have been the cost to complete the work under this contract, the Contractor or his Surety shall be credited therewith. When the work shall have been substantially completed, the Contractor and his Surety shall be so notified and certificates of completion and acceptance, as provided in paragraph 42 hereinabove set forth, shall be issued. A F,., complete itemized statement of the contract accounts, certified to by Owners Representative as being correct shall then be prepared and delivered to Contractor and his Surety, whereon the Contractor or his Surety, or the F 50. 51. 52. 53. Owner as the case may be, shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement within 30 days after the date of certificate of completion. In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would have been the cost to the Owner had the work been completed by the Contractor under the terms of this contract, or when the Contractor and/or his Surety shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the Owner, then all machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies left on the site of the work shall be turned over to the Contractor and/or his Surety. Should the cost to complete the work exceed the contract price, and the Contractor and/or his Surety fail to pay the amount due the Owner within the time designated hereinabove, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies on the site of the work, notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials shall be mailed to the Contractor and his Surety at the respective addresses designated in this contract; provided, however, that actual written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing, or other giving of such notice, such property shall be held at the risk of the Contractor and his Surety subject only to the duty of the Owner to exercise ordinary care to protect such property. After fifteen (15) days from the date of said notice the Owner may sell such machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies and apply the net sum derived from such sale to the credit of the Contractor and his Surety. Such sale may be made at either public or private sale, with or without notice, as the Owner may elect. The Owner shall release any machinery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies which remain on the jobsite and belong to persons other than the Contractor or his Surety, to their proper owners. ABANDONMENT BY OWNER In case the Owner shall fail to comply with the terms of this contract, and should fail or refuse to comply with said terms within ten (10) days after written notification by the Contractor, then the Contractor may suspend or wholly abandon the work, and may remove therefrom all machinery, tools, and equipment, and all materials on the ground that have not been included in payments to the Contractor and have not been incorporated into the work. Thereupon, the Owner's Representative shall make an estimate of the total amount earned by the Contractor, which estimate shall include the value of all work actually completed by said Contractor at the prices stated in the attached bid, the value of all partially completed work at a fair and equitable price, and the amount of all Extra Work performed at the prices agreed upon, or provided for by the terms of this contract, and a reasonable sum to cover the cost of any provisions made by the Contractor to carry the whole work to completion, and which cannot be utilized. The Owner's Representative shall then make a final statement of the balance due the Contractor by deducting from the above estimate all previous payments by the Owner and all other sums that may be retained by the Owner under the terms of this Agreement, and shall certify same to the Owner who shall pay to the Contractor on or before thirty (30) days after the date of the notification by the Contractor the balance shown by said final statement as due the Contractor, under the terms of this Agreement. BONDS The successful bidder will be required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $100,000 and the successful bidder will be required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000. All bonds, if required, shall be submitted on forms supplied by the Owner, and executed by an approved Surety Company authorized to do business in the State of Texas. And it is further agreed that this contract shall not be in effect until such bonds are so furnished. SPECIAL CONDITIONS In the event special conditions are contained herein as part of the contract documents and said special conditions conflict with any of the general conditions contained in this contract, then in such event the special conditions shall control. LOSSES FROM NATURAL CAUSES Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss or damage to the Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance and the prosecution of the same, i r t or from unusual obstructions or difficulties which may be encountered in the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at his own cost and expense. 54. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR Contractor is, and shall remain, an independent contractor with full, complete and exclusive power and authority to direct, supervise, and control his own employees and to determine the method of the performance of the work covered hereby. The fact that the Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right to observe Contractor's work during his performance and to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and vested in the Owner or Owner's Representative hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at any time change or effect r the status of the Contractor as an independent contractor with respect to either the Owner or Owner's Representative or to the Contractor's own employees or to any other person, firm, or corporation. 55. CLEANING UP The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of debris caused by the work, and at the completion of the work he shall remove all such debris and also his tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials and shall leave the work room clean or its equivalent. The work shall be left in good order and condition. In case of dispute Owner may remove the debris and charge the cost to the Contractor. No Text Resolution No. 5121 March 14, 1996 Item #19 7 WHEREAS, the City Council has heretofore established the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for each craft or type of workmen or mechanics needed to execute public works contracts for the City of Lubbock in accordance with the provisions of Vernon's Ann.Civ.St., Art. 5159a; and WHEREAS, such wage rates were established by Resolution No. 719 enacted February 12, 1981, updated by Resolution No. 1590 enacted February 23, 1984, and further updated by Resolution No. 2502 enacted January 8, 1987; and WHEREAS, such rates need to be updated at the present time in order to reflect the current prevailing rate of per diem wages; NOW THEREFORE: BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK: THAT the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for public works contracts shall be as set forth in the following named exhibits, which exhibits shall be attached hereto and made a part hereof for all intents and purposes: Exhibit A: Building Construction Trades Exhibit B: Paving and Highway Construction Exhibit C. Overtime Rate Exhibit D: Weekend and Holiday Rate Such wage rates are hereby found and declared to be the general prevailing rate of per diem wages in all localities where public works are undertaken on behalf of the City of Lubbock and such wage rates shall be included in all public works contracts as provided by law. F r a Paving and Highway Construction Prevailing Wage Rates Craft Asphalt Heaterman Asphalt Shoveler Concrete Finisher Concrete Finisher -Helper Electrician Egger Form Setter Form Setter -Helper Laborer -General Laborer -Utility Mechanic Mechanic -Helper Power Equipment Operators Asphalt Paving Machine Bulldozer Concrete Paving Machine Front End Loader Heavy Equipment Operator Light Equipment Operator Motor Grader Operator Roller Scraper Tractor Truck Driver -Light Truck Driver Heavy Hourly Rate 6.00 5.50 7.35 5.75 10.50 5.50 6.50 5.50 5.50 6.25 7.25 5.50 7.00 7.00 7.00 6.50 7.00 6.50 8.50 6.00 6.50 6.50 6.00 6.50 r r r Passed by the City Council this 14th dayoof:: — ch , 1996. ATTEST: &tt,- I I (-X-& Betty M. J—Anson, City Secretary APPROVED AS TO CONTENT: 17)6w- av�� ---- Mary AndrIVws, Managing Director of Human Resources APPROVED AS TO FORM: old Willard; Assistant City Attorney HW:da/ccdocs/pubworks.res February 14, 1996 2 F F City of Lubbock Building Construction Trades Prevailing Rates Acoustical Ceiling Installer Air Conditioner Installer Air Conditioner Installer -Helper Asbestos Worker Asbestos Supervisor Bricklayer Bricklayer -Helper Carpenter Carpenter -Helper Cement Finisher Drywall. Hanger Electrician Electrician -Helper Equipment Operator -Heavy Equipment Operator -Light Floor Installer Glazier Insulator-PipingB oiler Insulator -Helper Iron Worker Laborer -General Mortar Mixer Painter Hourly Rate 10.00 11.00 5.50 8.00 11.00 11.00 6.00 11.00 6.00 7.50 10.00 13.00 6.00 8.50 7.50 8.50 9.00 9.00 5.50 8.00 5.50 5.50 9.50 Plumber ..• . ., .....� - ,_,..� 10.50 Plumber-Helve Roofer-Helper 5.50 Sheet Meta! Wow' -Sheet Metal Worker -Helm 5.50 r r EXHIBIT C Prevailing Wage Rates Overtime Rate The rate for overtime (in excess of forty hours per week) is 1 1/2 times base rate. EXHIBIT D Prevailing Wage Rates Weekend and Holiday Rate The rate for weekend and holiday is 1 1/2 times base rate. No Text r LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 is SECTION 01031 - ALTERNATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Alternates: a. List of alternates. b. Procedures for alternate work. B. Related Sections: 1. Applications for payment: Elsewhere in Invitation to Bid. j" 2. Procedures for modifications to the contract: Elsewhere in Invitation to Bid. j 3. Contract closeout procedures: Elsewhere in Invitation to Bid. r 1.2 ALTERNATE LIST A. Alternate No. 1: Flagpole. 1. Add Flagpole. 2. As specified in section(s) 3300, 10350 3. As shown on drawing(s) (See Civil Sheets) B. Alternate No. 2 : Emergency Generator. 1. Provide Emergency Generator, transfer switch, connections, etc., complete and ready to use. Some Light Fixture changes are also a part of this alternate. See fixture r schedule. 2. As specified in Electrical Specification Sections. 3. As shown on Electrical Sheets. 4. NOTE: Emergency Panel is in the Base Bid. C. Alternate No. 3 : Additional (12) Metal Lockers 1. Add 12 additional lockers identical to the 12 in the Base Bid. 2. As specified in section(s) 10505. 3. As shown on Architectural Sheets. r D. Alternate No. 4: Graffiti Resistant Coating 1. Add graffiti resistant coating. r- 2. As specified in Section 09910. E. Alternate No. 5: Concrete Sidewalks at Property Perimeter r. 1. Add concrete sidewalk as indicated on Sheet C3. ' 1.3 CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS A. Alternates: 1. Indicate prices for each alternate on bid form; if no change in price is required, indicate no change. 03860296/96 ALTERNATES 01031-1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 2. Indicate on the bid form the amount to be added or deducted from the base bid, should the alternate be accepted, indicating whether it is an "ADD" or a "DEDUCT" price. 3. Include in alternate price all materials, parts, and accessories required for a complete installation, regardless of whether they are mentioned in the alternate description. 4. Voluntary alternates will not be considered in evaluation of bids. S. Accepted alternates will be identified in the agreement. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ALTERNATES A. Notify in writing each entity involved of the status of each alternate, immediately after notification by the owner. 1. Include complete description of any changes agreed upon. B. Coordinate alternate work with related work and modify adjacent work as required. END OF SECTION 01031 03860296/96 ALTERNATES ' 01031-2 r- t F r r LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 SECTION 01010 - SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The owner is: City of Lubbock, Texas, P.O. Box 2000, Lubbock, Texas. B. Section Includes: 1. Project description. 2. Permits and licenses. 3. Access to the site. 4. Contractor's use of the premises. 5. Coordination requirements. 6. Coordination drawings. 7. Preconstruction meeting. 1.2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION A. The project consists of a new 2-Bay Fire Station with related site work, utilities, equipment, etc. 1. At the North-West corner of N niversity Avenue and Corner 1 Street, Lubbock, Texas. 2. As shown in contract documents prepared by Parkhill, Smith and Cooper, Inc., 4010 Avenue R, Lubbock, Texas 79412. B. The Owner will be performing the following work: 1. Hose Dryer Equipment provided by Owner. GC to wire and vent dryer. 2. Washer and Dryer in Hose Storage Room provided by Owner. GC to provide utility hook-ups and vents. 3. Refrigerators provided by Owner. GC to provide utility hook-ups. 4. Ice Maker provided by Owner. GC to provide utility hook-ups. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Furnish: To supply products to the project site, including delivering ready for unloading and replacing damaged and rejected products. B. Install: To put products in place in the work ready for the intended use, including unloading, unpacking, handling, storing, assembling, installing, erecting, placing, applying, anchoring, working, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. C. Provide: To furnish and install products. D. Indicated: Shown, noted, scheduled, specified, or drawn, somewhere in the contract documents. 03860296/96 SUMMARY OF WORK r. 01010-1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Submit copies of all permits, licenses, and similar permissions obtained, and receipts for fees paid, to the owner directly. 1.5 ACCESS TO THE SITE AND USE OF THE PREMISES A. The space available to the contractor for the performance of the work, either exclusively or in conjunction with others performing other construction as part of the project, is restricted to the area within the legal description of the site unless the contractor makes arrangements to use additional space. B. Signs: Provide signs adequate to direct visitors. 1. Do not install, or allow to be installed, signs other than specified sign(s) and signs identifying the principal entities involved in the project. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) -- PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A. A preconstruction meeting will be held at a time and place designated by the Owner, for the -- purpose of identifying responsibilities of the owner's and the architect's personnel and explanation of administrative procedures. B. The contractor shall also use this meeting for the following minimum agenda: 1. Construction schedule. 2. Use of areas of the site. 3. Delivery and storage. 4. Safety. 5. Security. 6. Cleaning up. 7. Subcontractor procedures relating to: a. Submittals. b. Change orders. C. Applications for payment. d. Record documents. C. Attendees shall include: 1. The owner. 2. The architect, and any consultants. - 3. The contractor and its superintendent. 4. Major subcontractors, suppliers, and fabricators. 5. Others interested in the work. — 3.2 SECURITY PROCEDURES A. Limit access to the site to persons involved in the work. 03860296/96 SUMMARY OF WORK 01010-2 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO, 4 900-9268 B. Provide secure storage for materials for which the owner has made payment and which are stored on site. C. Secure completed work as required to prevent loss. D. Secure this site by means of fencing, security guards or other means to prevent damage, theft, safety hazards or other problems on the site. 3.3 COORDINATION A. If necessary, inform each party involved, in writing, of procedures required for coordination; include requirements for giving notice, submitting reports, and attending meetings. 1. Inform the owner when coordination of his work is required. B. See other requirements in other portions of the contract documents. C. Prepare the coordination drawings specified in product sections. 1. Where space is limited, show plan and cross-section dimensions of space available, including structural obstructions and ceilings as applicable. 2. Coordinate shop drawings prepared by separate entities. 3. Show installation sequence when necessary for proper installation. END OF SECTION 01010 03860296/96 SUMMARY OF WORK 01010-3 r LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 SECTION 01200 - PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION AND PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Progress documentation requirements: a. Contractor's construction schedule. b. Progress reports. 2. Progress procedures: a. Progress meetings. B. Contract time is indicated elsewhere. C. Related Sections: 1. Applications for payment: Elsewhere in Invitation to Bid. 2. Preconstruction meeting: Elsewhere in Division 1. 3. Coordination Meeting: Elsewhere in Division 1. 4. Schedule of values: Elsewhere in Invitation to Bid. S. Submittal schedule: Elsewhere in Division 1. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 1. Submit within 14 days after notice to proceed. 2. Submit revised schedule with application for payment. B. Daily Construction Reports: Submit every week. C. Progress Reports: Submit with each application for payment. D. Minutes of Progress Meetings. 1.3 FORM OF SUBMITTALS A. Schedules - General: 1. Provide legend of symbols and abbreviations for each schedule. 2. Use the same terminology as that used in the contract documents. 3. When transparencies are submitted, use only media which will not fade or lose contrast over time. 4. When opaque copies are submitted, submit a minimum of 3 copies. B. Bar Charts: 1. Provide individual horizontal bars representing the duration of each major activity. 2. Coordinate each element on the schedule with other construction activities. 3. Show activities in proper sequence. 4. Show percentage of completion of each activity. 03860296/96 PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION AND PROCEDURES 01200-1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 5. Include cost bar at top of chart, showing estimated and actual costs of work performed at the date of each application for payment. 6. Use vertical lines to mark the time scale at not more than one week intervals. 7. Prepare on reproducible transparency. 8. Use sheets of sufficient number and width to show the full schedule clearly. C. Reports - General: 1. Submit 2 copies to architect. 2. Submit 3 copies to Owner. 1.4 COORDINATION A. In preparation of schedules, take into account the time allowed or required for the architect's administrative procedures. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Prepare and submit a construction schedule. B. Provide construction schedule in the form of bar charts: 1. Use the same items of work as shown in the schedule of values. 2. Where related activities must be performed in sequence, show relationship graphically. �. 3. Incorporate the submittal schedule specified elsewhere. 4. Coordinate with the quality control activities schedule specified elsewhere. 5. Show dates of: a. Each activity that influences the construction time. b. Preconstruction meeting. C. Ordering dates for products requiring long lead time. d. All submittals required. e. Substantial and final completion, with time frames for the architect's completion procedures. 6. Show dates required for: a. Approval of mock-ups required for approval of products. 7. In developing the schedule take into account: a. Weather, including seasonal changes. C. The architect will notify the contractor if schedule is not satisfactory; revise and resubmit. 1. Resubmit within 7 days D. Make and distribute copies of schedule to the architect, to the owner, to subcontractors, and to other entities whose work will be influenced by schedule dates. 1. Hang a copy of the schedule up in each field office or meeting room. 03860296/96 PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION AND PROCEDURES 01200-2 P" f r LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 k t F E. Update the schedule whenever changes occur or are made, or when new information is received, but not less often than at the same intervals at which applications for payment are made. 1. Indicate changes made since last issue; show actual dates for activities completed. 2. Submit updated schedule with application for payment. 3. Issue updated schedule with report of meeting at which revisions are made. 4. Issue updated schedule in same manner as original schedule. 3.2 PROGRESS REPORTS A. Daily Construction Logs: Every day, record the following information concerning events at the site: 1. Weather conditions; high and low temperatures. 2. Approximate number of persons at the site. 3. Visitors to the site. 4. Modifications to the contract received; modifications implemented. 5. Delays; reasons for delay. 6. Emergencies and accidents. 7. Equipment and system start-ups and tests. 8. Field quality control activities conducted. 9. Instrument and meter readings. 10. Losses of material and property. 11. Meetings held and significant decisions made there. 12. Names of subcontractors at site. 13. Special reports made. 14. Orders and requests of representatives of governing authorities. 15. Unusual events. 16. Utility service disconnections and connections. B. Progress Reports: Prepare a narrative report describing the general state of completion of the work and describing in detail the following: I. Actual and anticipated delays, their impact on the schedule, and corrective actions taken or proposed. 2. Actual and potential problems. 3. Effect of delays, problems, and changes on the schedules of other prime contractors. 4. Status of corrective work ordered by the architect. 3.3 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Schedule and conduct periodic progress meetings during construction period. 1. Have meetings once a month. 2. Notify the architect and the owner at least one week in advance of date of meeting; the architect and the owner may attend. B. The following are required to attend: 1. Project superintendent. 2. Major subcontractors and suppliers. 3. Others who have an interest in the agenda. 03860296/96 PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION AND PROCEDURES 01200-3 r, LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 C. Prepare and distribute agenda prior to meetings; cover the following topics when applicable: 1. Review minutes of previous meeting. 2. Status of submittals and impending submittals. 3. Off -site fabrication and delivery schedules. 4. Actual progress of activities in relation to the schedule. 5. Actual and anticipated delays, their impact on the schedule, and corrective actions taken or proposed. 6. Actual and potential problems. 7. Status of change order work. 8. Effect of proposed changes on schedule and coordination. 9. Status of corrective work ordered by the architect. 10. Progress expected to be made during the next period. D. Record minutes and distribute copies within 7 days to the architect, to the owner, to all participants, and to all entities affected by decisions made. END OF SECTION 01200 03860296/96 PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION AND PROCEDURES 01200-4 F LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Preparing and processing of submittals for review and action. 2. Preparing and processing of informational submittals. B. Submit the following for the architect's review and action: 1. Shop drawings. 2. Product data. 3. Samples. C. Submit the following as informational submittals: 1. Structural design information required by the contract documents. 2. Certificates. 3. Coordination drawings. 4. Reports. 5. Qualification statements for manufacturers/installers. 6. Submittals for which procedures are not defined elsewhere. D. Specific submittals required are described in individual sections. l . Provide other information required by Division 15 for mechanical work. 2. Provide other information required by Division 16 for electrical work. E. Related Sections: The following are specified elsewhere in Division 1: 1. Payment, modification, and completion submittals. a. Applications for payment. b. Schedule of values. C. Change proposals. 2. Progress of work submittals: a. Contractor's construction schedules. b. Progress reports. 3. Quality control submittals: a. Inspection reports. b. Test reports. 4. Product submittals: a. Product option submittals. b. Requests for substitution. C. Operating and maintenance data. d. Warranties. e. Maintenance materials and tools. 5. Contract closeout submittals: a. Equipment and systems demonstration reports. b. Request for determination of substantial completion. C. Certificate of occupancy. 9iIiS , A- 03860296/96 SUBMITTALS 01300-1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 d. Project record documents. e. Bonds. 6. Other administrative submittals: a. Survey data. b. Layout data. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. "Shop drawings" are drawings and other data prepared, by the entity who is to do the work, specifically to show a portion of the work. 1. Shop drawings also include: a. Product data specifically prepared for this project. b. Shop or plant inspection and test reports, when made on specific materials, products, or systems to be used in the work. B. "Product data submittals" are standard printed data which show or otherwise describe a product or system, or some other portion of the work. 1. Product data submittals also include: a. Performance curves, when issued by the manufacturer for all products of that type. b. Selection data showing standard colors. C. Wiring diagrams, when standard for all products of that type. C. "Samples" are actual examples of the products or work to be installed. , D. Informational Submittals: Submittals identified in the contract documents as to be submitted for information only. 1.3 FORM OF SUBMITTALS A. Sheets Larger Than 8-1/2 by 14 Inches: 1. Sheet size: 24 x 36 inches, maximum drawing size, or 8 1/2 x 11 or 8 1/2 x 14 for others. a. Exception: Full size pattern or template drawings. 2. Number of copies: a. Submittals for review: 1. Reproducible will be returned. 2. 5 copies of blue- or black -line prints, plus quantity required by the contractor. 3. All but 3 copies will be returned. b. Informational submittals: 1. 3 copies of opaque prints. 2. No copies will be returned. B. Small Sheets or Pages: 1. Minimum sheet size: 8-1/2 by 11 inches. 2. Maximum sheet size for opaque copies: 8-1/2 by 14 inches. 3. Number of copies: a. Opaque copies: 03860296/96 SUBMITTALS 01300-2 r LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 1. For review: 5 copies. a. 3 copies will be retained. 2. Informational submittals: 3 copies r C. Samples: 1VU4fSAVA"- 1. 1 set will be returned. D. If additional sets are needed by other entities involved in work represented by the samples, submit with original submittal. E. Copies in excess of the number requested will not be returned. F. Provide additional copies for project record documents. 1.4 COORDINATION OF SUBMITTALS A. Coordinate submittals and activities that must be performed in sequence, so that the architect has enough information to properly review the submittals. B. Coordinate submittals of different types for the same product or system so that the architect has enough information to properly review each submittal. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TIMING OF SUBMITTALS A. Deliver each submittal requiring approval in time to allow for adequate review and processing time, including resubmittals if necessary; failure of the contractor in this respect will not be considered as grounds for an extension of the contract time. B. Deliver each informational submittal prior to start of the work involved, unless the submittal is of a type which cannot be prepared until after completion of the work; submit promptly. C. If a submittal must be processed within a certain time in order to maintain the progress of the work, state so clearly on the submittal. D. If a submittal must be delayed for coordination with other submittals not yet submitted, the architect may at his option either return the submittal with no action or notify the contractor of the other submittals which must be received before the submittal can be reviewed. E. Allow a minimum of 2 weeks for the first processing of each submittal. Allow more time when submittals must be coordinated with later submittals. F. Allow a minimum of 1 week for processing of resubmittals. 03860296/96 SUBMITTALS 01300-3 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 �- 3.2 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES -GENERAL A. Contractor Review: Sign transmittal form for each submittal certifying compliance with the requirements of the contract documents. _ B. Notify the architect, in writing and at time of submittal, of all points upon which the submittal does not conform to the requirements of the contract documents, if any. C. Do not commence work which requires review of any submittals until receipt of returned submittals with an acceptable action. D. Do not allow submittals without an acceptable action marking to be used for the project. E. Do not submit substitute items that have not been approved by means of the procedure specified elsewhere. F. Do not include requests for substitution (either direct or indirect) on submittals; comply with procedures for substitutions specified elsewhere. G. Preparation of Submittals: — 1. Label each copy of each submittal, with the following information: a. Project name. b. Date of submittal. -� C. Contractor's name and address. d. Architect's name and address. e. Subcontractor's name and address. _ f. Supplier's name and address. g. Manufacturer's name. h. Specification section where the submittal is specified. i. Numbers of applicable drawings and details. j. Other necessary identifying information. 2. Pack submittals suitably for shipment. 3. Submittals to receive architect's action marking: Provide blank space on the label or on the submittal itself for action marking; minimum 4 inches wide by 5 inches high. H. Transmittal of Submittals: 1. Submit all submittals to the architect. 2. Submittals will be accepted from the contractor only. Submittals received from other entities will be returned without review or action. 3. Submittals received without a transmittal form will be returned without review or action. 4. Transmittal form: Use a form acceptable to the architect; provide space on form for: a. Project name. b. Submittal date. C. Transmittal number. d. Specification section number. e. To: f. From: g. Contractor's name. h. Subcontractor's and supplier's names. 03860296/96 SUBMITTALS 013004 I r t LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 i. Manufacturer's name. j. Submittal type (shop drawing, product data, sample, informational submittal). k. Description of submittal. 1. Records of distribution. in. Action marking. n. The contractor's certification signature. o. Comments. 5. Fill out a separate transmittal form for each submittal; also include the following: a. Other relevant information. b. Requests for additional information. 3.3 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Content: Include the following information: 1. Dimensions, at accurate scale. 2. All field measurements that have been taken, at accurate scale. 3. Names of specific products and materials used. 4. Details, identified by contract document sheet and detail numbers. 5. Coordination requirements; show relationship to adjacent or critical work. 6. Name of preparing firm. B. Preparation: 1. Reproductions of contract documents are not acceptable as shop drawings. 2. Copies of standard printed documents are not acceptable as shop drawings. 3. Identify as indicated for all submittals. 4. Space for architect's action marking shall be adjacent to the title block. 3.4 PRODUCT DATA A. Submit all product data submittals for each system or unit of work as one submittal. B. When product data submittals are prepared specifically for this project (in the absence of standard printed information) submit such information as shop drawings and not as product data submittals. C. Content: 1. Submit manufacturer's standard printed data sheets. 2. Identify the particular product being submitted; submit only pertinent pages. 3. Show compliance with properties specified. 4. Identify which options and accessories are applicable. 5. Include recommendations for application and use. 6. Show compliance with the specific standards referenced. 7. Show compliance with specified testing agency listings; show the limitations of their labels or seals, if any. 8. Identify dimensions which have been verified by field measurement. 9. Show special coordination requirements for the product. 03860296/96 SUBMITTALS r- 01300-5 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 3.5 SAMPLES A. Samples: 1. Provide samples that are the same as proposed product. 2. Where unavoidable variations must be expected, submit "range" samples, minimum of 3 units, and describe or identify variations among units of each set. 3. Where selection is required, provide full set of all options. B. Preparation: 1. Attach a description to each sample. 2. Attach name of manufacturer or source to each sample. 3. Where compliance with specified properties is required, attach documentation showing compliance. 4. Where there are limitations in availability, delivery, or other similar characteristics, attach description of such limitations. 5. Where samples are specified to be returned for installation in the work, indicate such requirement on transmittal form. 6. Where selection is required, the first submittal may be a single set of all options; after return of submittal with selection indicated, submit standard number of sets of selected item. 3.6 REVIEW OF SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for approval will be reviewed, marked with appropriate action, and returned. B. Informational submittals: Submittals will be reviewed. 3.7 RETURN, RESUBMITTAL, AND DISTRIBUTION A. Submittals will be returned to the contractor by mail. B. Perform resubmittals in the same manner as original submittals; indicate all changes other than those requested by the architect. C. Distribution: 1. Distribute returned submittals to all subcontractors and suppliers involved in work covered by the submittal 2. Make extra copies for operation and maintenance data submittals, as required. END OF SECTION 01300 03860296/96 SUBMITTALS 01300-6 i` LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY SECTION 01400 - QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURES A. Section Includes: 1. General quality control activities. 2. Procedures for the following: a. Testing and evaluation of test results. b. Inspections. C. Construction and evaluation of mock-ups. d. Manufacturers' field services. 3. Procedures for quality control activities performed by: a. Public authorities having jurisdiction. b. Architect. r C. Independent testing agencies. 1 d. Contractor. e. Manufacturers' representatives. 4. Procedures for submittal of quality control documentation. B. Quality control activities required are specified in other sections. C. See General Conditions for additional requirements for testing, inspections, and approvals. D. Related Sections: 1. Alternates: Elsewhere in Division 1. 2. Contractor's construction schedule: Elsewhere in Division 1. 3. Submittal procedures: Elsewhere in Division 1. 1.2 CONTRACT CONDITIONS A. When portions of the work are required by the contract documents or by governing authorities to be tested, inspected, or approved, such tests, inspections, and approvals shall be made at the appropriate time. B. Unless otherwise indicated, all tests, inspections, and approvals shall be made by an independent testing agency, the appropriate public authority, or other entity acceptable to the owner. C. Unless otherwise specified, the contractor shall arrange for all tests, inspections, and approvals to be made and shall pay costs of all tests, inspections, and approvals, including related costs due to such tests, inspections, and approvals. D. The contractor shall notify the architect of the time and place where tests and inspections are to be made so the architect may have adequate time to arrange to observe such procedures. d, 03860296/96 QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURES 01400-1 r t LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 — E. If the contract documents require that the architect observe tests, inspections, or approvals, the architect will do so at no additional cost to the contractor, provided such tests, inspections, or approvals are to be conducted at the project site. 1. When witnessing of such tests and inspections by the architect at locations other than the project site is specified, the contractor shall bear all costs relating to the architect's travel to the testing or inspection location. F. The owner shall pay for tests, inspections, and approvals which become requirements after bids are received or negotiations concluded, unless noted otherwise. G. If the architect gives the contractor written instruction to perform additional testing or inspection not already included in the contract documents, the contractor shall arrange for such additional testing or inspection. The owner shall pay for such tests and inspections except as provided in the following paragraphs. H. If such additional procedures show that portions of the work do not comply with the contract documents, the contractor shall pay all costs arising thereafter due to such noncompliance including those due to repeating such procedures as well as payment for the services and expenses of the architect. I. Unless otherwise indicated, the contractor shall obtain all certificates of testing, inspection, and approval and shall promptly deliver them to the architect. J. Independent testing agencies, whether employed by the owner or the contractor, may not change the requirements of the contract documents and may not approve any portion of the work. K. Employment of testing agencies, by the contractor or the owner, shall not relieve the contractor of his obligation to perform the work in accordance with the contract documents. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Certificate: A written statement that a portion of the work as accomplished or a particular product conforms to the requirements of the contract documents. B. Installer: Any entity who performs a construction activity, whether an employee, subcontractor, or sub -subcontractor of the contractor. C. Reference Standard: Any document incorporated into the specification by reference rather than by inclusion of complete text; including, but not limited to, voluntary specifications prepared by standards organizations and industry organizations. 1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Reference Standards - General: 1. Comply with edition of standard indicated; if date is not indicated, comply with edition in effect as of: a. Date of agreement. 03860296/96 QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURES 01400-2 r LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 r., 2. Compliance with standards which are revised or reissued after that date will not be required unless incorporated into the contract documents by modification. 3. Where applicable codes, laws, or regulations require editions of different dates, obtain mom instructions from the governing authorities as to which edition is required. B. The requirements of reference standards are binding on the contractor, just as if they were copied into the contract documents, but no provisions of reference standards shall alter the contractual relationship of the parties to the contract. C. Keep at the site at least one copy of each reference standard specified which covers field mixing, installation quality, or field quality control methods. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Reports: Provide certified copies of reports. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, submit for information only. 2. Submit reports within 2 weeks after execution of quality control activity, but not later than the date of application for payment for the work to which the quality control activity relates. 3. Reports shall be prepared by the entity performing the quality control activity. 4. Submit copies directly to governing authorities when so directed. 5. When the contractor employs an independent testing agency, submit copies directly to the architect. 6. Include the following information in all types of reports: a. Date of report. b. Project name (and number, if applicable). C. Description of the quality control activity. d. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing activity. e. Date quality control activity was performed. f. Specification section(s) involved. g. Basis for evaluation (test method, etc.). h. Results or conclusions, including evaluations and interpretations. i. Title, name, and signature of person performing activity. 7. Include the following information in all test reports: a. Locations from which samples were taken, if any. b. Ambient conditions at time of activity. C. Recommendations for retesting, if any. r- B. Certificates: Submit for information only, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Certificates shall be signed by the product manufacturer, unless otherwise specified or not applicable. 2. Include the following information: a. Date of certificate. b. Project name (and number, if applicable). C. Description of the product or system certified. d. Specification section(s) involved. e. When actual materials to be used are to be certified, include lot identification markings, destination or shipment, and quantity in shipment. f. Title, name, and signature of person authorized to make certification. 03860296196 QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURES 01400-3 r LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 — C. Qualification Statements: Submit for information only, unless otherwise indicated. -. D. Manufacturers' Instructions: Submit for information only, unless otherwise indicated; identify conflicts with contract documents. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Manufacturers: As indicated in individual sections. B. Qualifications of Installers: As indicated in individual sections. C. Qualifications of Manufacturers' Field Personnel: Employed directly by the manufacturer and normally performing the activities specified. D. Qualifications of Testing and Inspection Personnel: 1. As indicated in individual sections. 2. Independent Testing Agency Qualifications: When employed by the contractor: a. Approved by the architect. b. Authorized to conduct business in the state in which the project is located. E. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices of an accuracy traceable to either the National Bureau of Standards (NBS) standards or to accepted values of natural physical constants. 1.7 COORDINATION WITH OTHER ENTITIES A. Cooperate with other entities performing quality control activities. B. Provide samples of materials and design criteria as indicated and when requested. C. Provide other assistance, equipment, tools, and storage facilities as specified. D. If desired, make arrangements with those entities and pay for additional similar or related testing or inspection required for the contractor's use or convenience. 1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate quality control activities to avoid delay and to make it unnecessary to uncover work for testing or inspection. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Provide work of the specified quality; where quality level is not indicated, provide work of quality customary in similar types of work. 03860296/96 QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURES 01400-4 r 7 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO., 4 900-9268 1. Where codes, laws, or regulations require work of higher quality or performance, provide work complying with those codes, laws, and regulations. 2. Where two or more quality provisions of the contract documents conflict, comply with the most stringent requirement; where requirements are different but apparently equal, and where it is uncertain which requirement is most stringent, obtain clarification from the architect before proceeding. 3. Actual quality may exceed the specified quality; verify that such differences are acceptable to the owner (other criteria may make excessive quality undesirable). B. Control products, suppliers, manufacturers, site conditions, installers, and workmanship in such a manner as to produce work of the specified quality. C. Comply with manufacturers' instructions and recommendations. 1. Keep a record of instructions and recommendations which supplement or conflict with the manufacturer's written instructions. 2. When manufacturers' instructions and recommendations conflict with the contract documents, obtain clarification from the architect before proceeding. D. Use installers who are capable of producing work of the specified quality. E. Perform all quality control activities specified unless indicated to be performed by other entities. 3.2 MOCK-UPS A. Mock-ups required are specified in other sections. B. Construct mock-ups as specified for actual work, with all components required for a complete installation. C. Erect specified mock-ups in locations indicated. 1. Mock-ups may not be constructed in the final location of the work. 2. Where mock-ups are to be removed, clear area after removal of mock-up and return to original or specified condition. D. Where mock-ups are to be approved by the architect, obtain approval of the architect prior to proceeding with installation. 3.3 TESTING A. Perform tests specified. B. When results of tests are unsatisfactory, make whatever changes or repairs are necessary and retest. C. Submit written report of each original test and of each retest. 03860296/96 QUA M CONTROL PROCEDURES 01400-5 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 3.4 INSPECTING A. Perform inspections specified. B. When inspections reveal unsatisfactory work, make whatever changes or repairs are necessary and reinspect. C. Submit written report of each original inspection and each reinspection. 3.5 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES A. Manufacturers' field services required are specified in other sections. B. Give the architect timely notice of site visits so that the architect may be present. C. Submit a report of each site visit, including records of. 1. Site conditions, installer procedures, and related activities which are not as recommended by the manufacturer. 2. Instructions and recommendations given which differ from the manufacturer's standard printed instructions. 3.6 PROTECTION AND REPAIR A. When work is uncovered during quality control activities, provide protection from damage. B. Correct work damaged by quality control activities; where repair is indicated as an unacceptable method, replace the work. END OF SECTION 01400 03860296/96 QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURES 01400-6 r LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 SECTION 01600 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 900-9268 PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. General product requirements, including: a. General specification requirements for all products. b. Product options. C. Procedures for substitution requests. d. General requirements and procedures for maintenance materials and tools. 2. General requirements for product documentation, including: a. Requirements and procedures for schedule of products. b. General requirements for operation and maintenance data. C. General requirements for warranties. 3. General procedures for products including: a. Procedures for transportation and handling. b. Procedures for delivery and receiving. C. Procedures for storage. B. Related Sections: 1. Submittal transmission, handling, and action procedures: Elsewhere in Division 1. 2. Project record documents: Elsewhere in Division 1. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Damage: Any sort of deterioration whether due to weather, normal wear and tear, accident, or abuse, resulting in soiling, marring, breakage, corrosion, rotting, or impairment of function. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of Products: Submit for approval. B. Final Schedule of Products: Submit for project record. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit for information only. D. Warranties: Submit for project record. E. Receipts for maintenance materials and tools. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Components required to be supplied in quantity within a specification section shall be identical, interchangeable, and made by the same manufacturer. 03860296/96 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600-1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 B. Do not use products removed from existing construction, unless specifically permitted by the — contract documents or approved by the owner. 2.2 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS AND TOOLS A. Maintenance Materials: Parts and materials for repair and maintenance; specific items required are specified in product sections. 1. Provide products and tools which are identical to those used in the work; if necessary to obtain identical items, order at the same time as products to be installed or tools to be used in the work. B. Package appropriately and label to show type and quantity of contents. C. Deliver, handle, and store in the same manner as products to be installed. —' D. Do not turn over to the owner until date of substantial completion, unless otherwise approved by the owner. E. Deliver to the owner; unload. F. Obtain receipt prior to final payment. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. It is the contractor's responsibility to select products which comply with the contract documents and which are compatible with one another, with existing work, and with products selected by other contractors. 1. Verify that electrical characteristics of products are compatible with electrical systems; notify architect of all discrepancies. B. Do not use any substitute products which have not been approved in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents; formal substitution request is required. C. Where the specification is silent on whether substitutions will be considered, substitutions will not be considered. D. Definition of Substitute Product: Any product which does not meet the requirements of the contract documents, whether in product characteristics, performance, quality, or manufacturer or brand names, is considered a substitute. E. Product Options: Where products are specified using more than one method, such as description with a manufacturer list, use a product meeting the requirements of both specification methods. F. Products Specified by Reference Standard: Use any product meeting the specification. Provisions of reference standards shall not modify the responsibilities of the owner or architect as defined in the contract documents. 03860296/96 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600-2 t ; r LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 a, G. Products Specified by Description: Use any product meeting the specification. I f H. Products Specified by Performance Requirements: Use any product meeting the specification. !" I. Products Specified by Listing Manufacturer(s) Accompanied by Language Indicating that 4 Substitutions Are Not Allowed: Provide a product meeting the specification and made by one of the manufacturers listed. r i J. Products Specified by Listing Manufacturer(s) Accompanied by Language Specifically Indicating that Substitutions Are Allowed: Provide a product meeting the specification; submit substitution request for any manufacturer not listed. K. Language indicating that substitutions are not allowed includes: 1. "Provide one of the following products." 2. "Provide products made by one of the manufacturers listed." 3. "Provide products complying with the contract documents and made by one of the following." 4. "No substitutions." 5. Other similar language. L. Language indicating that substitutions are allowed includes: 1. Substitutions will be considered. 2. "... will be among those considered acceptable." 3. Or approved equal. 4. Other similar language. 3.2 SUBSTITUTIONS AFTER AWARD OF THE CONTRACT A. The contractor will be notified in writing within a reasonable time; verbal acceptance will not be valid. B. Acceptable substitutions will be added to the contract documents by appropriate modification. 3.3 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURE A. Submission of request for substitution shall constitute a representation that the entity making the request: 1. Has investigated the proposed product and determined that it is equal to or better than the specified product. Absence of an explicit comparison of any characteristic of the proposed product to the specified product shall constitute a representation that the proposed product is equal to or better than the specified product with regard to that characteristic. 2. Will provide the same warranty for the proposed product as for the specified product. 3. Will coordinate the installation and make other changes which may be required for the work to be complete in all respects, including: a. Redesign. b. Additional components and capacity required by other work affected by the change. 03860296/96 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600-3 C'" LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 4. Waives all claims for additional costs and time extensions which subsequently may become apparent and which are caused by the change. 5. Will reimburse the owner for additional costs for evaluation of the substitution request, redesign if required, and reapproval by authorities having jurisdiction if required. _ B. Substitutions will not be considered when acceptance would require substantial revision of the contract documents. C. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data submittals without separate written request. D. Substitution requests will not be considered when submitted directly by subcontractor or supplier. E. Substitution Request Procedure: Submit written request with complete data substantiating compliance of the proposed product with the requirements of the contract documents. 1. Submit request at least 21 days prior to the date when the specified product needs to be ordered. 2. Submit request to the owner. 3. Submit 5 copies of each request and accompanying data. -- 4. Submit all requests on a standard form. 5. Only one request for substitution will be considered for each product. F. Data Required with Substitution Request: Provide at least the following data: 1. Identify product by specification section and paragraph number. 2. Manufacturer's name and address, trade name and model number of product (if _ applicable), and name of fabricator or supplier (if applicable). 3. Complete product data. 4. A list of other projects on which the proposed product has been used, with project name, the design professional's name, and owner contact. 5. An itemized comparison of the proposed product to the specified product. 6. Net amount of change to the contract sum. _ 7. List of maintenance services and replacement materials available. 8. Statement of the effect of the substitution on the construction schedule. 9. Description of changes that will be required in other work or products if the substitute product is approved. G. The architect will determine acceptability of the proposed substitution. H. When the proposed substitution is not accepted, provide the product (or one of the products, as the case may be) specified. 3.4 SCHEDULE OF PRODUCTS A. Prepare a complete schedule of major products used, including the following for each product: 1. Manufacturer's name. 2. Brand or trade name. 3. Model number, if applicable. _ 4. Reference standard, if more than one is applicable. 03860296/96 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600-4 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 i L 5. Arrange products in the schedule by specification sections; indicate paragraph where 1 specified. B. Prepare and submit a preliminary schedule within 30 days after award of contract ; resubmit when revised; submit final schedule prior to final payment. C. Schedule of products shall not be used to obtain approval of substitute products; make separate request for substitution. 3.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Provide operation and maintenance data as specified in individual product sections. 1. Provide data sufficient for operation and maintenance by owner without further assistance from the manufacturer. 2. Provide completed data at least 2 days prior to instruction of owner personnel. B. Data Required For Products - General: 1. Name of manufacturer and product. 2. Name, address, and telephone number of subcontractor or supplier. 3. Local source of replacements. 4. Local source of replaceable parts and supplies. C. Product Data: Where product data is specified for inclusion in operation and maintenance data, i provide manufacturer's data sheets marked to indicate specific product and product options l actually installed; delete inapplicable data. D. Project Record Documents: Provide an additional copy of applicable record documents for inclusion with the operation and maintenance data. j" E. Coordination Drawings: When coordination drawings are prepared, include a copy with the (( operating and maintenance data. F. Custom Manufactured Products: Provide all information needed for reordering. G. Finish Materials: Manufacturer's product data, color/texture designations, and manufacturer's instructions for care, cleaning, and maintenance. H. Products Exposed to Weather and Products for Moisture Protection: Manufacturer's product data, recommended inspection schedule and procedures, maintenance and repair procedures, and maintenance materials required. 1. Equipment: Provide at least the following information: 1. Product data giving equipment and function description, with normal operating characteristics and limiting conditions. 2. Starting, operating, and troubleshooting procedures. 3. Cleaning and maintenance requirements and procedures. 4. External finish maintenance requirements. 5. List of maintenance materials required. 6. List of special tools required. 03860296/96 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600-5 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 7. Parts list: List all replaceable parts, with ordering data. 8. Recommended quantity of spare parts to be maintained in storage. J. Systems: Provide overall function description, with diagrams, prepared especially for this project. K. Form of Data: Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual 1. Arrange content logically, using section numbers and sequence of sections indicated on the table of contents of this project manual 2. When multiple volumes are used, arrange by related subjects; identify contents in cover title. 3. Assemble into 3-ring binders with maximum 2-inch ring size. a. Hardback, cleanable plastic covers. b. Identify each book with title "Operation and Maintenance Instructions" and project name. C. Page size 8-1/2 by 11 inches, maximum. d. Prepare special typewritten data on minimum 20-pound paper. e. Provide tabbed divider for each product and system. f. Drawings: Bind large -size drawings separately. 4. Provide table of contents for each volume listing: — a. Name of the project. b. Name, address, telephone number, and contact name of- 1 . Architect. 2. Contractor. C. Index of products and systems included in volume. 3.6 WARRANTIES A. Provide warranties as specified in individual product sections. B. Manufacturer Warranties: Manufacturer's standard product warranty running for the manufacturer's standard term, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Submit copies of all manufacturer warranties which extend beyond the end of the contract correction period. C. Special Project Warranties: Written warranty commencing at date of substantial completion, running for the term indicated, and signed by the entities specified. 1. Where completion of warranty item is materially delayed beyond the date of substantial completion, provide warranty commencing on date of acceptance. 2. Submit each special project warranty. D. Provide 2 notarized copies of each executed warranty. E. Show actual date of commencement on each warranty. 3.7 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Require supplier to package finished products in a manner which will protect from damage during shipping, handling, and storage. 03860296/96 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600-6 I r LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 �..., B. Transport products by methods which avoid damage. I ' C. Deliver in dry, undamaged condition in manufacturer's unopened packaging. D. Provide equipment and personnel adequate to handle products by methods which prevent damage. E. Provide additional protection during handling where necessary to prevent damage to products and packaging. F. Lift large and heavy components at designated lift points only. 3.8 DELIVERY AND RECEIVING A. Arrange deliveries of products to allow time for inspection prior to installation. B. Coordinate delivery to avoid conflict with the work and to take into account both the conditions at the site and the availability of personnel, handling equipment, and storage space. C. Clearly mark partial deliveries to identify contents, to permit easy accumulation of entire delivery, and to facilitate assembly. D. Promptly inspect shipments and remedy damage, incorrect quantity, incompleteness, improper or illegible labeling, and noncompliance with requirements of contract documents and approved submittals. 3.9 STORAGE A. No indoor storage areas are available on site. B. Off -site storage of products for which application for payment will be made: No off -site storage will be approved. C. General Storage Procedures: 1. Store products immediately on delivery. 2. Store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. 3. Store in a manner to prevent damage to the stored products and to the work. 4. Store moisture -sensitive products in weathertight enclosures. 5. Store indoors if necessary to keep temperature and humidity within ranges required by manufacturer. 6. Store unpacked and loose products on shelves, in bins, or in neat groups of like items. 7. Arrange storage to provide access for inspection and inventory. 8. Periodically inspect and remedy damage and noncompliance with required conditions. D. Loose Granular Materials: Store on solid surfaces in well -drained area; prevent mixing with foreign materials. 03860296/96 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600-7 r- i LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 — E. Exterior Storage: 1. Cover products subject to weather damage with impervious sheet covering; provide ventilation to avoid condensation. 2. Provide surface drainage to prevent runoff or ponded water from damaging stored _ products. 3. Prevent damage and contamination from refuse and chemically injurious materials and liquids. , 4. Store fabricated products on substantial platforms, blocking, or skids above the ground, sloped to drain. END OF SECTION 01600 03860296/96 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600-8 — F r i i F LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 SECTION 01700 - CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. General construction and installation procedures. 2. Correction of defective work. 3. Cleaning during construction. 4. Facility startup. 5. Project completion procedures. 6. Final extermination. 900-9268 B. Related Sections: 1. Cleaning requirements for specific products and systems: Applicable product sections in Divisions 2-16. 2. Final payment procedures: Elsewhere in Division 1. 3. General product installation requirements: Elsewhere in Division 1. 4. Removal of mock-ups: Elsewhere in Division 1. 5. Testing, adjusting, and balancing of mechanical systems: Division 15. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Concealed Spaces: Spaces which are not accessible after completion of construction. B. Cutting: Removal of material by cutting, sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation. C. Damage: Any sort of deterioration whether due to weather, normal wear and tear, accident, or abuse, resulting in soiling, marring, breakage, corrosion, rotting, or impairment of function. D. Debris: Rubbish, waste materials, litter, volatile wastes, and similar materials, with the exception of surplus materials which are to become the property of the owner. E. Fire Barriers: Any wall, floor, ceiling, or roof which is indicated as having a fire resistance rating. F. Patching: Restoration to completed condition by patching, repairing, refinishing, finishing, filling, closing up, and similar operations. G. Replacement: Replace the entire element, surface, or product. H. Smoke Barriers: Any wall, floor, ceiling, or roof which is indicated as being designed to prevent passage of smoke and gases; may be indicated as "smoke barrier," "smoke partitions," "smoke wall," or similar designation. 038602,96/96 CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES 01700-1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 — 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Startup Reports: 1. Submit within 7 days after startup of item covered by report. _ 2. Include a statement that the item has been installed properly and is functioning correctly. 3. Include the following information: a. Item started up. b. Date of startup operation. C. Entity performing startup. d. Applicable specification section. e. Results of startup. f. Signature of person performing startup. B. Field Correction Requests: Submit immediately upon discovery of deviation required; include a detailed description of the problem, recommended changes, and reasons it is not possible to comply with the contract documents. C. Certificate of Final Extermination. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Cleaning: Perform cleaning in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer or fabricator of the product or system. Use only cleaning materials and tools which are -- specifically recommended, which are not hazardous to health or property, and which will not damage finishes. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Take precautions to prevent fires and to facilitate fire -fighting operations. 1. Keep flammable materials in non-combustible containers; store away from potential fire sources; remove flammable waste regularly. 2. Keep temporary and permanent fire fighting facilities readily accessible; keep fire _ fighting routes open. 3. Do not allow smoking in areas where highly combustible or explosive materials are present. 4. Carefully supervise the operation of potential fire sources, including heating units. — 5. Conduct welding operations in manner to prevent fire; comply with local regulations. B. Take precautions to prevent accidents due to physical hazards: 1. Provide barricades, warning lights, or signs as required to inform personnel and the public of the hazard being protected against. 2. Safety barricades: Comply with regulations. — 3. Provide temporary walkways where walking surfaces are hazardous. 4. Notify the owner before beginning work that involves hazardous operations, including use of explosives and the like. C. Take care to prevent pollution of air, water, and soil. 1. Comply with environmental protection regulations. 2. Limit effluent and rainwater runoff into waterways as required by regulations. 03860296/96 CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES 01700-2 — r t. r- LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 i r.. 3. Do not dump contaminants in areas that will result in contamination of waterways. D. Minimize discharge of effluent and rainwater runoff into sewers. 1. Control sediment discharge into sewers; filter out construction debris, soil, and contaminants. 2. Comply with regulations and orders of public utilities regarding use of sewers. 3. Where disposal of effluent or rainwater by means of sewers is not lawful or is not possible, provide alternative methods of disposal. E. Prevent erosion due to rainwater runoff. F. Control windblown dust; prevent erosion to site and nuisance to neighbors. G. Prevent flooding of excavations, below -grade construction, and adjacent properties due to rainwater runoff. H. Do not use tools or equipment which produce harmful levels of noise. 1. Do not use noise -making tools or equipment between 7 pm and 8 am weekdays, 7 pm to 9 am Saturdays, and all day Sunday and major hoildays. I. Keep the site and adjacent public ways free of hazardous and unsanitary conditions and public nuisances. J. Control rodents and other pests; prevent infestation of adjacent sites and buildings due to pests on this site. K. Keep public streets free of debris due to this work. L. Provide adequate traffic control by means of signs, signals, and flagmen, as necessary. M. Provide temporary means of draining roofs where required. N. Conduct construction operations so that no part of the work is subjected to damaging operations or influences which are in excess of those to be expected during normal occupancy conditions. O. Conduct construction operations so that waste of power, water, and fuel is avoided. P. Provide temporary supports as required to prevent movement and structural failure. Q. Install products only during environmental conditions which will ensure the best possible results. 1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Install products only at the time and in the sequence which will ensure the best possible results. CB. Coordinate required administrative activities with related construction activities. r r 4 03860296/96 CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES 01700-3 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 — PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Patching Materials: Identical to the materials of the work to be cut, unless indicated as specific materials specified in other sections. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL EXAMINATION REQUIREMENTS A. Prior to performing work, examine the applicable substrates and the conditions under which the work is to be performed. B. If unsafe or otherwise unsatisfactory conditions are encountered, take corrective action before proceeding. C. Conditions which could have been discovered by examination will not be allowed as cause for claims for extra work. 1. In particular, verify the following: a. Underground utilities. b. Other underground construction. C. Location and invert elevation of points of connection to piped utilities. D. Verify that utility requirements of operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. E. Verify space requirements of items which are shown diagrammatically on the drawings. — 3.2 GENERAL PREPARATION REQUIREMENTS — A. Take field measurements as required to fit the work properly. B. Recheck measurements prior to installing each product. 3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION PROCEDURES A. Accurately locate the work and components of the work; make vertical work plumb; make horizontal work level. B. See sections describing specific parts of the work for additional requirements. C. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and to maximize ease of removal for replacement. D. In finished areas, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction,unless otherwise indicated. E. Coordinate exact locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. 03860296/96 CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES 1 01700-4 r- LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 t r., F. Install work in such manner and sequence as to preclude, if possible, or at least to minimize, cutting and patching. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove debris from concealed spaces prior to enclosing the space. B. Keep the site and the work free of waste materials and debris. 1. Remove waste from site frequently enough to prevent significant accumulations of debris. 2. When temperature exceeds or is expected to exceed 80 degrees F, remove waste at frequency necessary to prevent development of health hazards and nuisance odors. 3. Keep hazardous and unsanitary materials in containers separate from other waste. C. Clean areas in which work is to be done to level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of that work. 1. Where dust would impair execution of work, broom- and vacuum -clean the entire interior area and keep clean. D. Keep installed work clean, and clean again when soiled by other operations. 1. Provide periodic cleaning as required to prevent damage due to soiling. 2. Remove liquid spills promptly. E. Protect installed work from soiling and damage. 1. Provide protective coverings as required. 2. Provide protective coverings for work which may be damaged by subsequent operations. 3. Where heavy abuse is expected, use minimum of plywood for protection. 4. Maintain protective coverings until substantial completion. 3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING PROCEDURES A. Fire/Smoke Barriers: Do not cut more than absolutely necessary. 1. Cut penetration holes to sizes required for penetration seal assemblies required. 2. Patch all oversize holes and cuts made in error. 3. Perform patching in a manner which complies in all respects with the original construction; if not possible, report nature of difficulty to the architect and request instructions. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF COMPONENTS A. Install all products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, whether conveyed in writing or not. B. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, install components at mounting normally encountered for similar components. 1. Obtain the architect'S instructions for uncertain mounting heights. C. Separate incompatible materials with suitable materials or spacing. l 1. Prevent cathodic corrosion. 03860296/96 CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES 01700-5 r LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 — D. Provide all anchors and fasteners required and use methods necessary to securely fasten work. 1. Allow for thermal expansion and contraction, and for building movement. E. Joints in Exposed Work: — 1. Make joints of uniform widths. 2. Where joint locations are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. a. When in doubt, obtain the architect's instructions. F. After installation, adjust operating components to proper operation. 3.7 PROCEDURES FOR CORRECTION OF WORK — A. The following must be replaced (repair is not acceptable): 1. Damaged surfaces exposed to view which cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair. 2. Components which cannot be repaired to proper operating condition. 3. Chipped and broken glass. -- 4. Scratched transparent materials. 5. Scratched reflective surfaces. B. Repair or Replace: 1. Components which do not operate properly. 2. Surfaces exposed to view which cannot be cleaned to original condition. .- 3. Permanent facilities used during construction. 4. Other defective work. C. Acceptable Repair Methods: 1. Replacing parts. 2. Refinishing. — 3. Touching up with matching materials. 4. Proper adjustment of equipment. D. When it is necessary to deviate from the contract documents in order to accomplish corrective — action, submit a field correction request. E. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. "- 3.8 FACILITY STARTUP A. Put each item of equipment and each system into full, satisfactory operation. B. Prior to Startup: -- 1. Verify that equipment and systems are complete, correctly connected to utilities, and tested. a. Comply with requirements of manufacturer. 2. Inspect and test as required to ensure that work is installed as specified and to determine suitability for energizing. 3. Provide power and fuel for startup and testing. 4. Change over from temporary to permanent utility sources. 03860296196 CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES 01700-6 i LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 r., 5. Re -adjust and lubricate operating components as required to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. a. Check drive rotations, belt tension, control sequences, and other features which might cause damage if not properly adjusted. 6. When required by manufacturer, have manufacturer's representative prepare for startup or supervise such preparation. rC. Execute startup under supervision of responsible personnel in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. I. When required by manufacturer, have manufacturer's representative perform startup. 2. Submit a written report of startup operation. i D. After startup, adjust equipment and systems as required for proper operation. r" 1. Where specified, perform tests or inspections to determine status of operation. E. Demonstrate the operation and maintenance of equipment and systems to personnel designated by the owner, prior to substantial completion. 1. Have final operating and maintenance data available during demonstration. F. For equipment and systems which have different operation at different seasons, demonstrate operation during subsequent seasons until fully demonstrated. 3.9 FINAL CLEANING A. Dispose of debris in a lawful manner. 1. Do not bum or bury debris on the site. 2. Do not dispose of volatile wastes in storm or sanitary drains. 3.10 PROJECT COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Complete the work, prior to substantial completion, as required to obtain consent to occupancy from the governing authorities. B. Arrange for final inspections by governing authorities to be accomplished prior to substantial completion. 1. Obtain certificate of occupancy. C. If temporary locking systems differ from permanent locking systems, change over to permanent systems prior to substantial completion. D. Final Extermination: Engage a licensed exterminator to make final inspection and rid the project of rodents, insects, and other pests. E. Upon request of the contractor, the owner will perform inspection for substantial completion. 1. No partial certificates of substantial completion will be issued. I r END OF SECTION 01700 03860296/96 CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES 01700-7 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 SECTION 01800 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Project record documents consisting of: a. Record drawings. b. Record project manual (specifications). C. Record submittals: 1. Shop drawings. 2. Product data. 3. Samples. 2. Exceptions: The following are not required as project record documents: a. Informational submittals. b. Manufacturers' and installers' qualification statements. C. Test Reports. B. Related Sections: 1. Operation and maintenance data: Elsewhere in Division 1. 2. Warranties: Elsewhere in Division 1. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Submit after substantial completion, but prior to final completion. 1. Record drawings: Submit in form of reverse sepia reproducibles. a. Submit original marked -up print set. b. Sets shall include all drawings, whether changed or not. 2. Other record documents: Submit originals or good quality photocopies. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MAINTENANCE OF PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Do not use record documents of any type for construction purposes. B. Maintain record documents in a secure location at the site while providing for access by the contractor and the architect during normal working hours; store in a fire -resistive room or container outside of normal working hours. C. Record information as soon as possible after it is obtained. D. Assign a person or persons responsible for maintaining record documents. E. Record the following types of information on all applicable record documents: 1. Dimensional changes. 03860296/96 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01800-1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 2. New and revised details. 3. Depths of foundations. 4. Locations and depths of underground utilities. 5. Actual routings of piping and conduits. 6. Revisions to electrical circuits. 7. Actual equipment locations. 8. Sizes and routings of ducts. 9. Locations of utilities concealed in construction. 10. Particulars on concealed products which will not be easy to identify later. 11. Changes made by modifications to the contract; note identification numbers if applicable. 12. New information which may be useful to the owner, but which was not shown in either the contract documents or submittals. 3.2 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Maintain a complete set of opaque prints of the contract drawings, marked to show changes. B. Where the actual work differs from that shown on the drawings, mark this set to show the actual work. 1. Mark location of concealed items before they are covered by other work. 2. Mark either record contract drawings or shop drawings, whichever are best suited to show the change. 3. Where changes are marked on record shop drawings, mark cross-reference on the applicable contract drawing. C. When the contractor is required by a provision of a modification to prepare a new drawing, rather than to revise existing drawings, obtain instructions from the architect as to the drawing scale and information required. D. Keep drawings in labelled, bound sets. 1. Mark with red pencil. 2. Mark work of separate contracts with different colors of pencils. 3. Incorporate new drawings into existing sets, as they are issued. E. Review completed record set with the architect. F. Upon authorization by the architect, prepare a full set of transparencies of contract drawings with all record changes marked. G. The architect will furnish transparencies of original contract drawings at the cost of $20.00 (twenty dollars) per sheet. H. Where record drawings are also required as part of operation and maintenance data submittals, make copies from the original record drawing set. 3.3 RECORD PROJECT MANUAL A. Maintain a complete copy of the project manual, marked to show changes. 03860296/96 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01800-2 r- LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 B. Where the actual work differs from that shown in the project manual, mark the record copy to show the actual work. ` 1. Include a copy of each addendum and modification to the contract. 2. In addition to the types of information required on all record documents, record the following types of information: a. Proprietary name and model number of actual products furnished, for each product, material, and item of equipment specified. b. Name of the supplier and installer, for each product for which neither a product data submittal nor a maintenance data submittal was specified. 3.4 RECORD SUBMITTALS A. Maintain a complete set of all submittals made during construction, marked to show changes. 1. Maintain submittals in cardboard file boxes, labeled to show contents. 2. Sort submittals by applicable specification section and file in order of submittal identification number. B. Record Shop Drawings: Record the types of information specified for all record documents. 1. Mark changes on record shop drawings only when contract drawing would not be capable of showing the change clearly or completely. 2. Mark changes in manner specified for record drawings. C. Record Product Data Submittals: Record the types of information specified for all record documents. 1. In addition, record the following types of information: a. Changes in the products as delivered to the site. b. Changes in manufacturer's instructions or recommendations for installation. D. Record Coordination Drawings: Record the types of information required for all record documents. 1. Mark up in the manner specified for record drawings. 3.5 TRANSMITTAL TO ARCHITECT A. Collect, organize, label, and package ready for reference. 1. Provide cardboard file boxes for submittals. 2. Provide cardboard drawing tubes with end caps for transparencies. 3. Bind print sets with durable paper covers. 4. Label each document (and each sheet of drawings) with "PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS - This document has been prepared using information furnished by " [insert the contractor's name], and the date of preparation. B. Submit directly to the Architect. END OF SECTION 01800 7. r� 03860296/96 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01800-3 r LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 SECTION 02200 - EARTHWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Site clearing. 2. Earth moving and excavation. 3. Utilities trenching. 4. Grading. 5. Backfilling. 6. Compacting. 7. Subbase course for walks and pavements. B. Related Documents: Geotechnical data. 1. Geotechnical data prepared by: Terra Engineers, Inc. 2. Geotechnical data consists of the following, which is available for the contractor's inspection at the office of the architect: a. Geotechnical engineer's report. 3. Geotechnical data is not a part of the contract documents. The contractor is entitled to rely upon the factual information contained therein, such as locations and depths of tests or explorations made at the site and material encountered at each location, all as of the dates made. The contractor is not entitled to rely upon the nonfactual information contained therein such as interpretations, opinions, or extrapolations of data; nor is the contractor entitled to rely upon the completeness of the information for the contractor's purposes.. C. Related Sections: 1. Changes in the work: General Conditions. 2. Paving: Elsewhere in Division 2. 3. Concrete: Elsewhere in Division 2. 4. Concrete: Division 3. 5. Installation of underground utilities: Divisions 15 and 16. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM D 698-91 — Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)); 1991. B. ASTM D 1556-90 — Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand -Cone Method; 1990. C. ASTM D 2167-94 — Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil In -Place by the Rubber Balloon Method; 1994. ` D. ASTM D 2487-93 -- Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System); 1993. r 03860296/96 EARTHWORK 02200-1 l: LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 - E. ASTM D 2922-91 -- Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil -Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth); 1991. F. ASTM D 2940-85 -- Standard Specification for Graded Aggregate Material for Bases or ._ Subbases for Highways or Airports. G. ASTM D 3017-88(93) -- Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth); 1988 (Reapproved 1993. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Plastic marking tape. B. Test Reports: Testing laboratory shall submit the following reports directly to the architect and shall copy the contractor: 1. Analysis of soil materials, whether procured on or off site, and including fill, backfill, and borrow materials. 2. Verification of each footing subgrade. 3. In -place density test reports. 4. Moisture -density relationship test reports. 5. Gradation test reports for pavement base course aggregates. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Laboratory Services: 1. Secure and pay for the services of a qualified, independent geotechnical engineer to classify existing soil materials, to recommend and to classify proposed borrow materials when necessary, to verify compliance of materials with specified requirements, and to perform required field and laboratory testing. Geotechnical engineer shall be acceptable to the architect and the owner and shall be licensed to practice in the state in which the project is located. 1.5 SITE CONDITIONS A. Traffic: Do not interfere with or close public ways without permission of governing authorities. Do not interfere with adjacent private facilities. B. Site Utilities: 1. If underground utilities are encountered in locations other than indicated, immediately advise utility owners before proceeding. Amend project record documents to show actual locations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Where sufficient approved materials are not available from required excavations on site, obtain and pay for materials from approved sources off site without charge to the owner. — 03860296196 EARTHWORK 02200-2 a r LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 B. For each soil material proposed for use as fill or backfill, whether obtained on or off site, testing laboratory shall classify soil material, develop Proctor curve, and perform any other tests required. C. Obtain approval of the architect for each soil material. D. Topsoil: Friable clay loam surface soil. E. Satisfactory Topsoil: Fertile agricultural soil, typical for locality, capable of sustaining vigorous plant growth; free of subsoil, rocks larger than 2 inches in diameter, clay, toxic matter, plants, weeds, and roots. F. Backfill and Fill Materials: Materials classified as satisfactory. G. Satisfactory Soil Material (ASTM D 2487): Free of stones larger than 2 inches in any dimension, trash, debris, organic material, other objectionable material and the liquid limit and plasticity index shall not exceed 35 and 12 respectively. H. Aggregate Base Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand, ASTM D 2940, with at least 95 percent passing a 1-1/2 inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. r, 2.2 PLASTIC WARNING TAPE A. Acid- and alkali -resistant polyethylene film specifically manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities. s 1. Minimum width, 6 inches; minimum thickness, 4 mils. 2. Continuous printed inscription shall describe utility. Tape color: �b�ed.,^t*iGas: Yw i PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protection: Provide markers indicating limits of work and clear identification of items and areas requiring protection. r B. Provide barricades, warning signs, and warning lights around open excavations as necessary I` to prevent injury to persons. C. The contractor is solely responsible for determining the potential for injury to persons and damage to property. 1. Where such potential is present, take appropriate protective measures. r. 2. Protect persons from injury and protect existing and new improvements from damage caused directly or indirectly by construction operations. D. Do not allow excavation subgrades and soil at foundations to be subjected to freezing r temperatures or frost. Provide protective insulating materials as necessary. Should prepared, r 03860296/96 EARTHWORK 02200-3 I LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 1 900-9268 — compacted subgrades be damaged by freezing, remove soil materials to the depth required by the architect and replace and recompact in conformance with specified requirements. 3.2 CLEARING AND GRUBBING A. Remove all vegetable matter from within the site. 1. Fill holes thus created with approved, compacted soil. _ 2. Remove and dispose of grass and other vegetation before stripping topsoil. Strip topsoil down to subsoil without contaminating topsoil with subsoil. 3. Stockpile in a manner to freely drain surface water and to prevent contamination by subsoil or other materials; cover if necessary to prevent wind-blown dust. 4. After removing topsoil, scarify surface soil to a depth of 9 inches and compact to a dry density not less than 95 % of the standard maximum dry density as determined in ASTM D698. 3.3 DEWATERING A. Do not allow surface or ground water to flow into or accumulate in excavations. B. Do not allow water to flow in an uncontrolled fashion across the project site or to erode slopes or to undermine foundations. Do not allow water to be diverted onto adjacent properties. Arrange excavation operations so as to provide continual and effective drainage of excavations. C. Provide and maintain temporary diversion ditches, dikes, and grading as necessary; do not use trench excavations for this purpose. When required by surface or subsurface water conditions, provide sumps, wellpoints, French drains, pumps, and other control measures necessary to keep excavations free of water. When existence of ground water near or above final excavation level is indicated or suspected, provide control measures prior to excavating to water level and maintain water level continuously below working level. — 3.4 EXCAVATION A. General: Excavation includes the removal of any materials necessary to achieve the required subgrade elevations and includes reuse or disposal of such materials. B. Unnecessary Excavation: The expense of excavation of materials outside of limits indicated or ordered in writing by the architect and the correction thereof to the satisfaction of the architect shall be borne by the contractor. 1. Unnecessary excavation under footings: Either deepen footings to bear on actual subgrade elevation without changing top elevations or place concrete fill up to required elevation, as required by the architect. 2. Unnecessary excavation other than under footings: Either place compacted fill or ` otherwise correct conditions, as required by the architect. C. Approval of Subgrade: Notify the architect when required elevations have been reached. 1. When required by the architect due to the unforeseen presence of unsatisfactory materials or other factors, perform additional excavation and replace with approved compacted fill material in accordance with the architect's instructions. — 03860296196 EARTHWORK 02200-4 - r r r e. r-� LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 2. Payment for unforeseen additional work will be made in accordance with established unit prices or, if none, in accordance with provisions for changes in the work. No payment will be made for correction of subgrades improperly protected against damage from freeze haw or accumulation of water, or for correction of otherwise defective subgrades. D. Excavation Stabilization: Wherever it is possible to slope faces of excavations to achieve stabilization, do so in compliance with requirements of governing authorities. Otherwise, provide shoring and bracing. 1. Design, provide, maintain, and remove shoring and bracing in compliance with requirements of governing authorities. Remove temporary shoring and bracing when stabilization is no longer required. E. Excavation for Structures: 1. Excavate beyond footings and foundations so as to allow proper construction and inspection of concrete formwork and other materials. Excavate to the required elevation. a. Tolerance: Plus or minus 0.10 foot. F. Excavation for Footings and Foundations: 1. Delay excavation to final grade and final compaction until just before concrete will be placed. 2. Remove any loose or sloughed material and adjust excavations to conform to required lines, grades, and tolerances and to form a suitable bearing surface. Do not disturb bottom of completed excavations. G. Excavation for Trenches: 1. Unless otherwise required, begin trenching, utility installation, and backfilling at lowest portion of utility line, working toward highest portion of line. 2. Required trench width: Excavate accurately to provide not less than 6 nor more than 9 inches of clearance on each side of pipes and conduits, unless otherwise indicated. a. Where indicated trench widths are exceeded, redesign, stronger pipe, or special installation procedures may be required by the architect at no additional cost to the owner. 3. Unless otherwise indicated, trench walls for piping shall be vertical from trench bottom to one foot above top of pipe or to top elevation of initial backfill, whichever is higher. 4. Excavate trenches to the depths necessary to achieve required flow lines and invert elevations and to prevent freezing of liquids or frost heave during winter. S. Dig trenches to depths indicated. 6. Trench bottoms: Unless otherwise indicated, excavate and shape trench bottoms as follows: a. Support pipes and conduit up to S inches diameter on smooth, accurately graded subgrade. Shape surface by hand to provide continuous support on undisturbed soil for bell and body of pipe and joints, fittings, and body of conduit. b. Support pipes and conduit 6 or more inches diameter on 4 inches of approved subbase material. Place and carefully compact additional layer of subbase material of depth required to support pipe haunches. Shape surface to provide continuous support for bell and body of pipe and joints, fittings, and body of conduit. H. Excavation for Walks and Pavements: Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated cross -sections, elevations and grades. 03860296196 EARTHWORK 02200-5 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 3.5 STORAGE 900-9268 — A. Stockpile materials to be used for filling and backfilling, including excavated materials classified as satisfactory soil materials, at locations indicated or as directed. Stockpile in a manner to freely drain surface water; cover if necessary to prevent wind-blown dust. 1. Store soil materials without intermixing. Protect from contamination with other soils or debris. 3.6 PLASTIC WARNING TAPE A. Install tape directly above utilities, 4 to 6 inches below finished grade. 3.7 FILLING AND BACKFILLING Preparation: Backfill excavations as soon as practicable. Complete the following operations before backfilling: 1. Inspection and acceptance of below -grade construction. 2. Inspection, testing, and approval of underground utilities. 3. Surveying of underground utilities for record documents. 4. Concrete formwork removal. 5. Removal of loose material, muck, debris, and trash from excavation. 6. Installation of temporary or permanent horizontal bracing for structures to receive backfill. A. B. Remove temporary shoring and bracing as the work progresses and when its use is no longer necessary. 1. Backfilling near footings, general: Where trenches occur underneath of footings, or where trench bottoms occur below and within 18 inches horizontally of footing bottoms, backfill trench with concrete to top of footing and up to 4 feet perpendicularly from each face of footing. C. Installation: Place approved soil materials in layers to required elevations. 1. Do not place material on muddy or frozen surfaces or on surfaces containing frost. D. Installation: Place fill materials to required elevations in lifts of required depth. Provide fill materials beneath each area as indicated. 1. Planted areas: Satisfactory soil materials with 9 inch depth of topsoil. 2. Building slabs: Satisfactory soil materials. 3. Piping/conduit: Subbase material where indicated; otherwise use satisfactory soil materials. 4. Walks/pavements: Use base material or satisfactory excavated or borrow soil material. 3.8 BUILDING SLAB AREAS A. Place fill or backfill lifts such that compaction true to grade and level is accomplished with a minimum of surface disturbance and segregation or degradation of materials. Maintain grade control and cross section by means of line and grade stakes. Maintain moisture content within prescribed limits during placing and compacting. 03860296/96 EARTHWORK 02200-6 9 r. LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 B. When the total thickness of materials to be placed is less than the maximum lift thickness permitted, place material in a single lift. When the total thickness of materials to be placed is greater than the maximum lift thickness permitted, place materials in two or more lifts of uniform thickness with no lift less than 3 inches in thickness. 3.9 COMPACTION A. Place materials used in backfilling and filling in layers not exceeding loose depths as follows: 1. Heavy equipment compaction: 8 inches. 2. Hand -operated tampers: 4 inches. B. Place material simultaneously on opposite sides of walls, small structures, utility lines, etc. to avoid displacement or overstressing. C. In -Place Density Requirements:Compact soil to not less than the values given below, expressed as a percentage of maximum density at optimum moisture content. 1. Unpaved areas: Top 6 inches of subgrade and subsequent lifts: a. 85 percent. 2. Building slabs and structures: Top 12 _inches of subgrade and subsequent lifts: a. 95 percent. 3. Utility trenches: Compact backfill and fill materials to in -place density specified for applicable area of trench, but in no case less than 90 percent. 4. Paved areas: Base course materials: a. 95 percent. D. Moisture Control: During compaction, control moisture of subgrades and subsequent lifts to within tolerances from optimum moisture content as recommended by testing laboratory. Wet surface with water when additional moisture is required. Aerate soil to aid in drying or replace soil when excessive moisture is present. 3.10 GRADING A. General: Smooth grade to a uniform surface that complies with compaction requirements and required lines, grades, and cross sections and is free from irregular surface changes. B. Provide smooth transition between existing adjacent grades and changed grades. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and cut down high spots to conform to required surfaces tolerances. C. Slope grades to direct water away from structures and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrade to required elevations within the following tolerance: 1. Unpaved areas: Plus or minus 0.10 foot. 2. Inside building lines: 1/2 inch as measured with a 10-foot straightedge. 3. Paved areas: Plus or minus 1/4 inch. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Laboratory Services: Provide timely notice to testing laboratory. Do not proceed with construction until testing of each subgrade and lift of fill or backfill has been performed and required inspections and approvals have been obtained. 03860296/96 EARTHWORK 02200-7 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 B. ' Maximum Density at Optimum Moisture Content: Determine in accordance with ASTM D — 698. 1. For each subgrade, fill, and backfill material, perform one moisture -density relationship test for each 1500 cubic yards, or fraction thereof, of material used. C. In -Place Density Tests: ASTM D 1556 (sand cone method), ASTM D 2167 (rubber balloon method), or ASTM D 2922 (nuclear method), as applicable. _ 1. When ASTM D 2922 is used, check and adjust calibration curves using ASTM D 1556 only. ASTM D 3017 shall be performed to measure water content of soil at the time in -place density tests are conducted. Calibrate density and moisture gages at the start of testing on each type of material encountered and at intervals as directed. D. Areas under Slabs and Pavements: Conduct not less than one in -place density test of subgrade and one in place density test of each compacted fill or backfill layer for every 2000 square feet of overlying paved area, but in no case less than 3 tests per lift. E. Foundation Wall Backfill: Conduct not less than 2 in -place density tests per lift. F. Trench Backfill: ConducL uZ 1g&ilhan-iulace density tests per lift per trench. G. If testing service reports indicate that subgrade or fills are below specified density, scarify or remove and replace to the required depth, recompact, and retest at no cost to the owner. 3.12 MAINTENANCE A. Completed Areas: Protect from damage by pedestrian or vehicular traffic, freezing, erosion, and contamination with foreign materials. 1. Repair and re-establish grades to specified tolerances in settled, eroded, or rutted areas. B. Damaged Areas: Where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or lose compaction and whether due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions, restore materials to required conditions: Scarify or remove and replace to the required depth, return to optimum moisture content, and compact materials to the required density before continuing construction. C. Correction: Should settling occur within the project correction period, remove finished surfacing, add additional approved material, compact material, and reconstruct surfacing. Construct surfacing to match and blend in with adjacent surfacing as nearly as practicable. 3.13 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Properly dispose of any excess or unsatisfactory topsoil off site. - B. Remove any material not required for use on the project (including unsatisfactory soil, excess satisfactory soil, trash, and debris) and legally dispose of it off the owner's property. C. On -site burning is not permitted. END OF SECTION 02200 03860296196 EARTHWORK 02200-8 r LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 SECTION 02280 - SOIL TREATMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY 900-9268 A. Section Includes: 1. Subterranean termite prevention treatment of soil areas scheduled to receive new construction. 2. Subterranean termite prevention treatment of new construction in progress. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Title 7, United States Code 136 through 136y -- Federal Insecticide, Fungicide, and Rodenticide Act as amended; 1947 (Revised 1988). 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit product label or accompanying labeling in accordance with the Federal Insecticide, Fungicide, and Rodenticide Act. B. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Certificates: Evidence of installer's authorization to apply products under applicable state and local law. 2. Manufacturer's instructions: Submit manufacturer's directions for use. C. Contract Closeout Submittals: 1. Project record documents: a. Submit a certificate signed by installer and contractor stating that treatment has been applied in accordance with applicable governing regulations and in accordance with this specification. b. Incorporate into the certificate or attach thereto a plan drawing indicating actual application locations and, for each location, noting methods and rates of application and including typical sections or details where necessary for clarity. 2. Warranty. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: 1. Licensed to install specified products in the state in which the project is located and in the local jurisdiction. 2. Comply with applicable pesticide regulations of the state in which the project is located. a. Comply with applicable local pesticide regulations. 191"" ;_I:47:lIIt, irr�l A. Special Warranty: 1. Submit installer's warranty against infestation of treated areas. r, 03860296/96 SOIL TREATMENT 02280-1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 2. Warranty shall not reduce or otherwise limit any other rights to correction which the -L owner may have under the contract documents. B. Correction during the warranty period shall include not less that the following: .- 1. Retreatment of areas in which evidence of infestation is discovered. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 TERMTTICIDE A. Registered with the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) for use as a termiticide under conditions of use prevailing at the project site. B. Registered with the applicable authorities in the state in which the project is located and with local governing authorities, as applicable for use as a termiticide under conditions of use prevailing at the project site. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Apply termiticide in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Apply termiticide at the maximum recommended application rates for the respective areas to be treated and methods of treatment used. C. Treat the entire structure. Do not leave any portion untreated. D. Schedule treatment of new construction to occur when treatment may be applied directly to the soils and surfaces to be treated, and prior to their concealment with subsequent construction. 3.2 CLEANING A. Do not allow contamination of surfaces not intended to be treated. Follow manufacturer's instructions to completely remove chemical from surfaces should contamination occur. B. Remove from beneath the structure any cellulosic material, wood that is not pressure -preservative treated, and debris. Do not allow non -pressure -preservative treated wood _ to contact with or remain proximate to soil. END OF SECTION 02280 03860296/96 SOIL TREATMENT 02280-2 t , i LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 r SECTION 02520 - PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: T 1. Formwork for pavements. 2. Formwork accessories. 3. Form stripping. r ` 4. Reinforcing steel for pavements. 5. Cast -in -place concrete for pavements. 6. Concrete curing. 7. Striping. B. Related Sections: 1. Earthwork: Elsewhere in Division 2. t 2. Cast -in -place concrete for structures: Division 3. 3. Joint sealers: Division 7. f 1.2 REFERENCES �.. A. AASHTO M 182-91I — Standard Specification for Burlap Cloth Made from Jute or Kenaf; American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials; 1991. t I B. ACI 201.2R-92 — Guide to Durable Concrete; American Concrete Institute; 1992. ` C. ACI 211.1-91 — Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete; American Concrete Institute; 1991. r D. ACI 301-89 — Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute; 1989. E. ACI 302AR-89 — Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; American Concrete Institute; 1989. w F. ACI 304R-89 — Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; American Concrete Institute; 1989. C" G. ACI 305R-91 — Hot Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute; 1991. +" I H. ACI 306R-88 — Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute; 1988. I. ASTM A 185-90a — Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete r- Reinforcement; 1990. J. ASTM A 615-92 — Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 1992. 03860296/96 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520-1 i LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 K. ASTM C 31-91 —Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the -- Field; 1991. L. ASTM C 33-92 -- Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 1992. M. ASTM C 39-93a— Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens; 1993. N. ASTM C 42-90 — Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete; 1990. O. ASTM C 94-92a -- Standard Specification for Ready -Mixed Concrete; 1992. P. ASTM C 143-90a — Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete; 1990. Q. ASTM C 150-94 -- Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 1994. R. ASTM C 171-92 — Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete; 1992. S. ASTM C 172-90 — Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete; 1990. T. ASTM C 173-78 — Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method; 1978. U. ASTM C 231-91b -- Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method; 1991. V. ASTM C 260-94 — Standard Specification for Air -Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 1994. W. ASTM C 309-93 — Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane -Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete; 1993. X. ASTM C 494-92 — Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 1992. — Y. ASTM C 618-94a — Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete; 1994. Z. ASTM D 1751-83(91) — Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types); y 1983 (Reapproved 1991). AA. ASTM E 329-93b — Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction; 1993. BB. CRSI MSP-1-90 — Manual of Standard Practice; Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; 1990. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for the following: 03860296/96 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520-2 =' LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 1. Concrete admixtures. 2. Curing compound. B. Quality Control Submittals: Submit the following information related to quality assurance requirements specified: 1. Design data: Submit proposed mix designs and test data before concrete operations begin. Identify for each mix submitted the method by which proportions have been selected. a. For mix designs based on field experience, include individual strength test results, standard deviation, and required average compressive strength f(cr) calculations. b. For mix designs based on trial mixtures, include trial mix proportions, test results, and graphical analysis and show required average compressive strength f(cr). C. Indicate quantity of each ingredient per cubic yard of concrete. d. Indicate type and quantity of admixtures proposed or required. 2. Test reports: Submit laboratory test reports for all testing specified. 3. Certifications: Submit affidavits from an independent testing agency certifying that all materials furnished under this section conform to specifications. 4. Certifications: Provide certification from manufacturers of concrete admixtures that chloride content complies with specified requirements. 5. Delivery tickets: Submit copies of delivery tickets complying with ASTM C 94 for each load of concrete delivered to site. 6. Cold weather concreting: Submit description. of planned protective measures. 7. Hot weather concreting: Submit description of planned protective measures. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Services: 1. Employ, at contractor's expense, an independent testing agency acceptable to the architect to perform specified tests and other services required for quality assurance. a. Testing agency shall meet ASTM E 329 requirements. B. Source of Materials: Obtain materials of each type from same source for the entire project. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver reinforcement to project site bundled and tagged with metal tags indicating bar size, lengths, and other data corresponding to information shown on placement drawings. 1. Store concrete reinforcement materials at the site to prevent damage and accumulation of dirt or rust. B. Store cementitious materials in a dry, weathertight location. Maintain accurate records of shipment and use. C. Store aggregates to permit free drainage and to avoid contamination with deleterious matter or other aggregates. When stockpiled on ground, discard bottom 6 inches of pile. D. Handle aggregates to avoid segregation. r 03860296/96 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520-3 e , LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS 900-9268 %_ A. Cold -Weather Concreting: Comply fully with the recommendations of ACI 306. 1. Well in advance of proposed concreting operations, advise the architect of planned protective measures including but not limited to heating of materials, heated enclosures, and insulating blankets. B. Hot -Weather Concreting: Comply fully with the recommendations of ACI 305R. 1. Well in advance of proposed concreting operations, advise the architect of planned protective measures including but not limited to cooling of materials before or during r mixing, placement during evening to dawn hours, fogging during finishing and curing, shading, and windbreaks. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORMWORK A. Pavement Forms: Standard steel paving forms in sections not less than 10 feet in length. 1. Single piece; depth equal to slab thickness. 2. Base width at least three -fourths of form depth but not less than 8 inches, unless '- otherwise approved. 3. Straightness tolerance: 1/8 inch in 10 feet from true plane surface along top; 1/4 inch in 10 feet along face. — 4. Locking provisions at ends of abutting form sections. 5. Wood forms complying with the above provisions, including base and locking, may be used only where form of less than 10 feet is required. .- 6. Wet screeds will not be permitted. 2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars: Provide deformed bars complying with the following, except where otherwise indicated: 1. ASTM A 615, Grade 60. B. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, cold -drawn steel, plain. C. Reinforcing Accessories: 1. Tie wire: Black annealed type, 16-1/2 gage or heavier. ` 2. Supports: Bar supports conforming to specifications of CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice." a. Precast concrete blocks of strength equal to or greater than specified strength of concrete or Class 3 supports equipped with sand plates, where concrete will be cast against earth. Concrete masonry units will not be accepted. D. Load Transfer. Devices: 1. Dowels: Plain round or deformed bars, as shown on the drawings. Provide corrosion inhibitor on unbonded end. a. Metal expansion caps: Designed to provide not less than 1 inch of bar movement. 03860296/96 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520-4 -- LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 e� 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, and as follows: ,r. 1. Type I, except where other type is specifically permitted or required. 2. Type I. B. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Type C or F. C. Water: Potable. D. Aggregates: L Normal weight concrete: ASTM C 33. a. Class 2M. 2. Maximum size of coarse aggregates: One-third of depth of pavements. E. Admixtures - General: Admixtures which result in more than 0.1 percent of soluble chloride ions by weight of cement are prohibited. F. Air Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260 and certified by manufacturer for compatibility with other mix components. G. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. H. Water -Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D. I. Water -Reducing and Accelerating Admixtures: ASTM C 494, Type E. J. High -Range Water -Reducing Admixture (Superplasticizer): ASTM C 494, Type F or G. K. Traffic Paint: Alkyd -Resin ready -mixed, complying with AASHTO M248, Type S, white color. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES A. Burlap: AASHTO M 182, Class 2 jute or kenaf cloth. B. Moisture -Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, and as follows: 1. Curing paper. 2. Polyethylene film. 3. White burlap polyethylene sheeting. a C. Liquid Curing Compounds: 1. Curing compounds: Liquid membrane -forming curing compounds complying with l ASTM C 309, Type 1. r. 2. Solvents: Provide water -based products. D. Expansion Joint Filler: 1. Nonextruding bituminous type: ASTM D 1751. 03860296/96 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520-5 a LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 2.5 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN 0 900-9268 A. Required Average Strength: Establish the required average strength f(cr) of the design mix on the basis of trial mixtures as specified in ACI 211, and proportion mixes accordingly. Employ an independent testing agency acceptable to the architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix design. B. Specified compressive strength f (c) at 28 days: 3,500 psi. C. Fly Ash: 1. The contractor may elect to replace a portion of the portland cement with fly ash up to a maximum percentage by weight of cement plus fly ash of 20 D. Admixtures: 1. Air -entraining admixture: Use in mixes for exterior exposed concrete unless otherwise specifically indicated. Add at rate to achieve total air content in accordance with Table 1.4.3 of ACI 201.2. For concrete not exposed to exterior, add at rate to achieve total air content between 2 percent and 4 percent. 2. Water -reducing admixture: Add as required for placement and workability. 3. Water -reducing and retarding admixture: Add as required in concrete mixes to be placed at ambient temperatures above 90 degrees F. 4. Water -reducing and accelerating admixture: Add as required in concrete mixes to be placed at ambient temperatures below 50 degrees F. 5. High -range water -reducing admixture (superplasticizer): Add as required for placement and workability. 6. Do not use admixtures not specified or approved. E. Mix Adjustments: Provided that no additional expense to owner is involved, contractor may submit for architect's approval requests for adjustment to approved concrete mixes when circumstances such as changed project conditions, weather, or unfavorable test results occur. Include laboratory test data substantiating specified properties with mix adjustment requests. 2.6 CONTROL OF MIX IN THE FIELD A. Slump: A tolerance of up to 1 inch above approved design mix slump will be permitted for 1 batch in 5 consecutive batches tested. Concrete of lower slump than that specified may be used, provided proper placing and consolidation is obtained. B. Total Air Content: A tolerance of plus or minus 1-1/2 percent of approved design mix air content will be allowed for field measurements. C. Do not use batches that exceed tolerances. 2.7 CONCRETE MIXING A. Transit Mixers: Mix concrete materials in transit mixers, complying with requirements of ASTM C 94. 1. At ambient temperatures of 85 to 90 degrees F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 75 minutes. 03860296/96 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520-6 C_ A 1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 f- 2. At ambient temperatures above 90 degrees F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 - EXECUTION m ` 3.1 CONCRETE FORM PREPARATION A. General: Comply with requirements of ACI 301 for formwork, and as herein specified. The contractor is responsible for design, engineering, and construction of formwork, and for its timely removal. B. Construction: Construct and brace formwork to accurately achieve end results required by concrete documents, properly located and accurately aligned. Provide for screeds, bulkheads, r^ anchorages, and other features shown or otherwise required. C. Release Agent: Provide field -applied form coating. Thoroughly clean and recondition formwork and reapply coating before each use. 3.2 PLACING REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with requirements of ACI 301 and as herein specified. B. Preparation: Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, soil, and other materials which adversely affect bond with concrete. C. Placement: Place reinforcement to achieve not less than minimum concrete coverages required for protection. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Provide Class C tension lap splices complying with ACI 318 unless otherwise indicated. Do not field -bend partially embedded bars unless otherwise indicated or approved. 1. Use approved bar supports and tie wire, as required. Set wire ties to avoid contact with or penetration of exposed concrete surfaces. Tack welding of reinforcing is not permitted. 2. Wire fabric: Install in maximum lengths possible, lapping adjoining pieces not less than one full mesh. Offset end laps to prevent continuous laps in either direction, and splice laps with tie wire. D. Welding: Welding of reinforcement is not permitted. 3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. General: Provide joints of the types and in the locations shown on the drawings. 1. Construct joints in adjacent panels in precise alignment. Do not offset joints. 2. Tool slab edges and formed joints with 1/8-inch radius jointing tool. �.•. B. Expansion Joints: 1. Provide positive, firm support of filler during placement of concrete to ensure accurate alignment. 2. Install expansion joint filler to the full concrete depth. f i �,. 03860296/96 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520-7 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 3. Recess top edge of filler to the depth indicated to accommodate joint sealant. Protect top edge of filler with removable metal channel while concrete is being placed, or provide filler with removable portion of the required depth. 4. Where dowels are used, punch or drill filler to exact dowel diameter, spacing, and depth. C. Load Transfer Devices: 1. Apply a thin brush coat of approved lubricant to free end of dowels immediately before concrete placement. 2. Place at right angles to joints, in precise horizontal and vertical alignment and spacing, and firmly supported against movement during placing of concrete. D. Sawn Contraction Joints: 1. Use only wet saws of an approved type. 2. Time sawing to occur before cracking occurs but after concrete has hardened sufficiently to avoid rough joint surfaces. 3.` Saw to one-fourth of slab depth. 4. Extend saw cut to full width of concrete section, including adjacent curbs and gutters, if any. 3.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Preparation: Provide materials necessary to ensure adequate protection of concrete during inclement weather before beginning installation of concrete. B. Inspection: Before beginning concrete placement, inspect formwork, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded, verifying that all such work has been completed. C. Placement - General: Comply with requirements of ACI 304 and as follows: 1. Schedule continuous placement of concrete to prevent the formation of cold joints. 2. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide keyed construction joints with tie bars of size and spacing as approved by the architect. 3. Deposit concrete as close as possible to its final location, to avoid segregation. D. Slab Placement: Schedule continuous placement and consolidation of concrete within planned construction joints. 1. Thoroughly consolidate concrete without displacing reinforcement or embedded items, using internal vibrators, vibrating screeds, roller pipe screeds, or other means acceptable to architect. E. Cold Weather Placement: Comply with recommendations of ACI 306 when air temperatures are expected to drop below 40 degrees F either during concrete placement operations or before concrete has cured. 1. Do not use frozen or ice -laden materials. 2. Do not place concrete on frozen substrates. I- F. Hot Weather Placement: Comply with recommendations of ACI 305R when ambient temperature before, during, or after concrete placement is expected to exceed 90 degrees F or when combinations of high air temperature, low relative humidity, and wind speed are such that `^ 03860296/96 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520-8 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 the rate of evaporation from freshly poured concrete would otherwise exceed 0.2 pounds per square foot per hour. 1. Do not add water to approved concrete mixes under hot weather conditions. 2. Provide mixing water at lowest feasible temperature, and provide adequate protection of poured concrete to reduce rate of evaporation. 3. Use fog nozzle to cool formwork and reinforcing steel immediately prior to placing concrete. 3.5 FINISHING PAVEMENTS A. Finishing Operations - General: 1. Do not directly apply water to slab surface or dust with cement. 2. Use hand or powered equipment only as recommended in ACI 302.1R. 3. Screeding: Strikeoff to required grade and within surface tolerances indicated. Verify conformance to surface tolerances. Correct deficiencies while concrete is still plastic. 4. Bull Floating: Immediately following screeding, bull float or darby before bleed water appears to eliminate ridges, fill in voids, and embed coarse aggregate. Recheck and correct surface tolerances. 5. Do not perform subsequent finishing until excess moisture or bleed water has disappeared and concrete will support either foot pressure with less than 1/4-inch indentation or weight of power floats without damaging flatness. 6. Final floating: Float to embed coarse aggregate, to eliminate ridges, to compact concrete, to consolidate mortar at surface, and to achieve uniform, sandy texture. Recheck and correct surface tolerances. B. Float Finish: As specified above. C. Slab Surface Tolerances: 1. Achieve flat, level planes except where grades are indicated. Slope uniformly to drains. 2. Flatness tolerance: Maximum depression between high spots when treasured by placing a 10-foot straightedge on surface at any orientation: 1/4 inch. D. Repair of Slab Surfaces: Test slab surfaces for smoothness and to verify surface plane to tolerance specified. Repair defects as follows: 1. High areas: Correct by grinding after concrete has cured for not less than 14 days. 2. Low areas: Immediately after completion of surface finishing operations, cut out low areas and replace with fresh concrete. Finish repaired areas to blend with adjacent concrete. Proprietary patching compounds may be used when approved by the architect. 3.6 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION A. General: w 1. Prevent premature drying of freshly placed concrete, and protect from excessively cold or hot temperatures until concrete has cured. �•► 2. Provide curing of concrete by one of the methods listed and as appropriate to service j conditions and type of applied finish in each case. B. Curing Period: 1. Not less than 7 days for standard cements and mixes. �,,,, 03860296/96 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520-9 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 C. Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms: 1. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared, but before surface is dry. 2. Keep continuously moist for not less than 3 days by uninterrupted use of any of the following: a. Water ponding. b. Water -saturated sand. C. Water -fog spray. -� d. Saturated burlap: Provide 4-inch minimum overlap at joints. 3. Begin final curing procedures immediately following initial curing and before concrete has dried. a. Moisture -retaining cover: Lap not less than 3 inches at edges and ends, and seal with waterproof tape or adhesive. Repair holes or tears during curing period with same tape or adhesive. Maintain covering in intimate contact with concrete surface. Secure to avoid displacement. 1. Extend covering past slab edges at least twice the thickness of slab. 2. Do not use plastic sheeting on surfaces which will be exposed to view when in service. b. Curing compound: Apply at rate stated by manufacturer to conform with moisture -retention requirements specified, using second, immediate application at right angles to first, if necessary, and reapply if damaged by rain. �A 4. Continue final curing to end of curing period. D. Avoid rapid drying at end of curing period. E. Ensure that joints and slab edges receive adequate curing. 1. Ensure that sawn joints receive adequate curing after sawing. 2. Where joints subsequently will be sealed, do not apply curing compounds unless joint faces will be sandblasted free of compound. F. During and following curing period, protect concrete from temperature changes of adjacent air in excess of 5 degrees F per hour and 50 degrees F per 24 hours. Progressively adjust protective measures to provide uniform temperature changes over entire concrete surface. 3.7 REMOVAL OF FORMS AND SUPPORTS A. Provided that concrete has hardened sufficiently that it will not be damaged, forms may be removed after concrete has cured at not less than 50 degrees F for 8 hours. Maintain curing and protection operations after form removal. 3.8 TRAFFIC PAINT A. Apply traffic paint for striping and other markings with mechanical equipment to produce uniform straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a 15 mil wet film thickness. 3.9 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Composite Sampling, and Making and Curing of Specimens: ASTM C 172 and ASTM C 31. 1. Take samples at point of discharge. = 03860296/96 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520-10 ro r LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 2. For pumped concrete, perform sampling and testing at the frequencies specified herein at point of delivery to pump, and perform additional sampling and testing at the same frequency at discharge from line. Results obtained at discharge from line shall be used for acceptance of concrete. B. Slump: ASTM C 143. One test per strength test and additional tests if concrete consistency changes. 1. Modify sampling to comply with ASTM C 94. C. Air Content of Normal Weight Concrete: ASTM C 173 or ASTM C 231. One test per strength test performed on air -entrained concrete. D. Concrete Temperature: 1. Test hourly when air temperature is 40 degrees F or below. r 2. Test hourly when air temperature is 90 degrees F or above. 3. Test each time a set of strength test specimens is made. E. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39. 1. Compression test specimens: Mold and cure one set of 4 standard cylinders for each compressive strength test required. 2. Testing for acceptance of potential strength of as -delivered concrete: a. Obtain samples on a statistically sound, random basis. b. Minimum frequency: 1 1. One set per 100 cubic yards or fraction thereof for each day's pour of each concrete class. 2. One set per 3500 square feet of slab area or fraction thereof for each day's i pour of each concrete class. 3. When less than 5 cubic yards is placed in one day, the architect may, at architect's option, waive laboratory testing of specimens if adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is provided. (Molding and curing of these { specimens is not waived.) 4. When the above testing frequency would provide fewer than 5 strength tests for a given class of concrete during the project, conduct testing from not less than 5 randomly selected batches, or from each batch if fewer than 5. C. Test one specimen per set at 7 days for information unless an earlier age is !' required. k d. Test 2 specimens per set for acceptance of strength potential; test at 28 days unless other age is specified. The test result shall be the average of the two specimens. " If one specimen shows evidence of improper sampling, molding, or testing, the test result shall be the result of the remaining specimen; if both show such evidence, discard the test result and inform the architect. e. Retain one specimen from each set for later testing, if required. f. Strength potential of as -delivered concrete will be considered acceptable if all of the following criteria are met: .. 1. No individual test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. 2. Not more than 10 percent of individual test results fall below specified compressive strength f (c). 03860296/96 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520-11 i 4 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 3. Average of any - 3 consecutive strength test results equals or exceeds specified compressive strength f (c). g. Evaluate construction and curingprocedures and implement corrective action when strength results for field -cured specimens are less than 85 percent of test values for companion laboratory -cured specimens. F. Test Results: Testing agency shall report test results in writing to architect and contractor within 24 hours of test. 1. Test reports shall contain the following data: a. Project name, number, and other identification. b. Name of concrete testing agency. C. Date and time of sampling. d. Concrete type and class. e. Location of concrete batch in the completed work. `- f. All information required by respective ASTM test methods. 2. Nondestructive testing devices such as impact hammer or sonoscope may be used at architect's option for assistance in determining probable concrete strength at various locations or for selecting areas to be cored, but such tests shall not be the sole basis for acceptance or rejection: 3. The testing agency shall make additional tests of in -place concrete as directed by the architect when test results indicate that specified strength and other concrete characteristics have not been attained. a. Testing agency may conduct tests of cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or tests as directed. b. Cost of additional testing shall be borne by the contractor when unacceptable concrete has been verified. 3.10 OPENING PAVEMENTS TO TRAFFIC A. Do not allow traffic, including construction traffic, on pavements until authorized. B. Pavements may be opened to traffic only after seven (7) days have elapsed after placement and pavements have developed at least 85 percent of specified final design strength. END OF SECTION 02520 r. G:- 03860296/96 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520.12 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 SECTION 02830 - CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Chain link fencing and accessories. 2. Fence gates and related hardware. 3. Gate operator. B. Related Sections: 1. Electric power for gate operators: Division 16. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 90-81(91) — Standard Test Method for Weight of Coating on Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Iron or Steel Articles; 1981 (Reapproved 1991). B. ASTM A 392-91b — Standard Specification for Zinc -Coated Steel Chain -Link Fence Fabric; 1991. C. ASTM F 567-93 — Standard Practice for Installation of Chain -Link Fence; 1993. D. ASTM F 669-92 — Standard Specification for Strength Requirements of Metal Posts and Rails for Industrial Chain Link Fence; 1992. E. ASTM F 900-94 — Standard Specification for industrial and Commercial Swing Gates; 1994. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. Indicate post sizes and thicknesses, protective coatings, fabric characteristics, and accessories. 2. Manufacturer's technical data, catalog cuts, specifications, and installation instructions for gate operator and keypad. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Showing location of fences, gates, posts and details of installation of hardware and accessories. Location of gate operator and keypad are critical and are to be approved by the Owner. 1.4 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Gates and Operators: 1. Complete and detailed operations and maintenance data for each component, including diagrams and part numbers for ordering spare or repair parts. 03860296/96 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 02830-1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 " PART 2 - PRODUCTS _ 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: 1. Galvanized steel fencing: a. Allied Tube and Conduit. b. American Security Fence Corporation. C. Anchor Fence, Inc. d. Boundary Fence & Railing Systems, Inc. 2.2 FENCING ACCESSORIES A. Material and finish of accessories shall match fence fabric, except as noted. 2.3 FENCE A. Fence Configuration: 1. Fence shall be constructed with: •� a. Barbed wire top, 3 strands, inclined arm. b. Top rail. C. Brace rails at each terminal post. d. Bottom tension wire. B. Fabric: 1. Material: Zinc -coated steel, ASTM A 392. 2. Zinc coating weight: 1.2 ounces per square foot. 3. Wire diameter: 0.148 inch (9 gage). 4. Mesh size: 2 inches. 5. Fabric width: 72 inches. C. Fence Framework: 1. Zinc coating of steel pipe (ASTM A 90): a. Interior and exterior coating: Hot -dip zinc -coated; weight of coating, 1.8 ounces per square foot of coated area, average. 2. Zinc coating of steel shapes (ASTM A 90): a. Hot -dip zinc -coated; weight of coating, 1.8 ounces per square foot. 3. Material: Except where specific requirements are indicated on the drawings, the contractor may select any framework material listed below. _ 4. Material: Conform to ASTM F 669, Light Industrial category. a. Group IA: Steel pipe. 1. Rail size: 1.660 inches outside diameter by 0.112 inch wall thickness, 1.82 _ pounds per foot. 2. Line post size: 2.375 inches outside diameter by 0.123 inch wall thickness, 2.96 pounds per foot: 3. Terminal post size: 2.875 inches outside diameter by 0.162 inch wall thickness, 4.69 pounds per foot. ~d b. Group I-C: Steel pipe, commercial standard, yield strength 50,000 psi. 03860296/96 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 02830-2 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 1. Rail size: 1.660 inches outside diameter by 0.083 inch wall thickness, 1.40 pounds per foot. 2. Line post size: 2.375 inches outside diameter by 0.095 inch wall thickness, 2.31 pounds per foot. 3. Terminal post size: 2.875 inches outside diameter by 0.110 inch wall thickness, 3.25 pounds per foot. C. Group 11: Roll -formed steel sections, commercial standard, yield strength 50,000 psi (see ASTM F 669). D. Gate Type 1 : 1. Construct gate (and gateposts) according to manufacturer's standard heavy-duty design. a. Type: Single rolling. b. Frame: Round tubular steel. C. Zinc coating of steel (ASTM A 90): Interior and exterior coating, 1.8 ounces per square foot of coated area. 2. Provide gate operator as described below. E. Gate Type 2 : 1. Comply with ASTM F 900. a. Type: Single swing. b. Frame: Round tubular steel. C. Zinc coating of steel (ASTM A 90): Interior and exterior coating, 1.8 ounces per square foot of coated area. 2. Provide gate hardware, including keeper for each leaf. F. Gate Operator 2. 3. 4. 5. General: Manufacturer's standard design and construction, suitable for gates specified. Select operator size and features according to manufacturer's published data, taking into consideration size, type, weight, and construction of gate, as well as Project conditions and specified requirements. Type: Electric motor with enclosed gear reducer and chain drive. Speed: Minimum 45 feet per minute. Features: Continuous duty without overloading or overheating. Rated by manufacturer at 30 or more complete cycles per hour. All components UL approved. Furnish disconnect switch with NEMA KS 1; Type 3R enclosure. a. Provide equipment with suitable electrical characteristics including phase, voltage, branch circuit wire size, overcurrent protection, and connection devices coordinated with Division 16. b. Self-locking. C. Weather -resistant steel enclosure protecting all operating parts. d. Automatic reversing upon obstruction during closing cycle and automatic stop upon obstruction during opening cycle. Controls: Electric and electronic programmable controls separated from motor and drive mechanism, sealed from water and insects, with space for additional optional equipment. Provide adjustable automatic closing timer and the following remote control device: a. Keypad control allowing access by typing in numeric codes. Should allow virtually unlimited number of codes. b. Photo -cell to keep fence from closing as long as an obstruction is present. 03860296/96 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES i 02830-3 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 C. Push-button inside fenced area, to permit exiting. Shield button from long -reach defeat efforts from outside the fenced area. d. Provide a manual overide switch to hold the gate open on demand. Locate switch in secure area on motor housing. -- PART 3 - EXECUTION ti 3.1 POST INSTALLATION A. Layout: 1. Space line posts at equidistant intervals not exceeding 10 feet on center measured parallel to grade. 2. Locate terminal posts at the beginning and end of each continuous length of fence, at abrupt changes in line or grade, additionally at intervals not to exceed 500 feet, and as otherwise shown on the drawings. 3. Install posts plumb and in proper alignment. 3.2 FENCE INSTALLATION A. Install posts, braces, fabric, and other components in accordance with manufacturer's f recommendations and to meet or exceed requirements of ASTM F 567. 3.3 GATE INSTALLATION A. Install gates in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, plumb, level, and secure. B. Gates shall operate freely without binding or dragging and shall be easily operable by hand. 3.4 GATE OPERATOR INSTALLATION A. Install gate operators according to manufacturer's instructions. Adjust for smooth, trouble -free operation. B. Advise and consult with the Architect to obtain the Owner's requirements for standard available programmable features or adjustable controls (such as time delays, interlocks, or safety devices), and make necessary adjustments. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Gates and Gate Operators: After repeated operation of completed installation equivalent to 3 days' use by normal traffic, readjust gates and gate operators and controls for optimum , operating condition and safety. Lubricate operating equipment and clean exposed surfaces. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Instruct the Owner's personnel on proper operation and maintenance of gate operators. END OF SECTION 02830 03860296196 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 02830-4 --� LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 SECTION 03300 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 900-9268 PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Formwork for cast -in -place concrete, with shoring, bracing, and anchorage. 2. Formwork accessories. 3. Form stripping. 4. Reinforcing steel for cast -in -place concrete. 5. Cast -in -place concrete, including concrete for the following: a. Foundations, footings. b. Slabs on grade. C. Supported slabs. 6. Concrete curing. B. Related Sections: 1. Portland cement concrete paving: Division 2. 2. Joint sealers: Division 7. 1.2 REFERENCES A. AASHTO M 182-91I — Standard Specification for Burlap Cloth Made from Jute or Kenaf, American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials; 1991. B. ACI 117-90 — Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; American Concrete Institute; 1990. C. ACI 201.2R-92 — Guide to Durable Concrete; American Concrete Institute; 1992. D. ACI 211.1-91 — Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete; American Concrete Institute; 1991. E. ACI 301-89 — Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute; 1989. F. ACI 302AR-89 — Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; American Concrete Institute; 1989. G. ACI 304R-89 - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; American Concrete Institute; 1989. H. ACI 305R-91 — Hot Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute; 1991. I. ACI 306R-88 — Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute; 1988. J. ACI 318-89 — Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete; American Concrete Institute; 1989. 003860296/96 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300-1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 '~ K. ACI SP-66-88 -- ACI Detailing Manual; American Concrete Institute; 1988. L. ASTM A 185-90a — Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement; 1990. M. ASTM A 615-92 — Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 1992. N. ASTM C 31-91 — Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field; 1991. O. ASTM C 33-92 — Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 1992. P. ASTM C 39-93a— Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens; 1993. Q. ASTM C 42-90 — Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete; 1990. R. ASTM C 94-92a — Standard Specification for Ready -Mixed Concrete; 1992. S. ASTM C 143-90a — Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete; 1990. T. ASTM C 150-94 — Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 1994. U. ASTM C 171-92 — Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete; 1992. V. ASTM C 172-90 — Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete; 1990. W. ASTM C 173-78 -- Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method; 1978. X. ASTM C 231-91b — Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method; 1991. Y. ASTM C 260-94 — Standard Specification for Air -Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 1994. Z. ASTM C 309-93 — Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane -Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete; 1993. AA. ASTM C 494-92 — Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 1992. BB. ASTM C 618-94a — Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete; 1994. CC. ASTM C 881-90 — Standard Specification for Epoxy -Resin -Base Bonding Systems for Concrete; 4990. G` f 003860296/96 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300-2 f r. LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 �-R DD. ASTM C 1059-91 — Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to Hardened Concrete; 1991. EE. ASTM C 1107-91a — Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic -Cement Grout (Nonshrink); 1991. FF. ASTM D 1751-83(91) — Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types); 1983 (Reapproved 1991). GG. ASTM E 154-88 — Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth under Concrete Slabs, on Walls, or as Ground Cover; 1988. HH. ASTM E 329-93b — Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction; 1993. II. CRSI MSP-1-90 — Manual of Standard Practice; Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; 1990. JJ. NBS PS 1-83 — Construction and Industrial Plywood; U.S. Department of Commerce/National Bureau of Standards; U.S. Government Printing Office; 1983 (Revised 1984). 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Unexposed Finish: A general -use finish, with no appearance criteria, applicable to all formed concrete concealed from view after completion of construction. B. Exposed Finish: A general use finish applicable to all formed concrete exposed to view and including surfaces which may receive a paint coating (if any). 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for the following: 1. Formwork accessories. 2. Concrete admixtures. 3. Grout. 4. Chemical hardener. 5. Curing compound. 6. Bonding compound. 7. Epoxy bonding system. B. Aggregates: Submit test reports showing compliance with specified quality and gradation. C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and placement of the following: 1. Reinforcement: Comply with ACI SP-66. Include bar schedules, diagrams of bent bars, arrangement of concrete reinforcement, and splices. a. Show stirrup spacing. r., D. Quality Control Submittals: Submit the following information related to quality assurance requirements specified: 003860296/96 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300-3 ,E LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 1. Design data: Submit proposed mix designsand test data before concrete operations begin. Identify for each mix submitted the method by which proportions have been selected. a. For mix designs based on field experience, include individual strength test results, -� standard deviation, and required average compressive strength f(cr) calculations. b. For mix designs based on trial mixtures, include trial mix proportions, test results, and graphical analysis and show required average compressive strength f(cr). C. Indicate quantity of each ingredient per cubic yard of concrete. d. Indicate type and quantity of admixtures proposed or required. 2. Test reports: Submit laboratory test reports for all testing specified. 3. Certifications: Submit affidavits from an independent testing agency certifying that all materials furnished under this section conform to specifications. 4. Certifications: Provide certification from manufacturers of concrete admixtures that V chloride content complies with specified requirements. 5. Delivery tickets: Submit copies of delivery tickets complying with ASTM C 94 for each load of concrete delivered to site. 6. Cold weather concreting: Submit description of planned protective measures. 7. Hot weather concreting: Submit description of planned protective measures. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the following documents, except where requirements of the contract documents or of governing codes and governing authorities are more stringent: 1. ACI 301. 2. ACI 318. 3. CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. B. Testing Agency Services: 1. Employ, at contractor's expense, an independent testing agency acceptable to the .— architect to perform specified tests and other services required for quality assurance. a. Testing agency shall meet ASTM E 329 requirements. C. Source of Materials: Obtain materials of each type from same source for the entire project. D. Mock -Ups: Cast mock-up of size indicated or as required to demonstrate typical joints and proposed texture and color for slabs utilizing a hardener/sealer, using specified concrete and formwork. Upon acceptance of visual qualities by the architect, maintain sample panel exposed to view for duration of concrete work. 1. Approved mock-up may be incorporated in the work, at the contractor's option. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver reinforcement to project site bundled and tagged with metal tags indicating bar size, lengths, and other data corresponding to information shown on placement drawings. 1. Store concrete reinforcement materials at the site to prevent damage and accumulation of dirt or rust. B. Store cementitious materials in a dry, weathertight location. Maintain accurate records of " shipment and use. 003860296/96 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300-4 i t LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 i �-C. Store aggregates to permit free drainage and to avoid contamination with deleterious matter or other aggregates. When stockpiled on ground, discard bottom 6 inches of pile. D. Handle aggregates to avoid segregation. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Cold -Weather Concreting: Comply fully with the recommendations of ACI 306. 1. Well in advance of proposed concreting operations, advise the architect of planned protective measures including but not limited to heating of materials, heated enclosures, and insulating blankets. B. Hot -Weather Concreting: Comply fully with the recommendations of ACI 305R. 1. Well in advance of proposed concreting operations, advise the architect of planned protective measures including but not limited to cooling of materials before or during mixing, placement during evening to dawn hours, fogging during finishing and curing, shading, and windbreaks. PART 2 - PRODUCTS N 2.1 FORMWORK A. Facing Materials: 1. Unexposed finish concrete: Any standard form materials that produce structurally sound concrete. 2. Exposed finish concrete: Materials selected to offer optimum smooth, stain -free final appearance and minimum number of joints. Provide materials with sufficient strength to resist hydrostatic head without bow or deflection in excess of allowable tolerances, and as follows: a. Overlaid plywood: PS-1 "B-B High Density Concrete Form Overlay," Class I. B. Formwork Accessories: 1. Form coating: Form release agent that will not adversely affect concrete surfaces or prevent subsequent application of concrete coatings. 2. Metal ties: Commercially manufactured types; cone snap ties, taper removable bolt, or other type which will leave no metal closer than 1-1/2 inches from surface of concrete when forms are removed, leaving not more than a 1-inch-diameter hole in concrete surface. 3. Fillets: Wood or plastic fillets for chamfered corners, in maximum lengths possible. 2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars: Provide deformed bars complying with the following, except where otherwise indicated: 1. ASTM A 615, Grade 60. B. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, cold -drawn steel, plain. 003860296/96 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300-5 b LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 >900=9268 C. Reinforcing Accessories: 1. Tie wire: Black annealed type, 16-1/2 gage or heavier. 2. Supports: Bar supports conforming to specifications of CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice." a. Class 1 (plastic protected) at all formed surfaces which will be exposed to weather. b. Class 1 (plastic protected) or, Class 2 (stainless steel protected) at all formed surfaces which will be exposed to view but not to weather. C. Precast concrete blocks of strength equal to or greater than specified strength of concrete or Class 3 supports equipped with sand plates, where concrete will be cast against earth. Concrete masonry units will not be accepted. 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, and as follows: 1. Type I. B. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Type C or F. C. Water: Potable. D. Aggregates: 1. Normal weight concrete: ASTM C 33. a. Class 2M. 2. Maximum size of coarse aggregates, whichever is least: a. One -fifth narrowest dimension between sides of forms. b. One-third of depth of slabs. C. Three -fourths of minimum clear distance between reinforcing bars or between bars and side of form. d. Columns and piers: Two-thirds of minimum clear distance between bars. E. Admixtures - General: Admixtures which result in more than 0.1 percent of soluble chloride ions by weight of cement are prohibited. F. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260 and certified by manufacturer for compatibility with other mix components. G. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. H. Water -Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D. I. Water -Reducing and Accelerating Admixtures: ASTM C 494, Type E. J. High -Range Water -Reducing Admixture (Superplasticizer): ASTM C 494, Type F or G. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES A. Vapor Retarder: Membrane for installation beneath slabs on grade, resistant to decay when tested in accordance with ASTM E 154. and as follows: 003860296/96 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE •"03300-6 P' ' LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 1. Polyethylene sheet, not less than 8 mils thick. B. Nonshrink Grout: ASTM C 1107. 1. Type: Provide nonmetallic type only. C. Chemical Hardener: Colorless, aqueous solution of fluosilicates and wetting agents for application to cured concrete for surface densification, where scheduled in the drawings. 1. Products: The following products, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. "Lapidolith"; Sonneborn Building Products Division/ChemRex, Inc. D. Burlap: AASHTO M 182, Class 2 jute or kenaf cloth. E. Moisture -Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, and as follows: 1. Curing paper. 2. Polyethylene film. 3. White burlap -polyethylene sheeting. F. Liquid Curing Compounds: 1. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. Sonneborn Building Products Division/ChemRex, Inc. 2. Material - curing compounds: Comply with ASTM C 309, Type 1. a. Non -yellowing formulation where subject to ultraviolet light. b. Where compounds are proposed for use on surfaces to which finishes, coatings, or coverings subsequently will be applied, compound shall possess demonstrated compatibility with finish, coating, or covering, and use shall be subject to approval of the architect. C. Curing and sealing compound: Where indicated, provide curing and sealing formulation with long-lasting finish that is resistant to chemicals, oil, grease, deicing salts, abrasion, and compatible to chemical hardener to be applied. 3. Solvents: Provide water -based products. G. Bonding Compound: Non-redispersable acrylic bonding admixture, ASTM C 1059, Type II. H. Epoxy Bonding Systems: ASTM C 881; type, grade, and class as required for project conditions. I. Expansion Joint Filler: 1. Nonextruding bituminous type: ASTM D 1751. 2.5 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN A. Review: Do not begin concrete operations until proposed mix has been reviewed by the architect. B. Proportioning of Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with recommendations of ACI 211.1. 003860296/96 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300-7 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 C. Required Average Strength: Establish the required average strength f(cr) of the design mix on the basis of either field experience or trial mixtures as specified in ACI 301, and proportion mixes accordingly. If trial mixtures method is used, employ an independent testing agency acceptable to the architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix design. D. Specified compressive strength f (c) at 28 days: 3000 psi. E. Fly Ash: 1. The contractor may elect to replace a portion of the portland cement with fly ash up to a maximum percentage by weight of cement plus fly ash of 20 r F. Admixtures: 1. Air -entraining admixture: Use in mixes for exterior exposed concrete unless otherwise specifically indicated. Add at rate to achieve total air content in accordance with Table 1.4.3 of ACI 201.2. For concrete not exposed to exterior, add at rate to achieve total air content between 2 percent and 4 percent. a. Do not use in slabs -on -grade scheduled to receive topping, unless manufacturer of topping recommends use over air -entrained concrete. 2. Water -reducing admixture: Add as required for placement and workability. 3. Water -reducing and retarding admixture: Add as required in concrete mixes to be placed at ambient temperatures above 90 degrees F. 4. Water -reducing and accelerating admixture: Add as required in concrete mixes to be placed at ambient temperatures below 50 degrees F. 5. High -range water -reducing admixture (superplasticizer): Add as required for placement and workability. 6. Do not use admixtures not specified or approved. G. Mix Adjustments: Provided that no additional expense to owner is involved, contractor may submit for architect's approval requests for adjustment to approved concrete mixes when circumstances such as changed project conditions, weather, or unfavorable test results occur. Include laboratory test data substantiating specified properties with mix adjustment requests. 2.6 CONTROL OF MIX IN TIC- E FIELD A. Slump: A tolerance of up to 1 inch above approved design mix slump will be permitted for 1 batch in 5 consecutive batches tested. Concrete of lower slump than that specified may be used, provided proper placing and consolidation is obtained. B. Total Air Content: A tolerance of plus or minus 1-1/2 percent of approved design mix air content will be allowed for field measurements. r C. Do not use batches that exceed tolerances. 2.7 CONCRETE MDC NG A. Transit Mixers: Mix concrete materials in transit mixers, complying with requirements of ASTM C 94. 1. At ambient temperatures of 85 to 90 degrees F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 75 minutes. 003860296/96 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300-8 i LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 2. At ambient temperatures above 90 degrees F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONCRETE FORM PREPARATION A. General: Comply with requirements of ACI 301 for formwork, and as herein specified. The contractor is responsible for design, engineering, and construction of formwork, and for its timely removal. B. Earth Forms: Hand -trim bottoms and sides of earth forms to profiles indicated on the drawings. Remove loose dirt before placing concrete. C. Design: Design and fabricate fortes for easy removal, without impact, shock, or damage to concrete surfaces or other portions of the work. Design to support all applied loads until concrete is adequately cured, within allowable tolerances and deflection limits. D. Construction: Construct and brace formwork to accurately achieve end results required by contract documents, with all elements properly located and free of distortion. Provide for necessary openings, inserts, anchorages, and other features shown or otherwise required. 1. Joints: Minimize form joints and make watertight to prevent leakage of concrete. a. Align joints symmetrically at exposed conditions. 2. Chamfers: Provide chamfered edges and corners at exposed locations, unless specifically indicated otherwise on the drawings. 3. Permanent openings: Provide openings to accommodate work of other trades, sized and located accurately. Securely support items built into fortes; provide additional bracing at openings and discontinuities in formwork. , 4. Temporary openings: Provide temporary openings for cleaning and inspection in most inconspicuous locations at base of forms, closed with tight -fitting panels designed to minimize appearance of joints in finished concrete work. E. Tolerances for Formed Surfaces: Comply with minimum tolerances established in ACI 117, unless more stringent requirements are indicated on the drawings. F. Release Agent: Provide either form materials with factory -applied nonabsorptive liner or field -applied form coating. If field -applied coating is employed, thoroughly clean and recondition formwork and reapply coating before each use. Rust on form surfaces is unacceptable. 3.2 VAPOR RETARDER INSTALLATION A. General: Place vapor retarder sheet over prepared base material, aligning longer dimension parallel to direction of pour and lapped 6 inches. Seal joints with appropriate tape. Cover with sand to depth shown on drawings. 3.3 PLACING REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with requirements of ACI 301 and as herein specified. L 003860296/96 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300-9 a 0 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900=9268 `- B. Preparation: Clean reinforcement of loose rust and null scale, soil, and other materials which -- adversely affect bond with concrete. C. Placement: Place reinforcement to achieve not less than minimum concrete coverages required �- for protection. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Provide Class C tension lap splices complying withACI 318 unless otherwise indicated. Do not field -bend partially embedded bars unless otherwise indicated or approved. .. 1. Use approved bar supports and tie wire, as required. Set wire ties to avoid contact with or penetration of exposed concrete surfaces. Tack welding of reinforcing is not permitted. 2. Wire fabric: Install in maximum lengths possible, lapping adjoining pieces not less than one full mesh. Offset end laps to prevent continuous laps in either direction, and splice laps with tie wire. D. Welding: Welding of reinforcement is not permitted. 3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints as indicated on drawings. If construction joints are not indicated, locate in manner which will not impair strength and will have least impact on appearance, as acceptable to the architect. 1. Keyways: Provide keyways not less than 1-1/2 inches deep. 2. Reinforcement: Continue reinforcement across and perpendicular to construction joints, unless details specifically indicate otherwise. B. Isolation Joints: Construct isolation joints in slabs poured on grade at points of contact with --- vertical components, such as foundation walls and column pedestals. Install expansion joint filler to full concrete depth. Recess top edge of filler 1/8 inch where joints are unsealed. C. Expansion Joints: Construct expansion joints where indicated. Install expansion joint filler to full depth of concrete. Recess edge of filler to depth indicated to receive joint sealant (and backer rod where necessary) specified in Division 7. , 3.5 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS A. General: Set anchorage devices and other items required for other work connected to or supported by cast -in -place concrete, using templates, setting drawings, and instructions from suppliers of items to be embedded. 1. Edge Forms and Screeds: Set edge forms and intermediate screeds as necessary to achieve final elevations indicated for finished slab surfaces. 3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Preparation: Provide materials necessary to ensure adequate protection of concrete during inclement weather before beginning installation of concrete. B. Inspection: Before beginning concrete placement, inspect formwork, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded, verifying that all such work has been completed. 003860296/96 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300-10 F- LUBBOCK FIRE STATION N0. 4 �_, 900-9268 1. Wood forms: Moisten immediately before placing concrete in locations where form coatings are not used. C. Placement - General: Comply with requirements of ACI 304 and as follows: 1. Schedule continuous placement of concrete to prevent the formation of cold joints. 2. Provide construction joints if concrete for a particular element or component cannot be placed in a continuous operation. 3. Deposit concrete as close as possible to its final location, to avoid segregation. D. Placement in Forms: Limit horizontal layers to depths which can be properly consolidated, but in no event greater than 24 inches. 1. Consolidate concrete by means of mechanical vibrators, inserted vertically in freshly placed concrete in a systematic pattern at close intervals. Penetrate previously placed concrete to ensure that separate concrete layers are knitted together. 2. Vibrate concrete sufficiently to achieve consistent consolidation without segregation of coarse aggregates. 3. Do not use vibrators to move concrete laterally. E. Slab Placement: Schedule continuous placement and consolidation of concrete within planned construction joints. 1. Thoroughly consolidate concrete without displacing reinforcement or embedded items, using internal vibrators, vibrating screeds, roller pipe screeds, or other means acceptable to architect. 2. Strike off and level concrete slab surfaces, using highway straightedges, darbies, or bull floats before bleed water can collect on surface. Do not work concrete further until finishing operations are commenced. F. Cold Weather PIacement: Comply with recommendations of ACI 306 when air temperatures are expected to drop below 40 degrees F either during concrete placement operations or before concrete has cured. 1. Do not use frozen or ice -laden materials. 2. Do not place concrete on frozen substrates. G. Hot Weather Placement: Comply with recommendations of ACI 30SR when ambient temperature before, during, or after concrete placement is expected to exceed 90 degrees F or when combinations of high air temperature, low relative humidity, and V&d speed are such that the rate of evaporation from freshly poured concrete would otherwise exceed 0.2 pounds per square foot per hour. 1. Do not add water to approved concrete mixes under hot weather conditions. 2. Provide mixing water at lowest feasible temperature, and provide adequate protection of poured concrete to reduce rate of evaporation. 3. Use fog nozzle to cool formwork and reinforcing steel immediately prior to placing concrete. 3.7 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Repairs, General: Repair surface defects, including tie holes, immediately after removing formwork. 003860296/96 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300-11 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 1. Remove honeycombed areas and other defective concrete down to sound concrete, cutting perpendicular to surface or slightly undercutting. Dampen patch location and area immediately surrounding it prior to applying bonding compound or patching mortar. 2. Before bonding compound has dried, apply patching mixture matching original concrete �-- in materials and mix except for omission of coarse aggregate, and using a blend of white and normal portland cement as necessary to achieve color match. Consolidate thoroughly and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. B. Unexposed Form Finish: Repair tie holes and patch defective areas. Rub down or chip off fins or other raised areas exceeding 1/4 inch height. _ C. Exposed Form Finish: Repair and patch defective areas, with fins or other projections completely removed and smoothed. _ 1. Smooth rubbed finish: Apply to surfaces indicated no later than 24 hours after form removal a. Wet concrete surfaces to be finished and rub with Carborundum brick or other abrasive until uniform color and texture are achieved. b. Do not apply separate grout mixture. 2. Contiguous unformed surfaces: Strike smooth and float to a similar texture tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and other unformed surfaces adjacent to or contiguous with formed surfaces. Continue final finish of formed surfaces across unformed surfaces, unless otherwise specifically indicated. 3.8 FINISHING SLABS A. Finishing Operations - General: 1. Do not directly apply water to slab surface or dust with cement. 2. Use hand or powered equipment only as recommended in ACI 302.1R. 3. Screeding: Strikeoff to required grade and within surface tolerances indicated. Verify conformance to surface tolerances. Correct deficiencies while concrete is still plastic. 4. Bull Floating: Immediately following screeding, bull float or darby before bleed water appears to eliminate ridges, fill in voids, and embed coarse aggregate. Recheck and correct surface tolerances. 5. Do not perform subsequent finishing until excess moisture or bleed water has disappeared and concrete will support either foot pressure with less than 1/4-inch indentation or weight of power floats without damaging flatness. 6. Final floating: Float to embed coarse aggregate, to eliminate ridges, to compact concrete, to consolidate mortar at surface, and to achieve uniform, sandy texture. Recheck and correct surface tolerances. 7. Troweling: Trowel immediately following final floating. Apply first troweling with power trowel except in confined areas, and apply subsequent trowelings with hand trowels. Wait between trowelings to allow concrete to harden. Do not overtrowel. Begin final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over it. Consolidate concrete surface by final troweling operation. Completed surface shall be free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and within surface tolerance specified. a. Grind smooth surface defects which would telegraph through final floor covering system. 003860296/96 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300-12 r" LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 +- B. Coordinate appearance and texture of required final finishes with the architect before ° application. t r-. C. Trowel Finish: As specified above. D. Chemical Hardener Finish: 1. Trowel finish and allow complete curing and drying of concrete surface. 2. Apply chemical hardener finish following manufacturer's printed application instructions, applying in 3 coats diluted with water. Evenly apply each coat, allowing 24 hours for drying between coats. C' 3. Remove any surplus hardener according to manufacturer's instructions. E. Slab Surface Tolerances: 1. Achieve flat, level planes except where grades are indicated. Slope uniformly to drains. 2. Troweled finishes: Achieve level surface plane so that depressions between high spots do not exceed the following dimension, using a 10-foot straightedge: a. 1/4 inch. F. Slab Finish Schedule: Apply finishes in the following typical locations and as otherwise shown on the drawings: 1. Trowel finish: a. Exposed interior floors not otherwise scheduled. b. Surfaces to receive resilient tile. C. Surfaces to receive carpet. 2. Chemical hardener finish: In locations shown on the drawings. G. Repair of Slab Surfaces: Test slab surfaces for smoothness and to verify surface plane to tolerance specified. Repair defects as follows: 1. High areas: Correct by grinding after concrete has cured for not less than 14 days. 2. Low areas: Immediately after completion of surface finishing operations, cut out low areas and replace with fresh concrete. Finish repaired areas to blend with adjacent concrete. Proprietary patching compounds may be used when approved by the architect. 3. Crazed or cracked areas: Cut out defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1 inch in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts. Dampen exposed concrete and apply bonding compound. Mix, place, compact, and finish patching concrete to match adjacent concrete. 4. Isolated cracks and holes: Groove top of cracks and cut out holes not over 1 inch in diameter. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding compound; place dry pack or proprietary repair compound acceptable to architect while bonding compound is still active: a. Dry -pack mix: One part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate and enough water as required for handling and placing. b. Install patching mixture and consolidate thoroughly, striking off level with and matching surrounding surface. Do not allow patched areas to dry out prematurely. 003860296/96 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300-13 4 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 3.9 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION A. General: 1. Prevent premature drying of freshly placed concrete, and protect from excessively cold or hot temperatures until concrete has cured. 2. Provide curing of concrete by one of the methods listed and as appropriate to service conditions and type of applied finish in each case. B. Curing Period: 1. Not less than 7 days for standard cements and mixes. C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period or until forms are removed. 1. Keep wooden or metal forms moist when exposed to heat of the sun. 2. If forms are removed prior to completion of curing process, continue curing by one of the applicable methods specified. D. Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms: 1. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared, but before surface is dry. 2. Keep continuously moist for not less than 3 days by uninterrupted use of any of the following: a. Water ponding. b. Water -fog spray. C. Moisture -retaining cover. 3. Begin final curing procedures immediately following initial curing and before concrete has dried. a. Moisture -retaining cover: Lap not less than 3 inches at edges and ends, and seal with waterproof tape or adhesive. Repair holes or tears during curing period with same tape or adhesive. Maintain covering in intimate contact with concrete surface. Secure to avoid displacement. 1. Extend covering past slab edges at least twice the thickness of slab. 2. Do not use plastic sheeting on surfaces which will be exposed to view when in service. b. Curing compound: Apply at rate stated by manufacturer to conform with moisture -retention requirements specified, using second, immediate application at right angles to first, if necessary, and reapply if damaged by rain. Apply to all areas which do not receive curing and sealing compound and chemical hardener. C. Curing and sealing compound: Apply at rate stated by manufacturer to conform with moisture -retention requirements specified, using second, immediate application at right angles to first, if necessary, and reapply if damaged by rain. Apply additional coat near substantial completion to act as sealer. Apply to areas scheduled in the drawings as sealer and hardener. d. Use curing compounds only in locations permitted or required, and where use will not interfere with other finishes, coatings, or coverings to be applied. 4. Continue final curing to end of curing period. E. Avoid rapid drying at end of curing period. 003860296/96 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300-14 r- i LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 F. During and following curing period, protect concrete from temperature changes of adjacent air in excess of 5 degrees F per hour and 50 degrees F per 24 hours. Progressively adjust protective measures to provide uniform temperature changes over entire concrete surface. r 3.10 REMOVAL OF FORMS AND SUPPORTS r A. Non -Load -Bearing Formwork: Provided that concrete has hardened sufficiently that it will not be damaged, forms not actually supporting weight of concrete or weight of soffit forms may be removed after concrete has cured at not less than 50 degrees F for 24 hours. Maintain curing and protection operations after form removal. 3.11 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Fill-in: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades after such work is in place. Place such fill-in concrete to blend with existing construction, using same mix and curing methods. 3.12 CONCRETE REPAIRS A. Perform cosmetic repairs of concrete surfaces as specified under concrete application. B. Perform structural repairs with prior approval of the architect for method and procedure, using epoxy bonding systems. The architect's approval is required for repair methods using materials other than those specified. 3.13 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Composite Sampling, and Making and Curing of Specimens: ASTM C 172 and ASTM C 31. 1. Take samples at point of discharge. 2. For pumped concrete, perform sampling and testing at the frequencies specified herein at point of delivery to pump, and perform additional sampling and testing at the same frequency at discharge from line. Results obtained at discharge from line shall be used for acceptance of concrete. B. Slump: ASTM C 143. One test per strength test and additional tests if concrete consistency {" changes. 1. Modify sampling to comply with ASTM C 94. C. Air Content of Normal Weight Concrete: ASTM C 173 or ASTM C 231. One test per strength test performed on air -entrained concrete. D. Concrete Temperature: 1. Test hourly when air temperature is 40 degrees F or below. 2. Test hourly when air temperature is 90 degrees F or above. 3. Test each time a set of strength test specimens is made. E. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39. .. 1. Compression test specimens: Mold and cure one set of 4 standard cylinders for each compressive strength test required. �, 003860296/96 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300-15 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 2. Testing for acceptance of potential strength of as -delivered concrete: a. Obtain samples on a statistically sound, random basis. b. Minimum frequency: 1. One set per 100 cubic yards or fraction thereof for each day's pour of each concrete class. 2. One set per 3500 square feet of slab or wall area or fraction thereof for each day's pour of each concrete class. - 3. When less than 5 cubic yards is placed in one day, the architect may, at architect's option, waive laboratory testing of specimens if adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is provided. (Molding and curing of these specimens is not waived.) 4. When the above testing frequency would provide fewer than 5 strength tests for a given class of concrete during the project, conduct testing from not less than 5 randomly selected batches, or from each batch if fewer than 5. C. Test one specimen per set at 7 days for information unless an earlier age is required. d. Test 2 specimens per set for acceptance of strength potential; test at 28 days unless other age is specified. The test result shall be the average of the two specimens. If one specimen shows evidence of improper sampling, molding, or testing, the test result shall be the result of the remaining specimen; if both show such evidence, discard the test result and inform the architect. e. Retain one specimen from each set for later testing, if required. f. Strength potential of as -delivered concrete will be considered acceptable if all of the following criteria are met: 1. No individual test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. 2. Not more than 10 percent of individual test results fall below specified compressive strength f (c). 3. Average of any 3 consecutive strength test resultsequals or exceeds specified compressive strength f (c). g. Evaluate construction and curing procedures and implement corrective action when strength results for field -cured specimens are less than 85 percent of test values for companion laboratory -cured specimens. F. Test Results: Testing agency shall report test results in writing to architect and contractor within 24 hours of test. 1. Test reports shall contain the following data: a. Project name, number, and other identification. b. Name of concrete testing agency. C. Date and time of sampling. d. Concrete type and class. e. Location of concrete batch in the completed work. f. All information required by respective ASTM test methods. 2. Nondestructive testing devices such as impact hammer or sonoscope may be used at architect's option for assistance in determining probable concrete strength at various locations or for selecting areas to be cored, but such tests shall not be the sole basis for acceptance or rejection. 003860296/96 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300-16 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 3. The testing agency shall make additional tests of in -place concrete as directed by the architect when test results indicate that specified strength and other concrete characteristics have not been attained. a. Testing agency may conduct tests of cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or tests as directed. b. Cost of additional testing shall be borne by the contractor when unacceptable concrete has been verified. END OF SECTION 03300 003860296/96 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE I C 104710 W LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 SECTION 04200 - UNIT MASONRY PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete masonry units (CMU). B. Decorative Concrete masonry units (CMU). C. Face Brick. D. Mortar. E. Grout for masonry. F. Reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01400 - Testing Laboratory Services: Testing laboratory services. B. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Loose steel lintels, and fabricated steel items. C. Section 07600 - Sheet Metal: Cap flashings over masonry work and placement of flashing receivers. D. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Rod and sealant at control joints. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ACE 530 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures. B. ACI 530.1 - Specifications For Masonry Structures. C. ASTM A82 - Cold -Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement. D. ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot Dipped Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. E. ASTM A525 - Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated, (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process. F. ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 03860296/96 UNIT MASONRY 04200-1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 1.5 900-9268 G. ASTM A641 - Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire. H. ASTM C90 - Load -Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. I. ASTM C91 - Masonry Cement. J. ASTM C94 - Ready -Mixed Concrete. K. ASTM C129 - Non -Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. L. ASTM C 144 - Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. M. ASTM C150 - Portland Cement. N. ASTM C207 - Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. O. ASTM C216 - Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale). P. ASTM C270 - Mortar for Unit Masonry. Q. ASTM C404 - Aggregates for Masonry Grout. R. ASTM C476 - Grout for Masonry. S. IMIAC - International Masonry Industry All -Weather Council: Recommended Practices and Guide Specification for Cold Weather Masonry Construction. T. HvRAC - International Masonry Industry All -Weather Council: Recommended Practices and Guide Specification for Hot Weather Masonry Construction. SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. Indicate bars sizes, spacings, locations, reinforcement quantities, bending and cutting schedules, supporting and spacing devices for reinforcement and accessories. B. Product Data 1. Provide data for facing brick pre -faced and fabricated wire reinforcement. 2. Include design mix, indicate whether the Proportion or Property specification of ASTM C270 is to be used, required environmental conditions, and admixture limitations. C. Samples 1. Samples a. Face Brick: Submit two samples of face brick, to illustrate color, texture and extremes of color range. b. Decorative CMU: Submit two samples of decorative CMU to illustrate color, texture and extremes of color range: 03860296/96 UNIT MASONRY 1 04200-2 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 2. Submit two samples of mortar, illustrating mortar color and color range. D. Reports 1. Submit reports on mortar indicating conformance of component mortar materials to requirements of ASTM C270 and test and evaluation reports to ASTM C780. 2. Submit reports on grout indicating conformance of component grout materials to requirements of ASTM C476 and test and evaluation reports to ASTM C 1019. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 530 and ACI 530.1. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.8 MOCKUP A. Provide mockup of masonry back-up and veneer under provisions of Section 01410. B. Construct a masonry wall into a panel sized 4 feet long by 2 feet high, which includes mortar and accessories, structural backup, wall openings, flashings, wall insulation, and vapor barrier. C. Locate where directed. D. Mockup may not remain as part of the Work. 1.9 PRE -INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section, under provisions of Section 01039. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Maintain packaged materials clean, dry, and protected against dampness, freezing, and foreign matter. 1.11 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Cold Weather Requirements: Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 40 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. 03860296/96 UNIT MASONRY 04200-3 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 B. Hot Weather Requirements: Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to maximum 90 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. 1.12 COORDINATION - A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039. B. Coordinate the masonry work with installation of window frames, Owner furnished equipment and Exterior Installation and Finish System. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Face Brick 1. Acme Brick Co. 2. Boral Brick Co. 3. Henderson Brick Co. B. Concrete and Decorative Concrete Masonry Units 1. Featherlite Block Co. C. Portland Cement, Mortar Cement, Masonry Cement, and Lime 1. Essroc Materials, Inc. 2. Glen-Gery Corporation. 3. Lafarge Corporation. 4. Lehigh Portland Cement Co. 5. Riverton Corporation (The). D. Mortar Pigments 1. Davis Colors. 2. Lafarge Corporation. _ 3. Solomon Grind -Chem Services, Inc. E. Joint Reinforcement, Ties, and Anchors 1. Dur-O-Wal, Inc. 2. Heckman Building Products, Inc. 3. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. 4. Masonry Reinforcing Corp. of America. 5. National Wire Products Industries. 6. Southem Construction Products. F. Admixtures 1. Integral CMU Water Repellent a. W.R. Grace & Co. 2. Cold -Weather Admixture a. Euclid Chemical Co. 03860296/96 UNIT MASONRY 1 04200-4 _. rig r-' LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 r �., b. W.R. Grace & Co. k 3. Water -Repellent Admixture ` a. W.R. Grace & Co. 2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Hollow Load Bearing Block Units (CMU): ASTM C90, Type I - Moisture Controlled medium weight, with integral waterrepellent admixture. B. Hollow Non -Load Bearing Block Units (CMU): ASTM C129, Type I - Moisture Controlled medium weight, with integral waterrepellent admixture. C. Size and Shape: Nominal modular size of 8 x 8 x 16 inches. Provide special units for 90 degree corners, bond beams and lintels. D. Decorative Block Units 1. Conformance: ASTM C129, Type I - Moisture Controlled with integral waterrepellent admixture. 2. Size and Shape: Nominal size of 8 x 8 x 16 inches. 3. Surface Finish a. Type I: Ground face. b. Type IV: Ground face, Single scored vertically to simulate 8 x 8 inch units. 4. Color a. Type 1: Equal to Featherlite "Granite". b. Type IV: Equal to Featherlite "Texas Creme". 2.3 FACE BRICK UNITS A. General a- 1. Conformance Face Brick: ASTM C216, Type FBS, Grade SW. , 2. Size and Shape: Nominal modular size of 3 x 4 x 8 inches. 3. Color and Texture. a. Type II: Equal to Henderson Brick No. 6000 F or FW, light range, Velour texture. r.. b. Type III: Equal to Henderson Brick No. 6000 F or FW, light range, rockface. r 2.4 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE A. Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Truss type; steel wire, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A641 Class 1 after fabrication, 3/16 inch side rods with 3/16 inch cross ties. B. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, 40 ksi yield grade, deformed billet bars, uncoated finish. C. Strap Anchors: Bent steel shape, 2 x 10 inch size x 22 gage thick, hot dip galvanized to ,�. ASTM A123 B2. D. Veneer Wall Ties: Formed steel wire, adjustable, eye and pintle type, hot dip galvanized �. to ASTM A123 B2. i 03860296/96 UNIT MASONRY 04200-5 r- k LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 `- 2.5 MORTAR AND GROUT A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I. B. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91, Type S. C. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144, standard masonry type. _ D. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. E. Grout Course Aggregate: ASTM C404. F. Water: Clean and potable. G. Bonding Agent: Latex type. H. Mortar Color: Mineral oxide pigment; Standard gray at interior exposed masonry and color as selected by architect at all exterior masonry. 2.6 ADMIXTURES -' A. Water Repellent: Liquid type; Dry -Block Mortar Admixture. 2.7 FLASHINGS A. Copper/Kraft Paper Flashings: 2 oz/sq ft sheet copper bonded to fiber reinforced asphalt -- treated Kraft paper. B. Lap Sealant: Butyl type as specified in Section 07900. .� C. Joint Filler: Closed cell polyethylene or polyurethane oversized 50 percent to joint width; self expanding; by maximum lengths. D. Building Paper: No. 30 asphalt saturated felt. E. Weeps: Preformed plastic tubes, cotton wick filled or cotton rope. F. Cleaning Solution: Non -acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials. 2.8 MORTAR AND GROUT MXES A. Mortar For Load Bearing Walls and Partitions: ASTM C270, Type S using the _ Performance specification, with water repellent admixture for all exterior mortar. B. Mortar For Non -Load Bearing Walls and Partitions: ASTM C270, Type S using the Performance specification, with water repellent admixture for all exterior mortar. 03860296/96 UNIT MASONRY, 04200-6' — i 4 r LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 2.9 GROUT MIXES A. Bond Beams and Lintels: 2,500 psi strength at 28 days; 8-10 inches slump; or premixed type in accordance with ASTM C94. Mix in accordance with ASTM C476 Course grout. r, B. Engineered Masonry: 3,000 psi strength at 28 days; 8-10 inches slump; [premixed type in accordance with ASTM C94. r 2.10 GROUT MDIING " f A. Pre -mixed Grout: Mix grout in accordance with ASTM C94. B. Field Mixed Grout: Thoroughly nix grout ingredients in quantities needed for immediate ?^ r use in accordance with ASTM C476 Course grout. C. Add admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; mix uniformly. D. Do not use anti -freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of grout. i PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. r B. Verify items provided by other sections of work are properly sized and located. C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work. Y D. Request inspection of spaces to be grouted. i- 3.2 PREPARATION A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied to other sections. B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent bracing. L C. Apply bonding agent to existing concrete surfaces. r" D. Plug clean -out holes with brick or block masonry units. Brace masonry for wet grout pressure. I! t x 03860296/96 UNIT MASONRY 04200-7 r— LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Mortar Mixing 900-9268 1. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in accordance with ASTM C270 in quantities needed for immediate use. 2. Maintain sand uniformly damp immediately before the mixing process. 3. Add mortar color and admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide uniformity of mix and coloration. 4. Do not use anti -freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar. 5. If water is lost by evaporation, re -temper only within two hours of mixing. 6. Use mortar within two hours after mixing at temperatures of 90 degrees F or two -and -one-half hours at temperatures under 40 degrees F. B. Coursing 1. General a. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement. b. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness. 2. Concrete Masonry Units: a. Bond: Running. b. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches. c. Mortar Joints: Concave. 3. Brick Units: a. Bond: Running or Stacked as indicated on drawings. b. Coursing: Three units and three mortar joints to equal 8 inches. c. Mortar Joints: Concave. C. Placing and Bonding 1. Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly jointed with other work. 2. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints. 3. Buttering comers of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints are not permitted. 4. Remove excess mortar as work progresses. 5. Interlock intersections and external corners. 6. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace. 7. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit comers or edges. 8. Cut mortar joints flush where resilient base is scheduled, or furring chemicals are applied. 9. Isolate top joint of masonry partitions from horizontal structural framing members and slabs or decks with compressible joint filler. D. Weeps 1. Install weeps in veneer at 32 inches oc horizontally above through -wall flashing, above shelf angles and lintels, and at bottom of walls. 03860296/96 UNIT MASONRY 04200-8 j". t. r- LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 r r' I 900-9268 E. Cavity Wall 1. Do not permit mortar to drop or accumulate into cavity air space or to plug weeps. F. Reinforcement and Anchorage - Single Wythe Masonry 1. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches oc vertically. 2. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening. 3. Place joint reinforcement continuous in fast and second joint below top of walls. 4. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches. 5. Reinforce joint corners and intersections with strap anchors 16 inches. G. Reinforcement and Anchorage - Masonry Veneer 1. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 15 inches oc. 2. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening. 3. Place joint reinforcement continuous in first and second joint below top of walls. 4. Embed wall ties in masonry back-up to bond veneer at maximum 15 inches oc vertically and 36 inches horizontally. Place at maximum 3 inches oc each way around perimeter of openings, within 12 inches of openings. 5. Reinforce stack bonded unit joint comers and intersections with strap anchors 16 inches oc. H. Masonry Flashings 1. Extend flashings horizontally at foundation walls, above ledge or shelf angles and lintels, under parapet caps, and at bottom of walls. 2. Turn flashing up minimum 8 inches and bed into mortar joint of masonry or seal to existing back-up. 3. Lap end joints minimum 6 inches and seal watertight. 4. Turn flashing, fold, and seal at comers, bends, and interruptions. I. Lintels 1. Install loose steel lintels over openings. 2. Install reinforced unit masonry lintels over openings where steel lintels are not scheduled. 3. Do not splice reinforcing bars. 4. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch of dimensioned position. 5. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing. 6. Allow masonry lintels to attain specified strength before removing temporary supports. 7. Maintain minimum 8 inch bearing on each side of opening. Mortar and Grout 1. Install mortar in accordance with ASTM C270. Install grout in accordance with ASTM C476. 2. Work grout into masonry cores and cavities to eliminate voids. 3. Do not install grout in lifts greater than 16 inches or two CMU courses without consolidating grout by nodding. 03860296/96 UNIT MASONRY 04200-9 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 4. Do not displace reinforcement while placing grout. 5. Remove excess mortar from grout spaces. 6. At bearing locations, fill masonry cores with grout for a minimum 12 inches either side of opening. 7. High Lift Grouting a. Provide cleanout opening no less than 4 inches high at the bottom of each cell to be grouted by cutting one face shell of masonry unit. b. Clean out masonry cells and cavities with high pressure water spray. Permit complete water drainage. . c. After cleaning seal openings with masonry units. d. Limit grout lift to 60 inches and rod for grout consolidation. Wait 30 to 60 minutes before placing next lift. K. Control Joints 1. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control joints. 2. Form control joint with a sheet building paper bond breaker fitted to one side of the hollow contour end of the block unit. Fill the resultant core with grout fill. Rake joint at exposed unit faces for placement of backer rod and sealant. 3. Size control joint in accordance with Section 07900 for sealant performance. 3.4 BUILT-IN WORK A. As work progresses, install built-in metal door and frames, fabricated metal frames, window frames, anchor bolts, plates, and and other items to be built-in the work and furnished by other sections. B. Install built-in items plumb and level. C. Bed anchors of metal door and glazed frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with grout. Fill adjacent masonry cores with grout minimum 12 inches from framed openings. D. Do not build in organic materials subject to deterioration. 3.5 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Alignment of Columns: 1/4 inch. B. . Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/32 inch. C. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 ft and 1/2 inch in 20 ft or more. D. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch per story non -cumulative. E. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 ft and 1/4 inch in 10 ft 112 inch in 30 ft. F. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: -1/8 inch in 3 ft. 03860296/96 UNIT MASONRY 1 04200=10 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 G. Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: 1/4 inch. H. Variation From Joint Width: Plus or minus 1/8 inch and minus 0 inches. 3.6 CUTTING AND FITTING A. Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduit and sleeves. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape,and location. - B. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01410. B. Test and evaluate grout in accordance with ASTM C1019. 3.8 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of 01700. B. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses. C. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work. D. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution. E. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations. F. Do not scratch or deface units. 3.9 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01500. B. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners which may be damaged by construction activities. C. Maintain protective boards at exposed external corners. Provide protection without damaging completed work. END OF SECTION 04200 03860296/96 UNIT MASONRY 04200-11 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fabrication and erection of structural steel framing members, as defined in AISC Code and as indicated on the drawings. 2. Welding. 3. Shop painting. B. Products Furnished but Not Installed under This Section: 1. Steel anchorages cast in concrete. 2. Steel anchorages embedded in masonry. C. Related Sections: 1. Steel joists: Elsewhere in Division 5. 2. Steel decking: Elsewhere in Division 5. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 36/A 36M-94 — Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 1994. B. ASTM A 307-94 — Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength; 1994. C. ASTM A 325-93 — Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength; 1993. D. ASTM A 500-93 — Standard Specification for Cold -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 1993. E. ASTM A 501-93 — Standard Specification for Hot -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing; 1993. F. ASTM C 1107-91a — Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic -Cement Grout (Nonshrink); 1991. G. AWS D1.1-92 — Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 1992. H. Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges; American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. (AISC); 1986. I. Specification for Structural Steel Buildings — Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design; American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. (AISC); 1989. J. Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts; Research Council on Structural Connections; American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. (AISC); 1985. 03860296/96 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 -` K. Steel Structures Painting Manual, Volume 2, Systems and Specifications; Steel Structures -- Painting Council (SSPC); 1995, 7th Edition. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Structural Steel: Items as listed in 2.1 of AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," and excluding steel, iron, or other metal items not listed, even if attached to the structural framing. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General: Unless otherwise specifically approved in writing, furnish exact sections, weights, and kinds of material specified, using details and dimensions shown. 1. Not all connections are detailed; similar details apply to similar conditions, unless otherwise indicated. Contact the architect promptly to verify design of members or connections in any situation where design requirements are unclear. 2. Substitution of other shapes of equivalent or greater strength and no greater dimension may be allowed by the architect, but only under normal substitution procedures. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Producer's or manufacturer's information for products as follows, including sufficient data to show compliance with specified requirements: 1. Mill test reports for each type of structural steel furnished. 2. Specifications for primer paint, including manufacturer's data on chemical composition, adhesion of spray fireproofing, and dry film thickness per applied coat. — 3. Specifications for nonshrink grout. B. Shop Drawings: Complete drawings for structural steel, including information on location, type, and size of all connections, distinguishing between those made in the shop and those made in the field. 1. Indicate weld lengths and sizes, using standard American Welding Society (AWS) welding symbols. 2. Include setting drawings and templates for anchorages to be installed by others. 3. The fabricator is specifically responsible for the adequacy of any connections designed ^ by the fabricator to performance standards established in the contract documents. Approval by the architect of shop drawings shall not relieve the fabricator of this responsibility, despite wording to the contrary in paragraph 4.2.1 of the AISC Code. C. Welder Qualifications: Evidence that welders employed in the work are currently certified under American Welding Society (AWS) qualification procedures. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Procedures: Establish that joint welding procedures are prequalified or test in accordance with American Welding Society (AWS) qualification procedures. B. Welder Qualifications: Welders must be currently certified under American Welding Society — (AWS) qualification procedures. 03860296/96 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-2 r- LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 i C. Regulatory Requirements: Unless other requirements of governing authorities or particular requirements of this specification are more stringent, comply with provisions of the following: 1. AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." ,.. 2. AISC "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings — Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design," with Commentary and Supplements. 3. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Shipping: Deliver steel in timely fashion, to permit the most efficient and economical flow of work. Deliver steel members properly marked for field assembly and erection. 1. Deliver anchor bolts, washers, and other anchorage devices to be built into other work in time to avoid delays and permit their proper installation. r B. Storage: Protect steel and other materials of this section from damage and corrosion. If temporary storage at the project site is required, keep steel members off the ground, using !^ platforms or pallets, in location easily accessible for inspection. i k r PART 2 - PRODUCTS E 2.1 STEEL MATERIALS A. Structural Steel Members: ASTM A 36. B. Structural Tubing, Cold -Formed: ASTM A 500, C. Structural Tubing, Hot -Formed: ASTM A 501. D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 307, Carbon steel, Grade C; ASTM A 36 steel plate washers. E. Carbon Steel Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 307, Grade A. F. High -Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325. ` 1. Type 1, plain (medium carbon steel). 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Electrodes and Fluxes: AWS DI. 1; types as required by materials being welded. r-- B. Nonshrink Grout: Prepackaged material requiring only the addition of water and complying with ASTM C 1107, and as follows: •-, 1. Natural aggregate (nonmetallic) type. C. Shop Primer: Fabricator's standard primer. 2.3 FABRICATION r„ A. Shop Assembly - General: Comply with requirements of AISC Specifications. Shop fabricate and assemble to maximum degree possible. i r„ 03860296/96 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-3 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 1900-9268 B. Thermal Cutting: Perform all thermal cutting by machine. I. Plane thermally cut edges which are to be welded. C. Connections: 1. Shop connections: Welded or bolted, as required. 2. Field connections: Bolted, unless welds are specifically indicated. 3. Bolts: High -strength steel bolts, except as otherwise indicated. a. Bolting: Comply with requirements of AISC "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts." 4. Welds: Comply with requirements of AWS Code for welding procedures and quality of welds, including appearance. a. Built-up sections: Assemble components and weld using procedures which will maintain proper alignment of finished section. D. Finishing: Accurately mill ends of columns and other members which must transmit loads in bearing. E. Holes in Steel Members: Make all holes by means of cutting, drilling, or punching at right angles to surface of metal. Do not make or enlarge holes by burning. 1. Provide holes in steel members as required to permit connection of work by others. 2.4 SHOP COATING -PAINT A. Shop prime all steel members. 1. Do not paint the following surfaces: a. Machined or milled surfaces. b. Surfaces adjacent to field welds. C. Faying surfaces of bolted connections. B. Preparation: Thoroughly clean steel surfaces to be shop primed, removing loose rust, loose mill scale, dirt, oil, and grease. Clean steel in accordance with SSPC procedures as follows: 1. SSPC-SP 2: Hand tool cleaning. C. Painting: As soon as possible after cleaning, apply specified primer paint in accordance with instructions of paint manufacturer, at a rate sufficient to provide a finished thickness of not less than 1.5 mils and an average thickness of 2.0 mils. 2.5 SHOP QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspection: 1. Shop bolted connections: Comply with testing and verification procedures in AISC "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts." 2. Shop welded connections: Inspect and test shop -fabricated welds as follows: a. Visually inspect all welds. 03860296/96 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-4 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 SECTION 05210 - STEEL JOISTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. K-series open web steel joists. 2. Bracing. B. Related Sections: 1. Structural steel: Elsewhere in Division 5. 2. Metal decking: Elsewhere in Division 5. 1.2 REFERENCES A. SJI Technical Digest No. 9 — Handling and Erection of Steel Joists and Joist Girders; Steel Joist Institute; July 1987. B. Standard Specifications Load Tables and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders; Steel Joist Institute (SJI); 1992. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide joist system which is designed and fabricated to comply with requirements of the contract documents and which strictly conforms to material, manufacturing, and erection requirements of the Steel Joist Institute's (SJI) "Standard Specifications Load Tables and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders" (referred to hereinafter as SH "Specifications"). 1. Wind uplift: Design joists and connections to comply with wind uplift requirements indicated. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit for each distinct type of joist required and for accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Drawings for fabrication and erection of joists; include plans, elevations, and large scale details of typical sections, special connections, joining, and accessories. 1. Show location and spacing of joists; indicate mark number and type. 2. Show bridging. C. Quality Control Submittals: Submit the following: 1. SJI certification of joist characteristics. 2. Manufacturers' certification of joist characteristics. 3. Manufacturer's installation instructions, including specific installation sequence. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Strictly conform to requirements of SJI Technical Digest No. 9. 03860296/96 STEEL JOISTS 05210-1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordination Data: Prepare and distn'bute to affected installers, drawings or templates detailing placement of bearing plates and anchor bolts. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Steel: Conform to requirements of SH "Specifications." _ B. Steel Primer for K-Series Joists: Conform to requirements of SH "Specifications." C. Accessories: Provide accessories required for erection of steel joists, complying with SH "Specifications" and with contract documents. 2.2 JOIST FABRICATION A. General: All materials shall be clean and straight. B. Bridging is schematically shown on drawings. Detail and fabricate bridging in complete accordance with SH requirements. C. Joists: 1. Top chord extensions: Provide extensions where indicated. Extension members shall be designed as cantilever beams, with their reactions carried back at least to the first — panel point of the joists. 2. Bottom chord extensions: Where indicated, provide extended bottom chords or separate extension units properly designed to support ceilings attached directly to joist bottom chords. Maximum clearance between wall finish and end of extension: 1/2 inch, unless indicated otherwise. 3. Camber: Comply with recommendations of SJI "Specifications." _ 4. Surface preparation for shop priming: Hand clean steel in accordance with SSPC-Paint 15 requirements. 5. Shop priming: Provide 1-mil continuous dry paint film thickness. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ERECTION A. Do not begin joist erection until structural support components have been installed and are in suitable condition to receive joists. B. Do not overload or exceed carrying capacity of any joist during construction period. C. Accurately position and space joists before permanent attachment to structural supports. D. Provide safe, stable structure throughout construction period. Do not remove bridging after - construction is completed, unless specifically authorized to do so by the architect. 03860296196 STEEL JOISTS 105210-2 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION Kula•-& i A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions for erection of structural steel and verify that the work may properly proceed. Do not commence erection of structural steel until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected or fabricated steel components have been adjusted i with the architect's agreement. : 3.2 PREPARATION A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary guys, braces, falsework, cribbing, or other elements required to secure the steel framing against loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove such temporary support only when permanent connections have been made and the steel framing is fully capable of supporting design loads, including any temporary construction loads. 3.3 ERECTION A. General: Erect structural steel in compliance with AISC Code and Specifications. B. Assembly: 1. Set structural members accurately to locations and elevations indicated, within tolerances established in AISC Code, before making final connections. 2. Do not use thermal cutting to correct fabrication errors on any major structural member. a. Thermal cutting of secondary members may be permitted by the architect upon request, but only when members involved are not loaded. C. Columns and Bearing Surfaces: 1. Clean bearing and contact surfaces before assembly. Slightly roughen concrete and masonry surfaces to improve bond. 2. Set base and bearing plates accurately, using metal wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 3. After tightening anchor bolts and ensuring that structure is plumb, grout solidly between plates and bearing surfaces. a. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for nonshrink grout. D. Bolting- 1 Carbon steel bolts: Use only for temporary bracing during erection, unless otherwise specifically permitted by contract documents. 2. High -strength bolts: Comply with requirements of AISC "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts." E. Welding: 1. Do not perform field welding when ambient temperature is at 0 degrees F or below, or +•, when surfaces are wet, exposed to rain, snow, or high wind. 2. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 3. Tighten and leave in place erection bolts used in field -welded construction. r i �„ 03860296/96 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-5 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900=9268 —' F. Touch-up Painting: As soon as possible after erection of primed structural steel, clean painted — areas which have been abraded or otherwise damaged by welding, bolting, or other field operations. Apply touch-up paint matching shop coating by brush or spray to all damaged paint areas, achieving a minimum final thickness of 1.5 mils. — 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspection: 1. Field -bolted connections: Comply with testing and verification procedures in AISC "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts." _ 2. Field -welded connections: Inspect and test field -fabricated welds as follows: a. Visually inspect all field welds. END OF SECTION 05120 03860296/96 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-6 �- LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 P F r SECTION 05313 - STEEL ROOF DECK PART 1 - GENERAL 3 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Standard roof deck. 2. Formed steel accessories. 3. Framing for openings up to 18 inches. B. Related Sections: 1. Structural steel: Elsewhere in Division 5. 2. Steel joists: Elsewhere in Division 5. 3. Steel form deck: Elsewhere in Division 5. 1.2 REFERENCES 900-9268 A. ASTM A 611-93 — Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Carbon, Cold Rolled, Structural Quality; 1993. B. ASTM A 526/A 526M-90 — Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, Commercial Quality; 1990. C. AWS D1.1-92 — Structural Welding Code —Steel; American Welding Society; 1992. D. AWS D1.3-89 — Structural Welding Code —Sheet Steel; American Welding Society; 1989. E. SDI Publication No. 28 — Steel Deck Institute Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, Roof Decks, Coiner Decks and Cellular Metal Floor Deck with Electrical Distribution; Steel Deck Institute, Inc.; 1992. F. Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members; American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI); 1986 (with 1989 Addendum and 1990 Errata). 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit deck manufacturer's specifications and product information, indicating compliance with specified requirements. 1. Include Steel Deck Institute certification of manufacturer's deck characteristics. 2. Include manufacturer's certification of deck characteristics. 3. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions, including specific installation sequence. 4. Submit manufacturer's data on mechanical fasteners. B. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed drawings indicating deck types and plan layout; support locations and anchorages; projections; openings and reinforcement; and pertinent details and accessories. r 03860296/96 STEEL ROOF DECK 05313-1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 — C. Calculations: Submit manufacturer's documentation of deck design loads, allowable spans, and section properties. 1. Prepare calculations under seal of a professional structural engineer registered in the state in which the project is located. .— 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with requirements of the following, except where exceeded by the contract documents or requirements of governing authorities: 1. AISI "Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members." 2. AWS D1.3 "Structural Welding Code --Sheet Steel." 3. "Steel Deck Institute Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, Roof Decks, and Cellular Metal Floor Deck with Electrical Distribution." B. Qualifications: Qualify welding processes and welding operators according to procedures specified in AWS D 1.1. C. Installer: A company specializing in this type of work and with 3 years of documented experience. D. Testing: Welded decking in place is subject to inspection and testing by an independent agency paid by the owner. If testing indicates that welds do not comply with requirements, remove defective work and replace at no additional expense to the owner. 1.5 STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Storage: Separate sheets and store units on dry wood sleepers, sloped to promote drainage. Cover with waterproof material ventilated to avoid condensation. B. Marking: Unless deck units are all of the same gage and yield strength for the project, mark each unit clearly to identify differences. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Steel for Painted Metal Deck Units: ASTM A 611, Grade C, D or E. B. Sheet Metal Accessories: ASTM A 526, galvanized. C. Primer Paint: Manufacturer's standard primer for baked -on finish. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Roof Deck Units - General: Provide deck complying with SDI specifications for properties indicated. , B. Standard Roof Deck Unit Type 1 : Comply with the following: 1. Profile type: Wide rib (Type WR). 03860296/96 STEEL ROOF DECK 05313-2 -- LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 1. Install bridging in accordance with SJI requirements. 2. Bridging installation shall proceed concurrently with joist erection and shall be completed before joists are subjected to construction loads. E. K-Series Joist Anchorage: 1. Bolt joists to structural support members as required by SJI "Specifications." F. Touch-up Painting: Immediately after erection, solvent clean and hand- or power -tool clean (SSPC-SP 2 or SSPC-SP 3) completed field connections and damaged surfaces of shop -primed joists and adjoining structural steel. Apply corrosion -resistant touch-up paint compatible with primer. END OF SECTION 05210 03860296/96 STEEL JOISTS 05210-3 r i r t LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 SECTION 05315 - STEEL FORM DECK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Noncomposite steel form deck. 2. Framing for openings up to 18 inches. B. Related Sections: 1. Concrete: Division 3. 2. Structural steel: Elsewhere in Division 5. 3. Steel joists: Elsewhere in Division 5. 4. Steel roof deck: Elsewhere in Division 5. 1.2 REFERENCES 900-9268 A. ASTM A 446/A 446M-93 — Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, Structural (Physical) Quality; 1993. B. ASTM A 525-93 — Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process; 1993. C. AWS D1.1-92 — Structural Welding Code —Steel; American Welding Society; 1992. D. AWS D1.3-89 — Structural Welding Code —Sheet Steel; American Welding Society; 1989. E. MIL P-21035B(NAVY) — Paint, High Zinc Dust Content, Galvanizing Repair (Metric); U.S. Department of Defense; 1991. F. SDI Publication No. 28 — Steel Deck Institute Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, Roof Decks, Corner Decks and Cellular Metal Floor Deck with Electrical Distribution; Steel Deck Institute, Inc.; 1992. G. Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members; American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI); 1986 (with 1989 Addendum and 1990 Errata). 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit deck manufacturer's specifications and product information, indicating compliance with specified requirements. 1. Include Steel Deck Institute certification of manufacturer's deck characteristics. 2. Include manufacturer's certification of deck characteristics. 3. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions, including specific installation sequence. 4. Submit manufacturer's data on mechanical fasteners. 03860296/96 STEEL FORM DECK 05315-1 r' 9 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 B. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed drawings indicating deck types and plan layout; support locations and anchorages; projections; openings and reinforcement; and pertinent details and accessories. C. Calculations: Submit manufacturer's documentation of deck design loads, allowable spans, and section properties. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with requirements of the following, except where exceeded by the contract documents or requirements of governing authorities: 1. AISI "Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members." 2. AWS D1.3 "Structural Welding Code —Sheet Steel." 3. "Steel Deck Institute Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, Roof Decks, and Cellular Metal Floor Deck with Electrical Distribution." B. Qualifications: Qualify welding processes and welding operators according to procedures specified in AWS D1.1. C. Installer: A company specializing in this type of work and with 3 years of documented experience. 1.5 STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Storage: Separate sheets and store units on dry wood sleepers, sloped to promote drainage. Cover with waterproof material ventilated to avoid condensation. B. Marking: Unless deck units are all of the same gage and yield strength for the project, mark each unit clearly to identify differences. _ PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Steel for Galvanized Metal Deck Units: ASTM A 446. B. Galvanizing: ASTM A 525, G60 coating where indicated. C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: Comply with requirements of Military Specification MIL P-21035B, Type I or II. 2.2 FABRICATION -' A. Steel Form Deck - General: Provide units complying with SDI specifications for deck type indicated. B. Steel Form Deck: Comply with the following: 1. Profile type: Corrugated. 2. Material: Galvanized steel. 03860296/96 STEEL FORM DECK 05315-2 0 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 2. Material: G60 prime painted steel. a. Minimum yield strength: 33,000 psi. b. Minimum metal thickness: 0.034 inch. 3. Spanning configuration: Multiple span. 4. Sheet coverage width: Contractor's option. 5. Side joints: Lapped or lock seam, at contractor's option. 6. Flute sides: Plain vertical faces. C. Standard Roof Deck Unit Type 2: Comply with the following: 1. Profile type: Wide rib (Type WR) Cellular. 2. Material: G90 prime painted steel. a. Minimum yield strength: 33,000 psi. b. Minimum metal thickness: 0.034 inch. 3. Spanning configuration: Multiple span. 4. Sheet coverage width: Contractor's option. 5. Side joints: Lapped or lock seam, at contractor's option. 6. Flute sides: Plain vertical faces. 7. Cellular bottom plate: a. Minimum yield strength: 33,000 psi. b. Factory fabricated. C. Minimum metal thickness: 0.034 inch. 900-9268 D. Ridge/Valley Plates: Fabricate of same material and gage as deck units, in slope to match roof slope, not less than 4-1/2 inches wide. E. Fasteners: Galvanized hardened steel, self -tapping. F. Weld Washers: Uncoated mild steel, sized as recommended by manufacturer of steel deck units. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine field conditions and substrates to receive metal decking, and verify that existing conditions are acceptable before commencing installation. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install deck units and accessories in compliance with Steel Deck Institute specifications, manufacturer's recommendations, and requirements of this specification section. Fasten deck units to supports promptly after placement and alignment. Do not leave placed sheets unattached at end of working day. 1. Shop drawings: Comply with final shop drawings. 2. Steel bearing: Allow minimum bearing of 1-1/2 inches at steel supports; align and level deck units. 3. Placement: Place deck units flat and square, without excessive warp or deflection. a. Do not stretch or contract side lap interlocks. 4. End laps: Lap ends of deck units over supports and make laps not less than 2 inches. �^ 03860296/96 STEEL ROOF DECK I` 05313-3 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 — 5. Precautions: Coordinate location of decking bundles to prevent overloading of structure. — B. Fastening: 1. Fasten roof deck units to steel supporting members as follows: a. Minimum 5/8-inch-diameter fusion welds or elongated welds of equal strength. 1. Use weld washers for metal of less than 0.028 inch in thickness. b. Mechanical fasteners approved by the architect may be used in lieu of welds. C. Spacing: 12 inches on center average, but not more than 18 inches apart and not fewer than 2 fasteners at any support. 2. Side laps: At contractor's option, fasten side laps of adjacent deck units using one of the — following methods: a. Weld laps. b. Mechanically clinch, or button -punch. C. Mechanically fasten, using self -tapping machine screws of No. 8 size or larger. d. Spacing: Not to exceed 18 inches on center. C. Openings: 1. Cut deck units and accessories to fit snugly around other work penetrating decks. 2. At openings up to 18 inches in either dimension, provide reinforcement and closure strips as shown or as required for strength and rigidity. D. Metal Accessories: Fasten metal accessories securely to deck units, using welding or mechanical fasteners as appropriate to conditions. 1. Install other metal accessories as indicated. E. Touch-up Painting: After installation of deck units and accessories, wire -brush burned and .— abraded areas and rust spots and apply touch-up paint. 1. On shop primed surfaces, apply matching paint. 3.3 CLEANING A. Upon completion of work, remove all rubbish, debris, and excess materials from project site. — END OF SECTION 05313 03860296/96 STEEL ROOF DECK 05313-4 _ LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 SECTION 05400 - COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Cold formed metal framing. B. Related Sections: I. Gypsum Sheathing: Section 06100. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data. 900-9268 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: 1. Alabama Metal Industries Corporation (AMICO). 2. Dietrich Industries, Incorporated. 3. Dale/Incor. 4. Gold Bond Building Products, a National Gypsum Division. 5. Marino Industries Corporation. 6. Unimast, Inc. (formerly a part of USG). 2.2 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING A. Fabricate metal framing units from ASTM A 446, A 570, or A 611 steel sheet. 1. Finish: Galvanized (zinc -coated), Class G60, minimum. B. C-Shaped Studs: Provide load -bearing studs fabricated from steel and sized as indicated; C-shaped in cross section, 1.625-inch flange, with flange return lip. C. Framing Accessories: Fabricate from minimum 16 gage steel sheet of the type and finish used for framing members. Provide manufacturer's standard configuration for the following accessory items: 1. Track channel. 2. Cold -rolled channels, 1-1/2 inch depth. 3. Clip angles. 2.3 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Fasteners: 1. Threaded fasteners: ASTM A 90, hot -dip galvanized. 03860296/96 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400-1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 2. Anchorage devices: Hot -dip galvanized steel or stainless steel. Acceptable types include: a. Power -driven anchor screws. b. Drilled expansion bolts. C. Screws with sleeves. 3. Fasteners: ASTM C 954; self -drilling, self -tapping, bugle head galvanized or cadmium plated steel screws. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Comply with requirements of ASTM C 1007 except where exceeded by other requirements. B. Install framing accessories such as web stiffeners, diagonal bracing, and bridging as indicated or required. C. Fastening: Join components using screws or bolts. 1. Wire tying of framing elements is prohibited. 3.2 STUD FASCIA & SOFFIT FRAMING A. Correctly position runner tracks at base and top of studs. Attach runner tracks to structure in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for substrate and fastener type used. Use fasteners at all track terminations and corners. B. Construct comers using minimum of 3 studs. END OF SECTION 05400 03860296/96 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400-2 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 a. Minimum yield strength: 33,000 psi. b. Minimum metal thickness: 0.014 inch C. Maximum profile height: 9/16 inch. 3. Spanning configuration: Multiple span. r4. Sheet coverage width: Contractor's option. 5. Side joints: Lapped seam. r C. Fasteners: Galvanized hardened steel, self -tapping. i D. Weld Washers: Uncoated mild steel, sized as recommended by manufacturer of steel deck units. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine field conditions and substrates to receive metal decking, and verify that existing conditions are acceptable before commencing installation. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install deck units and accessories in compliance with Steel Deck Institute specifications, manufacturer's recommendations, and requirements of this specification section. Fasten deck units to supports promptly after placement and alignment. Do not leave placed sheets unattached at end of working day. 1. Shop drawings: Comply with final shop drawings. 2. Steel bearing: Allow minimum bearing of 1-1/2 inches at steel supports; align and level deck units. 3. Placement: Place deck units fiat and square, without excessive warp or deflection. 4. End laps: Lap ends of deck units over supports and make laps not less than 2 inches. 5. Precautions: Coordinate location of decking bundles to prevent overloading of structure. B. Fastening: 1. Fasten form deck units to steel supporting members as follows: a. Minimum 5/8-inch-diameter fusion welds or elongated welds of equal strength. 1. Use weld washers for metal of less than 0.028 inch in thickness. b. Mechanical fasteners approved by the architect may be used in lieu of welds. C. Spacing: 12 inches on center average, but not more than 18 inches apart and not fewer than 2 fasteners at any support. 2. Side laps: Fasten side laps of adjacent deck units as follows: a. Weld laps. b. Spacing: Not to exceed 24 inches on center. C. Openings: 1. Cut deck units and accessories to fit snugly around other work penetrating decks. 2. At openings up to 18 inches in either dimension, provide reinforcement and closure strips as shown or as required for strength and rigidity. r r, 03860296/96 STEEL FORM DECK 05315-3 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 D. Touch-up Painting: After installation of deck units and accessories, wire -brush burned and abraded areas and rust spots and apply touch-up paint. 1. Apply galvanizing repair paint to galvanized surfaces, complying with manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 CLEANING A. Clear debris from deck before concrete is placed. B. Upon completion of work, remove all rubbish, debris, and excess materials from project site. END OF SECTION 05315 03860296/96 STEEL FORM DECK 05315-4 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS 900-9268 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Shop coatings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS - METALS A. Steel Shapes: 1. Plates, bars, angles, channels, and H-sections: ASTM A 36. 2. Galvanizing: Hot -dip galvanizing after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A 123. 3. Tube: a. Hot -rolled: ASTM A 501. b. Cold -formed: ASTM A 500. 4. Pipe: ASTM A 53 (black steel and hot -dip galvanized). B. Steel Sheet: 1. For nonstructural uses: Cold -rolled, ASTM A 366; hot -rolled, ASTM A 569. 2.2 MATERIALS -MISCELLANEOUS A. Grout: Nonmetallic, noncorrodible, nonshrink, factory blended and packaged; complying with ASTM C 1107; recommended by manufacturer for exterior use. B. Concrete: Normal weight ready -mix concrete as specified in Division 3. 1. Compressive strength: 2500 pounds per square inch, minimum, at 28 days, unless otherwise indicated. C. Concrete Inserts: Style as required for application. D. Fasteners: Use fasteners suitable for the material being fastened and for the type of connection required. 1. For exterior use or built into exterior walls: Nonferrous stainless steel, zinc coated or cadmium plated. 2. Use fasteners of same material as items being fastened unless otherwise indicated. 3. Bolts and studs: ASTM A 307. 4. Nuts: ASTM A 563. 5. Lag bolts: FS FF-B-561. 6. Machine screws: FS FF-S-92. 7. Wood screws: FS FF-S-111. 8. Plain washers: FS FF-W-92. 9. Lock washers: FS FF-W-84. 10. Expansion shields: FS FF-S-325. 11. Toggle bolts: FS FF-B-588. 03860296/96 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 - E. Galvanizing Repair Paint: Zinc dust paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 or MIL P-21035B, — TypeIorII. F. Shop Primer: Rust -inhibitive, lead and chromate free, low VOC primer, complying with FS TT-P-664, or equivalent. 2.3 FABRICATION - GENERAL A. Fabricate and shop -assemble in largest practical sections for delivery to site. 1. Prepare and reinforce fabrications as required to receive applied items. 2. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. 3. Make exposed joints tight, flush, and hairline. B. Fasteners: Use concealed fasteners if possible. 1. Exposed fasteners: Flathead, countersunk type unless otherwise indicated. C. Anchors: Fabricate to suit conditions indicated; use anchors of same material and finish as item except where specifically indicated otherwise. D. Welding: 1. Provide continuous welds at welded corners and seams. 2. Exposed welds: Grind flush and smooth. E. Joints Exposed to Weather: Fabricate to keep water out, or provide adequate drainage of water that penetrates. 2.4 FABRICATION - SHEET METAL A. Comply with general fabrication requirements. — B. Bend sheet metal corners to smallest possible radius. C. Welding Steel Sheet: Comply with AWS D1.3 recommendations. 2.5 FABRICATION - SHOP COATINGS A. Shop prime all iron and steel fabrications, except: 1. Galvanized fabrications. 2. Fabrications embedded in concrete or mortar. 3. Fabrications specified as not to be primed. 4. Fabrications which are not to receive a finish paint system. 5. Fabrications for which an entirely field -applied coating is required. _ B. Prepare surfaces to be coated as follows: 1. Solvent -clean in accordance with SSPC-SP 1. — 2. Exterior fabrications: Clean in accordance with SSPC-SP 5, SSPC-SP 6, SSPC-SP 8, or SSPC-SP 10. 3. Interior fabrications: Clean in accordance with SSPC-SP 3, SSPC-SP 5, SSPC-SP 6, SSPC-SP 8, or SSPC-SP 10. 03860296/96 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-2 -- LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 C. Shop Priming: Comply with SSPC-PA I. 1. Apply primer immediately following surface preparation. 2. Do not prime surfaces to be welded. 3. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact bond with concrete. 4. Apply extra coat to comers, welds, edges, and fasteners. D. Shop Painting: Comply with SSPC PA 1. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Anchor metal fabrications to substrates indicated; provide all fasteners required. B. Perform all field fabrication required for installation. 1. Fit joints tightly. 2. Weld joints as indicated. a. Weld in accordance with AWS code. b. Exposed welds: Grind flush and smooth. C. Do not cut or weld items galvanized after fabrication that are indicated for bolted or screwed connections. D. Install items in correct location, plumb and level, without rack or warp. 3.2 CLEANING AND TOUCH-UP A. Touch up damage to galvanized surfaces using galvanizing repair paint in accordance with ASTM A 780. B. Touch up shop paint immediately after erection. END OF SECTION 05500 03860296/96 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-3 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 SECTION 05530 - GRATINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Gratings. 2. Shop coatings. 900-9268 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS - METALS A. Steel Shapes: 1. Plates, bars, angles, channels, and H-sections: ASTM A 36. 2. Grating bars: ASTM A 36 or ASTM A 569. 3. Galvanizing: Hot -dip galvanizing after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A 123. 4. Tube: a. Hot -rolled: ASTM A 501. b. Cold -formed: ASTM A 500. 5. Pipe: ASTM A 53 (black steel and hot -dip galvanized). B. Steel Sheet: 1. For nonstructural uses: Cold -rolled, ASTM A 366; hot -rolled, ASTM A 569. 2.2 MANUFACTURED COMPONENTS A. Bar Gratings: Manufacture in accordance with "Standard Specifications for Metal Bar Grating and Metal Bar Grating Treads" (part of NAAMM MBG 531), except for specific requirements specified here. 1. Galvanizing, where indicated: Minimum 1.5 ounces zinc per square foot of coated surface; galvanized after fabrication. B. Bar Gratings: 1. Steel. 2. Welded construction. 3. Bar sizes, dimensions, and spacings as indicated on drawings. 4. Cross bar spacing: 4 inches. 5. Top surface: Plain. 6. Finish: Hot -dip galvanized. 2.3 MATERIALS - MISCELLANEOUS A. Grout: Nonmetallic, noncorrodiible, nonshrink, factory blended and packaged; complying with ASTM C 1107; recommended by manufacturer for exterior use. B. Concrete Inserts: Style as required for application. 03860296/96 GRATINGS 05530-1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 C. Fasteners: Use fasteners suitable for the material being fastened and for the type of connection -- required. 1. For exterior use or built into exterior walls: Nonferrous stainless steel, zinc coated or cadmium plated. 2. Use fasteners of same material as items being fastened unless otherwise indicated. 3. Bolts and studs: ASTM A 307. 4. Nuts: ASTM A 563. 5. Lag bolts: FS FF-B-561. 6. Machine screws: FS FF-S-92. 7. Wood screws: FS FF-S-111. - 8. Plain washers: FS FF-W-92. 9. Lock washers: FS FF-W-84. 10. Expansion shields: FS FF-S-325. 11. Toggle bolts: FS FF-B-588. - D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: Zinc dust paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 or MIL P-21035B, Type I or H. E. Shop Primer: Rust -inhibitive, lead and chromate free, low VOC primer, complying with FS TT-P-664, or equivalent. -` 2.4 FABRICATION - GENERAL A. Fabricate and shop -assemble in largest practical sections for delivery to site. 1. Prepare and reinforce fabrications as required to receive applied items. 2. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. - 3. Make exposed joints tight, flush, and hairline. B. Fasteners: Use concealed fasteners if possible. 1. Exposed fasteners: Flathead, countersunk type unless otherwise indicated. C. Anchors: Fabricate to suit conditions indicated; use anchors of same material and finish as item except where specifically indicated otherwise. D. Welding: 1. Welding of steel: Comply with AWS D 1.1 recommendations. 2. Provide continuous welds at welded corners and seams. 3. Exposed welds: Grind flush and smooth. E. Joints Exposed to Weather: Fabricate to keep water out, or provide adequate drainage of water that penetrates. 2.5 FABRICATION -SHEET METAL A. Comply with general fabrication requirements. B. Bend sheet metal corners to smallest possible radius. C. Welding Steel Sheet: Comply with AWS D1.3 recommendations. 03860296/96 GRATINGS 05530-2 k: LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 2.6 FABRICATION -GRATINGS 900-9268 A. Gratings - General: 1. Arrange removable panels to permit removal without displacing penetrating items. B. Bar Gratings: 1. Banding bars: Cross section not less than bearing bars. 2. Provide banding bars welded to perimeter of removable grating sections. a. Provide minimum of 4 hold-down fasteners for each removable section. b. Fasteners: As recommended by grating manufacturer, or as suitable for the purpose. 3. Make no cuts or notches in bearing bars. 2.7 FABRICATION - SHOP COATINGS A. Shop prime all iron and steel fabrications, except: 1. Galvanized fabrications. 2. Fabrications embedded in concrete or mortar. 3. Fabrications specified as not to be primed. 4. Fabrications which are not to receive a finish paint system. 5. Fabrications for which an entirely field -applied coating is required. B. Prepare surfaces to be coated as follows: 1. Solvent -clean in accordance with SSPC-SP 1. 2. Exterior fabrications: Clean in accordance with SSPC-SP 5, SSPC-SP 6, SSPC-SP 8, or SSPC-SP 10. 3. Interior fabrications: Clean in accordance with SSPC-SP 3, SSPC-SP 5, SSPC-SP 6, SSPC-SP 8, or SSPC-SP 10. C. Shop Priming: Comply with SSPC-PA 1. 1. Apply primer immediately following surface preparation. 2. Do not prime surfaces to be welded. 3. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact bond with concrete. 4. Apply extra coat to comers, welds, edges, and fasteners. D. Shop Painting: Comply with SSPC-PA 1. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Anchor metal fabrications to substrates indicated; provide all fasteners required. B. Perform all field fabrication required for installation. r 1. Fit joints tightly. t 2. Weld joints as indicated. a. Weld in accordance with AWS code. r„ b. Exposed welds: Grind flush and smooth. i 03860296/96 GRATINGS 05530-3 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 C. Do not cut or weld items galvanized after fabrication that are indicated for bolted or screwed connections. D. Install items in correct location, plumb and level, without rack or warp. 3.2 CLEANING AND TOUCH-UP A. Touch up damage to galvanized surfaces using galvanizing repair paint in accordance with ASTM A 780. B. Touch up shop paint immediately after erection. END OF SECTION 05530 03860296/96 GRATINGS 05530-4 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Carpentry work not specified as part of other sections and which generally is not exposed, except as otherwise indicated. 2. Rough carpentry for: a. Miscellaneous lumber for attachment and support of other work. b. Construction panels for miscellaneous uses. 3. Preservative treatment. 4. Wall sheathing. B. Related Sections: 1. Finish carpentry: Elsewhere in Division 6. 1.2 REFERENCES A. APA PRP-108 — Performance Standards and Policies for Structural -Use Panels; American Plywood Association, 1988 (Revised 1989). B. ASTM A 153-82(87) — Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 1982 (Reapproved 1987). C. ASTM C 79 - Gypsum Sheathing Board. D. AWPA C27-91 — Plywood - Fire -Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes; American Wood -Preservers' Association; 1991. E. AWPB LP-2-88 — American Wood Preservers Bureau Quality Control and Inspection Procedures for Softwood Lumber, Timber and Plywood Pressure Treated with Waterborne Preservatives for Above Ground Use; 1988. F. NBS PS 1-83 — Construction and Industrial Plywood; U.S. Department of Commerce, National Bureau of Standards; 1983 (with 1984 Revision). G. NIST PS 20-94 — American Softwood Lumber Standard; U.S. Department of Commerce, National Institute of Standards and Technology; 1994. H. NFPA WCD #1 — Manual for Wood Frame Construction; American Forest and Paper Association (formerly National Forest Products Association); 1988. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Lumber: Comply with NIST PS 20 and approved grading rules and inspection agencies. 03860296/96 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 — B. Inspection Agency: Any agency whose rules are approved by American Lumber Standards .— Committee. C. Grade Stamps for Concealed Lumber: Each piece of lumber, applied by inspection agency and showing compliance with each specified requirement. D. Construction Panels: Comply with NBS PS 1 where veneer plywood is specified; comply with APA PRP-108 where APA rated panels are specified; bearing APA trademark showing compliance with each specified requirement. 1.4 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect wood products and sheathing against moisture and dimensional changes. Support stacks at several uniformly spaced points to prevent deformation. Store stacks raised above ground. '— Cover to protect from rain -and snow. Select and arrange cover to allow air circulation under and all around stacks to prevent condensation. Maintain and restore displaced coverings. Remove from the site any wood products that have been subjected to moisture or that do not — comply with the specified moisture requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DIMENSION LUMBER A. Size: Provide nominal sizes indicated, complying with NIST PS 20 except where actual sizes are specifically required. 1. Surfacing: Dressed lumber (S4S). 2. Moisture content: S-dry or MC19 (19 percent maximum moisture content). a. Any allowed under referenced grading rules. 3. Grade: Construction (Light Framing). B. Miscellaneous Lumber: Provide dimension lumber and boards necessary for the support of ^ work specified in other sections, whether or not specifically indicated, and including but not limited to blocking, nailers, etc. 1. Moisture content: 19 percent maximum (S-dry). _ 2. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or standard grade. 2.2 CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. Construction Panels/Plywood: Miscellaneous uses. 1. Concealed plywood: C-C Plugged exterior. 2. Electrical/telephone panel backer: APA rated sheathing, Exposure 1, Treating Grade — fire -retardant treated. 2.3 SHEATHING A. ASTM C79; moisture and fire resistant type; 1/2 inch thick except where otherwise scheduled, maximum permissible lengths; ends square cut; book tongue and grooved edges; water repellent — paper faces. 03860296/96 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-2 _ r LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 1. r., 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS f L' A. Fasteners: Provide as required by applicable codes and as otherwise indicated. 1. Provide fasteners with a hot -dip zinc coating (ASTM A 153) for treated lumber and where wood is in ground contact, subjected to high relative humidity, or exposed to weather. B. Joint Tape: Rubberized asphalt with polyethylene film backing, minimum 30 mils thick. 2.5 WOOD TREATMENT BY PRESSURE PROCESS A. Aboveground Iumber: AWPB LP-2 (waterborne preservatives). 1. Kiln dried after treatment to 19 percent maximum moisture content for lumber and 18 percent for plywood. 2. Treat the following: a. Wood in contact with roofing, flashing, or waterproofing. b. Wood in contact with masonry or concrete. C. Wood within 18 inches of grade. d. Other members indicated. B. Fasteners for Preservative Treated Wood: Hot -dip galvanized steel (ASTM A153). 1. Fire -retardant treated plywood: AWPA C27. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Arrange work to use full length pieces except where lengths would exceed commercially available lengths. Discard pieces with defects that would lower the required strength or appearance of the work. B. Cut and fit members accurately. install plumb and true to line and level. C. Fasten carpentry in accordance with applicable codes and recognized standards. D. Where exposed, countersink nails and fill flush with suitable wood filler. E. Use fasteners of appropriate type and length. Predrill members when necessary to avoid splitting wood. 3.2 MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY .— A. Provide miscellaneous blocking, hailers, grounds, and framing as shown and as required for support of facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. Cut and shape to the required size. Provide in locations required by other work. B. Use countersunk fasteners appropriate to applied loading. C. Install permanent grounds for concrete and masonry where required. 03860296/96 ROUGH CARPENTRY LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 3.3 WOOD FRAMING - GENERAL A. Comply with sizes, spacing, and configurations indicated. Where not specifically indicated, comply with applicable codes and NFPA "Manual for Wood Frame Construction." Splice members only where specifically indicated or approved. B. Space fasteners as indicated. Where not specifically indicated, comply with applicable codes _ and the "Recommended Nailing Schedule" of NFPA "Manual for Wood Frame Construction" and "National Design Specification for Wood Construction." 1. Nail or screw miscellaneous plywood panels to supports. 3.4 SHEATHING A. Install sheathing so that long edges are parallel to studs. Center edges over studs. B. Provide solid wood blocking or metal framing to support horizontal edges which do not bear on horizontal framing members. C. Coordinate installation of flashings, anchors, and similar items necessary to construct and weatherproof wall systems. D. Apply rubberized asphalt joint tape to edges and joints of sheathing. E. Install to a maximum allowable tolerance variation from plumb, level, and true to line of 1/8 inch in 10 feet. END OF SECTION 06100 03860296/96 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-4 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 SECTION 06410 - CUSTOM CABINETWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior architectural woodwork. a. Wood cabinets. b. Cabinet hardware. C. Plastic laminate clad tops. B. Related Sections: 1. Hollow Core Doors: Section 08211. 2. Hardware References: Section 08710. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ANSI A135.4 - Basic Hardboard. B. ANSI A208.1 - Mat Formed Wood Particleboard. C. AWI - Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards D. BHMA A156.1 - Butts and Hinges. E. BHMA A156.9 - Cabinet Hardware. F. BHMA A156.11 -Cabinet Locks. G. BHMA A156.16 - Auxiliary Hardware. H. BHMA A156.18 - Materials and Finishes. I. FS MMM-A-130 - Adhesive, Contact. J. HPMA HP - American Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood. K. NEMA LD3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates. L. NHLA - Rules for the Measurement and Inspection of Hardwood & Cypress M. PS 1- Construction and Industrial Plywood. N. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard. 900-9268 03860296/96 CUSTOM CABINETWORK 06410-1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 1.3 SUBMITTALS — A. Shop Drawings. 1. Indicate materials, component profiles and elevations, assembly methods, joint details, fastening methods, accessory listings, hardware location and schedule of finishes. 2. For shop drawings submitted in phases, number phases in sequential order and provide master cross reference indicating room number in numerical sequence, millwork ` elevation and shop drawing sheet where detailed. B. Samples 1. Submit four 2 x 3 inch size samples, illustrating counter top and cabinet finish. C. Plastic Laminate: 1. Product data. 2. Samples for selection. 3. Maintenance data. D. Cabinet Hardware: 1. Product data. 2. One sample of each type. -- 3. Samples showing each finish on each item of hardware exposed to view. 4. Maintenance data. S. Operation data for drawer slides. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality of Materials and Workmanship: Provide woodwork that complies with requirements of "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards," published by Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) (hereinafter referred to as "woodworking standard"). B. Where contract documents indicate deviations from the woodworking standard, the contract documents shall govern. _ C. Coordinate installation of woodwork with other work to avoid damage. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CABINETWORK _ A. All Cabinetwork: 1. Grades: As indicated on drawings. 2. Species: As indicated on drawings. 3. Finishes: As indicated on drawings. 2.2 WOOD MATERIALS A. Lumber: Species and grade as specified in woodworking standard, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Comply with applicable requirements of AWI Section 100. 03860296/96 CUSTOM CABINETWORK 06410-2 _ F r^ yam:. LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 2. Moisture content at time of fabrication: Not greater than optimum moisture content as specified in woodworking standard. 3. Provide lumber dressed on all exposed faces, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Do not use twisted, warped, bowed, or otherwise defective lumber. 5. Sizes indicated are nominal, unless otherwise indicated. 6. Do not mark or color lumber, except where such marking will be concealed in finish work. B. Plywood: Types, grades, and cores as specified in the woodworking standard, except as otherwise specified in this section. 1. Comply with applicable requirements of AWI Section 200. 2. Medium density overlaid plywood: Exterior Type. C. Medium Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Product Class MD.. D. Hardboard: AHA A135.4; tempered, with exposed faces smooth. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. High Pressure Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD 3. 1. Grades and thicknesses required by AWI. B. Transparent Finish Materials for Field Finishing: As specified in Division 9. C. Opaque Finish Materials for Field Finishing: As specified in Division 9. D. Wood Filler for Transparent Finish Woodwork: Match final finish color. E. Fasteners: Style, size, material, and finish as required for the purpose. 2.4 CABINET HARDWARE A. Provide hardware and accessories indicated and as required for a complete installation. B. Concealed Hinges: Totally concealed style, self -closing, opening 180 degrees. C. Butt Hinges: BHMA 156.1, A8133. D. Pulls: Standard wire style, 3 1/2-inch centers by 5/16-inch diameter, no escutcheons. E. Drawer slides: BHMA A156.9, Type B05051, Side -mounted, 75-pound capacity, full extension, with nylon ball -bearing rollers; positive pull-out stop, self -closing, lift -out feature. F. Locks: BHMA A156.11 , E07261, 5-pin tumbler, sized for door thickness. G. Shelf supports: BHMA A156.9, B04013, brass or nickel plated steel, no plastics allowed. H. Closet Rod: BHMA A156.16, Type L03131, 7/8" diameter stainless steel. 03860296/96 CUSTOM CABINETWORK 06410-3 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 I. Coat Hooks: BHMA A156.16, Type L03111, stainless steel or solid brass. — J. Silencers: BHMA A156.16, Type L03021. K. Lever Extension Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.16, Type L04091. L. Finishes on exposed hardware: Comply with BHMA A156.18 as follows: _ 1. Exposed Hardware: 630, satin stainless steel. 2. Concealed hardware: Manufacturer's standard non -corroding plated finish, complying with applicable requirements of BHMA A156.9. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate in sizes and shapes indicated and using details indicated. B. Complete fabrication and assembly in shop. 1. For applied fixtures and fittings, cut openings in shop. 2. Ease edges of solid lumber members using: a. 1/16-inch radius for members 1 inch or less nominal thickness. b. 1/8-inch radius for members more than 1 inch nominal thickness. — C. Drilled holes, at 1 inch spacing, for shelf support clips at each shelf indicated to be adjustable. D. Make special provisions as required for 1 3/8" doors at dorm lockers. This may require reinforced jambs for hinges, special cylinders, flush bolts, internal blocking, etc. E. Prepare for finishing in accordance with woodworking standard. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Verify that blocking and backings have been installed at appropriate locations for anchorage, and for coat hooks or other required hardware on dorm locker doors. 3.2 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Do not begin installation of interior woodwork until potentially damaging construction operations are complete in the installation area. ` B. Field Joinery: Comply with requirements of the woodworking standard for shop joinery. C. Make joints neatly, with uniform appearance. D. Install woodwork in correct location, plumb and level, without rack or warp. 1. Install with no variation in flushness of adjoining surfaces. E. Touch-up shop finishes at field cuts. r- 03860296196 CUSTOM CABINETWORK 06410-4 _ r LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 t E �. F. Secure woodwork to blocking or use anchors indicated. 1. Where anchorage method is not indicated, conceal all fasteners where possible. 2. Where exposed nailing is required or indicated, use finishing nails, countersink, and fill. r G. Repair damaged and defective woodwork to eliminate visual and functional defects; where repair is not possible, replace woodwork. H. Cabinets: 1. Install so doors operate smoothly, with edges aligned. 2. Install so drawers operate smoothly. ' 3. Install all hardware not installed in'shop. 4. Anchor tops securely. 5. Install tops level, within 1/8 inch in 8 feet. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect woodwork from damage and maintain design environmental conditions. B. Repair and damaged woodwork like new. 3.4 HARDWARE SCHEDULE .: A. Flush Reveal Cabinets Each door to have: 2 concealed, self closing hinges. 1 pull. 1 lock where indicated on drawings. Each drawer to have: Pair drawer slides. 1 pull. 1 lock where indicated on drawings. B. Wardrobe Cabinets Single door cabinets to have: 1 1/2 pair butts 1 lock r` 1 pull 3 silencers 1 clothes rod �^ 2 coat hooks l V i I f r- 03860296/96 CUSTOM CABINETWORK 06410-5 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 Double door cabinet to have: 3 pair butts l lock 2 pulls 1 set flush bolts 2 silencers 1 clothes rod 4 coat hooks END OF SECTION 06410 900-9268 03860296/96 CUSTOM CABINETWORK 06410-6 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 SECTION 07180 - WATER REPELLENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY 900-9268 A. Section Includes: 1. Application of clear water repellent coating to the following exposed surfaces: a. Exterior: 1. Brick masonry. 2. Concrete unit masonry. B. Section Does Not Include: Application of water repellents to horizontal traffic surfaces. C. Coordinate the application of this materials with the application of the Graffiti Resistant coating called for in Section 09910. Follow each manufacture's recommendations. Notify architect of potential conflicts. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical product data and recommendations for use of each type of product required. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Detailed application instructions, including weather limitations, condition of substrates, surface preparation or cleaning, protection of adjacent surfaces, application of product, and cleaning of accidental over -spray and spills. C. Samples - Clear Water Repellent: Submit 16-inch-square samples of each material to receive water repellent. Leave 1/3 of panel untreated, apply 1 coat of water repellent to 1/3 of panel, and apply 2 coats to remaining 1/3 of panel. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable rules of the pollution control regulatory agency having jurisdiction in the project locale regarding use of hydrocarbon solvents. B. Mock-up: Apply water repellent to mock-up constructed as work of other section(s). 1. Do not apply water repellents to project surfaces without the architect's approval of water-repellent mock-up. 1VENLI,il:`4711. rd A. Furnish warranty to provide materials and labor required to repair or replace materials which fail to perform properly due to defective materials or workmanship. This warranty shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights the owner may have against the contractor under the contract documents. 1. Warranty period is 5 years after date of substantial completion. I �� 03860296/96 WATER REPELLENTS 07180-1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CLEAR WATER REPELLENTS A. General: Provide products recommended by the manufacturer for compatibility and proper performance when applied to the substrates indicated to receive water repellent treatment. B. Products: The following products, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: 1. Silane -- 40 percent active ingredients: Ethanol based, water based, or solvent based polymerized silane solution: a. "Aridox"; Anti Hydro International, Inc. b. "Versaseal 'S' 40"; Applied Polymers of America, Inc. C. "Dri-Sil 40 Silane"; Dow Corning Corporation. d. "Chem-Trete BSM-40"; Huls America Inc. e. "Pentane 40"; L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. f. "Hydrozo Enviroseal 40"; Hydrozo Inc. g. "Klere-Seal940S"; Pecora Corporation. h. "Weather Seal H40% ProSoCo, Inc. 2. Siloxane — Mineral spirit based alkyl-alkoxy siloxane solution: a. "CP-250"; Chemical Products Corporation. b. "Euco Weather -Guard"; The Euclid Chemical Company. C. "Hydropel"; L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. d. "Shed Ox"; L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. e. "Rainstopper 100"; Textured Coatings of America, Inc. f. "Rainstopper 200"; Textured Coatings of America, Inc. g. "Water -Guard"; Nox-Crete, Inc. h. "Weather Seal Special Siloxane"; ProSoCo, Inc. i. "Weather Seal Siloxane"; ProSoCo, Inc. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Do not proceed with application of water repellent until sealants for joints adjacent to surfaces to receive water repellent treatment have been installed and cured. B. Protection: 1. Mask off and cover adjacent surfaces to prevent contamination by water repellents whether by spray, drift, drip, or spillage. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install water repellants to all exterior masonry surfaces. B. Comply with manufacturer's written application instructions. L 03860296/96 WATER REPELLENTS 07180-2 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 C. Unless specifically contraindicated by manufacturer's instructions, use low pressure spray equipment to apply a heavy saturation coat to substrate followed by a second saturation coat after the manufacturer's recommended drying time has elapsed. D. Remove protective coverings from adjacent surfaces. END OF SECTION 07180 ,,, 03860296196 WATER REPELLENTS 07180-3 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 f ,�. SECTION 07410 - MANUFACTURED METAL ROOF AND WALL PANELS f a PART 1-GENERAL i 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Manufactured metal roofing system: a. Manufactured metal roof panels. b. Installation accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Sheet metal flashing: Elsewhere in Division 7. 1.2 REFERENCES 900-9268 A. ASTM A 792-93a — Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55 % Aluminum -Zinc Alloy -Coated by the Hot -Dip Process, General Requirements; 1993. B. ASTM D 226-89 — Standard Specification for Asphalt -Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing yand Waterproofing, 1989. C. Roofing Materials and Systems Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.(UL); 1993. D. UL 580 — Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 1994. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Provide for expansion and contraction of system components due to ambient temperature and solar heat gain. Accommodate movement due to temperature change without buckling, undue stress on structural elements, reduction of performance, or other damaging effects. a. Anticipated ambient temperature range: 0 to 110 degrees F. B. Wind Uplift: Provide metal roof panel systems which have been tested in accordance with UL 580 and listed in the UL "Roofing Materials and Systems Directory" for the following rating: 1. Class 60. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's written technical information, including performance data, details, and installation recommendations, which demonstrate that metal panel assembly components comply with contract documents. ,�, 03860296/96 MANUFACTURED METAL ROOF AND WALL PANELS 07410-1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 B. Shop Drawings: Drawings which show arrangement and orientation of panels and details of panel joints, corners, custom profiles, supporting devices, and closure trim and flashing. Show panel system in relation to adjacent construction. C. Samples for Selection of Coated Finish Colors: 4 x 6 inch square pieces of actual panel materials. Submit full range of samples. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A company with a minimum of 5 years' successful experience in the design, fabrication, and installation of metal panel systems comparable in size and nature to those required for this project. B. Field Measurements: Measure in -place construction on which panel system will be installed if possible, before fabrication of panels. If not feasible, fabricate material to allow in -field trimming of panels to assure proper fit. 1. Coordinate field measurements and shop drawings with shop fabrication to minimize field adjustments, splicing, and mechanical joints. C. The same roofer must install both flat or membrane roof and metal roofs under this contract. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Warrant coated finish against cracking, peeling, blistering, chalk in excess of 8 units, and fade in excess of 5 NBS points, for a period of 20 years, without reducing or otherwise limiting any other rights to correction which the owner may have under the contract documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufactured Metal Panel Systems: Furnish basic materials, including panels, accessories, and fasteners, from a single source manufacturer. Furnish other products integral with panel system from the same manufacturer as basic materials, or from a manufacturer approved or recommended by the basic materials manufacturer. 1. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. AEP-Span Division/United Dominion Co. b. Fabral-Alvan Building Products. C. Architectural Panels, Inc. d. Berridge Manufacturing Company. e. Flexospan,Inc. f. Robertson, a United Dominion Company. g. Metal Building Components, Inc. h. Steelite, Inc. .y r- 03860296/96 MANUFACTURED METAL ROOF AND WALL PANELS 07410-2 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 2.2 MATERIALS �, I A. "Galvalume" Sheet: ASTM A 792; steel sheet, coated with zinc -aluminum alloy, manufactured under licensing requirements of BlEC International Inc. 2.3 ROOF SYSTEM A. System Type: Uninsulated system consisting of roof panels with concealed attachment clips in panel; clips secured directly to rigid substrate. 1. Seam type: Panel joint covered and locked by applied cap or strip (batten cover). 2. Fabricate panels from "Galvalume" sheet steel, minimum 24 gage (0.034 inch thick). 3. Exterior finish: Fluoropolymer. 4. Interior (underside) finish: Manufacturer's standard corrosion -inhibiting wash coat. 5. Panel width (nominal coverage): 16 inches. 6. Panel profile: Match MBCI Craftsman Series HB16-112. Color to be selected from standard colors. B. Rigid Insulation under the panels: The term "Uninsulated" is used to indicate the roof panel itself is not insulated. Insulation is required, however, under the panel as shown in the drawing details. This insulation should be the same type as used on the flat roof areas and may be either one or two layers totaling a minimum of R-19. C. Underlayment: Unperforated asphalt -saturated felt; ASTM D 226, Type II, No. 30. D. Concealed Panel Clips: 1. Fabricate from galvanized steel. 2. Provide roof system manufacturer's standard type clips to suit project requirements, including but not limited to the following: a. Live loads. b. Thermal movement; accommodate expansion and contraction without introducing stress into roof system. C. Slope of roof. d. Special conditions at transitions, penetrations, and terminations. E. Fasteners: 1. Threaded fasteners - general: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion -resistant fasteners of size and type required for intended application. a. Use of cadmium -plated fasteners is not allowed. 2. Rivets: Noncorrosive metal, compatible with metals to be fastened. F. Accessories: 1. Flexible closures: Closed -cell neoprene rubber, formed to fit panel profile with 5 to 10 percent compression when secured in place. 2. Sheet metal closures, flashing, and trim: Fabricate from same type of sheet metal, and with same finish, as adjacent roof panel. 3. Flexible sheet flashing: Neoprene or EPDM sheet, minimum 0.060 inch thickness. 4. Concealed sealants and gaskets: Manufacturer's standard. 5. Exposed joint sealant: As specified elsewhere in Division 7. r,, 03860296/96 MANUFACTURED METAL ROOF AND WALL PANELS 07410-3 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 G. Classification: Class B minimum. 2.4 FINISHES A. Fluoropolymer Finish: 1. Pretreatment: Caustic etch and conversion coating, each followed by water rinse. 2. Primer: Modified epoxy primer, minimum 0.2 mil thick; bake to cure. 3. Finish coat: 70 percent "Kynar 500" or "Hylar 5000" resin finish coat, minimum 0.8 mil thick; bake to cure. Match MBCI standard colors. 4. Protective film: Provide strippable plastic film, applied to finish of coil stock before forming. B. Mill Finish: As -fabricated, welds cleaned and dressed, exposed welds ground smooth. Remove oil, grease, dirt, and weld spatter from finished units. ` PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate or structural system to receive work of this section is complete, properly sized, and is laid out correctly in plan and elevations. B. Correct unacceptable substrate installations before start of metal panel erection. C. Coordinate work with other adjacent elements of building envelope to ensure watertight construction. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install manufactured metal panels in accordance with panel manufacturer's recommended practices. 1. Fasten panels to structure as necessary to comply with performance criteria, allowing for expansion and contraction due to temperature variations and building movement. 2. Install gaskets, sealants, closures, and trim as the work progresses to ensure airtight and watertight performance of the completed installation. B. Roof System Installation: 1. Underlayment: Install one layer of underlayment, starting at low point of roof. Lap seams a minimum of 2 inches. Conceal or arrange fasteners to prevent contact between fastener head and underside of metal roofing. 2. Install roof panels in single, continuous piece from eaves to ridge. 3. Roof panel installation: Install roof panels using concealed clips in panel joints. a. Use of exposed fasteners is not permitted unless specifically approved by the architect. 4. Do not penetrate finish ceiling in Apparatus Bay with screws. 03860296196 MANUFACTURED METAL ROOF AND WALL PANELS 07410-4 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Roof Systems: 1. Alignment: 1/4 inch in 20 feet for conformity to lines of roof slope and seam locations. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove protective coverings from prefinished metal surfaces after each panel is installed. B. Touch up or refinish marred or abraded surfaces. Replace damaged units and units which cannot be refinished to the architect's satisfaction. C. Clean finished surfaces using techniques and materials recommended by panel manufacturer. Protect cleaned surfaces until project completion. END OF SECTION 07410 03860296/96 MANUFACTURED METAL ROOF AND WALL PANELS 07410-5 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 SECTION 07525 - MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Substrate preparation. 2. Insulation. 3. Roof membrane. 4. Base flashings. 5. Roof accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Carpentry - wood blocking and nailers: Division 6. 2. Flashing and sheet metal (weather protection for base fleshings): Elsewhere in Division 7. 3. Roof specialties and accessories: Elsewhere in Division 7. 4. Roof drains, curbs for equipment: Division 15. 5. Metal roof panels: Elsewhere in Division 7. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM C 208-94 — Standard Specification for Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board; 1994. B. ASTM C 518-91 — Standard Test Method for Steady -State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 1991. C. ASTM C 728-91 — Standard Specification for Perlite Thermal Insulation Board; 1991. D. ASTM D 4897-89 — Standard Specification for Asphalt -Coated Glass -Fiber Base Sheet Used in Roofing; 1989. E. ASTM E 84-91a — Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 1991. F. FM P7825 — Approval Guide 1992; Factory Mutual System; 1992 (with Supplement I). G. The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual; National Roofing Contractors Association; 1989. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Factory Mutual System Classification: Provide roofing materials and a roofing system assembly which have been listed in the Factory Mutual System "Approval Guide" as being acceptable for Class I roof assembly construction. 1. Provide roof system, including insulation and fasteners, rated by FM for Class I-60 wind uplift. B. Roof covering classification: Class B minimum. r,,,, 03860296/96 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING 07525-1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 r 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit technical product information, installation instructions, and recommendations for each type of roofing material. Furnish additional information as necessary to demonstrate products comply with project criteria. B. Color samples for selection. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: A company that has produced roofing materials and accessories of the type included in this section for at least three years. B. Installer Qualifications: A company approved or licensed by the roofing materials manufacturer and which has completed at least 10 previous installations of roofing material similar to the type included in this section. 1. Certification: Furnish to the architect, before roofing contract award, written documentation that installer is manufacturer certified to install roofing systems of the type included in this section. 2. Installer supervision: Have installer identify a supervisor with at least 5 years experience in the application of the type of modified bituminous sheet roofing system included in this section, to provide full-time review of built-up roofing installation work. 3.. The same roofer must install both flat or membrane roof and metal roofs under this contract. C. FM Label: Roofing material packaging shall bear FM Classification marking. D. Pre -Roofing Meeting: " Organize and conduct a meeting at the construction site 2 weeks before scheduled start of roof system installation with roofing installer; installer of each component of related work, including deck or substrate construction, roof equipment, penetrations of roof deck, and other work integral with or adjacent to roofing; the architect; the owner; roofing manufacturer's representative; and other parties involved with roofing system performance, including owner's insurance representative, independent testing agencies, and governing authorities. 1. Walk roof areas to review and discuss substrate preparation including repair of unacceptable surfaces, roof drainage, penetrations, equipment curbs, and work performed by other trades which requires coordination with roofing system. 2. Examine steel deck for proper flatness and slope, review structural capability for supporting roofing system and methods of fastening. 3. Review contract document requirements and submittals for roofing system, including roofing schedule, inspection and testing, and environmental conditions. Identify what are considered unacceptable weather conditions for roofing, and which governing regulations or insurance requirements will affect roofing system installation. 4. Document discussions in writing, including actions required, and distribute copy of report to each meeting participant. 03860296/96 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING 07525-2 r LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS 900-9268 A. Begin roofing installation when weather conditions are within acceptable limits according to manufacturer's installation instructions and warranty requirements. 1.7 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Deliver materials to project site in manufacturer's unopened, sealed containers or packages, with manufacturer's labels intact. B. Store materials in weather -protected environment, clear of ground and moisture. 1.8 WARRANTIES A. Project Installation Guarantee: Submit written agreement signed by the installer and the contractor, guaranteeing to correct failures in product and workmanship for a 2-year period from date of substantial completion, without reducing or otherwise limiting other rights to correction which the owner may have under the contract documents. Failure is defined to include product failure which leads to interruption of a water -tight installation. Guarantee shall cover work of this section, including: 1. Roof membrane. 2. Base flashings. 3. Insulation. 4. Roof accessories. B. Manufacturer's Product Warranty: Submit manufacturer's standard limited product warranty signed by the manufacturer's authorized official, guaranteeing to correct failures in product which may occur during the warranty period, without reducing or otherwise limiting any other rights to correction which the owner may have under the contract documents, for the following period of time: 1. 15 years after date of substantial completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Roof System: 1. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. Celotex Corporation. b. Firestone Building Products Company. C. GAF Building Materials Corporation. d. Tamko Asphalt Products, Inc. e. Intec/Permaglas, Div. of U.S. Intec, Inc. 2. Specification: Tamko System 107 FR is used as a standard. Other systems must equal or exceed this product installation and other provisions in this section. ` 03860296/96 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING 07525-3 4 i LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 2.2 MATERIALS 900-9268 A. Base Sheet: Asphalt and polymer modifiers of styrene butadiene styrene (SBS) type, reinforced with non -woven polyester fabric with the following characteristics: I . Thickness: 150 mils minimum. 2. Average Weight: 1.0 lb/sq ft minimum. 3. Sheet Width: 39.4 inches 4. Tensile Strength per ASTM 2523. a. Longitudinal:69% b. Transverse: 65 % 5. Elongation to Break: per ASTM 2523 a. Longitudinal: 130 lbs/in. b. Transverse: 129 lbs/in. 6. Aging: None when test to ARMA MB-08 7. Elasticity: 57 percent with full recovery without set when tested to ARMA MB-04. 8. Surfacing: Uncoated. B. Insulation 1. Type A Insulation: HH-I-1972/2, Polysiocyanurate rigid board, both faces finished with non -asphaltic glass mat, with the following characteristics: a. Board Density 2.0 lb/cu ft. b. Board Size 48x96 inch. C. Board Thickness minimum 1 inch. d. Thermal Conductivity K factor of 0.36 as determined by ASTM C 177. e. Board Edges square 2. Type B Insulation: ASTM C208, Cellulose fiber roof insulating board, with the following characteristics: a. Board Density 1.0 lb/cu ft. b. Board Size 48x96 inch. C. Board Thickness 1/2 inch. d. Thermal Conductivity K factor of 0.38 as determined by ASTM C 177. e. Board Edges square 3. Type C Insulation: ASTM C728, expanded perlite mineral aggregate board with the following characteristics: a. Board Density 1.5 lb/cu ft. b. Board Size 48x96 inch. C. Board Thickness 3/4 inch. d. Thermal Conductivity K factor of 0.36 as determined by ASTM C 177. e. Board Edges square 4. Type D Insulation: ASTM C578, Type I or 11 (as required by roofing system manufacturer) expanded polystyrene board with the following characteristics: a. Board Desity minimum 1.0 lb/cu ft. b. Board Size 48x96 inch C. Board Thickness minimum 1 inch. d. Thermal Conductivity K factor of 0.36 as determined by ASTM C 177. e. Board Edges square r 03860296/96 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING 075254 G N LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 C. Membrane: Asphalt and polymer modifiers of styrene butadiene styrene (SBS) type, reinforced with non -woven polyester fabric with the following characteristics: 1. Thickness: 150 mils minimum. 2. Average Weight: 1.0 lb/sq ft minimum. 3. Sheet Width: 39.4 inches 4. Tensile Strength per ASTM 2523. a. Longitudinal: 69 % b. Transverse: 65 % 5. Elongation to Break: per ASTM 2523 a. Longitudinal: 130 lbs/in. b. Transverse: 129 lbs/in. 6. Aging: None when test to ARMA MB-08 7. Elasticity: 57 percent with full recovery without set when tested to ARMA MB-04. 8. Surfacing: Manufacturer's standard white ceramic granular coating. D. Asphalt Bitumen: ASTM D312, Type III. E. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D41. F. Plastic Cement: ASTM D2822 Type I, cutback asphalt type. G. Flashings 1. Flexible Base Flashings: Manufacturer's standard SBS type conforming to the same requirements at the membrane. 2. Counter Flashings: Metal, as specified in Section 07600. 3. Prefabricated Control Joint Flashing: Sheet butyl over closed cell foam seamed to galvanized flanges. H. Accessories 1. Fiber Cant: Asphalt impregnated wood fiberboard or perlite, preformed to 45 degree angle. 2. Tapered Edge Strip. Asphalt impregnated wood fiberboard or perlite, 1 1/2 inches high x 18 inches wide x manufacturer's standard length. 3. Insulation Joint Tape: Asphalt treated glass fiber reinforced; 6 inches wide; self adhering. 4. Roofing Nails: Galvanized, hot dipped or non-ferrous type, size as required to suit application. 5. Fasteners: Appropriate for purpose intended and approved by system manufacturer; length required for thickness of material with metal washers. 6. Sealants: As recommended by membrane manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work. B. Verify deck is supported and secured. 03860296196 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING 07525-5 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 C. Verify deck is clean and smooth, free of depressions, waves, or projections. D. Verify deck surfaces are dry and free of snow or ice. Verify flutes of metal deck are clean and dry. E. Verify pull-out force of existing gypsum deck to comply with manufacturer's requirement for proposed fasteners. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Insulation 1. Install Type A or D (at Contractor's option with membrane manufacturer's approval) insulation, in accordance with insulation manufacturer's instructions. 2. Install insulation units in continuous application of roofing bitumen or insulation adhesive or mechanically attach per manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Mechanically fasten insulation units at roof perimeter to meet wind uplift requirements, ` but using not less than one fastener per 4 square feet and at least 2 fasteners per board. 4. Tape joints of Type D insulation in accordance with insulation manufacturer's instructions. -- 5. In full mopping of hot bitumen, install top constant thickness layer of either Type B or Type C (at Contractor's option with membrane manufacturer's approval) insulation with all joints staggered from joints in first layer of insulation by a minimum of 6 inches. 6. Cut insulation to fit neatly to perimeter blocking and around penetrations through roof. 7. Lay boards with edges in moderate contact without forcing. 8. Apply no more insulation that can be covered with membrane in same day. 9. Total insulation thickness to provide a minimum aged R-value of 19. B. Membrane Application 1. Over Type B or C insulation, install base sheet in full mopping of hot bitumen. 2. Over base sheet, install membrane in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. Apply membrane; lap and seal edges and ends permanently waterproof. 4. Apply membrane smooth, free from air pockets, wrinkles, or tears. Ensure full bond of membrane to substrate. 5. Extend membrane up cant strips and minimum of 8 inches onto vertical surfaces or as F. otherwise detailed. 6. Mop and seal membrane around roof protrusions and penetrations. 7. Provide waterproof cut-off to membrane at end of day's operation. Remove cut-off before resuming roofing. C. Flashings and Accessories 1. Apply flexible sheet base flashings to seal membrane to vertical elements. 2. Secure to substrate as recommended by membrane manufacturer. 3. Seal flashings and flanges of items penetrating or protruding through the membrane. 4. Stripping: Do not strip metal items heavier than 24 gage sheet steel, 16-oz copper or 0.040-inch aluminum. Do not strip metal items greater than 10 feet in length. a. Set metal flange in a full bed of roofing cement. Prime metal surface to receive stripping. b. Install stripping as specified for flashings above, except for nailing requirements. 03860296/96 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING 07525-6 r' LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 1) Extend modified bituminous stripping a minimum of 6 inches onto roof membrane. D. Surfacing 1. Apply granular surfacing, matching membrane surfacing, as recommended by manufacturer to completely cover all lap joints in membrane. E. Roof Walkway Pads 1. At locations indicated on the drawings, install second layer of membrane for walkway pads. 2. Apply granular membrane surfacing as recommended by manufacturer to completely cover all edges at walkway pads. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01400. B. Correct identified defects or irregularities. 3.4 CLEANING A. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by work of this section, consult manufacturer of surfaces for cleaning advice and comply with their documented instructions. B. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by work of this section. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect building surfaces against damage from roofing work. B. Where traffic must continue over finished roof membrane, protect surfaces. END OF SECTION 07525 03860296/96 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING 07525-7 �"- LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 .. SECTION 07600 - FLASHING AND SHEET METAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Sheet metal flashing and trim. 2. Flexible flashings. 3. Composite flashings. 4. Gutters and downspouts. 5. Fasteners and attachment devices. 6. Coatings and slip sheets to isolate sheet metal from dissimilar materials. B. Flashing which are imbedded in masonry are not included in this section. C. Flashings which are integral with membrane roofing or waterproofing systems (base flashings) are not included in this section. D. Flashings which are integral with prefabricated roof accessories, equipment, and the like are not included in this section. E. Wood blocking, milers, edge strips, and battens are not specified in this section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association, Inc. (SMACNA); 1993. B. ASTM A 526/A 526M-90 — Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, Commercial Quality; 1990. C. ASTM A 527/A 527M-90 -- Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, Lock -Forming Quality; 1990. D. ASTM D 412-92 — Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Rubbers and Thermoplastic Elastomers-Tension; 1992. E. ASTM D 573-88 — Standard Test Method for Rubber —Deterioration in an Air Oven; 1988. F. ASTM D 746-79(87) — Standard Test Method for Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and Elastomers by Impact; 1979 (Reapproved 1987). G. ASTM D 1149-91— Standard Test Method for Rubber Deterioration —Surface Ozone Cracking in a Chamber; 1991. H. ASTM D 2240-91 — Standard Test Method for Rubber Property—Durometer Hardness; 1991. I. FS TT-C-494B — Coating Compound, Bituminous, Solvent Type, Acid Resistant; 1985. 03860296/96 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07600-1 4p f LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical information and installation instructions, in sufficient detail to demonstrate products comply with contract documents. B. Shop Drawings: Detailed drawings clearly indicating component profiles, joints, transitions, fastening methods, and relationship of flashing materials to adjacent construction. C. Samples: Submit 6-inch-square samples of each type of metal and finish required. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: A company familiar with installing products included in this section and which has completed at least 20 installations similar in scope to work included in this section. B. Quality Standard: 1. Fabricate and install sheet metal work in accordance with Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association, Inc. (SMACNA) "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual," unless specifically indicated otherwise. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Prefnished Galvanized Steel Sheet: Coil coated, commercial quality steel sheet, ASTM A 526 or ASTM A 527, G90 hot -dip galvanized. _ 1. Finish: 70 percent 'Kynar 500" or "Hylar 5000" resin finish over epoxy primer; minimum system thickness 1.0 mil. Provide manufacturer's standard prime coat on underside. a. Color: Selected by architect, after contract award, from manufacturer's standard color selection. 2. Provide strippable plastic protective film on prefinished surface. 3. Manufacturer: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. Atas Aluminum Corporation. b. Copper Sales, Inc. C. MM Systems Corporation. d. Petersen Aluminum Corporation. e. Vincent Metals Division/Rio Algom, Inc. B. Sheet Lead: Hard tempered; containing 4 to 6 percent antimony, 3.0 pounds per square foot minimum weight for exposed sheet. Soft lead sheet, 4.0 pounds per square foot minimum weight for concealed uses. C. Sheet Rubber Flashing: Use uncured neoprene or EPDM sheet. D. EPDM Flashing: Uncured EPDM sheet; minimum 60-mil thickness; minimum properties as follows: f 1. Tensile strength (ASTM D 412): 1305 pounds per square inch. 03860296/96 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07600-2 .- r- LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 2. Elongation (ASTM D 412): 300 percent. 3. Tear resistance (ASTM D 412): 150 pounds per inch. 4. Ozone resistance (ASTM D 1149): No cracks after 168-hour exposure to one part per million ozone at 104 degrees F and 20 percent strain. 5. Maximum brittleness temperature (ASTM D 746): Minus 49 degrees F. 6. Resistance to heat aging (ASTM D 573): Minimum properties (ASTM D 412) after aging at 240 degrees F for 672 hours: a. Tensile strength: 1205 pounds per square inch. b. Elongation: 200 percent. C. Tear resistance: 125 pounds per inch. 7. Products: The following products, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. "Sure -Seal Elastoform Flashing"; Carlisle Syntec Systems. b. "SPM Flashing"; Manville Roofing Systems, a Division of Schuller International, Inc. E. Neoprene Sheet Flashing: Uncured neoprene sheet; minimum 60-mil thickness; minimum properties as follows: 1. Shore hardness (ASTM D 2240): Minimum, 55 plus or minus 10. 2. Tensile strength (ASTM D 412): 1305 pounds per square inch. 3. Elongation (ASTM D 412): 250 percent. 4. Tear resistance (ASTM D 412): 150 pounds per inch. 5. Ozone resistance (ASTM D 1149): No cracks after 168-hour exposure to one part per million ozone at 104 degrees F and 20 percent strain. 6. Maximum brittleness temperature (ASTM D 746): Minus 35 degrees F. 7. Resistance to heat aging (ASTM D 573): Minimum properties (ASTM D 412) after aging at 240 degrees F for 672 hours as follows: a. Tensile strength: 1000 pounds per square inch. b. Elongation: 150 percent. C. Tear resistance: 125 pounds per inch. 8. Products: The following products, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. "Emseal Elastomeric Flashing"; Emseal Joint Systems Ltd. b. "Contourflash," black; Haartz-Mason, Inc. C. "Contourflash," gray (with hypalon coating); Haartz-Mason, Inc. d. "Wingprene," black; Versico Incorporated. F. Foam Backing For Flexible Flashings: Closed -cell foam rubber; polyethylene, neoprene, or similar soft, compatible material. G. Self -Adhesive Sheet Flashing - Through -wall Flashing: Rubberized asphalt sheets with ry polyethylene film facing; packaged in rolls with disposable release paper. t 1. Minimum total membrane thickness: 30 mils (0.03 inch) including rubberized asphalt and film facing. r., 2. Products: The following products, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. "Perm -A -Barrier Wall Flashing"; W. R. Grace & Company. b. "Polyguard 300 Membrane"; Polyguard Products, Inc. C. "Polyguard 400 Membrane"; Polyguard Products, Inc. 03860296/96 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07600-3 R 4 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Fasteners: Corrosion -resistant metal of same material as the material being fastened, or other material recommended by sheet metal manufacturer. Match finish and color of exposed fastener heads to finish and color of sheet material being fastened. B. Installation Accessories, Flexible Flashings: Provide joint tape, adhesives, sealers, and fasteners as recommended by flexible flashing manufacturer for indicated applications. C. Sealant: As specified in Division 7. 1. Use noncuring type for concealed joints. 2. Use nonsag elastomeric type for exposed joints. D. Joint Adhesive: Two -component noncorrosive epoxy adhesive, recommended by metal manufacturer for sealing of nonmoving joints. E. Bituminous Coating: Heavy bodied, sulfur -free, asphalt -based paint; FS TT-C-494. 2.3 FABRICATION - GENERAL A. Form sheet metal to match profiles indicated, substantially free from oil -canning, fish -mouths, and other defects. B. Comply with SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for applications indicated. C. Provide for thermal expansion of exposed sheet metal work exceeding 15 feet running length. 1. Flashing and trim: Provide movement joints at maximum spacing of 10 feet; no joints allowed within 2 feet of corner or intersection. D. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions wherever possible. 1. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of sheet metal exposed to public view. E. Form a 1/2-inch hem on underside of exposed edges. F. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as sheet metal component being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended by sheet metal manufacturer. 1. Gage: As recommended by SMACNA or metal manufacturer for application, but in no case less than gage of metal being secured. 2.4 SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. General: As a minimum, fabricate flashings using materials in the thickness listed for each flashing application. B. Exposed Flashings - Low Slope Roofs or Waterproofing: 1. Formed copings: a. Prefmished galvanized steel sheet: 24 gage (0.0239 inch). I- 03860296/96 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07600-4 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 r• C. Concealed Wall Flashings: a 1. Masonry through -wall flashing: a. Laminated copper/kraft paper. 2. Flashings around window or door openings: a. Self-adhesive rubberized asphalt sheet with polyethylene facing. D. Vent Stack Flashing: Fabricate from 2-1/24b soft sheet lead. 2.5 GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS i A. Fabricate from same material and finish used for adjacent exposed fleshings. B. Form sheet metal to profile dimensions indicated, free from distortions and defects detrimental to water -tight system. C. Provide expansion joints in gutters at spacing not to exceed 30 feet. ,r- D. Provide removable debris screens for gutters, fabricated from 1/4 inch mesh wire cloth of same material used for gutters or approved compatible material. Provide formed sheet metal frame on 4 sides of each screen unit. Length of screen units not to exceed 10 feet. i 1 E. Provide precast concrete splash blocks at downspout discharge. F. Provide formed metal splash pans fabricated from same type of sheet metal used for downspouts. Locate where downspout discharges onto lower roof. G. Gutter Supports: Spikes and ferrules. 1 H. Downspout Supports: Brackets. I. Back -paint concealed metal surfaces with bituminous coating to a minimum of 15 mils dry film thickness. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions under which products of this section are to be installed and verify that work may properly commence. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been fully resolved. 1. Verify that nailers, blocking, and other attachment provisions for sheet metal work are properly located and securely fastened to resist effects of wind and thermal stresses. r 3.2 PREPARATION A. Deliver the following items to entities performing work, for incorporation into their work: 1. Masonry through -wall flashings: Division 4. B. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. �„ 03860296/96 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07600-5 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 C. Isolate dissimilar metals by means of a heavy bituminous coating, approved paint coating, adhered polyethylene sheet, or other means approved by the architect. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with sheet metal manufacturer's installation methods and recommendations in the SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." B. Sealed Joints: Form minimum 1-inch hooked joints and embed flange into sealant or adhesive. Form metal to completely conceal sealant or adhesive. 1. Use joint adhesive for nonmoving joints specified not to be soldered. 2. Moving joints: When ambient temperature is moderate (40-70 degrees F) at time of installation, set joined members for 50 percent movement either way. Adjust setting position of joined members proportionally for temperatures above 70 degrees F. Do not install sealant at temperatures below 40 degrees F. Refer to section on sealants elsewhere in Division 7 for handling and installation requirements for joint sealers. C. Flexible Flashing Installation: 1. Comply with flashing manufacturer's instructions regarding surface preparation, handling, use of adhesives, and use of fasteners. 2. Take care during and after installation to avoid puncture or rupture of flexible flashing. 3. Secure flexible flashing to vertical surfaces using adhesive or combination of adhesive and fasteners. 4. Form continuous watertight seams between pieces of material using seam adhesive as recommended by flashing manufacturer. 5. Do not stretch flexible flashing sheets tight between points of anchorage. At moving joints or where drawings indicate slack or loop in flashing, form to approximate profile indicated and adhere foam rubber filler to back of flexible flashing. Anchor edges in a bed of sealant. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove protective film from prefinished sheet metal immediately after installation. B. Repair or replace work which is damaged or defaced, as directed by the architect. , 1. Refinish marred and abraded areas of prefinished sheet using finish manufacturer's recommended methods and materials. Replace units which, in the opinion of the architect, cannot satisfactorily be refinished in place. C. Protect sheet metal work as recommended by the installer so that completed work will be clean, secured, and without damage at substantial completion. END OF SECTION 07600 03860296/96 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07600-6 .-, POO LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 t' .- SECTION 07700 - ROOF SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY ,.., A. Section Includes: k 1. Manufactured curbs. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 1.3 SUBMITTALS A.' Product Data. i B. Shop Drawings. y t PART 2 - PRODUCTS p� 2.1 MATERIALS i, A. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 526 or A 527, minimum G90 coating. B. Hot -Dip Galvanizing (fabricated products and hardware): ASTM A 123. �. C. Fasteners: l 1. For attachment of roof accessories to supporting structure: Hot -dip galvanized zinc plated or cadmium plated steel, or stainless steel. 2. For steel and galvanized steel: Hot -dip galvanized steel. D. Steel for Structural Supports and Reinforcements: ASTM A 36, hot -dip galvanized after r fabrication in accordance with ASTM A 123. E . E. Sealant: Single- or multi -component urethane as specified in Division 7 section on sealants. 2.2 MANUFACTURED CURBS A. Manufacturer: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: t 1. Custom Curb, Inc. 2. Louvers & Dampers, Inc. 3. The Pate Company. 4. Penn Ventilator Company, Inc. 5. S & L Manufacturing Company. +-• 6. ThyCurb Fabricating Division/Thybar Corporation. 7. Uni-Curb, Inc. 8. Vent Products Company, Inc. 03860296/96 ROOF SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES 07700-1 t LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 B. Manufactured Curbs: Fabricate from galvanized steel sheet, minimum 18 gage, with seams fully welded, ground smooth, and painted with zinc -rich primer. Engineer units to support superimposed loads. 1. Style: Vertical sides (no cant). 2. Insulation: Provide noncombustible rigid insulation, minimum 1-1/2 inches thick, secured to inside face of curbs. 3. Slope bottom edges to match slope of roof deck so that top is level when installed. 4. Nailers: Provide on top of curb units, fabricated from softwood lumber preservative -treated by the pressure process in accordance with AWPB LP-2. 5. Provide units of heights indicated; where height is not indicated, provide units of _ manufacturer's standard height. 6. Curbs for mechanical units: Provide minimum 20 gage galvanized steel cap over areas not weatherproofed by mechanical units. Where unsupported cap dimension exceeds 8 inches, provide minimum 3/4 inch exterior grade plywood support or formed metal framing capable of supporting 200 pound concentrated load at any point. 7. Vibration isolating curb units: Provide units with spring isolation dampers supporting channel frame equipment support, acoustically isolated from curb base. Minimum effective vibration isolation coefficient 90 percent. 8. Pipe supports: Provide formed galvanized steel (strut) channel attached to top of flashing cap, fully threaded galvanized steel support rods, pipe roller chair of size to -- accommodate piping, stainless steel top bracket (retainer), and galvanized steel nuts for securement and adjustment. C. Pipe Portals: Top exit type of construction similar to manufactured curbs specified above, with split components for installation around in -place piping. 1. Pipe boots: Molded EPDM or neoprene rubber, with stainless steel geared band clamps top and bottom; sized to fit pipe or conduit at top, portal opening at bottom. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified, and except where project conditions require extra precautions or provisions to ensure satisfactory performance of the work. END OF SECTION 07700 03860296/96 ROOF SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES 07700-2 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 SECTION 07900 - JOINT SEALERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. The sealing of joints indicated on schedule at the end of this section. 2. The sealing of other joints indicated on drawings. B. Joints of a nature similar to that of joints indicated on the schedule shall be sealed with same sealer, whether indicated on drawings to be sealed or not. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Substrates: 1. M-type substrates: Concrete, concrete masonry units, brick, mortar, natural stone. The term "masonry" means brick, stone, and concrete masonry work. 2. G-type substrates: Glass and transparent plastic glazing sheets. 3. A -type substrates: Metals, porcelain, glazed tile, and smooth plastics. 4. O-type substrates: Wood, unglazed tile, substrates not included under other categories. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product data. B. Samples for Color Selection. (Products exposed to view only.) C. Certified Product Test Reports. D. Manufacturers' certificates. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install sealers if any of the following conditions exist: 1. Air or substrate temperature exceeds the range recommended by sealer manufacturers. 2. Substrate is wet, damp, or covered with snow, ice, or frost. B. Dimensional Limitations: Do not install sealers if joint dimensions are less than or greater than that recommended by sealer manufacturer; notify the architect and get sealer manufacturer's recommendations for alternative procedures. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Submit written warranty signed by contractor and installer guaranteeing to correct failures in sealer work that occur within 5 years after substantial completion, without reducing or otherwise limiting any other rights to correction which the owner may have under the contract documents. Failure is defined as failure to remain weathertight due to faulty materials or workmanship. Correction is limited to replacement of sealers. 03860296/96 JOINT SEALERS 07900-1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS - GENERAL A. General: Provide only products which are recommended and approved by their manufacturer ^ for the specific use to which they are put and which comply with all requirements of the contract documents. 1. Provide only materials which are compatible with each other and with joint substrates. 2. Colors of exposed sealers: As selected by the architect from manufacturer's standard colors. B. Manufacturers: Products of the manufacturers listed, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents will be among those considered acceptable. 1. Urethane sealants: a. Bostik Inc. b. Mameco International, Inc. C. Pecora Corporation. d. Products Research & Chemical Corporation. e. Sika Corporation. f. Sonnebom Building Products Division/ChemRex, Inc. g. Tremco, Inc. h. W. R. Meadows, Inc. 2. Acrylic solvent -release sealants: a. Pecora Corporation. b. Koch Protective Treatments, Inc. C. Tremco, Inc. ^- 3. Acrylic -latex emulsion sealant: a. Bostik Inc. b. Pecora Corporation. C. Sonnebomn Building Products Division/ChemRex, Inc. 2.2 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Sealants - General: Chemically curing eastomeric sealants of types indicated, complying with ASTM C 920, including specific Type, Grade, Class, and Uses indicated, as well as all other requirements specified. 1. Where movement capability exceeding that measured by ASTM C 920 is specified, sealant shall withstand the total movement indicated while remaining in compliance with the other requirements specified, when tested in accord with ASTM C 719, with base joint width measured at the time of application. 2. For M-type substrates: Comply with requirements for Use M. 3. For G-type substrates: Comply with requirements for Use G. 4. For A -type substrates: Comply with requirements for Use A. 5. For O-type substrates: Comply with requirements for Use M (minimum) and Use O for the particular substrate. B. Two -Part Nonsag Low -Modulus Urethane Sealant: Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, plus movement capability of 50 percent in both extension and compression. 03860296/96 JOINT SEALERS 07900-2 r LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 C. Nonsag Urethane Sealant for Use T: Type S or M, Grade NS, Class 25, Use T. D. One -Part Nonsag Urethane Sealant: Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. E. One -Part Nonsag Low -Modulus Urethane Sealant: Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, plus movement capability of 50 percent in both extension and compression. F. Urethane Sealant for Water Immersion:. One- or two-part urethane, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, specificaIIy recommended by the manufacturer for sealing joints immersed continuously in water. ' 2.3 PAVING JOINT SEALANTS A. Two -Part Urethane Paving Sealant: Pourable, chemically curing (cold -applied) complying with FS SS-S-200: 1. Composition: Urethane, with minimum movement capability of plus or minus 12-1/2 percent. 2. Composition: Bitumen modified polymer; also complying with ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25, Use T. 3. Composition: Bitumen modified urethane. 2.4 SOLVENT -RELEASE -CURING SEALANTS A. Acrylic Sealant: Nonsag, one -part, solvent -release -curing; complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Use NT, with the following exceptions: 1. Weight loss: 15 percent, maximum. 2. Movement capability: 7-1/2 percent in both extension and compression, minimum. 2.5 LATEX SEALANTS A. Acrylic -Latex Emulsion Sealant: One -part, nonsag, mildew -resistant, paintable; complying with ASTM C 834. 2.6 SEALANT BACKERS A. Backers General: Nonstaining; recommended or approved by sealant manufacturer for specific use. PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Do not begin joint sealer work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.1 PREPARATION r^ A. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to keep primers and sealers off of adjacent surfaces which would be damaged by contact or by cleanup. Remove tape as soon as practical. r ,., 03860296/96 JOINT SEALERS 07900-3 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with sealer manufacturers' installation instructions and recommendations, except where more restrictive requirements are specified. ... 3.3 SCHEDULE OF JOINT SEALERS A. Exterior Joints for Which No Other Sealer Is Indicated: 1. Use one of the following sealants: a. 'Iwo -part nonsag low -modulus urethane sealant. b. One -part nonsag urethane sealant. C. One -part nonsag low -modulus urethane sealant. 2. Backer: Backer rod. 3. Joint shape: Concave joint configuration. B. Interior Joints for Which No Other Sealer Is Indicated: 1. Use one of the following sealants: a. Acrylic -emulsion latex sealant. 2. Backer: Backer rod. 3. Joint shape: Concave joint configuration. C. Exterior Joints Well Protected from Weather and Not Subject to Movement: 1. Use one of the following sealants: -- a. Acrylic sealant. 2. Backer: Backer rod. D. Vehicular Paving Joints, Not Over 1-1/2 Percent Slope: 1. Use one of the following sealants: a. Two-part cold -applied urethane paving sealant. 2. Use bond -breaker tape. 3. Backer: Joint filler specified elsewhere. E. Interior Floor Joints and Pedestrian Paving Joints, Less than 1-1/2 Percent Slope: 1. Use one of the following sealants: a. Two-part nonsag urethane sealant for Use T. 2. Backer: Backer rod. 3. Joint shape: Flush joint configuration. END OF SECTION 07900 03860296/96 JOINT SEALERS 07900-4 j F LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 t, SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY 4 A. Section Includes: 1. Standard steel doors and frames. 2. Assemblies for fire -rated openings. 3. Insulated doors. 1.2 REFERENCES r" A. SDI 100-1991 — Recommended Specifications: Standard Steel Doors and Frames; Steel Door Institute; 1991. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's printed product information indicating compliance with } specified requirements. i B. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings for fabrication and installation of specified items, coordinated with opening schedule included in contract documents. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality Standard: Comply with SDI 100. B. Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: In compliance with NFPA 80 and labeled per ASTM E 152 by agency acceptable to governing authorities. C. Coordination: Transmit copy of final shop drawings to wood door manufacturer to allow t-. prefitting of wood doors to steel frames. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products in crates or cartons suitable for storage at the site. '` PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS 4 A. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: r� 1. Allied Steel Products, Inc. 2. Amweld Building Products, Inc. 3. Benchmark Commercial Door Products. �.. 4. Ceco Door Products, a Division of United Dominion. 5. Copco Door Company. 03860296/96 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-1 r 4 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 r 6. Curries Company/Essex Industries, Inc. r- 7. Kewanee Corporation. 8. Mesker Door, Inc. 9. Pioneer Industries Division/CORE Industries, Inc. 10. Premier Products. 11. Republic Builders Products Division/DESCO. 12. Steelcraft Manufacturing Company/Masco Industries. 13. Trussbilt, Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Steel Sheets, Hot -Rolled: ASTM A 569 and ASTM A 568, commercial quality, pickled and oiled. B. Steel Sheets, Cold -Rolled: ASTM A 366 and ASTM A 568, commercial quality, matte finish exposed, oiled. C. Anchorages: Galvanized steel, minimum 18 gage. D. Fasteners and Inserts: Units standard with manufacturer. 1. Exterior walls: ASTM A 153, hot -dip galvanized, Class C or D. E. Paint: 1. Primer: Manufacturer's standard rust -inhibitive coating, suitable to receive finish coatings specified. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Exposed Door Faces: Fabricate from cold -rolled steel. B. Frames: Fabricate from cold -rolled or hot -rolled steel. C. Seal top and bottom edges integrally with door construction, or use minimum 16 gage steel channels to form flush closure. D. Exposed Screws and Bolts: Where required, provide only countersunk, flat Phillips -head fasteners. E. Insulated Assemblies: At locations scheduled, provide insulating door and frame assemblies which have been tested in accordance with ASTM C 236 for thermal resistance. 1. U-value: 0.24 BTU per hour per square foot per degree F, minimum. F. Hardware Preparation: Comply with DIU Al15 series specifications. 1. Locations: Comply with final shop drawings. G. Shop Painting: 1. Primer: Apply primer evenly to achieve full protection of all exposed surfaces. 03860296/96 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-2 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 2.4 STEEL DOORS A. General: Fabricate steel doors in accordance with requirements of SDI 100. B. Interior Doors: 1. Grade II - Heavy -Duty, Model 1 - Full Flush. C. Exterior Doors: 1. Grade II - Heavy -Duty, Model 1 - Full Flush. 2.5 STEEL FRAMES A. General: Fabricate steel frames for scheduled openings, in styles and profiles as shown, using concealed fasteners. 1. Minimum thickness: 16 gage interior; 14 gage exterior. 2. Construction: Mitered and welded comers. B. Guards: Weld protective covers to back of hardware openings at locations where grout, plaster, or other materials might interfere with hardware operation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install steel doors, frames, and accessories to comply with manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Comply with detailed installation requirements of final shop drawings. B. Frame Installation: 1. General: Adhere to provisions of SDI 105. 2. Anchors: Provide 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels and minimum 18 gage base anchors. 3. Fire -rated openings: Comply with requirements of NFPA 80. C. Door Installation: 1. General: Comply with requirements and clearances specified in SDI 100. 2. Fire -rated doors: Comply with NFPA 80 requirements and clearances. 3.2 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Touch -Up: At locations where primer has been abraded or minor rusting has occurred, sand smooth and spray -apply compatible primer. B. Final Operating Adjustments: Check hardware at all openings for proper operation of doors, making final corrections as required to assure that work of this section is complete and undamaged. END OF SECTION 08110 03860296/96 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-3 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 SECTION 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS �.., PART 1 - GENERAL ' 1.1 SUBMITTALS ....... - A. Product -data. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Dimensions and location of each product specified. 2. Elevation for each distinct door configuration. 3. Construction details for each distinct product type. 4. Dimensions and location of blocking for hardware. 5. Factory finishing details. •ol '-f3 C. Samples: 1. Door construction: Show faces, edges, and core; minimum size 6 inches by 6 inches. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Flush Doors: Comply with the following, hereinafter referred to as referenced standard(s): 1. "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, Guide Specifications and Quality Certification Program," including Section 1300, "Architectural Flush Doors," Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWl). 1.3 WARRANTIES A. Warranty: ` 1. Solid core wood -faced interior doors: lifetime. t 2. Hollow Core wood -faced interior doors: 2 years. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOLID CORE WOOD -FACED DOORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. b. Buell Door Company. C. Benton Doors, Inc. d. Eggers Industries. e. Fenestra Corporation. f. G1enMar Door Manufacturing Company. g. Graham Manufacturing Corporation. h. Haley Brothers, Inc. i. Ipik Door Company, Inc. 03860296/96 SOLID CORE FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211-1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 j. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc. k. Vancouver Door, Inc. 1. VT Industries, Inc. In. Weyerhaeuser Company. B. Materials 900-9268 1. Lumber a. Transparent Finish: NHLA first grade, Red Oak, kiln dried to maximum 10 percent moisture content. 2. Cores a. Solid Core 1) Non -Fire Rated: ANSI 208.1, grade 1-LD2 particleboard, minimum 40 pounds per cubic foot density. 2) Fire Rated a) 20 Minute Rated: ANSI 208.1, LD2 fire retardant treated particleboard, minimum 40 pounds per cubic foot density. b) 3/4 and 1 1/2 Hour Rated: Manufacturer's standard mineral core. b. Hollow Core: Manufacturer's standard phenolic impregnated honeycomb corrugated fiberboard. 3. Veneers -- a. Transparent Finish: .050 inch thick, NWWDA, Custom, A grade, Red Oak species wood, plain sliced. 4. Glazing Stops -- a. Rolled steel channel shape as detailed, butted corners; prepared for countersink style screws. 5. Adhesives a. Interior Doors: Type II - water resistant. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Doors: Fabricate to provide consistent clearances as indicated. 1. Hinge and lock edges: Provide standard (1/8-inch in 2 inches) bevel at edges, unless standard bevel would not precisely match hardware bevel; provide proper bevel for hardware. 2. Prefitting: Fabricate and trim the following types of doors to size at factory to coordinate with frame shop drawings and floor finishes as indicated in the finish schedule: a. Prefinished doors. B. Openings: Cut, trim, and seal openings in doors at the factory. 2.3 FINISHING A. Transparent Finish as specified in Section 09900 - Painting. 1. Type: AWI System TR-2 - Catalyzed Lacquer. -- 2. Staining: Color to be selected by architect from manufacturer's full color range. 3. Grain effect: Open. 4. Sheen: Satin (low luster). 5. Grade: Custom. 03860296/96 SOLID CORE FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211-2 7m a- LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's recommended procedures and requirements of referenced standard. B. Fitting of Doors: 1. Accurately align and fit doors for trouble free operation throughout range of door swing. C. Clearances: 1. Clearance between door edge and head: 1/8 inch. 2. Clearance between door edge and jamb: 1/8 inch. 3. Clearance between door bottom edge and top surface of threshold: 1/4 inch. 4. Clearance between door bottom edge and floor covering surface or finish (where threshold is not indicated): 1/8 inch. S. Clearance between meeting edges at pairs of doors: 1/8 inch. D. Finish: Before installing doors, restore finish at door edges cut during field fitting. E. Touch up finishes as required at end of job. END OF SECTION 08211 r- 03860296/96 SOLID CORE FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211-3 i r LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 r, SECTION 08364 - STEEL SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel sectional overhead doors. 2. Locations for sectional overhead doors are indicated on the drawings and schedules. B. Products Furnished but Not Installed under This Section: 1. Anchors installed in masonry for support of overhead door units. 2. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and manufacturer's instructions for anchor installation to trades executing the work. C. Related Sections: 1. Installation of anchors in concrete: Division 3. 2. Installation of anchors in masonry: Division 4. 3. Door schedule: Elsewhere in Division 8. 4. Electric service characteristics for motor operators: Division 16. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 446/A 446M-93 — Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, Structural (Physical) Quality; 1993. B. ASTM A 525-93 — Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process; 1993. C. ASTM A 526/A 526M-90 — Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, Commercial Quality; 1990. D. ASTM E 330-90 — Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 1990. E. NAGDM 102-1988 — Specifications for Sectional Overhead Type Doors; National Association t of Garage Door Manufacturers; 1988. F. NEMA ICS 6-1993 — Enclosures for Industrial Control and Systems; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1993. G. NEMA MG 1-1993 — Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1993. H. UL 325 — Standard for Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and Window Operators and Systems; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 1986 (Revised 1988). b 03860296/96 STEEL SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08364-1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 900-9268 A. Design Requirements: 1. Sectional overhead doors standard: Comply with NAGDM 102. 2. Wind loading: Sectional overhead doors shall comply with NAGDM 102 wind loading criteria unless otherwise indicated. a. Design and construct sectional overhead doors to withstand indicated wind loads as tested in accordance with ASTM E 330. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical information and installation directions demonstrate that products comply with contract documents. B. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings only for components which are not described completely in manufacturer's technical information. C. Samples, for color selection: 1. Manufacturer's full range of metal finish colors on 4- by 6-inch base metal sample. Primer only may be acceptable, verify at time of submittal. D. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Certificates: For information only, manufacturer's written certification, indicating doors comply with specified design criteria for the following: a. General requirements of NAGDM 102. b. Wind loading. C. Thermal performance. 2. Manufacturer's directions: Submit directions for installation and operation of door units; distribute a copy to installer before start of work. 3. Installer qualification: For information only, submit installer's written statement of compliance with installation experience requirement. E. Contract Closeout Submittals: 1. Operation and maintenance data: Door operation instructions and maintenance data for each door type. F. Warranty: For information only, submit specimen copy of manufacturer's written warranty. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Furnish sectional overhead door units by one manufacturer for entire project. B. Qualifications: 1. Installer qualifications: Door manufacturer's authorized installer. C. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Automatic reversing: Doors with motor operators shall comply with requirements of UL 325. -- 03860296/96 STEEL SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08364-2 -- �- LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 D. Certifications: 1. Submit door manufacturer's written certification that sectional overhead doors comply ` with wind resistance design criteria. �.. 2. Submit door manufacturer's written certification that sectional overhead doors comply with thermal performance design criteria. 3. Submit door manufacturer's written certification that sectional overhead doors comply with NAGDM 102. 1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Schedule the building in of masonry anchors for support of overhead sectional doors with masonry work. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Product Warranty: Submit manufacturer's standard 10-year limited product +'^ warranty signed by the manufacturer's authorized official, guaranteeing to correct failures in product which may occur during the warranty period, without reducing or otherwise limiting any other rights to correction which the owner may have under the contract documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Steel Sectional Overhead Doors: 1. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. Overhead Door Corporation. b. Raynor Garage Door Company. C. Wayne -Dalton Corp. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel: 1. Structural quality carbon steel, ASTM A 446, Class A, or commercial quality steel sheets, ASTM A 526; minimum yield point, 33,000 pounds per square inch; gage as indicated. 2. Galvanized coating: ASTM A 525; minimum G90 zinc coating where indicated. B. Paint: 1. Metal primer: Manufacturer's standard epoxy primer. 2.3 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Steel Sectional Overhead Door: 1. Wind resistance: a. Load acting inward: 24 pounds per square foot of door surface area. b. Load acting outward: 20 pounds per square foot of door surface area. 03860296/96 STEEL SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08364-3 kI 7 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 2. Insulation: Polyurethane foam. a. Thermal resistance, R-value: 12 3. Interior surface: Painted galvanized steel. 4. Door section material: 20 gage galvanized steel. 5. Galvanized coating: G90, minimum. 6. Door section design: Ribbed profile. 7. Door finish: Manufacturer's standard baked -on epoxy primer with polyester finish coating. a. Color: Selected by architect, after contract award, from manufacturer's standard colors. 8. Counterbalancing mechanism: Torsion spring type. 9. Rollers: Case-hardened steel double rollers. 10. Installation: High lift vertical and follow roof slope tracks. 11. Electric operator: Hoist type with worm and gear reduction primary drive. a. Provide auxiliary manual chain hoist. b. Installation: Side -mounted. C. Electric motor: Totally enclosed nonventilated type. 1. Horsepower rating: 3/4 horsepower minimum, or as required to move the door to the fully open position in 13 seconds or less. This requirement will be tested and must conform. 2. Control enclosure: NEMA Type 1. d. Control station: 3-button push-button type. 1. Control station enclosure: Also, provide remote control operation for each door. Supply 6 dual frequency remote controls, with each door set to a unique frequency. e. Automatic reversing device: Pneumatic bottom bar switch. 12. Vision panels: Double -strength glass. 13. Accessories: a. Head and jamb weatherstripping. b. Infra -red motion stop sensor on each side of each door. 14. Roll -up drum - heavy duty, high performance. 2.4 COMPONENTS A. Tracks: 1. Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel tracks and accessories designed to accommodate door size, weight, and clearances indicated from adjacent construction. 2. Accessories: Provide brackets and reinforcing for rigid support of roller guides, for door type and size. 3. Fabricate vertical track sections with slots for door drop safety device at 2 inches on center. 4. Tilt tracks from vertical to achieve closure at jambs when sectional door is closed. Weld or bolt to track supports. B. Track Support: 1. Support tracks with manufacturer's standard anchors and brackets for size and weight of door, to provide strength and rigidity, and smooth and continuous operation. 2. Wall support: Provide continuous angle anchored to wall and welded to track in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 03860296/96 STEEL SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08364-4 r- 1 �"- LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 r� 3. Overhead support: Provide continuous angle welded to inclined tracks and braced r laterally to overhead structural members at each end of tracks. C. Counterbalancing Mechanisms: 1. Torsion spring: a. Tempered steel torsion springs mounted on and secured to a hardened tubular steel shaft, with cable drums attached at each end of shaft. b. Cable drums: Grooved cast aluminum or gray iron castings, wrapped with cable attached to door, heavy duty, high performance. C. Counterbalance supports: One ball -bearing bracket at each end of shaft and at midpoint, for shafts up to 16 feet long. Provide two additional brackets at third points to support shafts over 16 feet long. d. Emergency door stop: Spring -loaded steel or bronze cam secured to bottom door rollers at each track. e. Cushion door stop: Spring bumper attached at end of each horizontal track. D. Electric Door Operators: 1. Manufacturer's standard electric operator size as indicated, complete with gear reduction mechanism and control devices. 2. Emergency disconnect: Provide mechanism to allow transfer to manual hand chain operation, with safety device to lock out use of motor when chain is in use. 3. Door operator type: a. Hoist type, with worm and gear reduction drive, clutch disconnect and auxiliary chain hoist. 4. Electric motors: a. Reversible, constant duty, Class A insulated motor protected against overload; with capacity to move door at rate of 213 foot to 1 foot per second. b. Totally enclosed, nonventilated type motor, complying with NEMA MG 1; controller with enclosure of type indicated, complying with NEMA ICS 6. 5. Control station: a. Provide control stations of type indicated complete with enclosure complying with NEMA ICS 6. E. Automatic Reversing Control: 1. Automatic safety switch: Complying with UL 325, installed within neoprene or rubber astragal located along full width of door bottom. 2. Safety switch type: Pneumatic; where indicated. +^ F. Weather Seals: - 1. Continuous rubber, neoprene, or flexible vinyl adjustable weatherstrip gasket at head and jambs of overhead door, for weathertight installation. k G. Vision Panels: 1. Provide manufacturer's standard insulated, tinted vision panels of materials indicated, located where shown on the drawings. 2. Metal framed doors: Install vision panels with manufacturer's standard dry glazing gasket. 3. Glazing stops: Removable; made from door section frame material. 03860296/96 STEEL SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08364-5 f LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Hardware: 1. Heavy duty hardware, made from noncorrosive metal and provided with noncorrosive fasteners, as required for door type. 2. Hinges: a. Heavy steel hinges at each end and intermediate stile, of type recommended by r manufacturer for size of overhead door. b. Thru-bolt hinges to door sections at stiles and rails using lock washers and nuts, or rivets where access to nuts is not available. C. Provide manufacturer's recommended double hinges for doors exceeding 16 feet in width. 3. Rollers: a. Heavy duty ball -bearing rollers, in steel races. Mount rollers with projections from door surface as required to suit slope of track. b. Double hinges: Install roller shaft through both hinges. C. Roller tires: Type indicated; 3-inch diameter tires for 3-inch track, 2-inch diameter tires for 2-inch track; track size as recommended by door manufacturer for required door size. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Steel Door Sections: 1. Fabricate from galvanized steel sheet, maximum 24-inch-high section, nominal 2 inches deep, and in profile indicated on the drawings. 2. Section end closures and reinforcing: Provide 16 gage galvanized steel channel end -- closures, and intermediate 16 gage channel reinforcing at 48 inches on center, maximum along interior surface of section. 3. Bottom section reinforcements: Continuous channel or angle matching section profile. 4. Section reinforcing: Continuous horizontal and diagonal steel reinforcing, as necessary to comply with wind loading performance criteria. B. Insulation: 1. Type: Manufacturer's standard polyurethane foam insulation. 2. Conceal insulation with manufacturer's standard interior steel facing sheet. C. Factory Finishing: 1. Steel door sections: a. Pretreatment: Clean zinc -coated steel and apply zinc phosphate conversion coat. b. Factory paint system: Apply prune and finish coats to interior and exterior surfaces of door faces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: 1. Examine openings to receive sectional overhead doors for conditions that will prohibit proper installation. Correct unacceptable conditions before start of installation. 03860296/96 STEEL SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08364-6 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare surfaces at openings where sectional overhead doors will be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install complete overhead door assembly in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Anchor vertical tracks to rough opening perimeter at minimum 24 inches on center. C. Horizontal Tracks: Support from overhead framing with welded or bolted steel angles or channels, including diagonal bracing as necessary for secure installation. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. After door installation is complete, examine door performance, test operation, and adjust installation to provide smooth and quiet operation. B. Adjust door operators for proper performance in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean all door surfaces, tracks, springs, and operators, before final acceptance. 3.6 PROTECTION A. After installation and until final acceptance, protect door, equipment, and accessories from damage, and maintain in clean condition and operating properly. END OF SECTION 08364 03860296196 STEEL SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08364-7 `6 _ LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 z SECTION 08415 - ALUMINUM STOREFRONT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Aluminum door frames. 2. Aluminum framing system. 3. Aluminum Doors/Hardware. B. Related Sections: 1. Joint sealants: Division 7. 2. Glass: Elsewhere in Division 8. 3. Aluminum windows: Elsewhere in Division 8. 4. Hardware: Elsewhere in Division 8. r- 1.2 REFERENCES A. AAMA 605.2-92 — Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 1992. B. AAMA 1503.1-88 — Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 1988. C. ASCE 7-95 — Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; American Society of Civil Engineers; 1995. D. ASTM A 123-89a — Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 1989. E. ASTM B 209-93 — Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate; 1993. F. ASTM B 221-93 — Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes; 1993. G. ASTM C 864-93 — Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting Blocks, and Spacers; 1993. H. ASTM E 283-91 — Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen; 1991. I. ASTM E 330-90 — Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 1990. ',., 03860296/96 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT 08415-1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 J. ASTM E 331-93 -- Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain .- Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 1993. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Exterior Assemblies: Design to comply with the performance criteria listed below. B. Thermal Movement: Design to accommodate expansion and contraction resulting from air temperature range of 120 degrees F, solar heat gain, and nighttime re -radiation. C. Structural Performance: Design to withstand all live and dead loads without deformation and without deflection greater than 1/175 of span. 1. Deflection in plane of wall: Not greater than that which would reduce glass edge clearance to 25 percent of design dimension or 1/8 inch, whichever is greater, or that which would reduce glass bite to 75 percent of design dimension. 2. Design system to withstand 150 percent of design wind load with no failure or permanent deformation greater than 0.2 percent of span. D. Wind Loads: Determine in accordance with ANSI/ASCE 7. E. Air Infiltration: 1. Fixed framing: Not more than 0.06 cfm per square foot of fixed area. a. Measure at 6.24 psf. F. Water Penetration: 1. Fixed framing (excluding operable door edges): No penetration at 6.24 psf. G. Thermal Transmittance (U Value): 1. Fixed framing: Not more than 0.65. 2. Door frames: Not more than 0.93. H. Color: Must match aluminum window colors. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's material specifications, drawings of standard components, and installation recommendations. B. Certification by Manufacturer that Aluminum Framing System Complies with Performance Requirements. C. Shop Drawings: Show elevations, field measurements, composite members, reinforcement, -' anchorages, expansion provisions, hardware mounting, and glazing. D. Samples for Color Selection of Coated Finishes: Coating manufacturer's color selection data. E. Warranty on Fabricated Products. 03860296/96 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT 08415-2 r- LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standard for Wind Load Testing: ASTM E 330. B. Standard for Air Infiltration Testing: ASTM E 283; report result as cubic feet per minute per unit of measurement indicated, at pressure differential indicated. C. Standard for Water Penetration Testing: ASTM E 331; report result at pressure differential indicated. D. Standard for Thermal Transmission Testing: AAMA 1503.1; report result as U-value (Btu per hour per square foot per degree F). 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Take field measurements before starting fabrication. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Fabricated Products: Submit a written warranty, guaranteeing to correct failures in work which occur within 1 years from date of substantial completion, without reducing or otherwise limiting any other rights to correction which the owner may have under the contract documents. 1. Failures are defined to include faulty workmanship, failure to meet the specified performance requirements, faulty operation, and deterioration other than normal weathering. Correction may include repair or replacement. 2. Warranty to be signed by manufacturer, installer, and contractor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Packaged Entrances: 1. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. Arch Amarlite. b. CMI Archtectural Products, Inca C. Kawneer Company, Inc. d. Tubelite Architectural Systems. e. United States Aluminum Corporation. f, Vistawall Architectural Products Division/Butler Manufacturing Company. g. Besam, Inc. h. Dor-O-Matic Division/Republic Industries, Inc. i. Gyro Tech Inc. j. Horton Automatics/a division of the Overhead Door Corp. k. Keane Monroe Corporation. 1. Stanley Magic Door, Division of The Stanley Works. B. Aluminum Framing Systems: 03860296/96 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT 08415-3 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. Arch Amarlite. b. CMI Architectural Products, Inc. C. Kawneer Company, Inc. d. Tubelite Architectural Systems. e. United States Aluminum Corporation. f. Vistawall Architectural Products Division/Butler Manufacturing Company. 2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Aluminum Framing System: Extruded aluminum. 1. Style: Flush glazed (without projecting stops), with glazing centered in frame members; see drawings for profiles, dimensions, and arrangement of members. 2. Products which have minor differences will be accepted when, in the judgment of the architect, such differences do not detract from design concept or performance. 3. Framing members: Thermal break design with concealed, low thermal conductance material completely separating exterior metal members from interior metal members. Use only a standard construction which has been in use for at least 3 years. 4. Glazing method: Resilient gasket glazed, with provision for replacement of glazing without disassembly of framing. 5. Finish: a. Fluoropolymer finish, 2-coat. 1. Color and sheen: As selected by the architect from standard products of coating manufacturer. B. Aluminum Doors: Same general construction as Framing System, medium width style. 2.3 MATERIALS - GENERAL A. Aluminum Members: ASTM B 221 for extrusions, ASTM B 209 for sheet/plate; alloy and temper recommended by the manufacturer for the strength required, for corrosion resistance, and for the finish required. B. Fluoropolymer Finish: Multiple coats of thermally cured primer and topcoats, resin minimum _ 70 percent "Kynar 500" or "Hylar 5000"; comply with AAMA 605.2 and AA-C12C42R1X (inhibited chemical -cleaned; acid chromate -fluoride -phosphate chemical coating; organic coating). 1. Clean with inhibited chemicals and conversion -coat with acid chromate -fluoride - phosphate treatment, in accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions. 2. Products: The following products, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. "Fluoroceram"; Morton International. b. "Fluropon"; The Valspar Corporation. C. "Nubelar" or "Nubelar S"; Lilly Industries, Inc. d. "Trinar"; Akzo Coatings, Inc. e. "Duranar"; PPG Industries, Inc. 03860296/96 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT 08415-4 1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 F �^ C. Fasteners: Compatible with aluminum, aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or other noncorrosive, noncorrodible material. 1. Do not use exposed fasteners. D. Concealed Flashing: Fully annealed, soft stainless steel, 26 gage minimum; or extruded aluminum, 0.032 inch minimum. E. Miscellaneous Concealed Metal Members: High -strength aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless ` steel; hot -dip galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 123 maybe used for members which are not exposed to weather or abrasion. y F. Concrete Inserts: Cast iron, malleable iron, or steel hot -dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 123. G. Dissimilar Metal Coating: Cold -applied asphalt mastic, or other nonconductive, nonabsorptive material. H. Glazing Gaskets: Comply with ASTM C 864; style as recommended by manufacturer. �^ I. Joint Sealers: Provide products specified in Division 7. J. Door Hardware: Refer to Section 08710 for hardware specification. See hardware schedule in 3.4 of this section. ` 2.4 FABRICATION A. Any dimensions which may vary are indicated on drawings, with amount of dimensional variation allowed. B. Framing System: Pre-cut and perform all finishing in factory or shop. 1. Fit joints tightly with adjacent members in correct relationship. C. Welding: Perform welding before finishing; use methods which do not discolor metal; grind exposed welds flush; match original finish. D. Reinforcing: Provide as required to comply with performance requirements for rigidity and to support hardware; isolate dissimilar metals as specified in "Installation." E. Avoid damage to finishes. I PART 3 - EXECUTION r7 3.1 PREPARATION r- A. Examine structures; report conditions in writing which will adversely affect installation. i 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. �. 03860296/96 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT 08415-5 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 B. Install plumb and level, square and true, in correct location; support adequately and securely anchor. C. Separate aluminum exposed to weather from dissimilar metals; coat dissimilar metals that are in drainage cavities using one of the materials specified. Aluminum, stainless steel, zinc, cadmium, and small areas of white bronze are not considered dissimilar from each other. D. Coat all metals that come into contact with masonry, concrete, and treated wood, using one of the materials specified. E. Install joint sealers between exterior sill members and the surface below as indicated, to provide weathertight construction. Comply with Division 7 requirements for installation of joint sealers. 3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Clean exterior and interior soon after installation of glass, taking care to avoid damage to finishes. 3.4 HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. Aluminum door supplier to provide all hardware for aluminum doors except as noted. SET #1 Door no's. 01 and 05 Each door to have: 1 1/2 pr. Hinges A8112 NRP. Same finish as door/frame. 1 ea. E0231 x lever 1 ea. Cylinder E09211 (by Door Hardware Supplier) 1 ea. Closer CO2021 Same finish as door/frame. _ 1 ea. Pull J401 1 ea. Stop L02131 1 ea. Threshold J36170 END OF SECTION 08415 03860296/96 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT 08415-6 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 SECTION 08520 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Applications: a. Individual window units. b. Projected windows. 2. Other work included: a. Sealants around perimeters of windows. B. Related Sections: 1. Glazing: Elsewhere in Division S. 2. Sealants: Division 7. 3. Aluminum storefronts: Elsewhere in Division 8. 1.2 REFERENCES A. AA DAF-45 — Designation System for Aluminum Finishes; Aluminum Association; 1980. B. AAMA 101-93 — Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum and Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Prime Windows and Glass Doors; 1993. C. AAMA 605.2-92 — Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; American Architectural Manufacturers Association, 1992. D. AAMA 803.3-92 — Voluntary Specifications and Test Methods for Narrow Joint Seam Sealer; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 1992. E. AAMA 904.1-87 — Voluntary Specification for Friction Hinges in Window Applications; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 1987. F. ASTM A 123-89a — Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 1989. G. ASTM B 633-85 — Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel; 1985. H. ASTM B 766-86 — Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Cadmium; 1986. I. ASTM E 405-89 — Standard Test Methods for Wear Testing Rotary Operators for Windows; 1989. J. FS L-S-125B — Screening, Insect, Nonmetallic; 1972 (Notice 1, 1987). 03860296/96 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520-1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 -- 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide window assemblies which will perform as indicated without failure or deterioration. Failure includes the following: —. 1. Exterior assemblies: a. Excessive deflection. b. Excessive water leakage. C. Excessive air infiltration. d. Failure of perimeter sealant. e. Failure of glazing. B. Performance Requirements: As specified in AAMA 101, for window type, grade, and class indicated. C. Thermal Performance Required: Thermally broken construction. D. Color must match aluminum storefronts. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and data on fabrication methods, finishing, hardware, and accessories, and installation and handling recommendations. B. Certification by manufacturer that products comply with requirements of contract documents. C. Shop Drawings: Show information not conveyed by product data, and the following: 1. Elevations. 2. Cross -sections of all typical members. 3. Anchors. 4. Hardware. 5. Operators. 6. Accessories. _ 7. Glazing methods. 8. Sealants. D. Samples for Color Selection of Coated Finishes: Coating manufacturer's color selection data. E. Samples of Hardware Items. F. Warranty. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide windows bearing AAMA Certification labels showing compliance with testing specified. B. Test Methods - General: 1. Test sequence is optional, except that air infiltration test shall precede water resistance test. 03860296/96 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520-2 r' LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 r 2. Concentrated load tests may be performed on separate ventilators/sash of identical size and design as used for air, water, and uniform load tests. 3. Test each size of each type of window. r C. Test Units: Fabricated in accordance with requirements of contract documents, fully assembled, and glazed. 1. Minimum size: As specified in AAMA 101. D. Air, Water, and Structural Test Methods: As specified in AAMA 101. E. Component Structural Test Methods: As specified in AAMA 101. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements of window openings prior to fabrication. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by the contractor, installer, and manufacturer, guaranteeing to correct failures in window units which occur within 5 years after substantial completion, without reducing or otherwise limiting any other rights to correction which owner may have under the contract documents. Failures are defined to include faulty workmanship, failure to perform as specified, and failure and deterioration of materials and finishes in excess of that which would be expected under normal weather and wear. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WINDOWS - GENERAL A. Windows - General: Frame and ventilator/sash members of extruded aluminum, complete with all hardware, accessories, sub -frames, mullions, sills, and other components indicated or required; complying with AAMA 101. 1. See drawings for sizes, profiles, and arrangement of members. B. Window Design: 1. Design so water entering from outside is drained to exterior. 2. Where insulating glass or laminated glass is used, provide positive drainage to eliminate water standing in glazing channels. 3. Provide weatherstripping on all operable ventilator/sash in exterior wall. C. Window Components: Designed or selected by manufacturer for strength required and compatibility with other materials. D. Weatherstripping: Continuous weatherstripping at all points where frame of operable .- ventilator/sash or ventilator contacts frame of window. t 1. Use compression gaskets where other types are not indicated. �., E. Thermally Broken Construction: Provide frame and ventilator/sash members with concealed, E structural, load -bearing, low thermal conductance material separating exterior metal members 03860296/96 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520-3 i LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 from interior metal members. Use only a standard construction which has been in use at least -- 3 years. Do not bridge thermal gap with any fasteners or hardware. 2.2 PROJECTED WINDOWS A. Manufacturers: 1. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. Acorn Window Systems, Inc. b. Alenco Division/Redman Building Products, Inc. C. EFCO Corporation. d. Graham Architectural Products Corporation. e. Modu-Line Windows, Inc. f. TRACO. g. Winco Window Company. h. Windows, Inc. ("DeSCo"). i. Kawneer, Inc. _ B. Projected Windows: 1. Style: As indicated on drawings. a. Top Hinged. b. Out -swinging. C. Products which have minor differences will be accepted when, in the architect's judgment, such differences do not detract from design concept or intended performance. 2. Glazing method: Channel gasket. — 3. Grade: P-HC40. 4. Hardware: a. Operator: Rotary type. 1. Provide at out swinging windows. b. Hinges: Two 4-bar hinges. C. Locks: Lever handle, cam type. 5. Finish: Fluoropolymer coating. 6. Insect screens. a. Provide at project -in ventilators. _ b. Provide at project -out ventilators. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper appropriate for the use and finish, providing corrosion resistance, and as required for strength. 1. Minimum wall thickness of any member: 3/16 inch. inch. 2. Fuuoropolymer coating: Multiple coats of thermally cured fluoropolymer primer and top coats, resin minimum 70 percent "Kynar 500" or "Hylar 5000"; comply with AAMA 605.2 and AA-C12C42R1X (inhibited chemical -cleaned; acid — chromate -fluoride -phosphate chemical conversion coating; organic coating). Provide the number and type of coats as recommended by coating manufacturer for color and sheen required. - 03860296/96 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520-4 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 3. Colors: Where not indicated, colors are to be selected by the architect from manufacturer's standard range. B. Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners, except for hardware. 1. Hardware fasteners: Match finish of members to which they are fastened. 2. Anchor fasteners: Same as anchors. 3. Other fasteners: Noncorrosive and corrosion -resistant material that is compatible with materials being fastened. C. Concealed Anchors (one of the following): 1. Steel, cadmium plated after fabrication in accordance with ASTM B 766, Class 8. 2. Steel, zinc electroplated after fabrication in accordance with ASTM B 633. 3. Steel, hot -dip zinc coated after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A 123. 4. Stainless steel. D. Glass: Provide products specified elsewhere in Division 8. See window elevations for glass types used. E. Sealants: Use only nonhardening, nonshrinking, and nonmigrating materials. 1. For nonworking, metal -to -metal joints within window units: Small joint sealant conforming to 803.3, as described in AAMA 800. 2. For joints between other window components: Suitable for application. 3. For joints between window units and other building components: Provide products specified in Division 7. 4. For glazing: Provide products specified elsewhere. F. Dissimilar Metal Coating: Cold -applied asphalt mastic, or other nonconductive, nonabsorptive coating. 2.4 HARDWARE A. General: Corrosion -resistant material. B. Hinges: 1. For use without operators: Friction type; complying with AAMA 904.1; adjustable r' friction pivots/slides; nylon or other nonabrasive material. C 2. For use with operators: Nonfriction type. 3. 4- and 6-bar hinges: Concealed. r� C. Rotary Operators: Gear -type; complying with ASTM E 405, after 500 cycles with operating force of 120 pounds -force -inches, and after 7500 cycles with operating moment of 80 r pounds -force -inches and closing torque of 60 pounds -force -inches. D. Locks: Complete with strikes and fasteners. 1. Lever handle: Cam -action sweep type. 2.5 ACCESSORIES FA. Insect Screens: Formed or extruded aluminum frames with screen fabric. �, 03960296/96 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520-5 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 -- 1. Design to fit tightly, but be removable, using as few exposed fasteners or latches as possible. 2. Do not use wickets for access to window -operating hardware, unless absolutely necessary; make wickets hinged or sliding, with the same type of frames as screens, and — tight -fitting. 3. Frame construction: Minimum wall thickness of 0.040-inch, with joints mitered or coped and fastened with concealed fasteners. ._ 4. Anchor screen fabric with removable plastic or rubber splines. 5. Finish: To match window. 6. Screen fabric: Glass fiber mesh; complying with FS L-S-125. _ PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine openings before installation. Do not install windows if any detrimental conditions exist. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF WINDOWS A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. B. Install windows plumb and level, true and square. C. Support properly and securely anchor. D. Separate aluminum from dissimilar metals and coat dissimilar metals that are in drainage cavities, using one of the materials specified. Stainless steel, zinc, cadmium, and small areas of white bronze are not considered dissimilar metals. E. Coat all metals that come into contact with masonry, concrete, and treated wood, using one of the materials specified. F. Install joint sealers between sill members and the surface below, as indicated. G. Install joint sealers between frame perimeter and adjacent work, as indicated. H. Coordinate with wall -flashing installation. 1. Comply with requirements specified in Division 7 for installation of joint sealers. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF GLAZING -` A. Install as specified elsewhere in Division 8. 03860296/96 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520-6 -4 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operable ventilators/sash and hardware to operate smoothly and close tightly. 03860296/96 END OF SECTION 08520 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520-7 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 SECTION 08710 - HARDWARE PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. All finish hardware necessary for completion of project. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Section 08110 -Steel Doors and Frames B. Section 08211 - Flush Wood Doors C. Section 08360 - Sectional Overhead Doors: Hardware for same. D. Section 08410 - Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts: Hardware for same except cylinders 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers Qualifications 1. Companies specializing in manufacturing door hardware with minimum three years experience. B. Regulatory Requirements 1. Fire Door Hardware a. Conform to requirements of NFPA 80 and 101 for doors shown, scheduled, or specified to be in a fire rated wall or to receive a UL-label. b. In case of conflict between hardware specified and NFPA requirements, provide type required by NFPA. 1.5 REFERENCES A. ANSI A156.1 Butts and Hinges. B. ANSI A156.2 Bored and Preassembled Locks and Latches. C. ANSI A156.3 Exit Devices. D. ANSI A156.4 Door Controls - Closers. E. ANSI A156.5 Auxiliary Locks & Associated Products. 03860296/96 HARDWARE 08710-1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 F. ANSI A156.6 Architectural Door Trim. _ G. ANSI A156.7 Template Hinge Dimensions. H. ANSI A156.8 Door Controls - Overhead Holders. I. ANSI A156.16 Auxiliary Hardware. J. ANSI A156.18 Materials and Finishes. K. ANSI A156.21 Thresholds L. BHMA Directory of Certified Locks & Latches. M. BHMA Directory of Certified Door Closers. N. BHMA Directory of Certified Exit Devices. O. 36CFR Part 1191 - Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA) P. DHI-02 Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware. Q. DHI-03 Keying Systems and Nomenclature. R. DHI-05 Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. _ S. DHI A115 Wood Door Preparation Standards T. NFPA 80 Fire Doors and Windows. U. NFPA 101 Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures. _ V. NFPA 105 Installation of Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies. W. SDI-107 Hardware on Steel Doors (Reinforcement and Application). 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. Provide product data on specified hardware. 2. Submit manufacturer's parts lists, templates, and installation instructions. 3. Submit operation and maintenance data including data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements, and inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance. 03860296/96 HARDWARE 08710-2 _ LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 B. Hardware Schedule 1. Include for each item: quantities; manufacturer's name and catalog numbers; sizes; detail information or catalog cuts; finishes; door and frame size and materials; location and hardware set identification cross-referenced to drawings; lock trim material thicknesses; lock trim material evaluation test results; corresponding ANSI or BHMA standard type number or function number from manufacturer's catalog if not covered by ANSI or BHMA; and list of abbreviations. 2. Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware. 3. Indicate lock side of single cylinder doors. 4. Include master cross reference indicating door numbers in numerical sequence and associated hardware set. C. Keying Schedule I^ 1. Develop in accordance with DHI-03 and Owners requirements. 2. Obtain keying system approval before delivering hardware to project. 3. Master key all doors to one key. D. Certificates of Compliance 1. Submit certificates of compliance attesting that hardware items conform to the NFPA, CFR and ANSI or BHMA standards specified. In lieu of certificates, submit statement that proposed hardware items appear in current BHMA directories of certified products. 2. Fire Rated Doors: Submit certificates of compliance, attesting that doors which are indicated, scheduled, or specified to be fire rated are fitted with the required hardware (i.e. active latch bolts, self -closing devices) and operate in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 80 and 101. Identify all such doors on certificates. ! E. Spare Parts Data ' 1. Not later than 1 month prior to date of substantial completion, furnish spare parts data for locksets, exit devices, closers, electronic locking devices and electro-magnetic closer (~ holder release devices. ( 2. Include a complete list of parts and supplies, with current unit prices and source of supply. F. Maintenance Instructions 1. Furnish 6 complete copies of maintenance instructions listing routine maintenance procedures, possible breakdowns and repairs, and trouble shooting guides. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store and handle hardware to site in accordance with provisions of Section 01600. B. Individually package each article of hardware in manufacturer's standard commercial carton or container, and properly mark or label to be readily identifiable with approved hardware schedule. C. Tag or otherwise identify each change key with door for which its cylinder is intended. r f E r- 03860296/96 HARDWARE 08710-3 r LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 1.8 COORDINATION _ A. Coordinate requirements for hardware to be mounted on metal doors or metal frames between hardware manufacturer and door or frame manufacturer to establish location, reinforcement required, size of holes, and similar details. 1.9 WARRANTY _ A. Provide five year warranty for door closers. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS —' A. Hinges 1. Hager Hinge Co. _ 2. McKinney. 3. Stanley Hardware Division, Stanley Works. B. Lock and Latches 1. Best Lock Corporation. 2. Corbin/Russwin Architectural Hardware Division, Black & Decker Industries. 3. Sargent Division, Emhart Hardware Group. 4. Schlage Lock Company. C. Push/Pulls 1. H.B. Sues, a Harrow Company. 2. Rockwood Manufacturing Company. 3. Trego Industries, Inc. 4. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co. D. Exit Devices 1. Corbin/Russwin Architectural Hardware Division, Black & Decker Industries. 2. Norton Industries, Inc. 3. Sargent Manufacturing Company. 4. Von Duprin, Inc. E. Closers 1. Corbin/Russwin Architectural Hardware Division, Black & Decker Industries. 2. LCN Closers Division, Schlage Lock Co. 3. Norton Door Controls, Scovill Security Products. 4. Sargent Manufacturing Company. F. Overhead Holders 1. Glynn -Johnson. 2. Door Components International. 03860296/96 HARDWARE 08710-4 _ LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 G. Manual Bolts 1. Door Components International. 2. Glynn Johnson. 3. H.B. Ives, Harrow Co. 4. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co. H. Gasketing/Threshholds 1. Pemko Manufacturing Co. 2. 'Reese Enterprises, Inc. 3. Zero International, Inc. I. Protection Plates 1. Builders Brass Works (BBW). 2. Trego Industries, Inc. 3. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co. J. Door Stops/Bumpers 1. Builders Brass Works (BBW). 2. Trego Industries, Inc. 3. H.B. Ives, Harrow Co. 4. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co. K. Door Silencers 1. Builders Brass Works (BBW). 2. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co. 3. H.B. Ives, Harrow Co. L. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Hinges 1. General a. Conformance: ANSI A156.1 and ANSI 156.7 on metal doors and frames. b. Size: Except as otherwise specified, conform to hinge manufacturer's printed recommendations. c. Provide non -removable pins on hinges for reverse bevel doors with locks. Make non -removable by means such as a set screw in the barrel, or safety stud, when the door is in closed position. B. Locks and Latches 1. General a. To maximum extent possible, provide locksets and latchsets from single manufacturer. b. Furnish wrought strike boxes for wood frames and pairs of wood doors. c. Design: 03860296/96 11V"161i13-111 1 08710-5 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 -- (1) Levers, roses, and escutcheons: 0.050 inch thick if unreinforced; 0.035 inch _ thick if reinforced; combined thickness 0.070 inch. Provide levers with radiused return to doors. (2) Bored locksets and latchsets: Conform to ANSI A156.5. (3) Lock Cylinders: Removable type, six pin, conforming to ANSI A156.6. d. Provide all locks with core removal not requiring disassembly of knob or lockset. e. Series: 4000, conforming to ANSI A156.2, Grade 1. f. Strikes: conform to ANSI A115.2. g. Provide adjustable bevel fronts or otherwise conform to door shape for doors 1-3/8 inches thick and over. h. Furnish strike boxes with latch strikes for Grade 1. "— i. Install cylinders with cams that will freely operate all functions of the locksets specified. j. Fit cylinders to locksets without adapters. _ C. Push/Pull Plates 1. Combination push-pull plates: Category J300, 1/8 inch minimum stainless steel, beveled four edges, minimum size 4 x 16 inches, with countersunk screw holes. 2. Push and pull bars: Category J500, stainless steel with edges of mounting plates beveled.. 3. Push plates: stainless steel, beveled four edges, minimum size 4 x 16 inches. D. Exit Devices and Exit Device Accessories 1. General a. Conform to ANSI A156.3. b. Trim: wrought construction and commercial plain design with straight, beveled, or smoothly rounded sides, comers, and edges. _ c. Provide adjustable strikes for rim type devices. d. Provide touch bars in lieu of conventional crossbars and arms. e. Provide escutcheons not less than 7 by 2-1/4 inches and cut escutcheons to suit _ cylinders and operating trim. 2. Removable Mullions a. Type 22, box type furnished with mullion stabilizers of same manufacturer. b. Use only with exit devices for which mullions were manufactured. E. Closers 1. General a. Conform to ANSI A 156.4, Grade 1. b. Surface type closers: Size 1 or 2 through size 6. C. Closers for outswinging exterior doors: size one size larger than manufacturer's published recommendations, but not less than size 5. d. Size requirements for other closers: Conform to manufacturer's published recommendations, except as specified otherwise. e. Closers for outswinging exterior doors: Provide parallel arms or top jamb mount closers for outswinging exterior doors. f. Provide narrow projection closers for doors close to a wall so as not to strike wall at 90-degree open position. 03860296/96 HARDWARE 08710-6 _ LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 g. Set closing force on doors accessible to the physically handicapped for a push-pull of 5 pounds applied at knob or handle for interior doors; for exterior doors, set to minimum required to relatch door. 2. Surface Type Closers a. Series CO2000 Full Cover with options PT-4C and PT-41). F. Overhead Holders 1. Conform to ANSI A 156.8 G. Auxiliary Hardware r" 1. Conform to ANSI A156-16 for auxiliary hardware, consisting of flush bolts and door stops. 2. Lever extension flush bolts: Type L04081. 3. Dust -proof strikes: a. Type L04011 for non -fire rated doors. b. Type L04021 for fire rated doors. rH. Protection Plates 1. Conformance .. a. Kick plates: ANSI A156.6, category J102, stainless steel. 2. Fabrication: Bevel all edges, with countersunk screw holes. E 3. Size a. 2 inches less in width than door width for single doors and 1 inch less for pairs of doors and height as follows: (1) Kick Plates: 10 inches, except where bottom rail is less than 10 inches, extend to within 1/2-inch of panel mold or glass bead. 4. Automatic Door Bottoms a. Surface type with aluminum housing cover, anodized clear finish. b. Provide with rubber, vinyl, or neoprene seal. c. Fabricate for actuation by opening and closing of door. f 5. Metal Thresholds a. Conformance: ANSI A 156.21 !" b. Exterior doors: Extruded aluminum type as scheduled. c. Where required, modify thresholds to receive projecting bolts of flush bolt exit devices. d. Thresholds for doors accessible to handicapped: Raised thresholds, corrugated, beveled with slopes not exceeding 1:2, and with height not exceeding 1/2-inch. Bevel not required where height is less than 1/2-inch. 7 6. Rain Drips ! a. Extruded aluminum, not less than 0.07 inch thick, clear anodized. b. Door sill rain drips: 1-1/2 inches to 1-3/4 inches high by 5/8-inch projection. c. Overhead rain drips: approximately 1-1/2 inches high by 2-1/2 inches projection; extend 2 inches on door opening width. 7. Aluminum Housed Type Weatherseals a. Extruded aluminum retainers not less than 0.07 inch wall thickness with vinyl, neoprene, silicone rubber, polyurethane or vinyl brush inserts. b. Finish: Clear anodized. r 03860296/96 HARDWARE 08710-7 r LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 — 8. Smoke Gasketing a. Compression -type seal, silicon based, self-adhesive product for use on steel door frames with wood or steel doors for 20-minute label. b. Color: Bronze I. Accessories 1. Special Tools: Provide special tools such as spanner and socket wrenches and dogging keys, required to adjust hardware items. — J. Fastenings 1. Provide proper type, size, quantity, and finish with each article of hardware. 2. Concrete or Masonry: Provide machine screws and expansion shields. 3. Fastenings exposed to weather and in finished work: brass, bronze, or stainless steel. K. Fire Door Hardware 1. Conform to requirements of NFPA 80 and NFPA 101. L. Finishes 1. Painting of primed surfaces: Specified in Section 09900 - Painting. 2. Conform to ANSI A156.18 as follows: — a. Hinges: BHMA 626 or 630 b. Lock and door trim: BHMA 626 or 630. c. Door closers: BHMA 630 or BHMA 689 painted. d. Miscellaneous hardware: BHMA 630 e. Aluminum housed weatherstripping: BHMA 673 f. Thresholds: 673 — 3. Door Protection Plates: BHMA 630. M. Keying — 1. Provide a master keying system. 2. Key locks in sets or subsets. 3. Send keys directly from lock manufacturer to Owner by registered mail or other approved _ means. 4. Supply keys in following quantities: a. 3 keys for each lock b. 2 master keys C. 2 control keys and 5 extra cylinder cores 5. Furnish keys to Owner arranged in sets or subsets as scheduled. 6. Provide a key cabinet conforming to BMHA. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. 03860296/96 HARDWARE 08710-8 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 L B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION 900-9268 A. General 1. Locate in accordance with DHI 04 and DHI 05 recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames and DHI Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frames. 2. Install in accordance with DHI-02. 3. When approved, slight variations in locations or dimensions will be permitted. 4. Attach door control devices for exterior doors such as closers and holders to doors with thru bolts such as sex bolts and nuts. 5. Conform to 36CFR Part 1191 for positioning requirements for handicapped. B. Door -Closing Device 1. Install and adjust in accordance with templates and printed instructions supplied by manufacturer. 2. Insofar as practicable, mount closer on room side of door for doors opening to or from halls and corridors. C. Key Control Storage System 1. Install where directed by Architect. D. Kick Plates 1. Install kick plates on push side of single -acting doors. E. Auxiliary Hardware 1. Install lever extension flush bolts at top and bottom of inactive leaf of pairs of doors. 2. Install dust -proof floor strike or threshold, cut-out for bottom bolt F. Thresholds 1. Install in a bed of sealant with stainless steel screws and expansion shields. 2. Provide proper clearance and an effective seal with specified weather stripping. 3. Minimum screw size: #10, length dependent on job conditions. G. Weatherseals 1. Locate as indicated, snug to door face and fastened in place with color matched metal screws after door and frames have been finish painted. 2. Install to exclude light and air flow when door is in closed position. 3. Provide astragal seals at pairs of doors. 4. Screw spacing: as recommended by manufacturer. H. Gasketing 1. Install at inside edge of hinge, head and latch side of door frame. I. Hardware for Labeled Fire Doors 1. Install in accordance with requirements of NFPA 80 AND NFPA 105. i" 6 03860296/96 08710-9 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 3.3 HARDWARE SCHEDULE SET #1 All hardware to be provided by Aluminum Door Supplier except as noted below. Door no's. 01 and 05 Each door to have: 1 ea. Cylinder E09211 (by Door Hardware Supplier) SET #2 Door no's. OlA and 04 Each door to have: 1 1/2 pr. Hinges A8112 1 ea. Pull 1401 1 ea. Push Bar J501 1 ea. Stop L02101 1 ea. Kickplate 3 ea. Silencers 1 ea. Closer CO2021 SET #3 Door no's. 04A, 04B, 06, 14 and 25 Each door to have: 1 1/2 pr. Hinges A8111 1 ea. Panic Device Type 01, Function 08 with lever, (lock cylinder not required) 1 ea. Closer CO2021 1 ea. Stop L02101 1 ea. Kickplate 1 set Smokeseals 1 ea. Automatic Door Bottom 3 ea. Silencers 900-9268 03860296196 HARDWARE 08710-10 r r LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 SET #4 i' Door no's. 07 and 17 r- Each door to have: i 1 1/2 pr. Hinges A8112 1 ea. Closer CO2021 at door No .07, CO2011 at door no. 17. r 1 ea. Privacy Set, F77 1 ea. Stop L02251 1 ea. Kickplate Plate r' -3 ea. Silencers SET #5 Door no's. 02, 11, 18, 19, 26, 27 and 28 Each door to have: 1 1/2 pr. Hinges A8112 1 ea. Lockset F81 1 ea. Closer CO2011; CO2021 at door no's. 08, 18, 19 and 28 1 ea. Stop L02251 1 ea. Kickplate Plate 3 ea. Silencers SET #6 Door no's. 15 Each pair to have: 3 pr. Hinges A81I I NRP 1 ea. Lockset F86 r 1 pr. Flushbolts L04081 2 ea. Overhead Holders C08511 2 ea. Kickplates r 2 ea. Stops L02131 I 1 ea. Head and Sill Raindrip 1 ea. Threshold J32100 r 1 set Weatherstrip F f l 03860296/96 HARDWARE r 900-9268 087104 1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 Door no's. 13 Each pair to have: 3 pr. Hinges A8112 . 1 ea. Lockset F81 1 ea. Automatic Flushbolt 2 ea. Closers CO2021 2 ea. Kickplates 2 ea. Silencers 1 set Weatherstripping SET #7 SET #8 Door no's. 12B and 14A Each door to have: 1 1/2 pr. Hinges A8111 NRP 1 ea. Lockset F81 1 ea. Closer CO2021 1 ea. Kickplate 1 ea. Head and Sill Raindrip 1 ea. Stop L02131 1 ea. Threshold J36190 with Vinyl Bubble 1 set Weatherstrip SET #9 Door no. 23 Each door to have: 1 1/2 pr. Hinges A8111 1 ea. Push Plate 1 ea. Pull J401 and plate 1 ea. Closer CO2021 1 ea. Kickplate 3 ea. Silencers 1 ea. Stop L02101 900-9268 03860296/96 HARDWARE 08710-12 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 Door no's. 12 and 12A - Overhead Doors All hardware by door supplier. SET #10 END OF SECTION 900-9268 03860296/96 HARDWARE 08710-13 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 SECTION 08800 - GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Monolithic glass. 2. Insulating glass. 3. Mirror glass. 4. Glazing accessories. B. Types of work in this section include work for: 1. Exterior windows. 2. Interior windows. 3. Exterior storefront. 4. Aluminum entrances. 5. Exterior doors. 6. Mirrors. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Exterior Glazing: Provide glazing assemblies which will withstand normal conditions without failure, loss of weathertightness, or deterioration. 1. Design to withstand wind loading as specified by applicable code for parts/portions of buildings. a. Statistical probability of breakage: 8 per 1000, maximum, at 60-second wind load. B. Deterioration includes: 1. For insulating glass: a. Moisture or dirt between panes. b. Development of condensation between panes. C. Damage to internal coating, if any. d. Development of other visible indication of seal failure. 2. For coated glass: Development of visible defects in coating. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data. B. Samples of Glass. C. Certification by contractor, installer, glass fabricator, or manufacturer that glass thickness and heat treatment have been selected to provide the strength required to meet specified structural performance requirements. D. Insulating Unit Warranty. 03860296/96 GLAZING 08800-1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 — E. Weathertight Warranty. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Warranty on Insulating Glass: Fabricator's standard warranty for 5 years. 1. Weathertight warranty: 5 years. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS Where product names are indicated, comparable products of the manufacturers listed will be considered for substitution. A. Manufacturers: 1. Insulating glass units: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: — a. AFG Industries, Inc. b. Cardinal IG Company. C. Falconer -Lewistown, Inc. -- d. Guardian Industries Corporation. e. HGP Industries, Inc. f. Inde-Pane, Inc. g. Spectrum Glass Products, Inc. h. Tempglass Division/Indal Ltd. i. Viracon, Inc. 2. Reflective glass: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. Cardinal IG Company. _ b. Ford Glass Division/Ford Motor Company. C. Guardian Industries Corporation. d. HGP Industries, Inc. e. Libbey-Owens-Ford Company. f. Saint Gobain. g. Spectrum Glass Products, Inc. h. Tempglass Division/Indal Ltd. i. Viracon, Inc. 3. Spandrel glass, ceramic coated: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. Guardian - Jamestown. b. HGP Industries, Inc. C. Tempglass Division/Indal Ltd. d. Viracon, Inc. 4. Laminated glass: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with _ requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. Falconer -Lewistown, Inc. b. Globe Amerada Glass Company. C. Guardian Industries Corporation. 03860296/96 GLAZING 08800 2 71 F LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 r d. Tempglass Division/Indal Ltd. e. Viracon, Inc. 2.2 GLASS TYPES A. Glass Types - General: Provide glass types fabricated of the glass products indicated. 1. Exterior glass thickness: 6 mm (1/4 inch nominal), minimum. 2. Interior glass thickness: 6 mm (114 inch nominal), unless otherwise indicated. 3. Heat treatment for exterior glass: As recommended by glass manufacturer to provide strength necessary to resist specified loads. a. Exception: Safety glazing requirements supersede this strength requirement. 4. Cut tempered glass to size and shape and drill holes prior to tempering. 5. Cut or drill holes in laminated units. 6. Grind exposed edges smooth, using methods recommended by manufacturer. B. Glass Type I - 1 : Sealed insulating units. 1. Product: Opaque Insulating Spandrel Glass. 2. Total thickness: 1 inch, nominal. 3. Exterior pane: Opaque tempered glass a. Fully tempered glass b. Color: Solar gray 1. Fret and opacifier on 2nd surface. 4. Interior pane: Opaque tempered glass. a. Fully tempered. b. Color: Solar gray. C. Fret on 3rd surface. 5. Winter U-value: 0.10, maximum. 6. Summer U-value:.10, maximum. C. Glass Type I - 2 : Sealed insulating units. 1. Total thickness: 1 inch, nominal 2. Exterior pane: Low -emissivity coated glass. a. Fully tempered float glass. b. Color: Solar gray. 3. Interior pane: Low -emissivity coated glass. a. Fully tempered float glass. b. Color: Solar gray. 4. Light transmittance: 60 Percent daylight, 75 percent solar. 5. Shading coefficient: 0.65. 6. Reflectance: 33 percent daylight, 28 percent solar. 7. Winter U-value: 0.19 maximum. 8. Summer U-value: 0.10 maximum. D. Glass Type I-3: Sealed insulating, non -tempered units (same as Type I-2, except not tempered). E. Glass Type S - 1 : Wired glass. 1. Fire -resistance rated. 2. Product: Pattern -diamond. 03860296/96 GLAZING 08800-3 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 _ F. Glass Type M -1 : Mirror glass. — 1. Two-ply laminated glass with 0.030-inch-thick interlayer. a. Silvered on second surface. 2. Thickness: 5/16 inch. -- 3. Color: Clear. 4. Edge treatment: Ground. G. Glass Type L-1: Clear laminated. 1. Two or three ply laminated glass with 0.030-inch thick interlayer. 2. Thickness: 1/4 inch. _ 3. Color: Clear. H. Glass Type A-1: Overhead Door 1. Acrylic Insulated. 2. Color: Tinted gray. 3. Thickness: 5/8 inch minimum. 4. Per overhead door manufacturer's standard. 2.3 BASIC GLASS PRODUCTS A. Sealed Insulating Units: Factory -assembled multiple panes separated by and sealed to spacers forming air -tight, dehydrated air space(s). 1. ASTM E 774, Class A. 2. Spacer seals: Manufacturer's standard. B. Float Glass: Quality q3, unless otherwise indicated. 1. For mirrors: Quality ql or q2. 2. Annealed: ASTM C 1036, Type I. 3. Heat -strengthened: ASTM C 1048, Kind HS, Type I. 4. Fully tempered: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Type I. a. Tong marks are permitted if they will be concealed in glazing channel. C. Laminated Units: Multiple plies laminated together with interlayer, using heat and pressure, without air pockets or contaminants between plies. 1. Interlayer for all -glass units: Polyvinyl butyral sheet, specifically designed for lamination and with demonstrated long-term ability to maintain physical and visual properties under installed conditions. D. Reflective Glass: Float glass, coated as indicated. E. Wired Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type 11, Class 1, Quality q8. 1. Fire -resistance rated where indicated. F. Mirror Glass: Float glass, with minimum 4-layer coating consisting of silver, copper, and 2 heat -cured protective coats; tested in accordance with FS DD-M-411. 1. Fabrication: Always use gloves when handling mirror glass. a. Fabricate in the shop; avoid mechanical and chemical damage to backing. b. Seal edges immediately after fabrication with coating recommended by backing coating manufacturer. 03860296/96 GLAZING 08800-4 i F LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 .• C. Wash fronts, backs, and edges with clean water immediately after fabrication. 2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Installation Materials - General: Select products which have appropriate performance characteristics as recommended by glass and glazing materials manufacturers and which are compatible with all materials with which they will come into contact. B. Heel and Toe Bead Sealant: Noncuring, nonskinning, minimum 75 percent solids, butyl or polyisobutylene rubber, complying with 802.3, Type 11 ductile back bedding compound, as described in AAMA 800. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION -GENERAL r A. Comply with recommendations for installation contained in the FGMA "Glazing Manual" and "Sealant Manual" except when specifically not recommended or prohibited by the glass or glazing material manufacturer; comply with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Protect glazing from edge damage during handling and installation. C. Do not install glass that has edge damage or defects that reduce glass strength or performance or diminish appearance. 3.2 GLAZING IN FRAMES A. Use the following glazing methods in the locations indicated in other specification sections: 1. Compression gaskets, both sides. B. Use continuous heel or toe bead at all exterior glazing. C. Do not block weep holes. D. Compression Gaskets: Secure gaskets so they will not work out under normal movement. 1. Install so they fit tightly at corners, allowing for stretch during installation. 3.3 MIRROR INSTALLATION A. Install mirrors in accordance with the recommendations of the mirror manufacturer and with FGMA "Glazing Manual." 1. Do not install mirrors having any damage to backing coating. 2. Do not install until all other work in the area is complete. 3. Do not install until permanent HVAC systems are in operation. 4. Do not install in areas where airborne solvents or heavy duty cleaners are being used; ventilate areas thoroughly after use before installing mirrors. 5. Do not install over recently installed plaster, masonry, concrete, or paint. 6. Install with at least 3/ 16-inch space between back surface of mirror and substrate. 03860296/96 08800-5 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 7. Mount plumb; provide shims or spacers if required. 8. Mount adjacent pieces in the same plane. END OF SECTION 08800 03860296/96 GLAZING 0S800-6 r li LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 SECTION 09220 - PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Portland cement plaster. 2. Metal framing. 3. Metal furring. 4. Metal lath. 5. Trim and accessories. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product data. 900-9268 B. Samples: 1. Plaster finish: Submit 12-inch-square samples of each required plaster finish, mounted on plywood or hardboard. 2. Trim and accessories: Submit 12-inch-long samples of each type of trim and accessory which will be exposed in the finish work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Metal Framing Components: 1. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. Dale/Incor. b. Gold Bond Building Products, a National Gypsum Division. C. Marino Industries Corporation. d. Unimast, Inc. (formerly a part of USG). 2.2 FRAMING TO RECEIVE METAL LATH A. General: Size framing members and establish spacing to comply with requirements of ML/SFA "Guide Specifications for Metal Lathing and Furring," unless specifically indicated otherwise. As an optional method of framing soffits, the contractor may use Metal "C" Studs as shown in the details, see "Section 05400 - Cold Formed Metal Framing. If soffit framing is greater than 12" o.c., then soffit sheathing must be used. B. Ceiling Channels: ASTM C 754, with rust -inhibitive finish. 1. Main runner channels: 1-1/2-inch cold rolled channels; 0.475 pound per foot. 2. Cross -furring: 3/4-inch cold rolled channel; 0.3 pound per foot. 03860296/96 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220-1 7 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 C. Wire: ASTM A 641, soft, Class 1 galvanized. 1. Ceiling hangers: Minimum 8 gage wire. 2. Tie wire: Minimum 18 gage wire. 900-9268 D. Furring Channels: ASTM C 754 channels, galvanized per ASTM A 525, G60 coating designation. 1. Channel size: Except as otherwise indicated, 3/4-inch cold -rolled channels; 0.3 pound per foot. 2.3 METAL LATH A. General: Comply with MIJSFA "Guide Specifications for Metal Lathing and Furring" for type and style of metal lath to suit application and support spacing. B. Expanded Metal Lath: ASTM C 847. 1. Diamond mesh lath: 2.5 pounds per square yard nominal weight. a. Galvanized. b. Provide paper backing. C. Paper Backing: Where paper backing is indicated, provide the following material, factory bonded to back of lath, complying with FS UU-B-790 for Type I, grade and style as indicated below: 1. Vapor -retardant paper: Grade B, Style IA. 2.4 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER MATERIALS A. Base Coat Materials: 1. Masonry cement: ASTM C 91, Type N. 2. Aggregate: Manufactured or natural sand, ASTM C 897. B. Finish Coat Materials: Same as base coat materials. 2.5 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. Metal Trim: Fabricate from ASTM A 446 or ASTM A 527 galvanized steel, with Class G90 zinc coating. 1. Comer bead: 1/8-inch-diameter bead with expanded flanges. 2. Bull nose comer bead: 3/4-inch-radius, 7/8-inch-wide (chord length) bead with expanded flanges. 3. Casing bead: J-shaped, square -edge style, with 1/4-inch return, leg to match plaster thickness, and nominal 1-1/4-inch nailing flange. 4. Casing bead: J-shaped, square -edge style, with 1/4-inch return, leg to match plaster thickness, and nominal 1-1/4-inch nailing flange with nominal 2-inch expanded extension. 5. Control joint: M-shaped, with diamond mesh expanded flanges. 6. Flanged control joint: M-shaped, with flattened beads, removable tape to keep plaster out of groove, and with diamond mesh expanded flanges. 03860296/96 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220-2 t LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 t. B. Metal Lath Accessories: 1. Cornerite: Diamond mesh expanded metal; brake -formed to 100 degree angle with 2-inch-wide flanges. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide miscellaneous materials as produced or recommended by plaster manufacturer. 2.7 PLASTER MIXES A. Portland Cement Plaster: Comply with ASTM C 926 for type of substrate and for compatibility between coats. 7 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF METAL FRAMING A. General: Comply with requirements of MLJSFA "Guide Specifications for Metal Lathing and Furring," except where exceeded by other requirements, for framing to receive metal lath. See paragraph 2.2.A for contractor option at soffits. B. Ceiling Suspension: Secure hangers to structure or to anchorage devices so that full strength of hanger can be achieved. 1. Install ceiling framing components supporting plaster on metal lath at spacings not to exceed those permitted by MLJSFA specifications, and not to exceed the following: a. Hangers: 36 inches on center. b. Main runners: 48 inches on center. C. Cross -furring: 12 inches on center. 2. Reinforce openings and interruptions in horizontal framing system with additional furring channels. Ensure that entire suspension system is laterally braced. 3. Install additional bracing at exterior soffits as indicated, or as required to resist wind uplift. C. Furring: Install furring members in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and +-r referenced framing standard. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF METAL LATHING A. Installation Standard: Install lathing in accordance with ASTM C 1063. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF PLASTERING ACCESSORIES AND TRIM A. General: Comply with referenced installation standards for provision and location of plaster trim and accessories. 3.4 PLASTER APPLICATION r" A. General: Comply with provisions of ASTM C 926. 03860296/96 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220-3 r LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 '=r B. Apply plaster in thickness indicated by referenced application standard for 2-coat work. C. Curing: Comply with Annex A2 of ASTM C 926 for curing of each coat and for time between coats of portland cement plaster. D. Apply and work finish coat to produce uniform texture and color. 1. Finish texture: Float (sand) finish. END OF SECTION 09220 03860296/96 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 092204 f - LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 .• SECTION 09260 - GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal support systems. 2. Acoustic insulation. 3. Gypsum wallboard. 4. Drywall finishing. 5. Cementitious Backer Units. B. Related Sections: I I. Cold -formed metal framing: Division 5. 2. Painting: Elsewhere in Division 9. Is 1.2 REFERENCES i. A. ASTM C 36-93 — Standard Specification for Gypsum Wallboard; 1993. B. ASTM C 475-93 — Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board; 1993. i C. ASIM C 645-94 — Standard Specification for Non -Load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs, Runners (Track), and Rigid Furring Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board; 1994. r D. ASTM C 754-88 — Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw -Attached Gypsum; 1988. E. ASTM C 840-94 — Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 1994. F. ASTM C 919-84(88) — Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications; 1984 (Reapproved 1988). r G. ASTM C 1002-93 — Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of ` Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases; 1993. H. ASTM E 119-88 — Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and ' Materials; 1988. I. Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL); 1994. J. GA-214-90 Recommended Specification: Level of Gypsum Board Finish; Gypsum Association; 1990. 03860296/96 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS '09260-1 t I` LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for systems required, including installation instructions and data sufficient to show compliance with requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Provide installation by a company specializing in work similar to that required on this project and with not less than 5 years of documented experience. B. Regulatory Requirements: At locations indicated on drawings, provide fire -rated assemblies tested in accordance with ASTM E 119 and acceptable to authorities for ratings required. Provide assemblies as listed in the following: 1. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.'s (UL) "Fire Resistance Directory." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original and unopened packages, containers, or bundles, with brand names and manufacturer's labels intact and legible. B. Store materials in dry location, fully protected from weather and direct exposure to sunlight. C. Stack gypsum board products flat and level, properly supported to prevent sagging or damage to ends and edges. D. Store corner bead and other metal and plastic accessories to prevent bending, sagging, distortion, or other mechanical damage. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for applying and finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations, whichever are more stringent. For nonadhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain not less than .40 deg F (4 deg C). For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board, maintain not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 48 hours before application and continuously after until dry. Do not exceed 95 deg F (35 deg C) when using temporary heat sources. Ventilate building spaces as required to dry joint treatment materials. Avoid drafts during hot, dry weather to prevent finishing materials from drying too rapidly. B. Ventilation: Provide controlled ventilation during joint finishing operations,` to eliminate excessive moisture. Avoid drafts during hot, dry weather to prevent finishing materials from drying too quickly. f_ 03860296196 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09260-2 1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FRAMING MATERIALS A. General: Select size and gage of framing members and establish spacing to comply with requirements of ASTM C 754 unless otherwise specifically indicated. B. Studs and Tracks: ASTM C 645, steel with protective coating. 1. Nominal depths: As indicated on drawings. C. Ceiling Channels: ASTM C 754, cold -rolled or hot -rolled steel, with rust -inhibitive finish. D. Grid Suspension System: Manufactured steel direct -hung grid ceiling suspension system with interlocking main beam and cross -furring components, complying with requirements of ASTM C 645. E. Hanger Wire: ASTM A 641, soft, Class 1 galvanized. 1. Furring channel ties: Minimum 0.048 inch diameter (18 gage) wire. F. Hanger Rods and Flats: Mild steel, galvanized or coated with a rust -inhibitive paint. G. Furring Members: ASTM C 645, steel with protective coating. 1. Hat -shaped except as otherwise indicated. 2. C-shaped studs, in locations indicated. H. Furring Fasteners/Connectors: Manufacturer's recommended system for specific application indicated, complying with ASTM C 754. I. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: 1. Dale/Incor. 2. Dietrich Industries, Inc. 3. Gold Bond Building Products, a National Gypsum Division. 4. Marino/Ware 5. Unimast, Inc. (formerly a part of USG). 6. USG Corporation. 2.2 GYPSUM BOARD A. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36; maximum lengths available to minimize end -to -end butt ` joints in each area receiving finished gypsum board. 1. Regular, except as otherwise indicated. r2. Edges: Tapered. r .w B. Thicknesses: As indicated on drawings for each application. C. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: 1. Centex American Gypsum Company. 03860296/96 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09260-3 i LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900;-9268 2. Domtar Gypsum. 3. Georgia-Pacific Corporation. 4. Gold Bond Building Products, a National Gypsum Division. 5. USG Corporation. 2.3 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Except as otherwise specifically indicated, provide trim and accessories by manufacturer of gypsum board materials, made of galvanized steel or zinc alloy and configured for concealment in joint compound. 1. Include comer beads, edge trim, and other trim units necessary for project conditions. Provide accessories as required in order to achieve details indicated, whether or not specific accessories are shown on the drawings. B. Exposed Trim: At locations indicated, provide manufacturer's standard metal trim units designed to be left exposed or semiexposed. 2.4 JOINT TREATMENT A. , General: Provide products by manufacturer of gypsum boards. Comply with ASTM C 475 and with manufacturer's recommendations for specific project conditions. B. Joint Tape: Manufacturer's standard paper reinforcing tape. C. Drying Type Joint Compound: Vinyl -based type for interior use, and as follows: 1. Taping compound: Type specifically formulated for embedding tape and accessories and for prefilling. 2. Topping compound: Type specifically formulated for finishing drywall over taping compound. 2.5 CEMENTTTIOUS BACKER UNITS (GLASS MESH MORTAR UNITS) A. Proprietary backing units with glass fiber mesh reinforcing and water-resistant coating on both faces, complying with the following requirements: 1. Cement -Coated Portland Cement Panels: High -density portland cement surface coating on both faces and lightweight concrete core composed of portland cement and expanded ceramic aggregate; fabricated in panels 7/16-inch thick by 36 inches wide by 36, 48, 60, 64, or 72 inches long and weighing 3.2 to 3.8 psf. 2.° Vinyl -Coated Portland Cement Panels: Core formed in a continuous process from aggregated portland cement slurry and reinforced with vinyl -coated woven glass fiber mesh embedded in both surfaces, with one face smooth and other textured; fabricated in panels 1/2-inch thick and by 36 inches wide by 48, 60, and 72 inches long; and weighing 31bs psf. B. Mortar Unit Finishing Materials: Tape and joint compounds as recommended by manufacturer of cementitious backer units. r_ r1 03860296/96 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS . 09260-4 i PW LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 .- C. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, cementitious backer units which I may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: r, 1. Wonder -Board; Modulars Inc. 2. Durock Tile Backer Board; Durabond Div., USG Industries, Inc. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide miscellaneous materials as produced or recommended by manufacturer of gypsum products. B. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I; unfaced semirigid mineral fiber mat; thickness 2 1/2". C. Screws: ASTM C 1002; self -drilling type; lengths as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project conditions. D. Acoustical Sealants: ASTM C 919; nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning type for concealed locations; nonoxidizing, skinning type for exposed locations. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Inspection: Verify that project conditions and substrates are appropriate to begin installation of work of this section. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorage devices for suspended ceilings/soffits, verifying that spacing and rated strength are correct for anticipated load conditions. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF METAL FRAMING A. General: Comply with provisions of ASTM C 754 and ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation except where exceeded by other requirements. B. Steel Studs: 1. General: Install tracks and studs in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as follows: a. Stud spacing: As indicated on drawings. 2. Door openings: Comply with GA-214; reinforce openings as required for size and weight of doors, using a minimum of two side -by -side studs on each side of opening. a. At openings in fire -rated partitions, comply with requirements of governing authorities for framing. 3. Partition heights: Extend studs to face of suspended ceiling. 4. Blocking and bracing: Install blocking and bracing as recommended by manufacturer for adequate support of wall -mounted items installed as work of other sections. 03860296/96 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09260-5 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 3.4 INSTALLATION OF GYPSUM BOARD 900-9268 ' A. General: Comply with ASTM C 840 and GA-216 except where exceeded by other requirements. 1. Wherever possible, install gypsum board to minimize butt end joints. 2. Apply ceiling boards prior to installation of wallboards. Arrange to minimize butt end joints near center of ceiling area. 3. Install wallboards in a manner which will minimize butt end joints in center of wall area. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of walls. 4. Butt all joints loosely, with maximum of 1/16 inch between boards. 5. Place wrapped edges adjacent to one another; do not place cut edges or butt ends adjacent to wrapped edges. 6. Support all edges and ends of each board on framing or by solid substrate, except that long edges at right angles to framing members in non -fire -rated construction may be left unsupported. 7. In double -layer ceiling work, apply base layer with long edges perpendicular to framing members, with face layer in opposite direction, and with all joints offset. 8. In double -layer wall applications, apply base layer with long edges parallel to framing members, with face layer in opposite direction, and with all joints offset. B. Isolation Joints: Where gypsum board construction intersects structural components, provide isolation by stopping board a minimum of 1/4 inch from structure, for finishing by means of exposed or semiexposed trim. C. Installation on Metal Framing and Furring: 1. Single -layer application: Install gypsum board by means of screw attachment. a. On walls and partitions, plan installation so that leading edge or end of gypsum board is attached to open end of stud flange first. 2. Double -layer application: a. Install base layer by means of 1-inch screws, spaced at 24 inches on center. b. Install face layer by means of screws at least 3/8 inch longer than total thickness of gypsum board layers, spaced at 12 inches on center. 3. For fire -rated construction, install gypsum board by means of screws as specified for the tested assembly. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for installation of trim items. Except for items intended by manufacturer to be left exposed or semiexposed, install trim units for concealment in joint finishing compound. Wherever possible, fasten metal trim items to substrate with same fasteners used to install gypsum board products. B. Corner Bead: Install metal comer bead at all external corners unless details clearly indicate its omission at specific locations. C. Edge Trim: Install edge trim at locations indicated and wherever edge of gypsum board otherwise would be exposed. 03860296196 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09260-6 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 3.6 FINISHIIdG A. General: Comply with ASTM C 840 and GA-216 except where exceeded by other requirements. 1. Do not mix joint compounds except as specifically recommended by manufacturer. B. Finish gypsum board in accordance with the following level of finish per GA-214, except where indicated otherwise on the drawings: 1. Level 3: Embed tape in joint compound at all joints and interior angles. Provide two separate coats of compound at all joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. Provide smooth surfaces free of tool marks and ridges. C. Joint Treatment: Tape and finish joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for compounds used, using proper hand tools designed for the purpose. 1. Avoid raising nap of face paper when sanding; carefully sponge down any areas roughened by sanding process. D. Penetrations: Fill cutouts and openings around fixtures and penetrations with joint compound. 3.7 CLEANING A. Promptly remove any residual gypsum drywall materials from adjacent or adjoining surfaces, leaving spaces ready for subsequent finishing operations and decorating. END OF SECTION 09260 03860296/96 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09260-7 �t ry LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 SECTION 09300 - TILE PART 1-GENERAL �I 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Unglazed ceramic mosaic tile. 2. Glazed wall tile. 1.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Fire -Rated Construction: At locations indicated, provide fire -rated assemblies tested per ASTM E 119 and acceptable to governing authorities for designated fire ratings. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data. B. Samples - Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color selection boards of actual tile materials including a complete selection of available tile colors and finishes for each tile tvne indicated. Include samples of accessory materials requiring color selection. 1.4 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: Furnish not less than 2 percent of total product installed maintenance stock for each type, color, pattern, and size of tile product installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS - GENERAL A. Ceramic Tile Standard: ANSI A137.1. 1. Tile grade: "Standard Grade," unless noted otherwise. 2. Tile trim and accessories: Match color and finish of adjoining flat tile. 2.2 TILE PRODUCTS A. Unglazed Ceramic Mosaic Tile, Factory -Mounted Flat Tile: 1. Tile body: Porcelain. 2. Surface finish: Slip -resistant with abrasive contact. 3. 4. Nominal facial dimensions: 1 inch by 1 inch. Thickness: 1/4 inch nominal. 5. Surface configuration: Plain with cushion edge. 6. Colors: Selected by architect, after contract award, from manufacturer's standard colors. `.: 7. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. American Olean Tile Company. 03860296/96 TILE 09300-1 r 1' LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 b. Dal Tile Corporation. C. Mannington Ceramic Tile. d. Winbum Tile Manufacturing Company. B. Glazed Wall Tile; Flat Tile: 1. Nominal facial dimensions: 4-1/4 inches by 4-1/4 inches 2. Thickness: 5/ 16 inch, nominal _ 3. Surface configuration: Plain with cushion edges. 4. Mounting: Prefabricated back -mounted. 5. Colors: Selected by architect, after contract award, from manufacturer's standard r colors. 6. Trim units: Match color and finish of adjacent flat tile: a. Shapes and sizes: Manufacturer's standard, as indicated; coordinated with indicated size and coursing of adjacent tile, where applicable: 1. Comer bead. 2. Bullnose. 3. Surface bullnose. 4. Cove. 5. Base. 7. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with •- requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. American Olean Tile Company. b. Buchtal Corporation USA. C. Dal -Tile Corporation. d. Florida Tile Industries, Inc. e. International American Ceramics. f. Mannington Ceramic Tile. g. Porcelanosa USA. h. Quamagra Tile, Inc. i. Summitville Tiles, Inc. j. United States Ceramic Tile Company. C. Tile Accessories: Vitreous china accessories in color and finish selected by architect after contract award. 1. Soap holder for each shower. 2.3 STONE THRESHOLDS A. General: Fabricate to size to provide transition between tile floor and adjacent floor surface. B. Marble Thresholds: ASTM C 503. 1. White, honed marble; Marble Institute of America Group "A." 2.4 SETTING MATERIALS A. Portland Cement Mortar Installation Materials: ANSI A108. IA. 1. Setting bed reinforcing: Galvanized welded wire fabric, 2 inches by 2 inches, ASTM A 185; with W0.3 by W0.3, 0.0625 inch diameter, wire, ASTM A 82 except for , minimum wire size. 03860296/96 TILE 09300-2 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 B. Dry -Set Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.1. 2.5 WATERPROOFING MATERIALS 900-9268 A. Waterproof Membrane/Adhesive: One part trowel -applied urethane waterproofing and tile -setting adhesive. 2.6 GROUTING MATERIALS A. Commercial Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6. 1. Colors: Selected by architect, after contract award, from manufacturer's standards. B. Chemical Resistant Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3. 1 1. Service temperature: Product recommended and certified by manufacturer to resist anticipated ambient temperature range, but not less than 140 F degrees on a continuous �» basis. 2. Colors: Selected by architect, after contract award, from manufacturer's standards. t 2.7 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS IlC A. Compatibility: Provide sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates for project performance conditions. B. Urethane Sealant: ASTM C 920, Grade P; Class 25; Uses T, M, and A. 1. Color: Match tile grout color in adjacent tile joints. CIE 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Filler for Tile: Proprietary compound designed for filling unglazed tile to prevent staining. B. Tile Cleaner: Product specifically acceptable to tile manufacturer and grout manufacturer for application indicated and as recommended by National Tile Promotion Federation or Ceramic Tile Institute. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Tile Installation Standard: ANSI A108 series, for setting and grouting materials listed. B. Installation Methods: Comply with TCA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for type of applications indicated. C. Install waterproofing to comply with waterproofing manufacturer's instructions as necessary to result in a watertight installation. D. Stone Thresholds: Install at locations indicated, with same setting material as adjacent field tile. 17 03860296/96 TILE 09300-3 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 �- 1. Install with thinset mortar where thick mortar bed would be exposed above adjacent floor -- finish. 3.2 TILE APPLICATIONS A. Interior Floor, Thick -Bed: 1. Tile: Unglazed ceramic mosaic. 2. Installation method: a. Concrete subfloor: TCA F112. b. Install fluid-applied/adhesive type waterproof membrane in accordance with TCA F121. C. Mortar bed: Portland cement mortar, ANSI A108.1A. d. Install file with specified grout in accordance with TCA F114. e. Bond coat: Portland cement and water mix or portland cement dust coat on plastic bed. 3. Grout: Chemical -resistant epoxy resin. B. Interior Wall, Thin -Bed: 1. Tile: Glazed wall. 2. Installation method: -- a. Masonry: TCA W202. b. Bond coat: Dry -set portland cement mortar, ANSI A108.5. 3. Grout: Commercial portland cement. C. Shower Ceilings, Thin Bed: 1. Tile: Glazed Wall ~ 2. Installation Method a. Cementitious Backer Units: TCA W244 b. Bond Coat: Dry -set portland cement mortar, ANSI A 108.5. 3. Grout: Commercial portland cement 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean tile surfaces after installation is complete. 1. Tile filler: Clean and dry tile before applying filler. Apply filler at rate and by method recommended by filler manufacturer to achieve complete coverage and a uniform color over entire tile area. B. Protection: Apply neutral protective cleaner to file after installation if recommended by tile manufacturer. Overlay completed tile installation with kraft paper for protection from subsequent construction activities. END OF SECTION 09300 03860296/96 TILE 093004 7 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 :I SECTION 09511 = ACOUSTICAL LAY -IN CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Exposed suspension system. 2. Acoustical lay -in panels. B. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Metal deck hanger clips. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product data. 900-9268 B. Samples: Submit the following: 1. Selection samples: a. Acoustical units: Minimum 6-inch-square samples of acoustical units meeting the requirements of the specification for each type specified. 1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. In a timely manner, furnish to affected installers, attachment devices for incorporation into other work. B. Do not begin installation of ceiling system until building's normal operating temperature and humidity levels have been reached and will be maintained. 1.4 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: After ceiling installation has been completed, deliver to the owner replacement materials for materials installed. Furnish products which precisely match installed products. Protect with appropriate packaging and provide clear, legible labels. 1. Acoustical lay -in panels: Furnish full-sized panels in quantities not less than 2 percent of quantity of panels installed. 2. Elements of exposed suspension members: For each distinct type of exposed element, furnish quantities not less than 2 percent of quantity installed. " PART 2 - PRODUCTS ii 2.1 ACOUSTICAL CEILING UNITS - GENERAL A. Standard for Acoustical Ceiling Units: Provide units conforming to applicable requirements of ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials. B. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: 03860296/96 ACOUSTICAL LAY -IN CEILINGS 09511-1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 1. Mineral fiber acoustical units: -- a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. b. Celotex Corporation. C. USG Corporation. 2.2 CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS - GENERAL A. Attachment Devices for Suspension System: 1. Anchors and intermediate support members: Provide sizes capable of sustaining 5 times the load -carrying capabilities shown in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung" column. 2. Deck inserts and hanger clips: Fabricate from hot -dip galvanized steel. 3. Hanger wire: Zinc -coated (galvanized) carbon steel wire, ASTM A 641, soft temper, with Class 1 coating, minimum 12 gage (0.106 inch diameter). B. Edge Moldings and Trim: C. Manufacturer: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: 1. Exposed steel suspension system: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation. c. WAVE Worthington Armstrong Venture (formerly National Rolling Mills). d. USG Corporation. 2.3 LAY -IN ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEM 1 A. Acoustical Panels: Water felted, rigid mineral fiber boards: 1. Size: 24 by 24 inches. 2. Ceiling sound transmission class: Minimum CSTC 20. 3. Noise reduction coefficient: Minimum NRC 0.35. 4. Edge profile: Square. 5. Finish: Manufacturer's standard washable latex paint. 6. Color: White. 7. Face texture/pattern: Perforated (small holes) (ASTM E 1264 Pattern c). B. Exposed Grid: Formed, hot -dip galvanized steel with special corrosion -resistant painted finish. 1. Profile: Single -web tee, 15/16 inch wide. 2. Structural classification (ASTM C 635): Intermediate -Duty System. 3. Color and texture: White color to match ceiling panels; standard smooth texture. 2.4 LAY -IN ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEM 2 A. Ceiling Panels: Gypsum board with sealed edges, formulated especially for ceiling application in humid environments; 5/8 inch thick. 1. Size: 24 by 24 inches. 2. Finish: Unperforated vinyl film. 3. Color: White. B. Exposed Grid: Same as specified for the preceding lay -in acoustical ceiling system. 03860296/96 ACOUSTICAL LAY -IN CEILINGS 09511-2 7 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 2.5 LAY -IN ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEM 3 A. Acoustical Panels: Water felted, rigid mineral fiber boards: 1. Size: 24 by 24 inches. 2. Ceiling sound transmission class: Minimum CSTC 40. 3. Noise reduction coefficient: Minimum NRC 0.55. 4. Finish: Perforated vinyl film. 5. Color: White. 900-9268 B. Exposed Grid: Formed, hot -dip galvanized steel for concealed portion of grid; painted, formed aluminum for exposed portion. 1. Profile: Single -web tee, 15/16 inch wide. 2. Structural classification (ASTM C 635): Intermediate -Duty System. 3. Color and texture: White color to match ceiling panels; standard smooth texture. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that products furnished as work of this section, but not installed under this section, have been properly installed by the entity performing the installation. 3.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Conform to the requirements of ASTM C 636, manufacturer's installation instructions, and governing regulations. 2. Install hangers plumb and supported solely by building structure or carrying channels. Do not allow hangers to contact any objects or materials in ceiling plenum which are not actual components of ceiling system. a. Do not attach hangers to piping, conduit, or duct. Provide carrying channel trapeze support where obstruction cannot be avoided by splaying hanger 45 degrees from vertical or less. 3. Level ceiling suspension system to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet, with cumulative tolerance not to exceed 1/4 inch. Bending or kinking of hangers is not allowed. 3.3 TRIM INSTALLATION r; A. Install edge moldings and trim units at acoustical ceiling borders, at locations indicated, and where required to cover acoustical unit edges. 1. Face -riveting of trim and moldings is not allowed. 3.4 LAY -IN PANEL INSTALLATION A. Panel Installation: Install acoustical panels for accurate fit with suspension system and trim members. Scribe and cut panels at ceiling perimeter and at obstructions to provide neat, precise fit. 03860296/96 ACOUSTICAL LAY -IN CEILINGS 09511-3 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 1. Square -edge panel installation: Provide installation with panel edges which are hidden from view, by suspension members or trim. END OF SECTION 09511 03860296196 ACOUSTICAL LAY -IN CEILINGS 09511-4 I A LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY SECTION 09650 - RESILIENT FLOORING A. Section Includes: 1. Resilient tile flooring. f 2. Resilient sheet flooring. 3. Resilient base. 1.2 SUBMITTALS 900-9268 A. Product Data: Submit technical data from each manufacturer of resilient products required. B. Verification Samples: Submit samples of each type, color, and pattern of resilient product required, as follows: 1. Actual tiles. 2. Cut sections of sheet flooring, not less than six inches square. 3. Cut sections of resilient flooring accessories, not less than six inches in length. 4. Other materials requested by architect. 1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: At least 48 hours prior to beginning work, move resilient flooring materials to areas of installation and maintain at minimum 70 degrees F until 48 hours after completing installation and at minimum 55 degrees F thereafter. B. Sequencing: Do not begin installation of resilient flooring products until painting has been completed for each area. C. Existing Conditions: Do not install resilient flooring on concrete substrates until testing has been conducted to assure that moisture levels are acceptable. 1.4 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: At time of completing installation, deliver stock of maintenance materials to the owner. Furnish products matching those actually installed, packaged for storage and clearly labeled. 1. Resilient tile: 2 percent of each variety installed. 2. Resilient sheet: 2 percent of each variety installed, in full roll width. 3. Resilient base: 2 percent of each variety installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TILE FLOORING MATERIALS A. Solid Vinyl Tile: FS SS-T-31213, Type Ell. 1. Size: 12 inches by 12 inches. 03860296/96 RESILIENT FLOORING 4 ' 09650-1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 2. Gage: 1/8 inch. 3. Static Load Limit: 125 pounds per square inch. 4. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. Amtico Flooring Division/American Biltrite, Inc. b. TOIJ B. Vinyl Composition Tile: FS SS-T-312, Type IV; 12 inches by 12 inches. 1. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. Amtico Flooring Division/American Biltrite, Inc. b. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. C. Azrock Industries Inc. d. Kentile Floors Inc. e. Tarkett, Inc. 2. Composition 1: Free of asbestos. 3. Gage: 1/8 inch. 2.2 SHEET FLOORING MATERIALS A. Resilient Sheet Flooring : Inlaid vinyl sheet; filled vinyl surface layer with plastic foam backing, and other requirements as follows: 1. Total thickness:.85 inch minimum. 2. Wearlayer thickness: 0.050 inch minimum. 3. Sheet width: 72 inches minimum. 4. Static load limit: 125 pounds per square inch minimum. 5. Durability = Superior 6. Chemically welded. 7. Random Chip Blend. 8. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. Lonseal, Inc. b. Tarkett, Inc. C. Armstrong Commercial Flooring (Classic Corlon) 2.3 RESILIENT BASE MATERIALS A. Rubber Wall Base: FS SS-W-40, Type I, and as follows: 1. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. Burke Industries, Inc. b. Flexco Company. C. Johnsonite, Inc. d. The R. C. Musson Rubber Company. e. Roppe Corporation. 2. Height: 4 inches. 3. Style: Standard toe base. 4. Comers: Preformed or molded units matching base in color and finish. 03860296/96 RESILIENT FLOORING 09650-2 i n LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES 900-9268 A. Resilient Edge Strips: Solid rubber or vinyl edging, in tapered or rounded profile, nominally 1 inch in width and 1/8 inch in thickness. 1. Color: Matching flooring. B. Adhesive: Type recommended by manufacturer of resilient product for specific substrate conditions. 2.5 COLORS AND PATTERNS A. Provide colors and patterns of resilient flooring materials as selected by the architect from manufacturer's standard product line. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with manufacturer's published recommendations for installation in each area, extending resilient flooring into spaces which are partially concealed. Cut and fit tightly to fixtures, pipes, and other obstructions, as well as to walls and partitions. B. Tightly adhere resilient flooring to substrate with no open joints or cracks, and without raised or blistered areas. Spread adhesive evenly, so that final installation will be without telegraphed ' markings from adhesive or substrate. 3.2 TILE INSTALLATION A. Layout: Establish center of each space and lay tile from center point, so tiles at each edge will be not less than 1/2 the and equal in width. B. Matching: In each space, use tiles from same production run, and lay tiles in same sequence r as removed from cartons. Discard broken, chipped, or otherwise damaged tiles. 1. Lay tile square to room axis, unless indicated otherwise. 2. Lay tile with pattern in adjacent tiles oriented in opposite directions. 3.3 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING INSTALLATION A. Layout and Matching: Establish optimum use of material with minimum number of seams in each space. Match patterns carefully at seams, following manufacturer's directions. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF RESILIENT BASE A. Apply resilient base securely in locations indicated, using maximum lengths available. 03860296/96 RESILIENT FLOORING 09650-3 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 3.5 INSTALLATION OF MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES A. Resilient Edge Strips: At locations shown on drawings, or where otherwise required to protect edge of resilient flooring, install resilient edge strips securely with recommended adhesive, to achieve tightly butted joint. 3.6 CLEANING A. Initial Cleaning: Remove excess and waste materials promptly, and sweep or vacuum clean resilient flooring as soon as installation has been completed in each area. After adhesive has had adequate time to set, mop each area with damp mop and mild detergent. B. Final Cleaning: Remove scuff marks, excess adhesive, and other foreign substances, using only cleaning products and techniques recommended by manufacturer of resilient products. 1. Polish: Apply protective polish to clean resilient flooring surfaces, unless manufacturer of resilient product recommends otherwise. END OF SECTION 09650 03860296/96 RESILIENT FLOORING 09650-4 r LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 t SECTION 09680 - CARPET PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit technical data for each distinct type of carpeting material and accessory indicated. B. Initial Selection Samples: For each carpet type indicated, submit manufacturer's standard samples showing full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. 1.2 PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS A. Fire Performance: Provide carpet materials capable of meeting the following requirements when tested in accordance with methods indicated, by UL (Underwriters Laboratories Inc.) or other independent testing agency acceptable to governing authorities. 1. Methenamine pill test (ASTM D 2859): Passes. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Take measures as required to ensure materials are not damaged or deformed. Store products in flat position in properly ventilated, dry space. Use suitable means to prevent materials from lying in direct contact with the ground. 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Extra Materials: After carpet installation has been completed, deliver to the owner replacement carpeting in quantities not less than 2 percent for each distinct carpet color, pattern, and type installed. Extra materials furnished must precisely match materials installed, must be wrapped in suitable packaging, and must be clearly labeled. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Tufted Carpet: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: 1. The Blacknall Company. 2. Collins & Aikman Corporation. 3. The Harbinger Company. 4. J & J Industries, Inc. 5. Interface Flooring Systems, Inc. 6. Lees Commercial Carpets Division/Burlington Industries, Inc. 7. Milliken Contract Carpets. 8. Mohawk Carpet Corporation. 9. Stevens Carpet 03860296/96 CARPET LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 _ 900-9268 2.2 MATERIALS A. Carpet: 1. Location: Per Room Finish Schedule and Floor Plan. _ 2. Color/texture/pattern: To be selected from full range of samples. 3. Carpet construction: Tufted broadloom. 4. Pile fiber: Nylon. ., 5. Style: Level loop. 6. Pile face weight: Minimum 32 ounces per square yard. 7. Installation method: Direct glue -down. 8. i Edge guard: Vinyl or rubber. 9. Performance characteristics: a. Fire hazard classification (ASTM E 84/UL 723/NFPA 255): 1. Class B: Flame spread 26-75, smoke developed 0-450. -` b. Average critical radiant flux (ASTM E 648/NFPA 253): Minimum 0.22 watt per square centimeter. C. Smoke density with flame (ASTM E 662): Less than 450. " d. Smoke density without flame (ASTM E 662): Less than 450. e. Static electricity generation (AATCC 134): 3.5 kilovolts when tested at 20 percent relative humidity and 70 degrees F. f. Colorfastness to light (AATCC 16): Slight fade from 5 to 4 on Gray Scale after 60 hours exposure. g. Density: 5,000 minimum. ._. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Provide accessories recommended by carpet manufacturer. B. Rubber Edge Guard: Minimum width of anchorage flange 2 inches, size and shape indicated, colors selected by the architect from manufacturer's standards. C. Rubber Threshold: Edge strip type threshold at carpet termination at doors. Color as selected. D. Carpet Installation Adhesive: Manufacturer's recommended water-resistant adhesive manufactured for use with type of carpet and substrates indicated, and complying with fire performance requirements indicated for carpet. —' PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Perform installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, except where more .— stringent requirements are shown or specified, and except where project conditions require extra precautions or provisions to ensure satisfactory performance of the work. 1. Maximize consistency of carpet appearance, particularly in terms of lay of pile and its , direction. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for placement of seams. 2. Continue carpet into recessed spaces such as closets, and underneath obstacles with open bases. 03860296/96 CARPET 09680-2 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 B. At door openings, orient carpet seam perpendicular to traffic direction; doorway seam must be located directly underneath door in closed position. 3.2 INSTALLATION - GLUE DOWN CARPET A. Before applying adhesive to substrate, prefit carpet in areas where it is to be installed. Where cutting is necessary, provide properly prepared, straight, and unfrayed edges. B. Install prefitted carpet; butt edges snugly at seams and against vertical obstructions. 1. Stretch carpet tightly over substrate, so that it lies flat, is uniformly smooth, and free of bulges. C. Install edge guards at exposed carpet edges unless indicated otherwise; provide secure attachment to substrate. D. Immediately remove adhesive from surface of carpet by method which will not damage carpet. END OF SECTION 09680 03860296/96 CARPET i. 09680-3 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 SECTION 09900 - PAINTING 900-9268 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Surface preparation. B. Surface finish schedule. C. Color selection schedule. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Section 09910 - Graffiti Resistant Coating. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ANSUASTM D16 - Definitions of Terms Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related Products. B. ASTM D2016 - Test Method for Moisture Content of Wood. C. SSPC - SP1 - Solvent Cleaning. D. SSPC - SP2 - Hand Tool Cleaning. 1.5 DEFINITIONS A. Conform to ANSI/ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this Section. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing quality paint and finish products with five years experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in commercial. painting and finishing with five years documented experience. 03860296/96 PAINTING 09900-1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 —~ 1.7 SUB=ALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data 1. Provide product data on all finishing products. 2. Submit manufacturer's standard printed application instructions. B. Samples 1. Submit two samples 6 x 6 inch in size illustrating range of colors and textures available for each surface finishing product scheduled, for selection. C. Certificates 1. Submit paint manufacturer's certificate(s) stating the following: a. Paints for interior use contain no mercurial mildewcide. b. Paints for interior use contain no insecticide. c. Paints for interior use contain no more than 0.06 percent lead. d. Paints proposed for use meet the VOC regulations of the local Air pollution District having jurisdiction over the geographical area in which the project is located. D. Field Samples 1. Provide field sample panel, 48 inches long by 48 inches wide, illustrating special coating color, and finish. 2. Locate where directed. 3. Accepted sample may remain as part of the Work. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptance. C. Container labeling to include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. D. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F. and a maximum of 90 degrees F., in well ventilated area, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. E. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion. 1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain surface and ambient temperatures above 45 degrees F. for 24 hours before, during, and 48 hours after application of finishes, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. B. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is above 50 percent, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. 03860296/96 PAINTING 09900-2 S LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 r- C. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F. for interiors; 50 degrees F. for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. r D. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish and Synthetic Finishes: 65 degrees F. for interior or exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. E. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid -height at substrate surface. j 1.10 EXTRA STOCK A. Provide a one gallon container of each color to Owner at location designated. B. Label each container with color and room locations, in addition to the manufacturer's label. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Glidden Coatings and Resins Co., Cleveland, OH. B. Kelly -Moore Paint Co., Inc., San Carlos, CA. C. PPG Industries, Inc., Pittsburgh, PA. D. Substitutions: In accordance with Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS Coating s s c� g 1. Ready mixed, except field catalyzed coatings. Process pigments to a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous j coating. 2. Good flow and brushing properties; capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. 3. Compatible with existing coatings in renovation areas. �.; B. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not E specifically indicated but required to achieve finishes specified, of commercial quality. 2.3 FINISHES A. Refer to schedule at end of Section for surface finish schedule. I x 03860296/96 PAINTING 09900-3 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 B. The schedule is based on the products of Glidden Coatings and Resins Co. follows: Product Name 1. UH405 Interior Primer Alkyd 2. 595 Rustmaster Maintenance Primer Alkyd 3. UH450 Exterior Primer Alkyd 4. 4550X Industrial Enamel Alkyd -Gloss 5. UH8000 Semi -Gloss Enamel Alkyd 6. 5205,6,7 Tank & Structural Primer Alkyd 7. 5320 Block Filler Latex 8. 5019 PVA Primer/ Sealer Latex 9. 5067 Spray Coat Dry Fog Alkyd Flat 10. 81 Woodmaster Clear Satin Polyurethane -Gloss 11. 82 Woodmaster Clear Satin Polyurethane- Satin 12. 5035 QD Sanding Sealer Vinyl Toluene 13. 64897 Wallcovering Primer -Sealer Vinyl Toluene 14. 8200 Spred Ultra Enamel Latex -Semi Gloss ' .-- 15. 63245 Traffic Paint Acrylic 16. 61774 T & O Solution Tank Black Coal Tar C. Dry mill film thickness (DMF1) indicated is minimum acceptable. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by product manufacturer. B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application. C. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below following maximums: 1. Plaster: 12 percent. 2. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent. 3. Interior Located Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D2016. 4. Exterior Located Wood: 12 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D2016. D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing surfaces. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. B. Correct minor defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this Section. 03860296/96 PAINTING 09900-4 L LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 C. Shellac and seal marks which may bleed through surface finishes. D. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. E. Asphalt, Creosote, or Bituminous Surfaces Scheduled for Paint Finish: Remove foreign particles to permit adhesion of finishing materials. Apply latex based compatible sealer or primer. F. Insulated Coverings: Remove dirt, grease, and oil from canvas and cotton. G. Concrete Floors: Remove contamination, acid etch, and rinse floors with clear water. Verify required acid -alkali balance is achieved. Allow to dry. H. Galvanized Surfaces: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply coat of etching primer. I. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry. J. Plaster Surfaces: Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with latex patching plaster. Make smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Wash and neutralize high alkali surfaces. K. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces: Remove grease, scale, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Spot prime paint after repairs. L. Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. M. Interior Wood Items Scheduled to Receive Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried; sand between coats. N. Wood and Metal Doors Scheduled for Painting: Seal top and bottom edges with primer. O. Previously Painted Surfaces 1. Thoroughly clean of all grease, dirt, dust or other foreign matter. 2. Remove blistering, cracking, flaking, peeling or other deteriorated coating. 3. Roughen slick/glossy surfaces. 4. Repair damaged areas such as but not limited to nail holes, cracks, chips and spalls with suitable materials to match adjacent areas. 5. Feather edges of chipped paint and sand smooth. 03860296/96 PAINTING 09900-5 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 — 6. Prepare surfaces using methods SP 1 or SP 2. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration. B. Repair damage to other surfaces caused by work of this Section. C. Furnish drop cloths, shields, and protective methods to prevent spray or droppings from _ disfiguring other surfaces. D. Remove empty paint containers from site. 3.4 APPLICATION A. Paint, Stain and Varnish 1. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. 3. Apply each coat to uniform finish. 4. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise _ approved. 5. Sand lightly between coats to achieve required finish. 6. Allow applied coat to dry before next coat is applied. 7. Where clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain before set. Wipe excess from surface. 8. Prime back surfaces of interior and exterior woodwork with primer paint. _ 9. Prime back surfaces of interior woodwork scheduled to receive stain or varnish finish with gloss varnish reduced 25 percent with mineral spirits. 3.5 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Paint shop primed equipment. B. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately. C. In finished spaces, prime and paint insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, except where items are prefinished. D. Pre -finished Grilles and Registers: Where directed paint pre -finished grilles and registers to match wall surface in which they occur. E. Replace identification markings on mechanical or electrical equipment when painted accidentally. F. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint, to limit of sight line. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers and grilles to match face panels. 03860296/96 PAINTING 09900-6 N LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 G. Paint exposed conduit and electrical equipment occurring in finished areas, whether or not pre -finished. H. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone equipment before installing equipment. I. Color code equipment, piping, conduit, and exposed ductwork in accordance with requirements indicated. Color band and identify with flow arrows names and numbering. J. Replace electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings removed prior to finishing. 3.6 CLEANING A. As Work proceeds, promptly remove paint where spilled, splashed, or spattered. B. During progress of Work maintain premises free of unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials, and debris. C. Collect cotton waste, cloths, and material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers and remove daily from site. 3.7 SCHEDULE A. Exterior Surfaces Su 1st Coat (DMFT) 2nd Coat (DMFT) 3rd Coat (DMF) Ferrous Metals 595 (2.0) 455OX (2.0) 455OX (2.0) Bollards Bumper Guards Exposed Lintels Misc. Metal Ferrous Metals UH450 (1.5) 455OX (2.0) 455OX (2.0) Doors and Frames Equipment Galvanized Metals 5205,6,7 (2.0) 455OX (2.0) 455OX (2.0) Louvers Ducts Downspouts Traffic Striping 63245 (5.0) 03860296196 PAINTING 1' 09900-7 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 Surface 1st Coat (DMFTI 2nd Coat (DMFT) 3rd Coat (DMF) Metal Protection Dissimilar 61744 (2.5) 61774 (2.5) Metals; Metal to Concrete/Mortar B. Interior Surfaces Concrete Masonry 5320 Varies 5024 (1.4) (CMU) Ferrous Metals Doors, Frames UH405 (2.0) 460OX (1.4) & Equipment Exposed roof 5210 (1.5) 5067 (2.0) deck, beams & joists Galvanized Metal 5205,6,7 (2.0) 5024 (1.4) Ducts Louvers Piping .Vents Gypsum Drywall Surfaces to 5019 (1.1) 8200 (1.5) 8200 (1.5) receive texture and paint Wood Drawer & 5035 (1.0) 82 (1.0) 82 (1.0) Cabinet Interiors Transp. Finish. Trim, Transp. 1600 Varies 82 (1.0) 82 (1.0) Finish Cabinets, Ext. 555 (1.5) 460OX (1.4) 460OX (1.4) & Interiors Opaque Finish. END OF SECTION 09900 03860296/96 PAINTING 09900-8 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 SECTION 09910 - GRAFFITI RESISTANT COATING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Graffiti resistant coatings 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 900-9268 A. Section Includes: Surface Preparation, Barrier or Primer Coat, and 2-Part GSS-10 Polymer Based Finish Coat to all exterior masonry vertical surfaces outside the fence line, and doors/frames unless specifically indicated otherwise. B. Applicator must contact the manufacturer directly for instructions regarding the specific combination of GSS products appropriate for the substrate. C. Refer to surface finish schedule in this section or on the drawings. D. Coordinate with Section 07180. Follow each manufacturer's recommendations. Notify architect of any potential conflicts. E. Related Work Described Elsewhere. 1. Section 04230 - Reinforced Unit Masonry 2. Section 04255 - Veneer Masonry Systems 3. Section 09900 - Painting 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's written technical information, including performance data, and installation recommendations, which demonstrate that comply with contract documents. B. Sample 1. Submit full size sample of the actual brick and CMU with product applied to two-thirds of the surface area. Provide a "flat and a "semi -gloss" area over one third of the surface for each type with the remaining third uncoated. Identify the 3 different areas. Obtain approval from architect before preceeding. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards 1. Current City of Los Angeles Approval. Must submit research report number. 2. American Society for Testing Materials. B. The manufacturer will designate one person who has been specifically trained and certified to oversee all phases of the project's application. The person will direct the application of the coatings and all work outlined in this section. 03860296/96 GRAFFITI RESISTANT COATING s 09910-1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 C. Applicator will provide the specifier verification from the manufacturer that the project has been certified. D. Unless otherwise instructed, conform exactly to he manufacturer's written recommendations regarding the product's preparation, mixing, application and finish. E. All field coating is subject to verification of millimeter thickness. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to local or state Code or Regulations. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Warrant the application to perform as intended for a period of 10 years. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Freight Class is 55, Flammable UNI1263. B. Deliver products to he site in sealed and labeled containers. Inspect products before accepting. C. Container labels must include the manufacturer's name and type of coating as well as directions for surface preparation, application and cleanup. D. Store at a minimum of 40 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F in a well ventilated area. Prevent Barrier Coat from freezing. E. Take precautions to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Do not apply products during rain or when the relative humidity is such that condensation forms on the surface during application. B. Do not leave the GSS-10 containers in direct sunlight. Avoid applying coating indirect sunlight or when the temperature remains above 90 degrees F for more that four hours. C. Do not apply products outside when wind is over 10 mph. D. During application, the surface must be kept dry until coating is also completely dry. E. Mix materials in well ventilated areas. Remove all empty containers, waste and contaminated rages from the premises at the end of each working day. r 03860296/96 GRAFFITI RESISTANT COATING 09910-2 e"� a LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Approved manufacturer is American Polymer Corporation. B. Approved product is The Graffiti Solution System consisting of the GSS Barrier Coat, the GSS- 10 Graffiti Finish (Coating - Parts A and B) and the Erasol Spray Remover. C. For product information and application certification, contact the manufacturer: American Polymer Corporation at (801) 255-9505. (Refer to section 1.01, A-1 of this document). D. Bids will not be accepted from applicators who have not contacted the manufacturer for bidding, application and certification procedures. E. For each submitted bid, the applicator must attach a letter of qualification issued by the manufacturer stating that the applicator is in compliance with this specification. F. Substitutions must be essentially identical products in order to be approved. 2.2 GENERAL A. Only use the product as produced by the manufacturer. B. For succeeding coats, use primers produced by the manufacturer. C. No thinning, reducing or changing of the product is permitted unless specifically authorized by the manufacturer. D. Provide and use Methyl Ethyl Ketone (MEK) for frequent cleaning of equipment. 2.3 FINISHES A. Finishes will be either flat, semi -gloss or one of the natural color spectrum. Finish schedule should be determined before any work begins. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify that surfaces are ready for application as instructed by the manufacturer. B. Report any condition that may jeopardize a proper application. Do not start work until any and all concerns are resolved. C. Start of application means the contractor has accepted the existing substrate conditions. 03860296/96 GRAFFITI RESISTANT COATING 09910-3 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Surfaces should be completely dry and clean with no dust, dirt, oil, grease and other contaminants to prevent the coating from adhering to the surface. B. New concrete should be throughly cured before application. C. Glossy, glazed or slick troweled surfaces should be lightly etched or abraded before applying the coatings. D. Before work begins, painted surfaces must be approved for application by the manufacture or its representative. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Do not allow the products to come in contact with building occupants, pedestrians, surrounding property, other surfaces or vehicles. B. Avoid applying the products during winds over 10 mph which may cause the materials to drift. C. While applying the products to occupied buildings, all windows, exterior air intakes and air conditioning vents must be covered. D. Air Handling equipment must be covered and shut down during the application until surfaces are visibly dry or the odor has dissipated. 3.4 APPLICATION A. Applicator must follow the manufacturer's instructions for application of the recommended products and comply with the specification. 3.5 CLEANING AND TOUCH UP A. Clean application equipment with MEK immediately after each use. B. If the coating has begun to set and cannot be cleaned with MEK, use the GSS Erasol for cleaning. -- C. Clean all drips, runs and over spray while still wet. D. If the surface is clipped or damaged after the application is complete, a touch up coating of the GSS-10 should be applied immediately. END OF SECTION 09910 03860296/96 GRAFFITI RESISTANT COATING 09910-4 !^ LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 d. Finish: 1. Provide baked, rust -inhibiting prime coat and a minimum of 2 electrostatically -applied coats of thermosetting baked enamel. 4. Panel colors: Selected by architect, after contract award, from manufacturer's complete set of standard colors. 5. Hardware, accessories, and mounting brackets: Manufacturer's standard styles. The following materials will be acceptable: a. Chromium -plated nonferrous cast alloy ("Zamac"). 6. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. Accurate Partitions Corporation. b. All American Metal Corporation. C. American Sanitary Partition Corporation. d. Flush -Metal Partition Corporation. e. General Partitions Manufacturing Corporation. f. Global Steel Products Corporation. g. Knickerbocker Partition Corporation. h. Metpar Corp. i. Monarch Toilet Partition, Inc. j. The Sanymetal Products Company, Inc. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide hardware and accessories as necessary to properly install panel systems indicated. 1. Hinge: Self -dosing, pivot type hinge, recess -mounted within door; adjustable to permit door to rest at any angle. 2. Leveling -and -anchorage devices: Rust -resistant steel devices as recommended by panel manufacturer for installation of panels in conditions indicated. 3. Pilaster shoes: ASTM A 167 (Type 302/304) minimum 20 gage stainless steel, finish to match compartment hardware. Minimum shoe height: 3 inches. 4. Fasteners: Tamper -resistant rust proof, exposed fasteners as recommended by panel manufacturer for installation of panels and hardware in conditions indicated. Finish to match hardware. 5. Overhead bracing: Antigrip headrail bracing fabricated from continuous extruded aluminum, clear anodized finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that conditions conform to requirements of contract documents. B. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. C. Verify locations of plumbing fixtures to determine placement of panel assemblies. r 03860296/96 BAKED ENAMEL STEEL TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10162-3 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 — D. Verify that anchorage devices, provided by panel manufacturer to installers of related work, have been properly installed and aligned. E. Correct unsatisfactory substrate conditions before start of panel system installation. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Perform installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, except where more restrictive requirements are shown, specified, or are necessary for project conditions. _ B. Secure panels using number and type of brackets recommended by manufacturer for conditions indicated. Clearances exceeding 1 inch between panels and walls are not acceptable. 1. Panels attached to unit masonry walls: Where possible, place brackets so that anchorage fasteners penetrate joints, not masonry units. 2. Panels attached to tile -faced walls: Where possible, place brackets so that anchorage fasteners penetrate joints, not tiles. C. Compartments: 1. Securely attach panels to pilasters using manufacturer's recommended number and type of brackets. Align brackets with corresponding brackets at wall connections. Clearances .— exceeding 1/2 inch between panels and pilasters are not acceptable. Provide level, plumb installation. 2. Floor -anchored, overhead -braced compartments: Anchor pilasters to floor using manufacturer's recommended leveling -and -anchorage devices. Conceal attachment by installing pilaster shoe at each pilaster. Install overhead bracing using a minimum of 2 fasteners per pilaster. Install panels. , a. Compartments with doors: Properly align door. Top edge of closed compartment door must be parallel with overhead bracing member. D. Screens: 1. Form solid connection between panel system and building structure using manufacturer's recommended devices for conditions indicated. Anchorage must be designed to support weight of panels without damaging building finishes. Provide level, plumb installation. Provide screens capable of resisting impacts and stresses imposed during anticipated use and maintenance. E. Hardware and Accessories: Mount items in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Operating Hardware: 1. In -swinging door: Adjust hinges to automatically bring door to rest at an angle approximately 30 degrees from fully closed position when door is not latched. 2. Out -swinging door: Adjust hinges to automatically bring door to rest at an angle approximately 30 degrees from fully closed position when door is not latched. 03860296/96 BAKED ENAMEL STEEL TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10162-4 i n LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 SECTION 10162 - BAKED ENAMEL STEEL TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Compartments. 2. Screens. B. Related Sections: 1. Grouting of masonry for compartment anchorage: Division 4. �^ 2. Toilet accessories: Elsewhere in Division 10. 1.2 REFERENCES 900-9268 A. ASTM A 167-94 — Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat -Resisting Chromium -Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip; 1994. 4. B. ASTM A 591/A 591M-89 — Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Electrolytic Zinc -Coated, ' for Light Coating Mass Applications; 1989. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit written technical information for each distinct panel system indicated. Include data on hardware, accessories, leveling -and -anchorage devices, and fasteners. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings detailing construction of compartments. 1. Show layout of panels and associated hardware and accessories. 2. include details showing panel connections, anchorage, and support systems. C. Panel Color Verification Samples: Submit 6-inch-square samples of each panel finish type and color to be installed. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit for each product specified in this section. Include -, instructions for examination, preparation, and protection of adjacent work. E. Maintenance Data: Submit for each product specified in this section. Include instructions for cleaning and preventive maintenance. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: A company regularly engaged in manufacture of products specified in this section, and whose products have been in satisfactory use under similar service conditions for not less than 5 years. B. Installer's Qualifications: A company regularly engaged in installation of products specified in this section, with a minimum of 5 years of experience. ! 03860296196 BAKED ENAMEL STEEL TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10162-1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS 900-9268 A. Field Measurements: If possible, determine field measurements before beginning shop fabrication. Wherever field measurements have not been made before fabrication, provide components capable of adjustment during installation. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Use manufacturer's instructions and data to determine anchorage requirements for panel systems. In a timely manner, distribute to affected installers of related work those system components and anchorage devices provided by panel manufacturer for incorporation into other work. B. Refer to Division 1 for coordination drawing requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS l 2.1 PANEL SYSTEMS A. Compartments: Provide compartments fabricated of partitions and erected using the following panel systems at locations indicated on the drawings: 1. Steel over honeycomb core, with baked enamel finish, floor -anchored and overhead -braced. 2.2 PANEL MATERIALS A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard panels fabricated for installations indicated. Provide internal reinforcement as required for hardware and accessories. Premachine panels for field installation. B. Steel over Honeycomb Core - Baked Enamel Finish: 1. Steel sheets: ASTM A 591, Coating Class C, galvanized - bonderized: a. Minimum sheet thickness for panels: 20 gage. b. Minimum sheet thickness for pilasters: 20 gage (overhead -braced application). c. Minimum sheet thickness for pilasters: 16 gage. d. Minimum sheet thickness for doors: 22 gage. 2. Core material: Manufacturer's standard sound -deadening honeycomb. 3. Panel fabrication: Use single steel sheet for each face plate and laminate both face plates under pressure to core material. At full length of panel perimeter, form edges of each face plate to interlock directly with opposing face plate, or form edges to receive additional molding strip. If molding strip is used, provide one continuous molding strip for each panel edge. Provide manufacturer's standard neatly -made and finished corners. a. Minimum finished thickness: 1. Panels: 1 inch, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Pilasters: 1-1/4 inch. 3. Doors: 1 inch. b. Internal anchorage reinforcement: Galvanized steel sheet, minimum 12 gage. C. Internal tapping reinforcement: Galvanized steel sheet, minimum 14 gage. 03860296/96 BAKED ENAMEL STEEL TOILET COMPARTMENTS - 10162-2 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean panel system components using manufacturer's recommended procedures and cleaning agents. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect installed components from damage until project completion. END OF SECTION 10162 03860296/96 BAKED ENAMEL STEEL TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10162-5 W LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 SECTION 10200 - LOUVERS AND VENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Furnishing of door louvers; installation specified elsewhere. 2. Accessories. 1.2 REFERENCES A. AAMA 603.8-92 '— Voluntary Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Extruded Aluminum; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 1992. B. ASTM B 221-93 — Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes; 1993. C. SSPC-Paint 12 -- Cold -Applied Asphalt Mastic (Extra Thick Film); Steel Structures Painting Council; 1991. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data. B. Samples, style and color. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A company designing, manufacturing, and installing products of this section which have performed in a satisfactory manner under comparable conditions for a period of 5 years. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Where conditions permit, take field measurements and determine actual installed positions of louvers before beginning louver fabrication. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Wall Louvers: 1. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. Air Balance, Inc. b. CESCO Products. C. Penn Ventilator Company Incorporated. 03860296/96 LOUVERS AND VENTS 10200-1 r LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 — d. Ruskin Manufacturing Division/Tomkins Industries, Inc. B. Door Louvers: 1. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. A-J Manufacturing Company. b. All-Lite Metal Company. C. Construction Specialties, Inc. d. Reliable Products/Hart & Cooley, Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, manufacturer's standard alloy and temper for application and finish required. B. Fasteners: 1. For aluminum members: Aluminum, stainless steel, or galvanized steel. -- 2. For steel or galvanized steel members: Stainless steel or galvanized steel. 3. For stainless steel members: Stainless steel. 4. Finish exposed -to -view fastener heads to match adjacent surface. C. Anchors and Inserts: Hot -dip galvanized steel or nonferrous metal. r D. Bituminous Paint: SSPC-Paint 12; cold -applied asphalt mastic. 2.3 WALL LOUVER ACCESSORIES A. Screens: Removable type; provide screens for indicated exterior louvers. 1. Frame: Fabricate from same material used for louver. Miter and reinforce frame corners. a. Fabricate frame from extruded or formed metal. Provide insert or driven spline for mesh attachment. Frame must be capable of being rewired. 2. Insect screen mesh: a. 18 by 16 mesh, 0.011 inch aluminum wire. 3. Position screen on inner louver face; attach using machine screws located 3 inches from comer and 12 inches on center between corners. -- 2.4 DOOR LOUVERS A. Door Louver : Fixed N-shaped (standard) blades, 1 inch deep, spaced approximately 1 inch on center. 1. Fabricate louvers and integral frame of extruded aluminum, minimum 0.050 inch thick. 2. Frame style: Box shaped frame without flanges, installed using beads provided by door supplier. 3. Finish: Baked enamel. 03860296/96 LOUVERS AND VENTS 10200-2 r '^ LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 G. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Provide complete, shop -fabricated units, unless unit size dictates shipment in pieces; mark each �., component as required for proper field assembly. B. Fabricate frames to indicated profiles with features and clearances to suit installation conditions. 1. Include integral sills of finish and construction to match louver. a. At locations indicated or where required to prevent drainage infiltration, provide t' sill extensions or subsill flashings of same finish and material as louver. 2. Provide clearance or recesses as required to accommodate sealant between louver and adjacent construction. kl C. Provide shop -welded joints between framing components, and between framing components and r-i fixed louver blades, unless otherwise indicated or where field assembly is unavoidable. b. D. Provide uniform spacing between blades, including gap between blades and exposed face of head and sill members. E. Provide vertical mullions of type indicated. 2.6 FINISHES A. Baked Acrylic Enamel Finish: Thermally cured organic coating meeting the requirements of AAMA 603.8. 1. Color: As selected by the architect from manufacturer's complete set of standard colors. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrates and openings to receive louvers are rigidly set, at proper lines and elevation, properly sized, and ready to receive louvers. B. Do not proceed with installation until conditions detrimental to proper installation have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coat contact surfaces of dissimilar metals with one or more coats of bituminous paint. 1. The following metals are not considered dissimilar: Aluminum, stainless steel, and zinc. B. Apply one 15-mil dry film thickness coat of bituminous isolation coating to metal surfaces, other than galvanized steel, which will be in contact with cementitious materials. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Installation of door louvers is specified elsewhere. B. Install louvers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 03860296/96 LOUVERS AND VENTS 10200-3 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 C. Coordinate louver installation with adjacent elements of building envelope to ensure watertight construction. D. Set units and fleshings in proper location, plumb and true, free of warp or twist. E. Fit joints tightly; where joint sealers are to be installed, make joints of sizes required. F. Coordinate installation of electrically actuated louvers with work of Division 16. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove protective material from prefinished surfaces immediately after installation. B. Wash exposed surfaces using mild detergent; thoroughly clean inside comers. C. Remove excess sealant by moderate use of mineral spirits or other solvent recommended by sealant manufacturer. D. Touch up marred or abraded areas of finished elements. If satisfactory touch-up cannot be accomplished, remove and replace element. END OF SECTION 10200 03860296/96 LOUVERS AND VENTS 10200-4 �^ LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 SECTION 10350 - FLAGPOLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Flagpoles: a. Location of flagpole is shown on drawings. 2. Flagpole fittings and accessories. (^' 3. Flagpole is add Alternate Number One. See Section 01031. B. Related Sections: 1. Earthwork: Division 2. 2. Cast -in -place concrete: Division 3. 1.2 REFERENCES 900-9268 A. AA DAF-45 -- Designation System for Aluminum Finishes; Aluminum Association; 1980. B. ASTM B 241/B 241M-93 -- Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Seamless Pipe and Seamless Extruded Tube; 1993. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide flagpole and anchorage system to comply with the following requirements: 1. Flagpole with flag flying: Resist minimum wind velocity of 90 mph without permanent deformation, when flying appropriately sized flag. 2. Flagpole without flag: Resist minimum wind velocity of 90 mph without permanent deformation. 3. Safety design factor: 2.5. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit for each type of flagpole required. Include data for fittings and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings bearing the stamp of a professional structural engineer registered in the state in which the project is located. Include the following: 1. Configuration of flagpoles and bases. 2. Details showing jointing, anchorage, and support systems. 3. Substantiation of compliance with performance requirements indicated in contract documents. 4. Flagpole finishes, fittings, and accessories. 03860296/96 FLAGPOLES 10350-1 , LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firm regularly engaged in manufacture of products specified in this section, and whose products have been in satisfactory use under similar service conditions for not less than 5 years. B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm regularly engaged in installation of products specified in this section, with a minimum of 5 years of experience. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Execute product manufacturer's special instructions to prevent damage to products. B. Provide suitable protection for each flagpole before shipment. Spiral -wrap pole with heavy kraft paper or polyethylene material and place pole in hard protective tube. C. Deliver flagpoles and accessories properly labeled and in original wrappings. D. Store and handle materials in a manner which will prevent damage prior to installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: 1. Aabec Pole Division/Morgan-Francis Company, Inc. 2. Acme Flagpole Division/Lingo, Inc. 3. American Flagpole Division/Kearney-National, Inc. 4. Baartol Company, Inc. 5. Concord Industries, Inc. 6. EMC Division/Eder Manufacturing Corporation. 7. John Ewing & Company, Inc. 2.2 FLAGPOLES A. Description: 1. Mounting: Ground -set, embedded. 2. Type: Conventional. 3. Shaft metal: Aluminum. 4. Shaft form: Cone tapered. 5. Exposed length of flagpole: 25 feet 6. Halyard: Internal. 7. Flag: a. American flag b. 4by6 C. 100 percent nylon 03860296/96 FLAGPOLES 10350-2 r— LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 y' sl 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabrication - General: Provide each flagpole as a complete unit fabricated by a single manufacturer, including base, anchorage devices, fittings, and accessories as necessary for proper installation. B. Fabricate and ship flagpole as a single unit, unless shipping contraints preclude this alternative. Where flagpole size dictates shipment in more than one section, provide self -aligning internal sleeve composed of metal compatible with shaft metal and properly designed to allow precise, weathertight joining during installation. C. Flagpole Diameter and Wall Thickness: Wall thickness of shaft and ratio of top diameter to butt diameter must be appropriate for metal or alloy used and for length of flagpole. D. Joints and Seams: Form joints and seams which are inconspicuous. 1. Exposed welds: Grind exposed welds smooth. Finish to match flagpole shaft. E. Aluminum Shaft: 1. Seamless extruded tube: Comply with ASTM B 241. 2. Alloy: 6063-T6. 3. Minimum wall thickness: 3/16 inch, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Minimum tensile strength: 30,000 psi. 5. Minimum yield point: 25,000 psi. 6. After flagpole is fabricated, heat-treat and artificially age to alter temper of aluminum. 7. Shaft finish: Clear anodized finish, AA-M32C22A41 (medium satin directional textured mechanical finish; medium matte etched chemical finish; clear, architectural Class I anodic coating minimum 0.7 mil thick). F. Ground -Set Flagpole - Embedded Type: 1. Provide flagpole of sufficient overall length to allow setting depth which is not less than i 10 percent of exposed length. 2. Flash collar: Fabricate from same metal used for flagpole shaft. a. Product: Selected by the architect from manufacturer's standards based on availability for shaft size. 3. Foundation sleeve: Corrugated galvanized steel tube, 16 gage. ra. 4. Foundation sleeve plate: Square steel plate welded to bottom of foundation sleeve. Minimum edge dimension of square plate: 4 inches larger than inside diameter of foundation sleeve. b. Minimum thickness: 3116 inch. I" 5. Steel centering wedges: Minimum 1/8-inch-thick wedges, welded to sleeve plate inside foundation sleeve for the purpose of centering pole. 6. Electrical grounding spike: 3/4-inch steel spike, welded to bottom side of sleeve plate. a. Length of extension below concrete foundation: Not less than thickness of concrete footing below sleeve plate. 7. Foundation support plate: Square steel plate welded to electrical grounding spike at base of concrete foundation. a. Minimum edge dimension of square plate: 6 inches. b. Minimum thickness: 3/16 inch. 11' 03860296/96 FLAGPOLES 10350-3 F LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 G. Fittings: 1. Truck: a. Truck designed for internal halyard system. 2. Halyards: a. Internal type: 1. Cable: Stainless steel, with vinyl- or neoprene -covered weight. 2. � Winch: Direct drive type, internally mounted, with control stop to hold flag in any position on pole. 3. Winch crank: Removable. 4. Winch access door: Flush -mounted, with cylinder lock. 3. Flag snaps: a. Number required: Two flag snaps per halyard. b. Material: Bronze, manufacturer's standard. C. Sheaths: Provide heavy vinyl or neoprene sheath for each flag snap. 2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Provide materials for concrete flagpole foundations as specified in Division 3, 3,000 psi. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that conditions conform to requirements of contract documents. B. Ground -Set Flagpole: Verify that foundation is in suitable condition to receive flagpole. C. Do not begin flagpole installation until unsuitable conditions have been corrected. Commencement of installation indicates acceptance of conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Embedded Ground -Set Pole: 1. Bituminous coating: Apply protective coating of bituminous paint to section of flagpole which will be installed below grade, if not factory -applied by flagpole manufacturer prior to shipment. 3.3 INSTALLATION A., Concrete Flagpole Foundation: Comply with requirements specified in Division 3. B. Flagpole Installation - General: Install flagpole, base assembly, and fittings as indicated in contract documents and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Install flagpole in erect, plumbed position. D. Embedded Ground -Set Pole: Erect flagpole in foundation sleeve and plumb as necessary using hardwood wedges. Pour dry sand into foundation sleeve in successive layers, each layer 6 inches thick. Tamp each layer before adding next layer. When last sand layer is placed, 03860296/96 FLAGPOLES 10350-4 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 provide moisture seal over sand by applying sealant of proper thickness. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Division 7. E. Electrical Grounding: Provide positive lightning ground suitable for flagpole and installation conditions. F. Field Joints: Provide snug -fitting, weathertight, hairline joints. 1. Field welding of aluminum flagpole is not acceptable. G. Tolerances: 1. Maximum variation from plumb position (90 degrees from horizontal plane): 1 inch. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean surfaces. B. Verify smooth and proper operation of all installed fittings. Adjust as necessary. END OF SECTION 10350 03860296/96 FLAGPOLES 10350-5 rLUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 SECTION 10425 - SIGNS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Dimensional letters and numbers. B. Provide signage as indicated on the drawings. C. Related Sections: 1. Temporary project signs: Division 1. 1.2 REFERENCES 900-9268 A. ASTM B 584-91 — Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications; 1991. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit for each type of sign specified, including details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes. B. Shop drawings: 1. Show fabrication and erection of signs. Include plans, elevations, and large-scale sections of typical members and other components. Show anchors, grounds, layout, reinforcement, accessories, and installation details. 2. Provide message list for each sign required, including large-scale details of wording and lettering layout. 3. For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction, provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchors to be installed as a unit of Work in other Sections. 4. Templates: Furnish full-size spacing templates for individually mounted dimensional letters and numbers. C. Samples: 1. Submit manufacturer's full range of samples for initial selection of color, pattern, and texture. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication where necessary to ensure proper fitting. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. 03860296/96 SIGNS 10425-1 7 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 — PART 2 - PRODUCTS — 2.1 GENERAL A. Graphic Content and Style: Provide sign copy that complies with the requirements indicated for size, style, spacing, content, position, material, finishes, and colors of letters, numbers, and other graphic devices. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Bronze Castings: Copper alloy UNS C83600, complying with the requirements of ASTM B _ 584. B. Metal Fasteners: Use metals that are not corrosive to the sign material or mounting surface. C. Anchors and Inserts: Use nonferrous metal or hot -dipped galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled -in -place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work. r 2.3 FINISHES A. Colors and Surface Textures: For exposed sign material that requires selection of materials with integral or applied colors, surface textures or other characteristics related to appearance, provide color matches indicated, or if not indicated, as selected by the architect from the manufacturer's standards. 2.4 DIMENSIONAL LETTERS AND NUMBERS A. Cast Letters and Numbers: 1. Form individual letters and numbers by casting. 2. Produce characters with smooth, flat faces, sharp comers, and precisely formed lines and profiles, free from pits, scale, sand holes, or other defects. 3. Cast lugs into the back of characters and tap to receive threaded mounting studs. Comply with requirements indicated for finish, style, and size. 4. Metal: — a. Bronze. B. Finish: 1. Catalized Polyurethane, color as selected. 03860296/96 SIGNS 10425-2 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Locate sign units and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of the type described and in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions. 2. Install signs level, plumb, and at the height indicated, with sign surfaces free from distortion or other defects in appearance. B. Dimensional Letters and Numbers: 1. Mount letters and numbers using standard fastening methods recommended by the manufacturer for letter form, type of mounting, wall construction, and condition of exposure indicated. 2. Provide heavy paper template to establish letter spacing and to locate holes for fasteners. 3. Mount letters with back projected from wall surface 1/2". 3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to the manufacturer's instructions. Protect units from damage until acceptance by the Owner. 03860296/96 END OF SECTION 10425 SIGNS 10425-3 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 Poll, SECTION 10505 METAL LOCKERS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: I. Heavy duty metal lockers. B. Work Not Included: 1. Padlocks: Provided by the owner. C. Alternates: 1. One half of lockers to be bid as an alternate. See Section 01031. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Heavy Duty: This term is used to designate a particular type of locker specified in this section, regardless of individual manufacturer designations. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data and installation instructions. ' B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts, dimensions, trim, fillers, and accessories. 1. Indicate installation and anchoring methods. 2. Show verified field measurements. 3. Show locker numbering scheme. r" C. Samples for Color Selection: Locker manufacturer's full range of colors. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS f A. Fit lockers neatly to actual construction; take field measurements before fabrication. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver lockers until spaces to receive lockers are clean and dry. B. Protect lockers from damage. PART 2 - PRODUCTS ' 2.1 LOCKER CONFIGURATIONS AND COMPONENTS A. Lockers: t 1. Location: Apparatus Bay 2. Fully welded construction. 3. Heavy duty. 03860296/96 METAL LOCKERS 10505-1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 -- 4. Single -tier. -- 5. Height: 72 inches, plus legs. 6.. Width: 18 inches 7. Depth: 24 inches _ 8. Legs: 6 inches high. 9. Doors: Expanded metal mesh. 10. Sides and vertical dividers: Expanded metal mesh. 11. Shelves: Expanded metal mesh. 12. Top: Flat. 13. Door handles. 14. Shelf. 15. Two wall hooks. 2.2 HEAVY DUTY LOCKERS A. Provide all heavy duty lockers and accessories by one manufacturer. 1. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with — requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. American Locker Security Systems, Inc. b. Art Metal Products Division/Fort Knox Storage. C. List Industries Inc. d. Penco products, Inc. e. Republic Storage Systems Co., Inc. — B. Components: 1. Frames: 16 gage steel sheet channels or 13 gage steel angles, minimum. — 2. Legs: Extend vertical frame members or attach gusset -type legs of not less than 14 gage steel sheet. 3. Tops: 16 gage steel sheet, minimum. _ 4. Bottoms: 16 gage steel sheet, minimum. 5. Horizontal dividers: 16 gage steel sheet, minimum. 6. Expanded metal sides and vertical dividers: 13 gage, 3/4-inch, flattened diamond steel mesh. 7. Backs: 13 gage, 3/4-inch, flattened diamond steel mesh. 8. Expanded metal doors: 13 gage, 3/4-inch flattened diamond steel mesh. 9. Door handles: Standard type. — 10. Latching mechanism: Concealed in door, designed so that door can be closed while locked, with spring -loaded latches engaging beveled strikes on frame. a. Doors over 36 inches high: Three-point latching, minimum. -- C. Miscellaneous Components and Trim: 18 gage steel sheet, minimum. D. Fabrication: Weld all joints between frame members and weld sheet members to frame; weld latching mechanism and hinges to doors and frames; use no bolts or rivets. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: Cold -rolled, leveled mild steel 03860296/96 METAL LOCKERS 10505-2 r LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 B. Expanded Metal Mesh: Steel, with 3/4-inch flattened mesh gages as indicated. C. Fasteners: Zinc-, cadmium-, or nickel -plated steel or stainless steel. 1. Exposed bolt heads: Tamperproof type. 2. For fastening moving components: Use lock washers or self-locking nuts. 900-9268 D. Hinges: 5-knuckle, nonremovable-pin hinges, of loop style with 2 full thicknesses in each leaf; minimum 2 inches high. . 1. Minimum of 2 hinges per door. 2. Doors over 42 inches high: Three hinges. E. Standard Door Handles: Die-cast zinc alloy or chrome -plated steel latch lifter and padlock hasp, designed so that door can be closed while locked; pry -resistant. F. Interior Fittings: Cadmium- or zinc -plated steel or cast aluminum, except shelves. G. Number Plates: Aluminum, zinc alloy, or stainless steel; raised or recessed numerals at least 3/8 inch high. 1. Number lockers as directed by the architect. 2. Fasten to doors, centered near the top, using 2 fasteners. 2.4 FABRICATION -ALL LOCKERS A. Factory -fabricate and fully assemble lockers; do not knock down for shipping. B. Make lockers square with rigid joints, without dents or warped surfaces. 1. Exposed metal edges: Smooth off sharp edges and comers. 2. Exposed welds: Grind flush. 3. Door and frame fronts: No exposed bolts or rivet heads. 4. Where exposed holes for built-in locks are not used, cover holes neatly using permanent materials. C. Doors: Fabricate with flanged edges, reinforced if required for stiffness, and designed to open and close without springing. 1. Provide extra stiffeners for doors more than 15 inches wide. D. Legs: Provide means of fastening to floor. E. Expanded Metal Components: Weld edges to steel frames at not less than 6 inches on center; enclose sharp edges with frame. F. Miscellaneous Components: Provide all parts, filler panels, closures, clips, and fasteners required for a complete installation. G. Finishing: Pretreat and finish all surfaces, both exposed and concealed, except stainless steel, chrome, and aluminum. 1. Factory -finish all accessory components to match. 2. Pretreatment: Remove scale, rust, and contaminants; chemically degrease and phosphatize. 03860296/96 METAL LOCKERS 10505-3 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked -on enamel. _ 4. Color: As selected by the architect from manufacturer's standard range. PART 3 - EXECUTION _ 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean debris from under and behind lockers before installation. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install lockers plumb and level. B. Anchor lockers securely to substrates in manner recommended by manufacturer. 1. Use reinforcing plates and spacers as required to prevent metal distortion. 2. Provide anchors at not more than 48 inches on center. 3. Conceal fasteners wherever possible. C. Install accessory components with flush, tight joints using concealed fasteners. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust doors and latches for smooth operation. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean and touch up finishes; if finish cannot be restored to original appearance, replace locker. B. Use only cleaning and touch-up materials recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 10505 03860296/96 METAL LOCKERS 10505-4 n LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 SECTION 10521- FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work Included: r 1. Portable fire extinguishers. 2. Fire extinguisher mounting brackets. 1.2 REFERENCES J A. Fire Protection Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL); 1993. B. NFPA 10 — Standard For Portable Fire Extinguishers; National Fire Protection Association; 1994. l 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data showing compliance with contract documents. I B. Certification: Installer shall submit written certification that the fire extinguishers installed comply with the contract documents and are fully and correctly charged. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide only fire extinguishers which comply with NFPA 10. B. Labels: Provide only fire extinguishers which are listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not deliver or install extinguishers until just before substantial completion. B. Do not use permanent fire extinguishers for construction period fire protection. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with 1 requirements of contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: 1 1. Fire extinguishers: a. Amerex Corporation. b. Ansul Fire Protection/A Grinnell Company. C. American Specialties, Inc. d. J.L. Industries r e. Larsen's Mfg. Co. I, 03860296/96 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10521-1 r LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 B. Fire Extinguishers: 1. Rating: 4A:60B:C 2. Type: Multipurpose dry chemical (ammonium phosphate). a. Stored pressure type. 3. Wall mounted. C. Identification of Wall -Mounted Fire Extinguishers: Provide manufacturer's standard vinyl decal on wall above extinguisher. D. Brackets: Provide wall bracket for each wall -mounted extinguisher. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Perform installation in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified, and except where project conditions require extra precautions or provisions to ensure satisfactory performance of the work. B. Install extinguishers in locations indicated. C. Install brackets for wall mounted extinguishers at height indicated. END OF SECTION 10521 03860296/96 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10521-2 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 r,.,. SECTION 10810 - TOILET ACCESSORIES o PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: r` 1. Toilet paper dispensers. 2. Grab bars. 3. Robe hooks. (" 4. Mop and broom holders. l 5. Mirrors. B. Related Sections: 1. Shower Doors: Division 10. 2. Metal anchor reinforcement in walls: Division 6. 3. Wood anchor reinforcement in walls: Division 6. 4. Toilet compartments: Division 10. 5. Rough carpentry: Division 6. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM C 1036-91 -- Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 1991. B. FS DD-M-411C — Mirrors, Glass; 1990. 1' 1.3 SUBMITTALS 1 - A. Product Data: Written technical information for each accessory specified. B. Certificates: Submit certification that work complies with requirements of contract documents. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: A company regularly engaged in manufacture of products specified in this section, whose products have been in satisfactory use, under similar service conditions, for not less than 5 years. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Execute product manufacturer's special instructions to prevent damage to products. Store products in manufacturer's original shipping containers. 1.6 COORDINATION r A. Use manufacturer's instructions and data to determine anchorage requirements for products l specified. In a timely manner, distribute the following to affected installers of related work: 1. Components and anchorage devices provided by toilet accessory manufacturer for r incorporation into other work. l r 03860296/96 TOILET ACCESSORIES 10810-1 l: LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 -- 2. Coordination data including setting drawings, templates, instructions, etc., for cutouts — and installations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS .- 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: 1. A & J Washroom Accessories. _ 2. American Specialties, Inc. 3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 4. Bradley Corporation. 5. Franklin Brass Manufacturing Company. 6. McKinney/Parker, Inc., a Subsidiary of Essex Industries, Inc. 2.2 TOILET ACCESSORIES A. Toilet Paper Dispenser: 1. Description: a. Type: Double -roll. b. Spindleless unit, tension spring delivery, chrome -plated zinc alloy. C. Tissue roll size: 5 inches diameter. B. Grab Bar: 1. Description: _ a. Stainless steel. b. Outside diameter: 1-1/2 inches. c. Wall thickness: Minimum 18 gage (0.050 inch). d. Grasping surface finish: Smooth, satin. — e. Mounting: Exposed. f. Clearance between wall and inside of grab bar: 1-1/2 inches. C. Robe Hook: a. Double -prong type. D. Mop and Broom Holder: 1. Description: a. 18 gage (0.050-inch) stainless steel ASTM A 167, Type 304, hat -shaped channel. — b. Holders: 4 spring -loaded rubber cam holders. C. Length: 36 inches. E. Mirror: 1. Description: a. Type: Stainless steel -framed mirror. — b. Minor material: Float glass 1/4 inch thick, ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality ql. Apply silvering, copper coating, and suitable protective organic coating to copper backing, and test mirror glass, in accordance with FS DD-M-411 C. 03860296/96 TOILET ACCESSORIES 10810-2 r LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 C. Frame: Form frame using minimum 18 gage (0.050 inch) angle shapes. Provide welded, precisely -mitered corners. Grind welds smooth. d. Protection for mirror edges: Design frame to accept protective mirror -edging materials such as plastic, wood, etc. e. Backing system: Provide tamperproof backing system capable of preventing moisture buildup and providing rigid support for mirror material. Fabricate from full -mirror sized, minimum 22 gage (0.034 inch) galvanized steel sheet and nonabsorptive filler material. Do not use corrugated cardboard for filler. f. Hanger System: Provide tamperproof hanging system for rigid mirror installation: 1. One-piece spring -action locking device fabricated from galvanized steel and designed to support mirror of size indicated, without use of exposed fasteners. g. Frame finish: Number 4 satin polish. F. Towel Bars: Heavy duty, chrome plated. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Mounting Devices and Fasteners: Provide toilet accessory manufacturer's recommended items for substrates and conditions indicated. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Manufacturer's Trademarks and Model Numbers: Neither name nor trademark of manufacturer is acceptable on exposed surfaces of accessories, unless approved by the architect. Permanently affix manufacturer's name and model number to unexposed surface of accessory. B. Surface Mounted Accessories: Where possible, design accessory to provide concealed anchorage when installed. Precisely -fit seams and joints. Roll exposed edges unless indicated otherwise. Use full-length stainless steel piano type hinges for access doors and panels. C. Recess Mounted Accessories: Design accessories to provide concealed anchorage when closed. Weld all joints. Precisely miter corners where indicated. Use full-length stainless steel piano -type hinges for access doors and panels. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Accessory Locations: Coordinate accessory locations with other work to avoid interference and to ensure proper operation and servicing of accessories. Notify the architect in writing of any conflicts concerning product placement, for resolution. Do not proceed without resolution. B. Correct unsatisfactory substrate conditions before start of accessory installation. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces to receive accessories. Protect surrounding elements from damage during r accessory installation. I: 03860296/96 TOILET ACCESSORIES 10810-3 r LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Perform installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified, and except where project conditions require extra precautions or provisions to ensure satisfactory performance of the work. B. Provide plumb, level accessory installations. C. Securely attach accessories to substrate. D. Accessories Installed for Use by Handicapped Persons: Install as indicated on drawings. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust accessories as required to provide smooth operation and trouble free servicing. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean and polish exposed surfaces of accessories using accessory manufacturer's recommended procedures and cleaning agents. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Provide coverings as required to protect installed accessories. END OF SECTION 10810 03860296/96 TOILET ACCESSORIES 10810-4 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 SECTION 10820 - SHOWER DOORS/ENCLOSURES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This section consists of hinged aluminum framed glass shower doors and enclosures. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Literature: Manufacturer's catalog cuts, detail sectional drawings and installation instructions. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle enclosure units following manufacturer's recommended procedures. 1.4 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Take field measurements, to ensure openings fit manufacturer's unit sizes. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Manufacture: To establish a standard of quality, design and function desired, Drawings and specifications have been based on Century Shower Door Inc., 250 Lackawanna Avenue, West Paterson, NJ 07424, (201) 785-4290, Product: "Crest". 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Frame: Extruded aluminum, alloy 6463-T5, having diffuse bright finish, clear anodized; Aluminum Association AAC32A21. B. Glass: 1. Obscure glass: Patterned safety glass, nominal 5/32 inch thick, conforming to ANSI Z97, and certified by Safety Glazing Certification. C. Hinge: Continuous aluminum piano hinge, matching frame finish. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Install shower and tub enclosures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored, with doors operating freely and smoothly. B. Seal with clear cilicone. END OF SECTION 10820 03860296/96 SHOWER DOORS/ENCLOSURES 10820-1 r LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 I SECTION 12511 - HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Horizontal louver blinds. 2. The locations of window treatment are indicated on the drawings. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacnirer's specifications describing features, colors, options, accessories, for each type of unit. 1. Include installation instructions and show how installation methods may differ for different openings and mounting substrates. B. Samples: 1. For color selection: Color charts showing full range of colors and finishes available. C. Certificates: For information only, submit manufacturer's written certification stating compliance with requirements for the following: 1. Physical properties indicated. D. Contract Closeout Submittals: 1. Operation and maintenance data: Include manufacturer's written operation and maintenance instructions. E. Warranty: For information, include specimen of manufacturer's written warranty. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer qualifications: A company manufacturing all components of products specified in this section which have performed in a satisfactory manner for at least 3 R— years. 2. Installer qualifications: Company specializing in fabrication and installation of specified products, with at least 2 years of experience fabricating and installing similar products. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING +�^ A. Deliver materials in factory packages, marked with manufacturer and product name and I location of installation. B. Store materials in dry area maintained at building's operating temperature and humidity. C. Follow manufacturer's instructions to prevent damage. f 03860296/96 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12511-1 I LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 — 1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING — A. Do not install window treatment until wet and dirty work is complete. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Submit manufacturer's standard 2 year warranty, which shall not reduce or otherwise limit any other rights to correction which the owner may have under the contract documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS A. Head Rail: Formed steel channel section, enclosing tilt and lift mechanisms; minimum 24 gage sheet; long edges returned or rolled; with reinforcing as required for rigidity. 1. Enclose all hardware required for blind operation in headrail. 2. Finish rails the same color as louvers. — B. Bottom Rail: Finish to match louvers. 1. Formed steel rail, designed not to twist or sag. 2. Curve top of rail to match louver radius. 3. Cap ends with plastic or metal caps; color to match rail. C. Louvers: Aluminum minimum 0.006 inch thick, curved cross-section with smooth round comers. 1. Width: As indicated; size other parts to fit. — a. 1/2 inch (15 mm) nominal. 2. Design and space louvers to minimize light penetration when closed. D. Ladders: Hold louvers at correct spacing and angle in all tilt positions. — 1. Braided polyester cord ladder; verticals of 0.04 to 0.07 inch diameter; horizontals of not less than 2 threads braided into verticals; spaced to prevent long-term louver sag, but not over 24 inches apart and not over 7 inches from ends of louvers. E. Tilt Mechanism: Hold louvers at any tilt angle despite normal building vibration; worm gear that disengages at limits of tilt with low friction tilter; provide drum at each ladder, linkage rod, and grommets for ladder and operating cords. 1. Tilt wand: Clear plastic, detachable; length as necessary to make operation convenient from floor level. F. Lift Mechanism: Lift cords of nylon or polyester with pulls; cord lock that holds bottom rail securely at any level; cord separators. G. Brackets: Design for easy removal and re -installation of blind. 1. Design to withstand dead weight and operating stresses. 2. Provide brackets at ends and at intervals recommended by manufacturer. 3. Include fasteners appropriate for substrate. 03860296/96 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12511-2 F , LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 H. Accessories: 1. Hold-downs: Provide two brackets at lowest position of bottom rail, engaging hook or pin on bottom rail end caps. I. Finish: All components factory -finished. 1. Steel: Baked -on enamel finish; prepared by galvanizing, and phosphatizing or priming. 2. Aluminum: Baked -on enamel finish; prepared by chemical conversion coating. 3. Concealed components: Corrosion -resistant finish. 4. Pattern/color: Selected by architect, after contract award, from manufacturer's standard patterns/colors. 5. Exposed items other than louvers: Match color of rails. J. Manufacturers: 1. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. Hunter Douglas, Inc./Window Covering Division. b. Kirsch Company. C. Levelor Corporation. d. Springs Window Fashions (Bali/Graber). 2.2 FABRICATION A. Fabricate to fit actual construction; take field measurements of openings before starting fabrication. B. Use materials that are compatible, will not need to be lubricated, and which will not adversely affect adjacent materials. C. Make blinds fill each opening completely, from jamb to jamb and from head to sill, with a single blind unit, unless multiple units are specifically indicated. D. Horizontal Louver Blinds: 1. Space ladders in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Space louvers to positively overlap when closed. 3. Provide fully tilting louvers, approximately 180 degrees of rotation. 4. Install tilt control on left side when facing interior side of blind. 5. Install lift cords on right side when facing interior side of blind. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates at locations in which window blinds will be installed. Do not begin installation until conditions are correct. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install blinds in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. I 03860296/96 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12511-3 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 B. Set units in correct location, plumb, and level; allow clearance for window operating hardware. C. Fasten securely to substrates. D. Separate metal components from concrete and masonry using plastic tape or other suitable material. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust each blind for proper operation. B. Replace defective and damaged units. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed work. END OF SECTION 12511 03860296/96 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12511-4 F �•. LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 t. SECTION 12621 - MARKER BOARDS i i PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fixed units. o 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer's technical data. l 2. Manufacturer's installation and breaking -in instructions. 3. Color charts showing full range of standard colors. 4. Test reports demonstrating compliance with specified requirements. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Provide dimensioned elevations of each configuration of board. r 2. Show sections of trim members. Key to elevations. 3. Show anchorage and any necessary grounds. j 4. Show layout and installation details. PM C 0 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: 1. Not less than 5 years of experience in manufacturing products of the type specified. r 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS l:. A. Environmental Requirements: r. 1. Deliver boards only when interior air and substrates have reached equilibrium moisture E ' and temperature approximating that of normal occupied conditions. r„ PART 2 - PRODUCTS k 2.1 MANUFACTURERS l A. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the l contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: 1. Fixed units: r a. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc. x b. Greensteel Division/Information Display Technology, Inc. C. Lemco, Inc. d. Peninsular Slate Company. r 03860296/96 MARKER BOARDS 12621-1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 — 2.2 MATERIALS — A. Porcelain -Enamel Marker Boards: High -pressure -laminated composite construction. 1. Facing sheet: _ a. Manufacturer's option of enameling processes listed: 1. Steel: Special quality enameling iron or steel, low metalloid and copper content for temperature over 1,400 degrees suitable for coating porcelain on steel for architectural purposes; chemically bathed and rinsed before — enameling. Porcelain writing surface: Nickel Cobalt primer 0.002 inches minimum thickness, writing surface 0.0025 inches minimum thickness. Opposite surface: Nickel cobalt ground coat 0.002 inches minimum — thickness for silica spray coat for lamination adhesion. Total finish thickness 0.004 inches minimum thickness. Panel edges at butt joints porcelain coated. — 2. Proprietary process using Type 1 stretcher -leveled aluminized steel sheet with enamel fired at approximately 1000 degrees F. b. Minimum thickness: 24 gage. C. Marker board cover coat: 1. Manufacturer's standard gloss finish. B. Colors of boards and trim: As selected by the architect from manufacturer's standard colors. 2.3 MANUFACTURED UNITS — A. Construct units as follows: 1. Fixed unit. 2. Writing surface: Porcelain -enamel marker board. -" 3. Board size: 4 feet by 6 feet 4. Unit frames: a. Anodized, satin finish aluminum tubing. b. Full-length chalk tray. PART 3 - EXECUTION — 3.1 ASSEMBLY A. Assemble units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Joints shall be neat and tight -fitting. _ 3.2 PROTECTION A. Protect boards from damage until substantial completion. END OF SECTION 12621 03860296/96 MARKER BOARDS 12621-2 1 �.. LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 E SECTION 15000 - GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 CHECKING DOCUMENTS A. The drawings and the specifications are numbered consecutively. The Contractor shall check the drawings and specifications thoroughly and shall notify the Architect of any discrepancies or omissions of sheets or pages. Upon notification, the Architect will promptly provide the Contractor with any missing portions of the drawings or specifications. No discrepancies or omissions of sheets or pages of the contract documents will relieve the Contractor of his duty to provide all work required by the complete contract documents. 1.02 GENERAL A. In general, the lines and ducts to be installed by the various trades under these specifications shall be run as indicated, as specified herein, as required by particular conditions at the site, C and as required to conform to the generally accepted standards as to complete the work in a neat and satisfactorily workable manner. The following is a general outline concerning the running of various lines and ducts and is to be excepted where the drawings or conditions at r the building necessitate deviating from these standards. r B. All piping and ductwork for the mechanical trade shall be concealed in chases in finished areas, except as indicated on the drawings. Horizontal lines run in areas that have ceilings shall be run concealed in those ceilings, unless otherwise specifically indicated or directed. C. Piping and ductwork may be run exposed in machinery and equipment spaces, where serving as connections to motors and equipment items in finished rooms where exposed connections are required, and elsewhere as indicated on the drawings or required. D. The Contractor shall thoroughly acquaint himself with the details of the construction and finishes before submitting his bid as no allowances will be made because of the Contractor's unfamiliarity with these details. All concealed lines shall be installed as required by the pace of the general construction to precede that general construction. E. The mechanical plans do not give exact details as to elevations of lines and ducts, exact locations, etc., and do not show all the offsets, control lines, pilot lines and other installation details. The Contractor shall carefully lay out his work at the site to conform to the architectural and structural conditions, to provide proper grading of lines, to avoid all obstruction, to conform to details of installation supplied by the manufacturers of the equipment to be installed, and thereby to provide an integrated, satisfactorily operating installation. F. The mechanical plans do not give exact locations of outlets, fixtures, equipment items, etc. The exact location of each item shall be determined by reference to the general plans and to all detail drawings, equipment drawings, roughing -in drawings, etc., by measurements at the building, and in cooperation with other sections. Minor relocations necessitated by the 03860296/96 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000-1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 _ conditions at the site or as directed by the Architect shall be made without any additional _ cost accruing to the Owner. G. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper fitting of his material and apparatus into the space. Should the particular equipment which any bidder proposes to install require other space conditions than those indicated on the drawings, he shall arrange for such space with the Architect before submitting his bid. Should changes become necessary on account of failure to comply with this clause, the Contractor shall make such necessary, changes at his (the Contractor's) own expense. H. The Contractor shall submit working scale drawings of all his apparatus and equipment -- which in any way varies from these specifications and plans, which shall be checked by the Architect before the work is started, and interferences with the structural conditions shall be corrected by the Contractor before the work proceeds. -- I. Order of precedence shall be observed in laying out the pipe, ductwork, material, and conduit in order to fit the material into the space above the ceiling and in the chases and .- walls. The following order shall govern: 1. Items affecting the visual appearance of the inside of the building such as lighting _ fixtures, diffusers, grilles, outlets, panelboards, etc. Coordinate all items to avoid conflicts at the site. 2. Lines requiring grade to function such as storm drains. 3. Large ducts and pipes with critical. clearances. 4. Conduit, water lines, and other lines whose routing is not critical and whose function would not be impaired by bends and offsets. J. Piping and ducts serving outlets on items of equipment shall be run in the most appropriate manner. Where the equipment has built-in chases, the lines shall be contained therein. Where the equipment is of the open type, the lines shall be run as close as possible to the underside of the top and in a neat and inconspicuous manner. K. Exceptions and inconsistencies in plans and specifications shall be brought to the Architect's attention before the contract is signed. Otherwise, the Contractor shall be responsible for any and all changes and additions that may be necessary to accommodate his particular apparatus, material, or equipment. L. The Contractor shall distinctly understand that the work described herein and shown on the accompanying drawings shall result in a finished and working job, and any item required to — accomplish this intent shall be included whether specifically mentioned or not. M. Each bidder shall examine the plans and specifications for the General Construction. If these documents show any item requiring work under Division 15 and that work is not indicated on the respective "M" or "P" drawings, he shall notify the Architect in sufficient time to clarify before bidding. If no notification is received, the Contractor is assumed to _ require no clarification, and shall install the work as indicated on the General Plans in accordance with the specifications. 03860296/96 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000-2 r F LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 1.03 ELECTRICAL WIRING 900-9268 A. All electric wiring of every character will be done under Division 16 of these specifications. The Contractor for each section shall erect all his motors in place ready for connections. The Contractor, under Division 16, shall mount all the starters and controls, furnishing the supporting structures and any required outlet boxes. B. Every electrical current consuming device furnished as a part of this project, or furnished by the Owner and installed in this project, shall be completely wired up under Division 16. Verification of exact location, method of connection, number and size of wires required, voltage requirements, and phase requirements is the responsibility of the Contractor under Division 16. If conflicts occur between the drawings and the actual requirements, actual requirements shall govern. 1.04 TERMINOLOGY A. The use of the word "shall" conveys a mandatory condition to the contract. B. "This section" always refers to the section in which the statement occurs. C. "The project" includes all work in progress during the construction period. D. "Concealed" areas are those areas which cannot be seen by the building occupants from the floor with all building components in place. E. "Exposed" areas are all areas which are exposed to view by the building occupants, including mechanical rooms. F. In describing the various items of equipment, in general, each item will be described singularly, even though there may be a multiplicity of identical or similar items. 1.05 SEALING AROUND PIPES, DUCTS, ETC. A. The Contractor installing pipes, ducts, etc. shall seal all spaces between pipes and/or sleeves where they pierce walls, partitions or floors with 3M No. 2000 fire resistant caulk. The packing shall effect a complete fire and/or air seal where pipes, conduits, ducts, etc., pierce walls, floors or partitions. 1.06 INSTALLATION DRAWINGS A. It shall be incumbent upon the Contractor to prepare special drawings as called for elsewhere herein or. as directed by the Architect to coordinate the work under each section, to illustrate changes in his work, to facilitate its concealment in finished spaces to avoid obstructions or to illustrate the adaptability of any item of equipment which he proposes to use. 03M96196 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000-3 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 B. These drawings shall be used in the field for the actual installation of the work. Unless otherwise directed, they shall not be submitted for approval but three copies shall be provided to the Architect for his information. 1.07 ROUGH -IN AND MAKE FINAL CONNECTION FOR EQUIPMENT A. The shop drawings for all equipment are hereby made a part of these specifications. The Contractor under each section of the specifications shall rough -in for the exact item to be furnished on the job, whether in another section of the specifications or by the Owner. The Contractor shall refer to all drawings and other sections of the specifications for the scope of work involved for the new equipment, and by actual site examination determine the scope of the required equipment connections for the Owner furnished equipment. B. Should any of the equipment furnished require connections of a nature different from that — shown on the drawings, report the matter to the Architect and finally connect as directed by the Architect. C. Should any shop drawings not be available for equipment furnished under other contracts or by the Owner, the Contractor under each section of these specifications shall bid the work as detailed on the drawings. D. Minor differences in the equipment furnished and that indicated on the drawings will not constitute ground for additional payment to the Contractor. ` END OF SECTION 03860296/96 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000-4 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 SECTION 15100 - SITE UTILITIES 900-9268 PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 NOTE A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.03 SCOPE A. Perform all layout, trenching, excavation, backfill, shoring and similar work and provide and install all materials and appurtenances necessary for the installation and final connection of all utilities. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. All piping materials for every purpose shall be furnished and installed as hereinafter specified. B. All pipe and fittings shall be new and unused unless specifically indicated otherwise. C. Underground steel piping shall be factory coated pipe "X-Tru-Coat" or epoxy coated pipe with fittings wrapped with a double thickness of 3M Scotch "51" vinyl tape over pipe and fittings. 2.02 SANITARY SEWER A. PVC Plastic Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D3034 type PSM with a maximum SDR of 35 with elastomeric joints complying with ASTM D3212. 2.03 WATER LINES A. PVC Piping: Schedule 80, ASTM D1785 with tapered ends, with elastomeric gasket bell and socket fittings conforming to requirements of AWWA C900, C.I. pipe dimensions only. Reaction blocking shall conform to NFPA 24. 2.04 GAS LINES A. Plastic Gas Piping: Polyethylene, Type III, Grade 3, (PE 3406-3408), resin conforming to ASTM D1248-7A, pipe construction conforming to ASTM D2513 (SDR 11). 03860296196 SITE UTILITIES 15100-1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 — B. Mechanical Joints: Where steel lines connect to plastic lines 2" and smaller in size, use Continental Style 5 extra heavy duty malleable iron couplings with stiffeners. C. Flanges: Where steel lines valves or accessories connect to plastic lines 2-1/2" and larger, _ use polyethylene and steel flat face flanges with full face gaskets. D. Casing: Encase plastic lines under streets in schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe extending 36" beyond paving. E. Service Risers: Wayne Manufacturing compression service riser with anode and built-in stiffener. ` 2.05 FIRE LINE A. PVC Piping: ASTM D-2241, SDR-17, Class 150, bell and spigot with ASTM D-1869 rubber gasket, Manville Blue Brute. 2.06 EXTERIOR CLEANOUTS A. Provide and install cleanouts in exterior sewer lines where shown or as required by ordinance but not greater than 100 ft. apart. Cleanouts shall consist of a concrete encased special fitting with sewer pipes extending therefrom upward, terminating in a concrete slab. A brass countersunk cleanout ferrule shall be set on this slab in such manner as to be flush with finished grade and to provide access, through its cover, to the cleanout. Cleanouts shall be the same size as the sewer, up to 6" in size. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 LAYOUT OF UTILITY LINES A. Before starting excavation Contractor shall: 1. Uncover and determine the elevation at beginning and end terminals of each line. 2. Compute and verify depth of all lines and grade of sewer lines and submit figures in -` writing. 3. Stake route of each line. 4. Arrange utility connections with authorities. — 5. Locate and identify any conflicting underground structures and adjust grade or routing to accommodate installation of the lines. 3.02 LAYING PIPE A. Lay pipe to the lines and profiles required by conditions at the site and the drawings. Keep pipe trenches free of water and dry during the bedding, laying and jointing operations. Install fittings and valves at the required locations, with joints centered and with valve stems vertical. Handle pipe carefully to avoid damage to dimensioned ends. Remove pipe with damaged ends which cannot be suitably repaired. Keep interior of piping and accessories clean. 03860296/96 SITE UTILITIES 15100-2 F LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 B. Proximity of Water and Sewer Lines: Unless otherwise required by drawings, lay parallel water lines and sewer lines in separate trenches at least 10 feet apart. Insofar as possible place water line at a higher elevation than the sewer. Where water lines and sewer lines cross each other, the water line shall be at least 3 feet above the sewer, or if this is not possible, r amount of clearance between the lines may be reduced to 12" out to out clearance provided the sewer line is cast iron for at least 10 feet on each side of the water line. 3.03 EXCAVATION FOR OUTSIDE UTILITIES A. The Contractor shall perform any excavations of every description and of whatever substances encountered, to the depths indicated on the drawings and/or required for the installation of his work. r B. Piling of Excavated Materials: All excavated material shall be piled in a manner that will not ! endanger the work and that will avoid obstructing sidewalks and driveways. Hydrants under pressure, valve pit covers, valve boxes, curb stop boxes, fire and police call boxes, or other �,. utility controls shall be left unobstructed and accessible until the work is completed. Gutters shall be kept clear or other satisfactory provisions made for street drainage, and natural water courses shall not be obstructed. Segregate topsoil for replacement. Unused material shall be r removed from the site. C. Trenching Methods: Trench digging machinery may be used to make trench excavations except where operation of same would cause damage to existing structures, or plants either above or below ground; in such instances hand method shall be employed. D. Barricades and Safety Provisions: To protect persons from injury and to avoid property damage, adequate barricades, construction signs, warning lights and guards as required shall be placed and maintained during progress of the construction work. All material, piles, equipment, pipe, and open trenches that may serve as hazards to vehicular or pedestrian traffic shall be protected by barricades or fences and warning lights. E. Protection of Property and Structures: Temporary support, adequate protection, and maintenance of all underground and surface structures, drains, sewers, and other obstructions encountered in the progress of the work shall be furnished by the Contractor at his expense and under the direction of the Architect. Any structures that have been disturbed shall be restored upon completion of the work. 3.04 BACKFILLING A. The trenches shall not be backfilled until all required tests are performed and until the utilities systems as installed conform to the requirements specified hereinafter. The trenches shall be carefully backfilled with the excavation materials approved for backfilling, consisting of earth, loam, sandy clay, sand and gravel, soft shale, or other approved materials free from large clods of earth or stones deposited in thoroughly and carefully rammed 6" layers, until the pipe has a cover of not less than one foot for water mains and two feet where possible for other lines. 03860296/96 SITE UTILMES 15100-3 i LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 B. The remainder of the backfill material shall then be thrown into the trench, moistened and tamped in one foot layers. Blasted rock, broken concrete or pavement, and large boulders shall not be used as backfill material. Settling the backfill with water will be permissible and will be a requirement when so directed. Any trenches improperly backfilled or where settlement occurs, shall be reopened to the depth required for proper compaction, then refilled and mounded over, and smoothed off. C. Open trenches across roadways or other areas to be paved shall be backfilled as specified above, except that the entire depth of the trench shall be backfilled in 6" layers, each layer moistened and compacted to a density at least equal to that of the surrounding earth in such manner as to permit the rolling and compaction of the filled trench together with the adjoining earth to provide the required bearing value, so that paving of the area can proceed immediately after backfilling is completed. Along all other portions of the trenches, the ground shall be graded to a reasonable uniformity and the mounding over the trenches left in a uniform and neat condition. 3.05 LOCATION AND DETECTION A. Below Ground: 1. Non -Metallic: a. Non-metallic pipe installed below ground shall have installed in the same trench a detectable plastic tape that conforms in to the APWA color coding as follows: Blue - Water Green - Sewer and Sanitary Systems Yellow - Gas Such tape shall consist of one layer of aluminum foil laminated between two layers of inert plastic film. Tape shall be approved 2 1/8" wide and shall be imprinted with a continuous traceable for a minimum of eight years after direct burial. Product shall be Terra Tape Detectable or approved equal. Tape shall be installed per manufacturer's instructions, but no less than 12" above the buried line. 2. Metallic: a. Below ground metallic piping shall have identifying tape similar to that specified for below ground non-metallic except that the aluminum foil for location is not required. 3.06 UTILITY SERVICES A. Water Service: The Contractor shall secure water service from the city main as indicated on the drawings. The Contractor shall make all arrangements with the city for domestic water service, including the tap, meter and meter box, and pay all charges levied by the city. Beginning at the termination of the city work, the contractor shall provide and install all water piping, fittings, valves, valve boxes, etc. shown on the drawings. Meter box shall conform to municipal requirements. 03860296/96 SITE UTILITIES 15100-4 r LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 B. Sanitary Sewer: The contractor shall arrange with the city for sewer service at the point shown on the drawings. Pay any charges levied by the city for this connection. C. Gas: Arrange with the gas utility company for natural gas service as shown on the drawings. From the location of the new meter, extend service to the building. Provide service valves at each service point. D. Fire Protection Water Service: The Contractor shall secure service from the city main at the point shown. Arrange for the tap with the city and pay all charges levied by the city for the service. 3.07 TESTING A. Sewer: Prior to testing for leakage the trench shall be backfilled up to at least the lower half of the pipe. If required, sufficient additional backfill shall be placed to prevent pipe movement during testing, leaving the joints uncovered to permit inspection. Visible leaks encountered shall be corrected. Test shall be made by filling the line to be tested with water so that a head of at least 10 feet is provided above the top of the pipe at the upper end of the pipe line to be tested. The filled line shall be allowed to stand not less than 4 hours. B. Water Lines: Test under hydrostatic pressure of 150 PSIG for 4 hours with no leaks and no pressure drop. C. Gas: Before backflling, test under air pressure at 15 PSIG for 24 hours. There shall be no pressure drop, except for correction for temperature variation. If any pressure drop occurs, soap test every joint, correct the leaks and retest. 03860296/96 END OF SECTION SITE UTILITIES 15100-5 i LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 SECTION 15200 - PIPING AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 NOTE A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.03 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to the piping and accessories as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein. 1.04 INSPECTION A. All pipe, valves, fittings, and other accessories shall be inspected upon delivery and during the course of the work. Any defective materials found during field inspection or during hydrostatic and leakage tests shall be removed from the site of the work and replaced by the Contractor. 1.05 PROTECTION DURING STORAGE A. The interior of all pipe, fittings, and other accessories shall be kept free from dirt and foreign matter at all times. Valves and fittings shall be drained and stored in a manner that will protect them from damage by freezing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. All materials shall be manufactured or fabricated in the United States of America. B. Materials shall conform to the listed standards. Refer to specific sections for materials to be used under that section. The following tabulation is for reference only to identify the applicable standard. PVC Soil Pipe and Fittings ASTM D3034, Type PSM PVC Soil Fittings Copper Tubing 03860296/96 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES Max. SDR = 35 Elastomeric ASTM D3212 ASTM B75 76 15200-1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 Wrought Copper Solder Fittings ANSI B16.22 Steel Pipe ASTM A 120, A53, A 106 Butt Weld Fittings ANSI B16.9 Socket Weld Fittings ANSI B 16.11 Steel Flanges ANSI B 16.5 Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings ANSI B 16.3 C. Unions in Ferrous Lines: 150 pound malleable iron, screwed pattern, ground joint with brass to iron seat; equal to Crane. D. Insulating Fittings: Equal to Clear Flow fitting designed to meet requirements of ASTM " F-492. E. Unions in Copper or Brass Lines: 125 pound all brass, screwed pattern, bround joint, equal �- to Chase, Crane or Mueller. 2.02 VALVES — A. Ball Valves: Bronze threaded body, chrome plated bronze ball, teflon seats and O-rings, bronze shafts, and infinite position handle. Valve shall be two piece. Apollo, Crane, Jamesbury and Stockham are acceptable. B. Swing Check Valves 2" and Smaller: All bronze screwed, equal to Crane No. 37 for pressures to 125 psi or No. 36 for pressures to 200 psi.SWP or 400 PSI WOG. C. Gas Valves: Iron body, lubricated plug valves equal to Nordstrom Fig. 143 in sizes 2-1/2" and larger. Valves 2" and smaller equal to Crane No. 270 threaded gas stop. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS A. Install runs of piping essentially as indicated on the drawings and/or as required. The - location, direction and size of the various lines are indicated on the drawings. B. Make up all systems straight and true and properly graded for correct flow of contained materials and to provide drainage. Cut pipes accurately to measurements established at the building and work into place without forcing or springing. Except as required for specified grading, run all piping above ground parallel with the lines of the building. C. Make all changes in pipe sizes with reducing fittings. Use no long screws or bushings. D. Install and support piping systems with loops, bends, expansion joints and/or flexible connectors as required for flexibility, to accommodate expansion and contraction of piping due to temperature changes in the contained fluids and in the surrounding space, and to minimize the transmission of vibration to the building structure. 03860296/96 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15200-2 r F LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268. i' E. Provide unions in the lines assembled with screwed and soldered fittings, at points of connection to equipment, and elsewhere as indicated or required to permit proper connections to be made, or to permit valves, equipment items, etc. to be removed. Provide unions also in welded lines at connections to equipment where flanges are not provided. Provide insulating unions where ferrous material joins non-ferrous material. F. In piping systems assembled by welding, use factory -fabricated welding fittings of the same material and the same schedule or weight as the Riving in which they are installed, except that branches or take -offs of sizes not exceeding 2/3 of the nominal diameter of the mains may be made with Bonney Weldolets or Thredolets. Mitering of pipe to form elbows, notching of straight runs to form tees, and any similar construction will not be permitted. G. In general, use listed materials in fabricating the various piping systems. The method of assembly may be varied only to meet special conditions where it is impossible to comply with the specified method of joining piping. Where special classes of piping are involved and are not listed, request exact instructions as to the class of material involved and the method of fabricating it before ordering materials. 3.02 FLASHING A. Flash around all pipes passing through the roof with sheet lead not less than 2-1/2 lbs. per square foot, built a minimum of 8" in all directions from the outside of the pipe into the waterproofing. Flashing shall be run up the pipe and turned over into the pipe cavity. Flashing at roof drains shall be 36" square. 3.03 SEALANT PANS A. As specified in Section 07600 - "FLASHING AND SHEET AETAL". 3.04 PIPE SLEEVES A. Generally where pipes pass through walls or floors except sewer pipes through floors on grade, pipe sleeves shall be used. The sizes of these sleeves shall be such as to permit readily the subsequent insertion of the pipes of the proper size. In the case of insulated lines, the diameter of the sleeves shall be approximately 1/2 inch greater than the outside diameter of the insulation. B. The pipes passing through interior walls or floors shall pass through galvanized pipe sleeves. In walls, they shall finish flush with each finished surface. In pipe chases, they shall emend 1-1/2 inches above the floor slab. The annular space between the pipe and sleeve in floor penetrations and fire rated wall penetrations shall be fire -sealed with fire resistive material equal to 3M No. 2000 fire resistant caulk. C. The pipes passing through concrete beams or walls, and masonry exterior walls and through floors shall be provided with galvanized wrought iron pipe sleeves. Weld at least four No. 4 r ' rods to each pipe sleeve to serve as an anchor as directed by the Architect. After the pipes are installed, in the case of pipes sleeving through exterior beams or walls and floors on grade, the Contractor shall fill the annular space between the pipe and its sleeve with r I i 03860296/96 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15200-3 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 mechanical interlocking synthetic rubber link equal to Link Seal. Contractor shall coordinate sleeve size to insure a watertight joint. 3.05 ESCUTCHEONS, CEILING PLATES F A. Except as otherwise noted provide and install concealed hinge, chrome plated escutcheons or ceiling plates with spring catches around each pipe passing through any wall, floor, or ceiling in any space, except in underfloor and attic spaces. Plates shall be sized to fit snugly against the outside of the pipe, or against the outside of the insulation on lines which are insulated. B. No floor plates will be required around the iron pipe sleeves on exterior walls. 3.06 FABRICATION OF PIPE JOINTS r A. No -Hub Joints: Install according to manufacturer's instructions. Rubber sleeve shall be neoprene. Clamps and bolts shall be stainless steel B. Threaded Pipes: Ream and deburr pipe after it is cut and before it is threaded. Stand each pipe on one end and hammer to remove all foreign material. Full cut threads, but not more than 3 pipe threads shall remain exposed when joint is completed. Make up joints with graphite and oil or an approved graphite compound applied to male threads only. Caulking of threaded joints to stop or prevent leaks is prohibited. C. Copper Tubing: Cut tubing square, ream and deburr. Clean insides of fittings and outsides of tubing with sand cloth before assembly. Exercise care to prevent annealing of fittings and hard drawn tubing. Make all joints with high temperature solid string or wire solder, 95 % tin, 5% antimony, using non -corrosive paste flux of the proper type for all copper tubing. Low temperature solder such as 50150 or 40/60 will not be permitted. D. Welded Joints: Make all welded joints by the metallic arc process. Use base material conforming to ANSI B31.1 for welded pipe ASTM A 106 and ASTM A53. Use filler material conforming to ASTM A233 and in accordance with ANSI B31.1. Machine the ends of the material to be joined or gas cut. Make the cut smooth in order that good fit can be made and a full penetration weld made. Use direct current for welding with the electrode positive. Limit the depth of deposit to 1/8" per pass. Remove all slag or flux remaining on any bead of welding before laying down the next successive bead of welding. Remove any -- cracks or blow holes that appear on the surface of any bead of welding by chipping or grinding before depositing the next successive bead of welding. t E. Flanged Joints: Flanged joints shall be made using bolts of Grade 5 or better and gaskets as specified. Faces of the flanges shall be cleaned of all dirt, rust or other foreign matter. The pipe, valve, or fitting shall be properly aligned and free to move while bolting, and the bolts shall be gradually tightened at a uniform rate around the entire flange. No strain shall be put on the flanges in making up the joint. F. Solvent Weld Plastic Joints: Solvent welded according to manufacturers instructions. 03860296/96 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15200-4 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 3.07 REPAIR OF LEAKS A. All leaks in piping systems shall be corrected as follows: 1. Repair leaks in solder joints by remaking the joint; no soldering or brazing over existing joints will be permitted. 2. Repair leaks in screwed joints by tightening the joint; remake the joint if the tightening fails to stop the leak. 3. Repair leaks in PVC pipe by remaking the joint. 4. Repair leaks in welded joints by removing the defective weld completely through the base metal and grind smooth. Re -weld, accomplishing 100 % penetration of the base metal. The repair weld should in no case be less than 4" in length. B. When any defect is repaired, retest that section of the system. 3.08 ALIGNMENT AND GRADES A. General: All pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades with fittings, valves, at the required locations; spigots centered in bells; and all valve stems plumb. All pipe shall be installed straight and true to line. 03860296/96 END OF SECTION PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15200-5 8� r LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 SECTION 15210 - PLUMBING SYSTEMS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 NOTE A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.03 SCOPE 900-9268 A. This section of the specifications requires the furnishing and installation of all equipment, labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the installation of the plumbing systems. PART 2 - PRODUCTS t 1 2.01 MATERIALS: Refer to Section "Piping and Accessories". A. Interior Sanitary Soil, Waste and Drain Lines: PVC-DWV Plastic pipe and fittings conforming to ASTM D-2665-68, assembled with solvent cement conforming to ASTM D-2564-67. B. Sanitary Vent Lines: PYCmDWV Plastic pipe and fittings conforming to ASTM D-2665-68, assembled with solvent cement conforming to ASTM D-2564-67. C. Domestic Water Lines (Hot, Cold and Recirculating): All water lines underground or under slabs on grade shall be of Type_K.Spft.drawn copper tubing. All interior water lines shall be Ztpe-hard dra , D-copper tubing. Copper tubing shall be assembled using solder joint fittings. D. Gas Lines: Schedule-40 black-steelwith_ 1501b. banded malleable iron fittings for pipe 2" and smaller; welded fittings for pipe 2-1/2" and larger. E. Drain Lines: Type L copper with solder joint fittings. 1 F. Downspouts and Interior Storm Drain Lines: PVC-DWV Plastic pipe and fittings conforming p to ASTM D-2665-68, assembled with solvent cement conforming to D-25"64-a. 1 / G. Interior Ceeanouts: Cleanouts shall be provided at the bottom of each stack, at each change in direction, and in each horizontal run at intervals not exceeding 50 feet in all interior soil, waste, and drain lines. Where cleanouts occur in walls of finished areas, they shall be G concealed behind chrome plated access covers, such as Wade W-8480-R or provided with other special plugs and covers as required to present a finished appearance. Floor cleanouts 03860296/96 PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15210-1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 in unfinished areas shall be Wade W-6000 with threaded adjustable housing, flanged ferrule with cast iron plug and gasket and secured satin bronze scoriated top. Floor cleanouts in finished tile floors shall be Wade W-6000-TS with square tile top; in carpeted areas Wade W-6000-72 with carpet marker. All cleanouts shall be the same size as the line served up to 4" size and shall be 4" for all larger lines. H. Air Chambers: Air chambers of Type L copper, not less than 12" long and no smaller than the supply pipe, shall be provided and installed in each water supply to each and every fixture, outlet, item of equipment, etc. The length and/or the diameter of these air chambers shall be greater where required to eliminate water hammer. PDI shock absorbers may be used if sized in accordance with PDI recommendations. I. Vacuum Breakers: On each water supply line serving a plumbing fixture, item of equipment, or other devicewhich has a water supply below the rim of the fixture, or which has a `- threaded spout, provide and install an approved vacuum breaker. These vacuum breakers shall be designed to prevent any possible backflow through them. Where these are installed in chrome plated lines, they shall be chrome plated to match. 2.02 PLUMBING FIXTURES A. The plate numbers on the drawings represent fixtures that will be acceptable on the job. Approved equal fixtures of American Standard, Eljer, and Kohler will be acceptable. B. All exposed trim shall be chrome plated brass. This includes faucets, fittings, stops, risers, strainers, tailpieces, traps, waste, escutcheons, flush valves, brackets, vacuum breakers, goosenecks, hole covers, bolts, nuts and etc. C. All threaded supply fittings or outlets with tubing nozzles shall have back flow preventers. D. All fixtures shall have wheelhandle stop valves. E. Generally res shall be rovided with chair carriers so that no weight is supported from the wall. F. All fixtures shall be cleaned before final acceptance. L G. Verify mounting height of each and every fixture before rough -in. H. Where fixtures mate with walls or floor, the joint shall be grouted with dental plaster, G. E. Silicone or other grout as directed by the Architect. I. The Contractor shall verify all rough in heights before installation and shall secure a current ruling on heights of handicapped fixtures before rough in to insure that they meet the requirements of the parties having jurisdiction. J. Controls for flush valves shall be mounted on the wide side of toilet areas. K. All fixtures shall meet State of Texas SB587 water saving performance standards. 03860296/96 PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15210-2 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 2.03 PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE Water Closet WC'A' Bowl Flush valve Seat Water Closet WC'B' Bowl Flush valve Seat Urinal U Fixture Flush Valve Lavatory L'A' Fixture Supply P-trap Stops & Risers 03860296/96 900-9268 Eljer 111-4805, 1.5GPF water saver, elongated bowl, siphon jet, standard height, with bolt covers. Sloan Royal 113-1.5, 16" riser. Bemis 1955 SS/CH white solid plastic open front. Eljer 111-4815, 1.5GPF water saver, elongated bowl, siphon jet, handicapped 16-3/4" height, with bolt covers. ADA compliant. Sloan Royal 111, 11-1/2" riser. Bemis 1955 SS/CH white solid plastic open front. Eljer 161-1150 vitreous china, siphon jet flushing action, with chair carrier and 3/4" top spud. Mount at standard height. Sloan Royal 180 Eljer 051-2954, vitreous china 22-1/2" x 18-1/2" self rim, with 4" drillings. 557-1122, single chrome lever handle aerator, and 803-0552 perforated grid striner. 804-1180 with tubing waste and escutcheon. 802-0320 with flexible chrome risers and wheel handle stops. PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15210-3 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 Lavatory L'B' Fixture Supply Tailpiece P-trap Stops & Risers Insulation Sink S Fixture Supply Strainer P trap Stops, risers Disposal 900-9268 E1jer 051-2954, vitreous china 22-1/2" x 18-1/2" self rim, with 4" drillings. ADA compliant. 557-1122, single chrome lever handle aerator. 803-0530 perforated grid with offset drain. 804-1180 with tubing waste and escutcheon. 802-0320 with flexible chrome risers and wheel handle stops. Truebro 102W insulation for p-trap, offset tailpiece, and hot and cold supplies. Elkay LR-3319, 33" x 19-1/2" double compartment, 18 gage type 304 self rimming stainless steel with 4 holes. E1jer 717-1280, Chrome finish swing spout single lever unit with aerator, hose and spray, 3/8" tubing inlets. Two E1jer 803-0580 strainers and crumb cups with tailpieces. E1jer 804-1190 with tubing waste and escutcheon. E1jer 802-0320 with flexible chrome risers and wheel handle stops. In-Sink-Erator, Classic Model, 1 Hp stainless steel garbage disposal, stainless steel rotating shredder with two 3600 swivel impellers & stainless steel grind chamber. Service Sink SS Fixture Stainless steel Just A-18665 gauge, Type 304, wall hung service sink. 03860296/96 PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15210-4 .-* i. LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 Supply Just JUB-1200 chrome plated rigid spout mixing faucet with vacuum breaker. Spout with pail hook, wall brace and 3/4 inch threaded hose outlet. Ship Wt. 7 lbs. Trap Just JTS-1060 standard, enameled inside, with cleanout. Electric Water Cooler EWC Fixture P-trap Stop Hose Bibb HB Fixture Washing Machine Rough -in Box WM Fixture Shower Head SH'A' Fixture Shower Head SH'B' Fixture 03860296/96 Elkay EBFSA-8 with stainless steel receptor and vinyl clad cabinet. E1jer 804-1180 with tubing waste and escutcheon. E1jer 802-0320 with flexible chrome riser and wheel handle stop. Nibco Fig. 63 angle sillcock, with vacuum breaker. Guy Gray B-150 recessed stainless steel box with 1-1/2" drain outlet with two angle pattern hose bibbs. Powers Type 413 pressure equalizing shower control with check valves, stops, and chrome plated metal lever. Powers No. 141-376 deluxe shower head, univeral ball joint, 2-1/2 GPM volume control. Shower head shall be mounted at 6'-0" AFF. Powers Type 413 pressure equalizing shower control with check valves, stops, and chrome plated metal lever. Powers No. 141-376 deluxe shower head, univeral ball joint, 2-1/2 GPM volume control. Shower head shall be mounted at 6'-6" AFF. PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15210-5 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 Wall Hydrant WH Fixture Roof Drain RD Fixture ! . Ti Wade W-8620, non -freeze wall hydrant with integral vacuum breaker. Wade W-3010 cast iron drain and flange, flashing ring, gravel stop, cast iron mushroom dome, deck clamp and bearing pan. Downspout Nozzle DSN Fixture Wade W-3940 cast brass nozzle with threaded inlet and flange. 2.04 DRAINS A. Provide all drains as scheduled. Wade, Josam or Zurn are acceptable. Provide a clamping device for the floor membrane, where applicable. B. All floor drains, shall have deep seal p-trap. Shower Drain SD Fixture Wade No. W-1102 with 5" NB top, cast iron body. Floor Drain FD Fixture Wade No. W-1103 with 6" NB top, cast iron body. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ISOLATION VALVES A. The water supplies to each group of fixtures shall have an isolating valve in each line serving the riser. Where these valves are not accessible thru removable ceilings or otherwise, provide access doors in the ceiling or chase. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS A. Refer to PIPING AND ACCESSORIES for requirements for installing pipes. In addition, the following specifications shall apply. B. Drain Lines and Sanitary Waste: Grade down toward the sewer connection at a uniform slope of 1/4" per foot to serve individual fixtures or not less than 1/8" per foot to serve multiple stacks or outlets. Slope shall be greater where possible and shall never be less than required to produce a flow velocity of 2 feet per second. 03860296/96 PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15210-6 ftf Y LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 C. Vents: Grade up to the vent thru the roof. Terminate not less than 10" above the roof. p D. Water Lines: Grade to established low points and provid alved drains to mpletely drain the system. E. Secure and anchor piping in plumbing chases such that theke s no ment of flush valves, stops, etc. at fixture rough -ins. F. Gas Lines: All gas piping shall run exposed unless specifically detailed otherwise on the drawings, with special venting provisions. ' G. A drip pocket shall be installed at connection to an item of equipment and at each low point of the gas distribution system. Grade all lines to drip pockets. Drip pockets shall consist of a nipple and cap screwed to the bottom of the drop. H. Provide a gas cock, union and gas pressure ,regulator at each connection to a gas consuming appliance. I. All gas piping on the roof shall be supported as detailed on the drawings. Spacing of supports shall be as specified under "Hangers and Supports". 3.02 TESTING A.. Test all pipes before they are concealed in furrings or chases insulated, painted, or otherwise covered up or rendered inaccessible. Accomplish testing by sections of lines or systems, as required by conditions during construction. Clean all piping and equipment before testing. B. Domestic Water Lines Interior: Hydrostatically test for 6 hours at 150 psig. There shall be no leaks whatsoever. C. Interior Soil, Waste and Vent Lines: Drainage and venting system piping shall be tested with water before the fixtures are installed. Water test shall be applied to the drainage and venting system either in its entirety or in sections. If the entire system is tested, all openings in the pipes shall be tightly closed except the highest opening and the system shall be filled with water to the point of overflow. If the system is tested in sections, each opening except the highest opening of the section under test shall be tightly plugged, and each section shall be filled with water and tested with at least a 10 foot head of water. The water shall be kept in the system, or in the portion under test, for at least 30 minutes before the inspection starts. The system shall then be tight at all joints. Water shall not drop more than V in 8 hours. D. Gas Lines: Test with 15 psig air pressure for 24 hours with no pressure drop (except for temperature correction). If any drop occurs, soap test all joints, correct leaks and retest. END OF SECTION 6 03860296196 PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15210-7 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 SECTION 15280 - FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 NOTE A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS 900-9268 A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials and provide plan layout of system for approval. 1.03 SCOPE A. The entire building shall be protected by a automatic sprinkler system designed in conformance with NFPA 13R, Installation of Sprinkler Systems in Residential Occupancies up to and Including Four Stories in Height 1.04 APPLICABLE SPECIFICATIONS A. The design and installation of the Automatic Sprinkler Systems and the Alarm and Supervisory Systems shall be in strict accordance with all mandatory and recommended provisions of the NFPA, FM, UBC, and UL publications. All recommended provisions of the NFPA (National Fire Codes) listed below shall be considered as mandatory requirements. B. Issues of the following publications, including revisions and amendment as of the date of award of this contract, form a part of this specification. 1. National Fire Protection Association Standards (NFPA) 2. No. 13R Sprinkler System 3. No. 70 National Electrical Code 4. No. 72C Remote Station Protective Signaling Systems 5. No. 24 Outside Protection 6. Factory Mutual System, Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation Publication (FM) 7. Approval Guide 8. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. Publication (LIL) 9. Approved Equipment Lists (with supplements). 1.05 QUALIFICATION OF THE CONTRACTOR A. The Fire Protection System shall be installed by an experienced firm regularly engaged in the installation of automatic sprinkler and standpipe systems. The Contractor shall have a "Certificate of Registration" and shall have in his employee a licensed "Responsible Managing Employee", as provided for in Article 5.43-3 "Fire Protection Sprinkler Systems" of the Texas State Board of Insurance, Insurance Code. The Owner may reject any proposed installer who cannot show evidence of such qualifications. 1 03860296/96 FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM 15280-1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 1.06 SHOP DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall submit complete working drawings of the sprinkler system and such other descriptive data as the Architect may require to demonstrate compliance with the contract documents. B. Shop drawings will be submitted at one time to demonstrate that pertinent items of equipment have been properly coordinated and will function properly with each other. No installation work will be permitted prior to approval of complete shop drawings. C. If departures from the contract drawings are deemed necessary by the Contractor, details of such departures, including changes in related portions of the project and the reasons, therefore, shall be submitted with the shop drawings and hydraulic calculations. Approved departures shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Hydraulic calculations will be required in accordance with NFPA No. 13R. 1.07 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall revise the original shop drawings to agree with the construction as actually accomplished. These drawings shall be delivered to the Architect. PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.01 GENERAL A. All material and equipment shall be new and the current standard products of the manufacturer. Where two or more items of equipment performing the same function are required, they shall be exact duplicates, produced by one manufacturer. However, component parts need not be products of the same manufacturer. B. All materials and equipment shall be UL listed and/or FM approved for systems of the type indicated on the drawings, unless otherwise noted, and shall conform to the requirements of NFPA No. 13R. 2.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. The following is a listing of the materials and specifications. The list is comprehensive in nature. It is not intended that all materials listed will necessarily be required, but that those required for the work be selected from this listing. All pipe and fittings shall be non -galvanized, except where called for on the drawings or required by code. ITEM SIZE (INCL) SPECIFICATIONS Pipe All Ferrous pipe as per NFPA 13R. 03860296/96 FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM 15280-2 r. LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 ITEM Fittings, Flanges Threadolets Weldolets Plugs Unions Flange gaskets Valves: Globe valves Angle valves Gate valves Gate valves Butterfly valves Check valve 03860296/96 SIZE (INCL) All r1'7„-.. 2" 2" and larger All Thru 2" All Thru 2" Thru 2" Thru 2" 2-1/2" & Larger 2-1/2" & Larger Thru 2" SPECIFICATIONS As per NFPA 13R. Steel, ANSI B 16.11 sockolets ASTM A 105 Steel, 90 degrees STD only, ANSI B 16.9, ASTM 105 Brass, square head, 125 lb, ANSI B 16.5 Malleable iron, 300 lb bronze to iron ground joint. Red rubber 1/16 inch, ANSI B16.21 Screwed, bronze body, rising stem, 175 lb WWP, screw -in bonnet, renewable disc, Kennedy Fig. 97. UL/FM approval not required. Screwed, bronze body, rising stem, 175 lb. WWP, screw -in bonnet, renewable disc, Kennedy Fig. 9B. UL/FM approval not required. Screwed, bronze body, OS&Y, 175 lb WWP, Kennedy Fig. 66. Flanged, iron body, OS&Y, 175 lb WWP, Kennedy Fig. 68, electrical supervisory switch. Lug body, EPDM seat, ductile iron body, bronze disc, 6" and above gear operated, 175 lb. WWP, UL/FM approved, electrical supervisory switch. Screwed, bronze body, 175 lb WWP, horizontal swing, renewable disc, Kennedy Fig. 442. UL/FM approval not required. FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM 15280-3 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 ITEM SIZE (INCL) Check valves 2-1/2" & Larger Auto ball drip 1/2 or 3/4 Sprinklers and Nozzles: Automatic sprinkler Water Flow Alarm Devices: Water Flow Switch Miscellaneous: Pipe hangers supports, and connections Pipe escutcheons Sprinkler escutcheon Sprinkler guard Hypochlorite Water Pressure gage Siamese 03860296/96 900-9268 SPECIFICATIONS Flanged, iron body, 175 lb WWP, bolted bonnet, horizontal swing, renewable seat & rubber faced disc, Kennedy Fig. 126A. Bronze, Grinnell Model F775. Chrome plated pendant or upright. Potter -Roemer 6200 Series, UL/FM approved, 120 volt. Approved type, in accordance NFPA No. 13R requirements. Chromium -plated iron or chromium -plated brass, either one piece or split pattern, held in place by internal spring tension or setscrew. Two-piece, finish to match sprinkler except where otherwise specified on drawings. Depth as required to position sprinkler. Approved guard, standard baked red enamel finish. AWWA 300 3-inch minimum dial, 0-300 psi range, polished brass case, 2-1/2"x2-1/2"x4" chromium plated flush mounted with caps, chains and sillcock. Mark "AUTO SPKR". FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM 15280-4 r �. LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 PART 3 - EXECUTION e P 3.01 JOINTS A. Joints shall be the threaded type for 2" and smaller, and shall be welded or flanged for 2-1/2" and larger. B. Threaded Joints: Threads shall be concentric with the outside of the pipe and shall conform to ANSI B2.1. Threaded joints shall be made tight with an approved thread joint compound or tape. Joint compound shall be applied lightly but sufficiently to cover male threads only. t� Leaking joint shall not be repaired by penning or packing. C. Flanged Joints: Flanged joints shall be faced -true, provided with 1/16 inch red rubber gaskets, and made square and tight. When made up, flange bolts shall extend through nuts by at least one full thread. No flanges shall be placed in locations which will be inaccessible after erection. D. Welded Joints: All welding, including methods and qualifications of welders, shall be in ` strict accordance with the standards and requirements specified in NFPA Nos. 13R. All welds are subject to inspection by the Architect. The Architect reserves the right to accept, reject, or demand removal of welds which are in violation of these specifications. Welded branch connections to headers shall be made by use of threadolets, sockolets or weldolets type fittings. E. Cutting: Pipe shall be cut accurately to measurements shown on the shop drawings and to suit field conditions, and shall be carefully worked into place without forcing or springing. All cuts shall be reamed to remove fins and burrs. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Piping material, including valves and fittings, shall be delivered to the site in a clean and protected condition. End seals of pipe, valves and flange covers shall be maintained in place, being removed only as necessary for cleaning, fabrication, erection or for inspection by the Contractor. Care shall be exercised in the handling and storage of all piping materials and prefabricated piping so that contamination by moisture, grease, dirt, or injurious foreign matter shall not occur. B. The pipe shall be cut accurately to centerline measurements to suit field conditions, and shall be carefully worked into place without forcing or springing. Piping shall be pitched to allow proper drainage. C. The interior and exterior surfaces of all piping shall be kept clean at all times. Pipe shall be free from and burrs and shall be cleaned in accordance with cleaning procedures herein. D. No flanges or unions shall be placed in locations which will be inaccessible after erection. E. All valves shall be properly packed and made leakproof under the test pressures described. 03860296/96 FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM 15280-5 r LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 F. All piping passing through walls shall be provided with pipe sleeves two pipe sizes larger than the systems piping they accommodate or approved steel sleeves providing annular space around the pipe. Annular space shall be made weather and watertight. G. Where pipes pass through fire walls, fire partitions, or floor/ceiling assemblies, a fire seal of mineral wool, or similar noncombustible material shall be packed between the pipe and sleeve. 3.03 ESCUTCHEONS A. Pipe escutcheons shall be provided at all finished surfaces where exposed piping passes through floors, walls or ceiling except in boiler, utility, or equipment rooms. Sprinkler escutcheons shall be provided for all pendant heads through ceilings. Escutcheons shall be fastened securely to the pipe. 3.04 SIGNS A. All control drain and inspector's valves shall be provided with porcelainized metal identification signs. All hydraulically designed systems shall be provided with a permanently attached nameplate data sign as recommended by NFPA No. 13R. �. 3.05 SPRINKLER GUARDS A. All sprinkler heads installed within 7 feet of the floor or otherwise subject to mechanical damage shall be equipped with sprinkler guards. 3.06 TESTING A. Testing of the sprinkler systems and alarm systems shall be as prescribed by NFPA Pamphlet No. 13R. Each test shall be in the presence of an authorized representative of the owner. This representative shall sign the Certificate of Inspection as a witness of a successful test. The Contractor shall deliver these certificates of inspection in duplicate to the Architect. 3.07 STERILIZATION A. All new lines shall be flushed and sterilized with chlorine before acceptance for service. -- Calcium hypochlorite powder, containing not less than 70% available chlorine, shall be used for sterilization. The amount of chlorine applied shall be such as to provide a dosage of 100 ppm for at least 24 hours. At the conclusion of the 24 hour contract time, C12 residual should .• be at least 20 ppm. The chlorinating material shall be mixed with treated water in an acceptable container and injected directly into the system, the process being repeated until the system is filled. All valves in the system shall be open and closed 3 times during the ,. procedure to insure that the sterilizing mixture is thoroughly and evenly distributed throughout the system. After a contact period of not less than 24 hours, the system shall be flushed with water. 03860296/96 FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM 15280-6 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 3.08 PROCEDURE FOR PLACING SYSTEMS IN SERVICE A. The Contractor shall place the systems in service with the operating mediums after purging operations are completed. The Contractor shall furnish all labor and tools required. 3.09 ELECTRICAL WORK A. All electrical work in connection with the installation of the fire protection system shall be performed in accordance with Division 16. 3.10 SPARE SPRINKLER HEADS A. The Contractor shall furnish spare heads in accordance with NFPA Pamphlet No. 13R. Heads shall be provided in a suitable cabinet and shall be representative of, and in proportion to, the number of each type and temperature rating of heads installed. In addition to the spare heads, the contractor shall furnish not less than one special sprinkler wrench per cabinet. The Cabinets shall be mounted at the system's riser. END OF SECTION 03860296/96 FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM 15280-7 r.• LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 SECTION 15320 - AIR DISTRIBUTION PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 NOTE A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.03 SCOPE 900-9268 A. This section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the installation of ductwork, linings, air distribution devices, dampers and control devices, curbs and other materials and accessories as described herein and/or as shown on the accompanying drawings, or reasonably implied therefrom. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL DUCTWORK A. Except as otherwise specified herein, in other sections of the specifications, and/or noted on the drawings, low pressure ducts shall be constructed of galvanized steel sheets in accordance with the recommended construction for low pressure ductwork insofar as gauges of metal to be used, bracing of joints and joint construction as established in HVAC DUCT CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS, First Edition, as published by Sheetmetal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA). B. Unless indicated otherwise, all duct shall be constructed in conformance w' i" w g. pressure class. C. Make square elbows where shown or required, with factory -fabricated turning vanes. Make all other changes in direction with rounded elbows having a centerline radius equal to 1-1/2 times the width of the duct in the plane of the bend. D. Make transformations in duct shape or dimension with gradual slopes on all sides. Make increases in dimensions in the direction of air flow, with a maximum slope of V in 7" on any side. Make decreases in dimensions in the direction of air flow preferably with a slope of 1" in 7" on any side, but with a maximum slope of 1" in 4" where conditions necessitate. E. Ducts shall be routed in conjunction with pipes, electrical conduits, ceiling hangers, etc. so as fi to avoid interferences insofar as possible. Where duct penetrations are unavoidable, provide streamline shaped sleeves around such material penetrations, made airtight at duct surfaces, N 03860296/96 AIR DISTRIBUTION 15320-1 i LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 1900-9268 except that such sleeves are not required at tie rods.: Where obstructions are of a size to exceed 10% of the duct area, the duct shall be transformed to maintain the same duct area. 2.02 DUCT LINER A. All sheet metal supply and return ducts from rooftop units, and outside and supply ducts from fresh air ventilators shall be lined. B. The listed ducts shall be lined to a thickness of V with Mansville "Linacoustic" mat faced duct liner, or equal duct liner coated with neoprene on one side. C. Duct liner shall have an average thermal conductivity of .26 btu-in./sq. ft.-degree F. at a mean temperature of 75 F. D. The duct line Ed a applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations with the coa� om the metal, using weld pins or adhesive Tuffbond ive type metal clips Go equal, of the type which do not protrude through the uct. size of -'the ducts ' a and the sheet metal sizes shall a 2" gr ter in both dimensio ommodate the lining. No voids are permitted. E. Use 100% adhesive coverage and clips at the rate as specified by SMACNA. 2.03 DUCT SEALER A. All supply air and exhaust air ductwork shall be sealed to provide airtight construction. Metal surfaces to be joined shall be clean, dry and free of dirt or grease. Apply a heavy coat of Kingco Seal -Rite 18-120 to the interior metal surface of the slip joint, then interlock into place _ metal duct sections. Apply a heavy coat of 18-120 to the exterior metal surface duct joint, making sure any voids are filled to secure a continuous air pressure sealant. B. Allow sealant to dry a minimum of 48 hours before pressurizing system. C. Blue Glue or Hardcast will be considered equal. '- 2.04 AIR CONTROL DEVICES A. Manual dampers shall be installed as required to afford complete control of the air flow in the various duct systems. In rectangular supply ducts, a volume damper shall be installed at each point where a branch is taken off to achieve the final air balance. B. Volume dampers of the "butterfly" type shall be constructed of 22 gauge galvanized steel riveted or welded to square operating rods. Dampers shall have bearings of brass, bronze or approved plastic in most instances. Volume dampers of the butterfly type shall be used only in cases where neither dimension of the damper exceed 24". The metal used shall match that of duct system containing the damper in each case. Use special metals for damper rods and bearings as required to resist corrosion. 03860296196 AIR DISTRIBUTION 15320-2 7 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 k 900-9268 C. In cases where either dimension of the smaller branch duct exceeds 24", volume dampers shall be of the opposed blade type with blades linked together and controlled from a single point. They shall be constructed of No. 16 gauge steel either galvanized or with a baked enamel finish. Dampers shall have brass, bronze or approved plastic sleeve bearings. Blades shall be not more than 12" in width and shall be opposed acting, and those for automatic dampers shall have neoprene blade edges and stainless steel jamb seals. Blades shall be mounted in suitable band or angle iron frames strongly braced to insure rigidity. j D. Each volume damper, unless specified for automatic operation, shall be fitted with an adjusting device having a locking mechanism. Wherever the ducts are rendered inaccessible (' behind non -removable ceilings or furrings, .or other construction that is not easily removable to permit access to the ducts, the devices shall be equal to Young Regulator Co. No. 1200 right angle worm gear regulator with 301 concealed damper regulator. On exposed or easily accessible ducts the adjusting devices shall be equal to Young No. 1 or No. 900 and shall be fastened to the ducts. ,., E. Damper rods and operators on insulated ducts shall have extended rods and stand off brackets. 2.05 FLEXIBLE DUCT A. Flexible duct shall be a factory fabricated assembly consisting of an inner sleeve, insulation and an outer moisture barrier. The inner sleeve shall be constructed of a continuous vinyl -coated spring steel wire helix fused to a continuous layer of fiber glass impregnated and coated with vinyl. A 14/4 itch thick insulating blanket of fiber glass wool shall encase the inner sleeve and be sheathed with an outer moisture barrier of a reinforced Mylar or neoprene laminate of low permeability. The flexible duct shall be rated for a maximum working velocity of 6000 FPM and shall be listed by the Underwriters' Laboratories under their UL-181 standards as a Class 1 duct and shall comply with NFPA Standard #90A. The flexible duct shall be Thermaflex M-KC for high pressure and Thermaflex M-KE for low pressure application. B. Flex duct shall not exceed 6-0" in length or have more than 90 degree of bend. If longer duct is required use round sheetmetal duct with 2" thick duct insulation to make-up the difference in length. 2.06 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS A. Provide sound isolating flexible connections between connecting ducts and the inlet and outlet of each fan. These connections shall in each case be long enough to permit a minimum separation of 3" between the duct and the fan or unit housing with at least V slack in the flexible material itself. B. The material shall be of a glass cloth type equal to 30 ounce Ventglas as manufactured by I Ventfabrics. It shall be fire resistant, waterproof and mildew -resistant. t' 03860296/96 15320-3 r; LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 2.07 ROUND DUCT TAPS A. All round takeoffs shall be made with spin -in type fittings for sheet metal duct or fiberglass ductboard as applicable. Provide each with a factory installed balancing damper, positive locking nut and air scoop. 2.08 AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES A. Furnish and install all grilles, registers, and diffusers for every purpose. Refer to the tabulation on the drawings for types, sizes and accessories. B. All grilles, registers, and diffusers located in the ceiling shall be factory finished in OFF-WHITE. Door grilles shall be factory finished in baked enamel medium birch tan. All other grilles and registers shall be factory primed and spray painted 2 coats on the job. C. All grilles and registers shall be installed with tamperproof screws and shall be secured to the duct with a minimum of four screws. D. Where perforated supply grilles or diffusers are scheduled, they shall be of the type with adjustable curved blades in the neck of the diffusers. Other types are not acceptable. E. Where ceiling mounted air distribution devices are shown and require a ceiling radiation damper, the grille or diffuser shall be constructed of steel, aluminum is not acceptable. F. Air distribution devices as manufactured by Titus, Metal -Aire, or Krueger will be acceptable. 2.09 SPIRAL WOUND DUCTS A. Ductwork on the inlet and outlet of the Truck Exhaust System shall be spiral wound. B. This ductwork shall be round in cross-section. It shall be constructed according to the latest edition of the ASHRAE HANDBOOK. Duct construction details shall be in accordance with the "HVAC DUCT CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS, FIRST EDITION, published by the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association Inc. except as may be abridged herein. C. All job -constructed ducts shall be made with longitudinal joints butted and welded. Round ducts shall be factory fabricated spirally wound conduit made from zinc coated steel strips. All such ducts shall be delivered in standard lengths and shall be cut to proper length at the site by power saw to insure proper fit and square alignment. D. Fittings used on round ducts shall be shop fabricated by welding. Changes in direction shall be made with mitered fittings of at least 3 sections; 90 degree elbows shall contain not less than five sections. Branch takeoffs shall be at 45 degree. E. A high degree of dimensional accuracy is required in both conduit and fittings in order that the installation may be strong, rigid, and within allowable limits of air leakage. Inside diameter of conduits when checked with ring gages shall show a variation from nominal 03860296/96 AIR DISTRIBUTION 15320-4 i LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 diameter of not more than 0.030". Fittings shall be provided with male connections and, when checked with ring gages, shall show a variation from nominal outside diameter of not more than 0.015 inch. F. All other joints between conduits and between conduits and fittings shall be made with "Hardcast" cement reinforced with self -tapping drill screws. Conduits shall be joined with couplings. Adjoining surfaces of fitting or coupling and conduit at each joint shall be thoroughly cleaned, and after receiving a uniform coat of cement shall be pressed together. Joints so formed shall be further strengthened by the use of hex head No. 7x12 self -tapping drill screws installed with a screw gun. Screws shall be equally spaced around the circumference and centered longitudinally on the joint. Use three screws per joint on conduit with diameters of 3" through 8" and space screws approximately 6" apart on conduit with diameters of 9" and over. Then seal the joint with "Hardcast" assembled using manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION 03860296/96 AIR DISTRIBUTION 15320-5 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 SECTION 15330 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 NOTE A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary r Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS r ! A. Submit manufacturer's data on all maaterials. 1.03 SCOPE f A. The Contractor for the work covered by each section of the specifications shall furnish and *- t install all hangers, supports and isolation required by pipe or equipment included in this work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Materials shall be provided for the support of all piping and equipment. The following j tabulation lists materials suitable for this duty. Equal materials manufactured by Fee and ! Mason, Carpenter -Patterson, Grinnell or Modern will be considered. MATERIAL SERVICE FEE AND MASON CAT. Hanger Copper Tubing 3" and smaller 361 copper plated r Hanger Steel Lines 3" and smaller 215 or 199 j Hanger Outside Insulation -all lines 239 Hanger Plastic Pipe 108 + 109 Wall bracket All 150, 151, or 155 Pipe Clamps 2" and Smaller 304 Pipe Clamps 3" and Larger 241 Pipe Rest All 295 or 291 Beam Clamps All 249, 254, 255, 282, 280 Adjuster All 2381 2.02 HANGER RODS A. All individually suspended horizontal pipes shall be supported by steel rods sized as follows: Rod Diameter Size of Steel Pipe or Copper Tube Supported 3/8" 2-1/2" and smaller 1/2" 3" and 4" <I 03860296/96 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15330-1 'I LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 2.03 HANGER SPACING 900-9268 A. All hangers shall be so located as to properly support horizontal lines without appreciable sagging of these lines. Locate a hanger within 12 inches of every elbow or tee. The following table gives minimum spacing for copper and steel lines. However, hangers shall be more closely spaced where necessitated by conditions or required by code. Size of Line 3/4" and smaller 1" through 1-1/2" 2" and larger All PVC lines PART 3 - EXECUTION Hanger Spacing in Feet 3.01 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTS 5 7 10 4 A. All pipes shall be adequately supported. All piping shall be installed with due regard to expansion and contraction, and the type of hanger, method of support, location of supports, etc. shall be governed in part by this consideration. Transmission of vibration and noise shall also be considered and any special suspension with vibration dampeners required to minimize transmissions shall be used where specified or required. B. All exposed vertical risers running near walls shall be supported from the walls. Each line shall have a minimum of 2 supports, not greater than 10'0" on centers, with the additional provision that there shall be a support near the top of the riser. All supports shall be aligned. C. All vertical pipes shall be supported with riser clamps sized to fit the lines and to adequately support their weight. At the bases of lines, `where required for proper supports, furnish and install anchor base fittings or other approved supports. D. Where vertical lines run down to a point near the floor and a support is needed, they may be supported by means of a pipe leg welded to the pipe, extending down to the floor and terminating in a capped end resting on the floor. E. Where pipes other than those specified hereinbefore, are running along walls, they shall be supported using hangers as described hereinbefore, but suspended from brackets bolted to the wall. Specially fabricated clips or U-braces may be used where commercially manufactured items are not available in the proper size. F. Where pipes run under steel construction, use beam clamps on beams. Under steel joists, piping may be suspended from rods thru the bottom chord with washers and double nuts. On piping larger than 4", verify the joist strength before installation. 03860296/96 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15330-2 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 G. Where multiple lines are run horizontally at the same elevations and grades, they may be supported on trapezes formed of sections of Unistrut, angle iron, or channels suspended on rods or pipes. Trapeze members, including the suspension rods, shall each be properly sized for the number, size and loaded weight of the lines they are to support. Trapeze spacings shall be in accordance with the preceding table for the smallest line supported on or from the trapezes. H. Perforated strap iron and wire will under no circumstances be acceptable as hanger material. 3.02 DUCT HANGERS A. All ductwork shall be supported in accordance with standards published by Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association Inc. END OF SECTION 03860296196 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15330-3 F LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 6 SECTION 15400 - INSULATION PART 1-GENERAL 1.02 NOTE A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.04 SCOPE 900-9268 A. This section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor, materials, ... transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the installation of thermal insulation, coverings, jackets, supports, shields, etc. as described herein and/or as shown on the accompanying drawings, or reasonably implied therefrom. All surfaces which may vary from the ambient temperature shall be insulated unless specifically excepted. f PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. In describing the various materials, application procedures, and finishes, each item will be described singularly, even though there may be a multiplicity of identical applications. Also where the description is only general in nature, exact dimensions, arrangements and other data ►`" shall be determined by reference to plans, schedules, and details, including those provided by equipment manufacturers. B. Where materials are described under other sections of the specifications and are pertinent to this section, they shall be installed hereunder as though they were repeated herein. C. All insulation shall have composite fire and smoke hazard ratings as tested by procedure NFPA 225, not exceeding flame spread 25, smoke developed 50. Accessories such as adhesives, mastics, cement, tape, cloth, etc. shall have these same component ratings. D. All materials installed under this section of the specifications shall be manufactured in the United States of America. 2.02 VAPOR BARRIER JACKETS A. Factory -applied vapor -barrier jackets shall be one of the following: 1. An All Service Jacket (ASJ) laminated of flame resistant white kraft paper, glass scrim reinforcement, and kraft paper. r 1 03860296/96 INSULATION 15400-1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 _ 2. Foil Reinforced Kraft (FRK) Jacket laminated of flame resistant 0.001" aluminum foil, glass scrim reinforcement and kraft paper. B. Where specified, insulate valves and fittings with two fiberglass inserts and preformed Manville Zeston covers with taped seams. 2.03 SHIELDS A. Provide shield of No. 16 U.S. standard gage galvanized metal to protect insulation at hangers and supports on piping 3 inches and smaller. For pipe 4 to 6 inches, use 14 gage; and for pipe 8 inches and larger, use 12 gage. Use a shield extending at least 6 inches on each side of the support bearing area. B. Under each shield on pipe 2" and larger, install a high density fiberglass insert equal to Hamfab H Block, 20 lb. density, or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The installation of all thermal insulation shall be performed by a recognized firm regularly engaged in the insulation business, using skilled insulation mechanics and using insulation materials which are the product of reputable manufacturer of the materials, using any special materials as required by these specifications and by those published standards. B. Any insulation which is not applied in a workmanlike manner will be rejected and replaced. All coverings shall be smooth, flush, dressed to line and tight. Mastic shall be neatly applied and tooled. The Architect reserves the right to reject any insulation whose appearance he deems unacceptable. 3.02 APPLICATION OF INSULATION A. Apply insulation and pipe covering after all work has been tested, found to be tight and accepted as such by the Architect. Thoroughly clean and dry all surfaces to be covered. 3.03 INSULATION ON EQUIPMENT AND PIPING SYSTEMS A. The following describes materials, thicknesses and finishes for insulation and coverings. B. Domestic Hot Water and Circulating Lines: Insulate wi 1" thick Owens -Coming Fiberglas ASJ/SSL-II molded sectional glass fiber pipe covering wi an All Service jacket (ASJ). Insulate valves and fittings with preformed "Zeston" PVC covers over fiberglass insulation. C. Domestic Cold Water Lines: Insulate with 1/2" thick Owens-Corning ASJ/SSL-II molded glass fiber pipe covering with factory appli 1 Service Jackets (ASJ). Insulate valves and fittings with preformed "Zeston" PVC covers over fiberglass insulation. Vapor seal all insulation. 03860296/96 INSULATION 15400-2 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 D. Drain Lines: 3/8" ick Manville Type II "Aerotube". Insulation may be slit flange type or threaded on during fabrication. E. Duct Insulation: Refer to Section 'AIR DISTRIBUTION' for duct liner specification. F. Ducts: Insulate the supply, return and fresh air ducts with2" thick, 3/4 lb. density, Owens-Corning "All Service Wrap" glass fiber flexible insulation having a factory applied FSKL vapor barrier jacket. G. This insulation shall be secured, vapor barrier side out, to sheet metal. On horizontal runs, lap top and bottom sheets over edges of side pieces. Butt joints tightly. Except on ducts handling warm air only, seal all joints, punctures, breaks and fasteners with two coats of Benjamin Foster 30-35 adhesive. Embed three inch wide Glassfab membrane in adhesive between coats. ,., H. Cover all joints, punctures and breaks with three inch wide facing strip. I. Ducts handling warm air only need not be vapor sealed. J. On ducts 24" and wider, install clips on bottom of duct, maximum of 18" O.C., to prevent insulation from sagging. K. Concealed Horizontal Storm Drains and Downspouts: Insulate with02-thick, 3/4 lb. density, Owens-Corning "All Service Wrap" glass fiber flexible insulation having a factory applied FSKL vapor barrier jacket. L. This insulation shall be secured, vapor barrier side out. On horizontal runs, lap top and bottom sheets over edges of side pieces. Butt joints tightly. Seal all joints, punctures, breaks and fasteners with two coats of Benjamin Foster 30-35 adhesive. Embed three inch wide Glassfab membrane in adhesive between coats. M. Cover all joints, punctures and breaks with three inch wide facing strip. N. Roof Drains: Insulate bodies of roof drain with one coat insulating cement to thickness of adjacent covering and cover with vapor barrier jacket of kraft paper and aluminum foil with glass fiber reinforcing fabric. Hubs shall be covered by building up layers of insulation until they are covered. The insulation shall overlap the adjacent insulation by a minimum of 2", bevel the ends and seal with glass fiber reinforced vapor barrier asphaltic adhesive. END OF SECTION INSULATION 15400-3 F 0 ,�. LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 F SECTION 15500 - EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 NOTE A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data and shop drawings on all items specified. 1.03 SCOPE 900-920 A. This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to the mechanical equipment as shown on the drawings and/or as specified herein. B. This section requires the furnishing of all equipment specified and/or shown on the drawings. Equipment referred to singularly shall mean each item, and the total number of items shown or specified shall be furnished. All equipment shall be manufactured in the USA. C. All appurtenances and auxiliary equipment necessary to the function of any specified item of equipment shall be furnished with the item of equipment, whether specifically mentioned or not. Each item of equipment shall perform the function for which it is intended, and all work necessary to provide a complete functional system shall be provided. D. This specification requires that all items of equipment be completely installed, finally !- connected, tested and placed in service. E. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to verify all requirements of the equipment and the contract and certify with the submittal of the shop drawings that all requirements have been met, including: 1. Space requirements 2. Electrical requirements (voltage, phase, wires - No. and size) 3. Capacities 4. Clearance for maintenance 5. Quality 6. Quantity PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MOTORS A. Motors shall be furnished for all motor driven equipment. General service motors driving i through flexible couplings or belts shall conform to the following requirements: r i 03860296/96 EQUIPMENT 15500-1 r LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 ._ B. Less than 1/6 HP: Split phase, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or enclosed as required by exposure, with a service factor of 1.0. C. Fractional 1/6 HP and Larger: Capacitor start, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or enclosed as required by exposure, with a service factor of 1.0 or greater. D. Integral Horsepower, Single Phase: Capacitor type, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or enclosed as required by exposure, with a service factor of 1.15. E. Three Phase: High efficiency continuous duty squirrel cage type, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or totally enclosed fan cooled as required by exposure with a service factor of 1.15. Motors shall have the minimum performance as scheduled below. HP RPM 1 1800 1-1/2 1800 2 1800 3 1800 5 1800 7-1/2 1800 2.02 STARTERS FRAME MIN EFF MIN POWER FACTOR 143T 82 84 145T 84 85 145T 84 85 182T 86 86 184T 87 87 213T 88 86 A. Starters, except those furnished as an integral part of the equipment as specified herein, shall be furnished by the Contractor under Division 16. Coordinate exact starter requirements and details: 2.03 FLUE VENTS A. Provide and install flue vents on water heater and hose dryer. B. All such flue vents shall be constructed of Metalbestos double wall metal conduit and shall be of the sizes recommended by the manufacturers of the devices vented. They shall be complete with all couplings and other required fittings and shall terminate 24" above the roof in a ventilator type weatherproof rainhead similar and equal to a Breidert Air-X-Hauster. Where any vent passes through combustible construction it shall be provided with a separation in accordance with the standards of the NFPA. All vents shall be flashed and counterflashed into the roofing construction to the satisfaction of the Architect and shall be watertight. 2.04 WATER HEATER A. Provide the water heater shown and scheduled on the drawings. It shall be a glass lined, jacketed, insulated package water heater. B. The gas fired unit shall be complete with draft diverter, adjustable thermostatic control, gas pressure regulator and all standard accessories including a thermomagnetic safety pilot 03860296/96 EQUIPMENT 15500-2 a r LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 f designed to shut off gas flow completely to both main burner and pilot burner, if pilot flame is extinguished. C. Provide in the outlet of each heater a Watts temperature and pressure relief valve, with a drain line therefrom full size to the floor drain. Size valve according to the applicable codes. D. Refer to drawings for capacities. 2.05 HOT WATER CIRCULATOR A. The pump shall be an in -line, single stage, wet rotor type with the motor mounted directly to 1 the pump chamber. The pump shall be furnished as shown on the plans and installed in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. The pump shall be capable of delivering 5 gallons per minute when operating at a total developed head of 5 feet of water column. The pump shall be as manufactured by Grundfos Model UP15-18SF. f.. B. The pump chamber shall be constructed of corrosion resistant 304 stainless steel and rated at 145 psi working pressure. Furnish with flanges. C. The impeller, impeller inlet cone, rotor can, and rotor cladding shall be constructed of stainless steel. The impeller shall be secured directed to the motor shaft by means of a stainless steel split cone. The motor shaft shall be constructed of aluminum oxide ceramic and shall be supported by two radial bearings mounted in a stainless steel bearing plate and rotor can. The pump shall be coupling or mechanical seal. D. The motor for the circulator shall be rated at 1/33 horsepower for continuous duty operating on 120 volt, single phase, 60 hertz alternating current. The motor shall be cooled and ( lubricated by the pumped fluid and shall require no scheduled maintenance. E. The pump shall be supported such that the weight of the pump is not carried by the adjoining Pipe- 2.06 FANS A. The fans indicated on the drawings shall be provided in accordance with the schedule on the drawings. B. All v-belt drives shall be a variable pitch type and shall be so selected that the specified fan performance occurs at approximately the midpoint of the adjustable range. Motor mounting shall be flexible to permit belt tightening. The static pressure tabulated in the schedule is for bidding purposes only. The fan shall be adjusted to achieve the air delivery specified and if changing of the motor and drive is required it shall be done at no increase in the contract. t. C. Motor and Drive: The motor shall be open drip proof NEMA T frame design to meet horsepower and electrical requirements specified. The adjustable v-belt drive shall be selected " for a 1.4 service factor based on motor horsepower and shall be factory set for the specified 1 rpm. The motor shall be mounted for alignment and tensioning the belts. Conduit shall be flexible. r- 03860296/96 EQUIPMENT 15500-3 r- LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 D. Provide isolators and flexible duct connections with each fan to limit the transmission of noise Y and vibration. E. Fans shall be AMCA rated as scheduled. F. Fans shall be furnished with backdraft dampers and disconnect. G. Fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced. H. Fans shall have factory applied finish. I. Power Roof Ventilators: All roof mounted exhaust fans shall be of the low silhouette type with fan wheels mounted horizontally. All fan housings shall be corrosion resistant construction. All fans shall be equipped with ball bearings, permanently lubricated. Fans -- shall be resiliently mounted. J. Exhaust fans shall have backward inclined centrifugal wheels. K. All fans shall have bird screens. L. Curbs shall be factory fabricated and furnished with the unit. It shall be of welded construction. M. Exhaust fans shall be as manufactured by Cook, Penn Ventilator, Acme or Greenheck. N. Wall Mounted Propeller Fan: Ventilator shall be belt driven axial type. Drive frame assembly shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel angle. Mounting members shall be slotted to allow adjustment and centering of propeller over spun venturi. O. Propeller construction shall be six die formed blades welded to a steel hub with gussets welded to three quarters of the blade length. The hub bore shall be a machined steel insert welded to the hub. A standard square key with two set screws and two retaining rings shall lock the propeller to the shaft. O. The ground and polished steel propeller shaft shall be mounted in sealed ball bearings. Fully machined cast iron pulleys shall be keyed to the propeller and motor shafts. All drives shall be adjustable and sized for a minimum of 165 percent of driven horsepower. Q. Refer to schedule on the drawings for size and capacities. -- R. The fan shall be mounted as shown with sheet metal connector to the louver with a flexible duct connector. S. Fan shall be Greenheck or equal. T. Ceiling Exhaust Fans: Unitary exhaust fans shall be as scheduled on the drawings. They shall be centrifugal, direct driven fans in a sound insulated sheet metal housing for installation above the ceiling. There shall be a finished integral metallic grille for each unit. Provide a 03860296/96 EQUIPMENT 15500-4 r LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 r backdraft damper, duct thru the roof and suitable rain cap for each. Fans shall be Penn, Greenheck, or equal. 2.07 GAS FIRED RADIANT HEATERS A. Provide and install the gas fired radiant heaters indicated on the drawings. The heaters shall be Re -Verbs -Ray as manufactured by Detroit Radiant Products. C B. Each heater shall be complete with the following components: 1. Frame and burner assembly, suspended from structure at the height directed. 2. Reflector constructed of .050 mirror polished aluminum. 3. Ceramic Radiator. 4. Secondary radiating rods or screen. 5. Automatic firing assembly including a gas pressure regulator, firing valve, gas stop and pilot. 6. Electrical controls including remote thermostat, on -off switch, and prewired control ,.., assembly. C. Each unit shall be equipped with 24 volt automatic ignition and 24 volt thermostat. D. The heater infra -red element and secondary radiating surface shall be warranted for ten years. E. Heater shall have a minimum of 85 square inches of radiating surface area. F. Each heater shall be suspended at the height directed, and at the angle directed. G. Provide and install the gas fired radiant heaters indicated on the drawings. 2.08 ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS - SINGLE ZONE A. The contractor shall furnish and install package rooftop units as shown and scheduled on the contract documents. The units shall be installed in accordance with this specification and r- perform at the specified conditions as scheduled. r- B. Units shall be as manufactured by Trane, Carrier, Lennox or York. C. General Unit Description: Units furnished and installed shall be combination gas heating/electric cooling packaged rooftops as scheduled on contract documents and these specifications. Cooling capacity ratings shall be ARI Standard 210 certified. Units shall consist of insulated weather tight casing with compressors, air cooled condenser coil, a)ndenser fans, evaporator coil, return air filters, supply motors and drives, gas -fired heating section. D. Units shall be 100% factory run tested and fully charged with R-22. E. Units shall have labels, decals, and/or tags to aid in the service of the unit and indicate ( caution areas. Wiring internal to the unit shall be colored and numbered for identification. r^. 03860296/96 EQUIPMENT 15500-5 j LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 F. Capacity: Some latitude will be allowed to compensate for differing unit manufacturers. However, units shall not be submitted with total capacity less than 10 % below the scheduled capacity nor less than 5% of the sensible capacity. G. Cabinet: Galvanized steel, phosphatized, and finished with an air-dry paint coating with removable access panels. Structural members shall be 16 gauge with access doors and removable panels of minimum 20 gauge. Units cabinet surface shall be tested 500 hours in salt spray test in compliance with ASTM B117. Cabinet construction shall allow for all service/maintenance from one side of the unit. Cabinet top cover shall be one piece construction or where seams exists, it shall be double hemmed and gasket sealed. H. Access Panels: Water and air tight panels with handles shall provide access to filters, heating section, supply air fan section, evaporator coil section, and unit control section. I. Downflow unit's base pans shall have a raised 1 1 /8 inch high lip around the supply and return openings for water integrity. J. Insulation: Provide 1/2 inch thick coated fiberglass insulation on all exterior panels in contact with the return and conditioned air stream. K. Air Filters: Factory installed filters shall mount integral within the units and shall be accessible thru access panels. One inch thick glass fiber disposable media filters shall be provided with the provisions within the unit for 2 inch thick filters to be field provided and installed. L. Fans and Motors: Provide evaporator fan section with forward curved, double width, double _ inlet, centrifugal type fan. Provide self -aligning, grease lubricated, ball or sleeve bearings with permanent lubrication fittings. Provide units 5 tons and below with direct drive, multiple speed, dynamically balanced supply fans. Provide units 6 1/4 tons and above with belt driven, supply fans with adjustable motor sheaves. Outdoor and indoor fan motors shall be permanently lubricated and have internal thermal overload protection. Outdoor fans shall be direct drive, statically and dynamically balanced, draw through in the vertical discharge position. Provide shafts constructed of solid hot rolled steel, ground and polished, with key -way, and protectively coated with lubricating oil. M. Gas Fired Heating Section: Completely assembled and factory installed heating system shall be integral to unit. UL approved specifically for outdoor applications for use downstream from refrigerant cooling coils. Threaded connection with plug or cap provided. Provide capability for gas piping connection through side of unit. N. Heating section shall be factory run tested prior to shipment. O. Gas burner shall be forced combustion type power burner, negative pressure gas valve, manual shut-off, hot surface ignition, and flame sensing safety control. P. Gas Burner Safety Controls: Provide safety controls for the proving of combustion air prior to ignition, and continuous flame supervision. Upon a failure to ignite, two attempts of ignition will occur before lockout of the ignition system. 03860296/96 EQUIPMENT 15500-6 , I� LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 1 Q. Combustion blower shall be centrifugal type fan with built-in thermal overload protection on fan motor. R. Heat Exchanger: Provide drum and tube heat exchanger of flee floating design manufactured from 18-gauge aluminized steel. Factory pressure and leak tested. Heat exhanger shall be warrantied for 10 years. S. Limit Controls: High temperature limit controls will shut off gas flow in the event of excessive temperatures resulting from restricted indoor airflow or loss of indoor airflow. T. Evaporator Coil: Provide configured aluminum fin surface mechanically bonded to copper tubing coil. U. Provide an independent expansion device for each refrigeration circuit. Factory pressure test at 450 psig and leak tested at 200 psig. V. Provide drain pan for base of evaporator coil constructed of PVC or galvanized steel with external connections. W. Condenser Section: Provide internally finned 3/8 " seamless copper tube mechanically bonded to aluminum fins. Factory pressure tested to 450 psig. X. Provide vertical discharge, direct drive fans with aluminum blades. Fans shall be statically + balanced. Motors shall be permanently lubricated, with integral thermal overload protection in a weather tight casing. Y. Hail Guard Screen: Entire condenser coil shall be covered with 18 gauge, 1/2" mesh galvanized wire screen. The screen shall be installed on the 24 gauge stand-off clips to allow 1" clearance between coil and screen. Z. Refrigeration System: Provide hermetic reciprocating compressors with heat treated forged steel or cast iron shafts, aluminum alloy connecting rods, automotive type pistons, rings to prevent gas leakage, internal suction and discharge valves, crankcase heater, and centrifugal oil pump. Internally isolated motors on springs. Provide suction gas cooled motor with over temperature and over current protection. Compressors shall be warrantied for 5 years. AA. Provide with thermostatic temperature control in the compressor windings, to protect against excessive temperatures, high and low pressure conditions. BB. Provide each unit with factory supplied and piped liquid line filter drier, suction and liquid line Schraeder valves. CC. Operating Controls: Provide NEC Class H, adjustable zone control to control heating stages in sequence with delay between stages, compressor stages and supply fan to maintain zone temperature setting. 1. Provide automatic changeover control with (off -heat -auto -cool), and fan control switch (auto -on). 2. Provide plexiglass locking thermostat cover. r 03860296/96 EQUIPMENT 15500-7 r LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 -- 3. Locate zone control in room as shown. 2.09 ROOF MOUNTING FRAME A. A 13" high galvanized roof mounting frame supplied by the unit manufacturer shall be furnished and installed for the unit. B. This frame shall include a 2"x4" nailer secured to the sides to facilitate flashing. C. This frame shall exactly fit the unit and shall be approved by the National Roofing Contractors Association. D. This frame shall be set level and squared according to the manufacturers instructions and secured to the building as detailed on the plans. E. All connections to the unit shall be made from bottom within the confines of the frame. 2.10 FRESH AIR VENTILATOR A. Fresh air ventilator shall be equal to Semco standard FV Series Energy Recovery units for indoor air preconditioner. B. Casing: Standard panels shall be 20 gauge galvanized solid exterior skins, lined with 1/2 inch thick synthetic rubber insulation. The exterior of the unit shall be coated with a two part epoxy painting system for corrosion protection. C. Access: Access to components shall be provided through a large, tightly sealed and easily removable access panel. Access panels shall be constructed of the same materials as the unit casing and use Semco's standard hardware. The wheel cassette shall be easily removable from the unit. The bottom of the unit shall also be removable for access. D. Total Energy Wheel: The media shall be a fluted, honeycomb design to provide for laminar flow, to prevent the leakage of the exhaust air to the supply air through the media, and to -' allow for the use of a purge section to minimize contaminant carry-over. The rotor media shall be made of aluminum which is coated with a non -migrating, 3 angstroms molecular sieve desiccant, specifically developed for the selective transfer of water vapor. Verification in writing shall be presented from the desiccant manufacturer confirming that the internal pore diameter distribution inherent in the desiccant being provided limits adsorption to materials having a kinetic diameter of 3 angstroms or less (water molecule is 2.8 angstroms). All media surfaces shall be coated with a non -migrating solid absorbent layer prior to being formed into the honeycomb media structure to insure that all surfaces are coated and that adequate latent capacity is provided. Desiccant coatings that are sprayed on or dip coated, or _ desiccants that must be reapplied over time are not acceptable. Equal sensible and latent recovery efficiencies shall be provided, and clearly documented through a certification program conducted in accordance with ASHRAE 84 and ARI 1060 standards. The media shall be cleanable with low temperature steam, hot water or light detergent, without degrading the latent recovery. 03860296/96 EQUIPMENT 15500-8 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 E. Wheel media shall be independently tested to document a flame spread of less than 25 and a smoke generation rating of less than 50 when tested in accordance with AST M-84. This independent wheel test data shall be provided as part of the submittal. F. Rotor Housing: The rotor housing shall be a structural framework which limits the deflection of the rotor due to air pressure. The housing shall be made of galvanizer) steel to prevent corrosion. The rotor cassette shall be easily removable from the Energy Recovery Unit to facilitate rigging (if necessary) and ease of service. The wheel cassette design shall use flange bearings for long life. The casing design shall also incorporate a purge to limit contaminant carry-over. r- j G. Fans: Fan ratings are based on tests made in accordance with AMCA Standard 210. Fans shall be DWDI, designed with a scroll type housing. Fan blades shall be statically and 1-- dynamically balanced and tested prior to shipment. H. Fans shall be driven by multiple speed direct drive motors located at the fan inlet or by fixed speed motors using belts and sheaves. ` I. Filters: The filter media shall be an average efficiency of 25-30% based upon the ASHRAE �,. Test Standard. The filter shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories as Class 2. J. Electrical: Unit shall require a single point power connection with a voltage as listed on the schedule. The electrical panel shall include the necessary components and contactors to start and stop the system from a remote location. 2.11 VEHICLE EXHAUST EXTRACTION SYSTEM EQUIPMENT 1 A. Scope of System Operation: The vehicle exhaust removal system shall source capture 100% of the exhaust emissions directly at the tail pipe of the vehicle and exhaust those emissions to " a specified area safely outside the building. When the vehicle returns to the station, simply • sleeve the nozzle over the tail pipe, pull up on the hose handle, and connect the electromagnet assembly to the anchor plate mounted to the vehicle. The nozzle remains in place over the �^ tail pipe by spring tension created between the dimensional relationship from the tail pipe to '• the anchor plate. Upon vehicle exit, the electromagnet and anchor plate connection serves as the lead pulling component for the hose and nozzle which moves with the vehicle in either .-� direction of travel, forward or reverse. As the tail pipe passes the exit threshold, the electromagnet is automatically de -energized by a limit switch that contacts a disconnection plate allowing the nozzle and hose to smoothly separate from the vehicle. After release, the balancer safely retracts the hose assembly in a stored position ready to receive the vehicle for connection to the exhaust extraction system upon reentry. No positive locking device nor moving parts shall be permitted to be connected to the tail pipe. Bending over to connect the exhaust system and expose the operator to harmful exhaust fumes is not permitted. Upon r , disconnection, the hose assembly shall not be permitted to swing wide, possibly endangering personnel, and the hose shall remain at the door ready for connection. rB. Fan Auto -Start: As the emergency apparatus approaches the facility, the Fan Auto -Start + . system automatically starts the exhaust fan, thus the fan is at full rpm prior to entry or connection. This is accomplished by an FCC approved radio transmitter mounted in the 03860296/96 EQUIPMENT 15500-9 t^ i E LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 _. vehicle sending a signal to a receiver to start the fan. This permits the operator to connect the exhaust system to the vehicle without being exposed to noxious exhaust fumes. The fan remains in the "on" position for the duration that the vehicle is running. The fan does not shut down until after the vehicle has been turned off and can be preset from 45 seconds - 10 minutes with an adjustable timer. Upon emergency dispatch of the vehicle, the exhaust fan shall automatically start prior to the engine being energized. The fan will automatically shut down after the apparatus has left the building and the timer engages. The control console shall be a NEMA-1 enclosure with a dual safety lock cover. Internal components are UL approved; manufactured by General Electric. C. Optional Fan Activation: The exhaust fan shall be operated in conjunction with an automatic off delay timer, 0-10 minute variable setting, wired to the open relay of the door opener or a central tone system. This allows for automatic operation of the exhaust fan when opening the vehicle exit or entry door. alternatively, the fan-shall,also have the capability to be operated from a 0-20 minute manual override timer to be located in the vehicle bay area at a convenient access location. D. Guide Track: The horizontal guide track supports and stores the overhead hose and is mounted overhead and to the side of the vehicle. Mounted to the horizontal guide track is a 6" diameter flexible hose with individual inner trolleys which ride inside the guide track and permit the flexible hose to expand and contract while the vehicle is moving. The horizontal guide track shall be made of 12 gauge low carbon strip steel, cold formed into a channel measuring 1.5625" square, with one side having a continuous open slot measuring 0.4375" wide, giving an overall throat depth of 1.5". Guide tracks shall be provided such that no incremental length shall be greater than 20 feet without a 4 bolt flange -to -flange connection arrangement for field assembly to the length as shown or indicated on the drawings. Guide tracks shall have a non -toxic alkyd enamel rust preventive finish. Guide tracks shall be supported by structural vertical supports, i.e. schedule 170 unistrut and/or 1/4" angle iron, connected to the ceiling/wall of the facility. E. Guide Track Clamping Brackets: Each horizontal guide track shall be provided with an adjustable self aligning clamping bracket to support and connect the guide track to the installation brackets. Clamping brackets shall be of 0.1875" electro-plated galvanized steel bar and formed in a configuration which wraps tightly around and is bolted to the guide track. clamping brackets shall be 1.625 wide x 4.125" high, and assembled to the guide track at a distance no greater than 9'6" on center. F. Horizontal Extraction Hose: The horizontal extraction hose is suspended from the horizontal guide track which stores the hose up and out of the way to ensure a safer approach to the apparatus during a run. The horizontal extraction hose shall be 6" in diameter and of suitable flexibility and length to prevent premature wear on the hose material from being fully stretched on a regular basis. Therefore, the hose must be able to withstand 100,000 runs without tearing, perforating or collapsing (under normal use with proper installation and care). The material for the hose shall be Trevira fabric covered with HYPALON (CSM, Chloro-sulfonated polythylene). The hose shall be fire resistant according to DIN 4102 B1. The hose shall be capable of withstanding temperatures of 340 degrees Fahrenheit continuously, and up to 370 degrees Fahrenheit on an intermittent usage basis. The helix shall be external and made of galvanized steel or aluminum. The helix shall have high 03860296/96 EQUIPMENT 15500-10 flexibility and be able to withstand oil, chemical, ozone, and weather resistance. The hose compression ratio shall not be less than 6:1. The helix shall be arranged to have eyelets clamped and pressed approximately every 12". The eyelets are to be used for suspending the hose from individual nylon trolleys, maintenance free, which will be inserted in the horizontal guide track upon assembly at the job site. Hose trolleys shall have an overall diameter and width to allow a tolerance of no greater than 0.046" clearance between cylinder ends and inner wall of the guide track. Once installed in the guide track, the clearance between the top of the horizontal hose and the bottom of the guide track shall 5 2" at any given point, whether the hose is extended or compressed. This concept shall prevent any continuous hanging or drooping loops of hose which could obstruct or hinder movement of people or vehicles in the work place. At the end of the flexible hose shall be a minimum 6-1/4" diameter round galvanized steel connector as a coupler for flexible to solid duct work. The connector shall be arranged to fasten to the end of the guide track and be adjustable upon assembly for alignment to solid duct work. G. Upper Vertical Extraction Hose: The upper vertical extraction hose shall be 6" in diameter, and of suitable flexibility to have a compression ratio of 6:1. The hose material shall be Trevira fabric covered with HYPALON (CSM, Chloro-sulfonated polyethylene). The hose shall be fire resistant according to DIN 4102 B1. The hose shall be capable of withstanding temperatures of 340 degrees Fahrenheit continuously and up to 370 degrees Fahrenheit on an intermittent usage basis. The external helix shall be made of galvanized steel or aluminum, €, not exposed to the internal air stream, to maintain a smooth bore interior hose for minimum static pressure losses and maximum efficiency. The helix shall have high flexibility and be able to withstand oil, chemical, ozone and weather resistance. H. Balancer: The balancer shall be provided to add or release tension to the vertical hose and nozzle assembly away from the vehicle as it leaves the building, when the electromagnet disengages. The balancer also permits the vertical hose and nozzle assembly to be suspended safely off the floor in the storage position when not in use. The balancer shall be of a cone shape drum design with centrifugal brake and reverse spring characteristics, mounted on a 12 gauge steel formed bracket. The balancer is to be equipped with 27 feet of cord which shall feed from the balancer cone, penetrate a steel elbow (which joins the horizontal and vertical hoses) and is fastened internally at the electromagnet coupler, so the cord is internal to the upper vertical extraction hose. The centrifugal brake shall ensure that the cord is wound onto the drum at a low speed. The reverse spring characteristic shall have the full spring power to the balancer when the cord is wound onto the drum. The spring power shall be gradually and continually reduced the farther the cord is pulled (unwound) off the balancer cone. At 26.4' of cord extension, lifting power shall be 27 ft. lbs. of torque. The withdrawal shall be 50% greater than the lifting power. The cone shaped drum and cord assembly shall be exposed for ease of adjustment to tension if required. Mounted to the Balancer formed bracket shall be 6" x 90°, 1.5 radius, 24 gauge coated steel elbow which is to join the horizontal extraction hose to the vertical extraction hose with 6" to 5" reducer hose clamps and covers as provided. Attached to the backside of the balancer formed bracket is an all steel trolley which inserts into the horizontal guide track upon field assembly. The trolley framework shall be welded and be constructed of 25" hardened steel and fitted with no less than six steel ball bearing rollers which freely roll in the guide track. 03860296/96 EQUIPMENT 15500-11 f` LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 — I. Microswitch: Mounted to the balancer formed bracket shall be a 24V microswitch which, _ acting as a limit switch, is factory pre -wired to energize and de -energize the electromagnet upon contact with a disconnection plate positioned on the horizontal guide track. J. Disconnected Plate: Affixed to the end of the guide track nearest the exit door, shall be a galvanized steel disconnection plate. The disconnection plate shall serve as the contact point for the microswitch which, upon contact with the disconnection plate, shall de -energize the electromagnet to separate the hose assembly from the vehicle. The separation of the entire hose assembly from the vehicle is a one step process whereby no stress or strain is transferred from the vehicle to the exhaust equipment. Numerous mechanical functions to achieve nozzle separation such as valve activation, pneumatic deflation, and pulling forces to remove the nozzle from the tail pipe are not permitted. The disconnection plate shall be an adjustable bolted attachment and shall be positioned upon installation to create a nozzle release point between 1' to 2' inside the door threshold as the vehicle exits the building. — K. End Stop: The guide track shall be equipped with an end stop which is designed to stop the travel of the entire hose and nozzle assembly. The stopping action itself must be spring _ cushioned to prevent the hose and nozzle assembly from coming to an abrupt and immediate halt. A coiled spring end stop is inserted internally at the end of the guide track nearest to the exit door. The spring must be safety bolted in place at the opposite end of the contact _ point of the balancer trolley. L. Electromagnet Assembly: An electromagnet assembly shall be used as the means of keeping the nozzle and hose assembly attached to the vehicle, whether at rest or as it moves to the point of exit. The electromagnet shall be 24V, DC with power supplied via an insulated conductor encapsulated within the helix of the upper hose. The electromagnet assembly shall consist of an electromagnet disc, an manual override switch, and an anchor plate. The electromagnet disc assembly shall consist of a 2.75" diameter by 1.5625" wide cup which is externally mounted to the side of a 6" diameter galvanized steel sleeve. The steel sleeve shall serve as both the mounting point of the electromagnet as well as the coupler of the upper vertical hose and lower hose assembly with nozzle. The steel sleeve shall be 5" in diameter, 24 gauge galvanized steel and have a rolled bead at each end to secure the hoses via hose clamps. The electromagnet disc assembly shall be slightly recessed within a hard resilient plastic cup, measuring 2.75" in diameter by 1.5625" deep by 0.0625" thick. The plastic cup also serves as a guide for ease of connection to the anchor plate mounted on the vehicle. The disc consists of an outer 0.125" thick metal ring encased in bakalyte which in turn surrounds — a 1.25" diameter solid metal disc. These metal components shall serve as the energized contact points to the anchor plate on the vehicle. The entire width of the cup assembly shall be protected by a 0.0625" thick molded rubber collar, formed to be of a diameter greater than 3.25", creating an anti -scratching cover. The formed collar shall also be of a smooth and rounded configuration to prevent hooking or catching on external devices of the vehicle. M. Manual Override Switch: A manual override switch shall be easily accessible to disconnect the hose assembly while washing the vehicle or accessing storage compartments. The manual override switch shall be mounted externally, located 90° to the right side of the electromagnet disc assembly and facing the operator. The purpose of the switch shall be to manually de - energize the electromagnet, allowing the hose and nozzle assembly to come away unrestrained from the vehicle when in the parked position within the building. The switch shall be a 03860296/96 EQUIPMENT 15500-12 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO, 4 900-9268 f normally closed, single pole, single throw (NC-SPST), spring loaded, momentary ON with a black matte rocking actuator. The switch shall be UL Recognized, CSA Approved and rated for 6A, 250VAC. The switch shall be surrounded and mounted in a closed cell neoprene jacket, 1.25" wide. The jacket is epoxy coated to the outside of the collar and wraps 90 rdegrees to the electromagnet, but protrudes no greater than 0.875" externally off the side wall. Power is fed to the switches as an integral function of the vertical hose, which in turn feeds the electromagnet. N. Anchor Plate: The anchor plate shall be mounted on the vehicle to allow the operator, in an upright position, to connect the electromagnet. The anchor plate shall have an outer circular holder made of hard resilient plastic, which measures 4.365" in diameter and has an outer rim thickness of 0.625". The inside diameter of the rim shall be 3.3125" which allows adequate clearance for operator ease of connection to the electromagnet. Recessed in the center of the holder shall be a finished steel disc measuring 2.4375" in diameter and 0.21875" thick, and held in place with a set screw. The backside of the circular holder shall be flat, smooth, and with no protrusions. There shall also be two pass through holes on the backside for field installation of the anchor plate to the vehicle. The backside of the metal plate shall have two tapped holes for receiving two machine screws upon field assembly to the vehicle. The anchor plate shall be positioned on the vehicle in relation to the vertical and horizontal centerlines of the tail pipe outlet. The horizontal distance shall be ± 3" beyond the vertical centerline toward the front of the vehicle. The vertical range shall be 24" (+4" - 1 ") from the horizontal centerline. Deviations to the location of the anchor plate beyond the dimensional parameters previously described are to be approved solely by an authorized representative of the manufacturer of the exhaust removal system. O. Lower Vertical Hose: The lower vertical hose shall be 6" in diameter and be formed to easily connect the nozzle to the tail pipe. The hose diameter shall exceed the tail pipe diameter to ensure source capture of 100 % of all exhaust fume volume emissions. The typical engine and truck pipe diameter is 5". A 4" diameter hose, which is smaller than the exhaust discharge point, shall not be permitted as it does not have the volume capacity to handle all fumes emitted. The hose material shall be Trevira fabric covered with GYPALON (CSM, Chloro- sulfonated polyethylene). The hose shall be fire resistant according to DIN 4102 B 1. The r- hose shall be capable of withstanding temperatures of 340 degrees Fahrenheit continuously, and up to 370 degrees Fahrenheit on an intermittent usage basis. The entire hose assembly shall be capable of handling pump/load tests as required on a daily basis. The nozzle permits an ambient air mix in the air stream to immediately reduce exhaust emission temperatures by rat least 50% at the point of capture. The reduced air stream temperatures prolong component life by not permitting thermal breakdown of materials. The galvanized steel helix shall be completely rubber encapsulated. P. Nozzle: The flexibility between the electromagnet collar assembly and the nozzle shall be such that the operator never has to touch the nozzle for connection, but can maneuver the r nozzle to the tail pipe while the operator grips the hose handle. As the operator simultaneously positions the electromagnet to the anchor plate, tension will be automatically applied to the nozzle face, created by an internal leaf spring assembly, which will hold the nozzle face firmly in place over the tail pipe. The positioning of the electromagnet on the vehicle, combined with the tension created at the nozzle, shall not allow the nozzle to come away from the tail pipe until the electromagnet is either automatically or manually de- A 1 03860296/96 EQUIPMENT 15500-13 r- LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 — energized. Manually detaching the electromagnet from the anchor plate, while still energized, shall not be allowed. The nozzle shall be constructed of both metal and rubber, with no internal movable parts related to the connection of the nozzle to the tail pipe. The inlet diameter at the nozzle is oversized to allow maximum airflow capacity for large engines _ and/or pump tests. The nozzle permits ambient air into the heated air stream when the vehicle is running and immediately reduces the exhaust temperature and eliminates thermal breakdown of materials. The inlet boot of the nozzle is to be made of EPDM rubber, and bonded to a sturdy 24 gauge steel conical reducer. When at rest and away from the vehicle, the nozzle and the lower hose shall constantly maintain a form which causes the inlet plane of the nozzle to be facing upward from the floor, on an approximate 30° angle. The purpose of this configuration shall be to allow the operator a clear visual perspective of the nozzle inlet as it is being mounted the tail pipe upon vehicle connection. This upward configuration of the nozzle shall be accomplished by means of an internally fixed specially formed leaf spring affixed to the conical reducer. The design of the nozzle shall allow for maximum flexibility to accept a variety of tailpipe configurations. Tail pipe extensions may be required to bring the pipe to the side of the chassis. Tail pipe adapters or mechanical pipe modifications are not permitted. For the nozzle assembly, no positive locking devices or a concept of a positive — locking device, pneumatics, internal or external air hoses, wires, airbags, valves or precautionary devices for pneumatic bursting pressure shall be permitted or allowed. Q. Installation: The exhaust removal system shall be installed as indicated and recommended by the manufacturer. Welding and brazing shall conform to ASME-17. Slip joints shall be sealed. Riser duct shall be supported to the structure as indicated on the drawings. Main — duct shall be attached to building structural members. R. Exhaust System Suspension: Installation height of guide track shall be between 10' to 16' range or as otherwise indicated on the drawings. The guide track shall be installed approximately 14" from the side of the vehicle and > 12" away from the side edge of the exit door. The guide track for the exhaust system shall include corrosion resistant brackets for ease of mounting to structural channel, trusses, or angle iron. Brackets shall be a minimum of 0.125" thickness. Mounting bolts to be no less than 0.375" diameter (structural grade 8) for connection to steel frame. Bolts required for masonry installation shall be 0.5" x 3.5" expansion bolts, or 0.375" x 4" sleeve anchors for wall mount masonry connection. -' S. Testing: Each exhaust system and inlet shall be balanced to produce the indicated air quantities within 10 percent at the conditions shown. Control devices shall be set to control at the points indicated or directed. Any fans with bearings shall be lubricated, and the speed, direction and rotation of each fan shall be checked and verified as running correctly. The running current of each motor shall be checked and verified as correct. Upon completion and prior acceptance of the installation, the exhaust system shall be tested at the operating conditions to demonstrate satisfactory functional and operating efficiency. Operating tests shall cover a period of not less then 2 hours for each system, and all tests will, if requested, _ be conducted in the presence of the owner. If tests do not demonstrate satisfactory operation of the exhaust system, deficiencies shall be corrected and tested. All instruments, facilities, and labor required to properly conduct the tests shall be provided by the Contractor. T. Training: The Contractor, or authorized approved personnel, shall provide training to the Owner (or appointed representatives of the Owner) in the daily use of and maintenance of the 03860296/96 EQUIPMENT 15500-14 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.4 900-9268 vehicle exhaust removal system installed and specified herein. The Owner shall be notified at least 7 days prior to the date scheduled for the training course. 03860296/96 END OF SECTION EQUIPMENT 15500-15 F FLUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 SECTION 15600 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 NOTE A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.02 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the testing, balancing and adjusting of various systems and portions thereof to produce proper flows of air, correct setting of regulation devices, and other end results as more fully described hereinafter. B. Upon completion of the installation and start up of the mechanical equipment, check, adjust, and balance systemic components to obtain optimum conditions in each conditioned space to the building. C. Prepare and submit to the Architect complete reports on the balance and operation of the system. D. Make a total of three inspections within 90 days after occupancy of the building to insure that satisfactory conditions are being maintained throughout and to satisfy any unusual conditions. E. Make inspections in the building during the opposite season from that in which the initial adjustments were made and at those times make any necessary modifications to the initial adjustments required to produce optimum operation of the systemic components, to produce l the proper conditions in each conditioned space. F. During the balancing, the temperature regulation shall be adjusted for proper relationship between controlling instruments and calibrated by the Contractor. The correctness of the final setting shall be proved by taking hourly readings for a period of 4 successive eight hour days in a typical room on each separately controlled zone. The total variation shall not exceed two degrees from the preset median temperature during the entire temperature survey period. G. In all fan systems, the air quantities shown on the plans shall be varied as required to secure a maximum temperature variation of 2 degrees within each separately controlled zone, but the total air quantity indicated for each zone must be obtained. It shall be the obligation of the Contractor to furnish or revise fan drives and/or motors if necessary, without cost to the Owner, to attain the specified air volumes. 03860296/96 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 15600-1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 — H. Before final acceptance is made, furnish the following data: _ 1. A tabulation of the simultaneous temperature of all spaces on each separately controlled zone, together with the outside temperature at time of measurement. 2. A listing of the measured air quantities at each outlet corresponding to the temperature _ tabulation specified above. 3. Air quantities at each air handling device. 4. Static pressure readings entering and leaving each supply, and exhaust fan, and other components of the system. These readings shall be related to fan curves in terms of CFM handled. 5. Motor current readings at each fan and pump. The voltages at the time of the reading shall be listed. 1. The above data shall be neatly entered on appropriate forms together with any typed supplements required to completely document all results. Written explanations of any -- abnormal conditions shall be included. All'this shall be assembled into a suitable brochure and a total of 4 copies shall be provided. J. When opposite season modifications are made, additional data sheets indicating new settings, readings, etc., shall be prepared and submitted in quadruplicate. 1.03 INSTRUCTIONS A. During the test periods instruct the building operating personnel in the operation and _ maintenance of all equipment. B. Deliver to the Owner 3 complete instruction manuals covering the maintenance and operation of the system components. Provide complete data on all equipment, including for each item a parts list, and the name and address of the vendor where replacement parts can be purchased. END OF SECTION 03860296/96 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 15600-2 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 SECTION 16000 - GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS 900-9268 A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to the work of this Section. 1.02 ELECTRICAL LINES A. General: In general, the electrical lines to be installed under these specifications shall be run as indicated, as specified herein, as required by particular conditions at the site, and as required to conform to the generally accepted standards as to complete the work in a neat and �., satisfactorily workable manner. The following is a general outline concerning the running of electrical lines and is to be excepted where the drawings or conditions at the building necessitate deviating from these standards. I B. General Construction: The Contractor shall thoroughly acquaint himself with the details of the construction and finishes before submitting his bid as no allowances will be made because of the Contractor's unfamiliarity with these details. Place all inserts in masonry walls while they are under construction. All concealed lines shall be installed as required by the pace of the general construction to precede that general construction. C. Field Conditions: The electrical plans do not give exact details as to elevations of electrical lines, exact locations, etc., and do not show all the offsets, and other installation details. The Contractor shall carefully lay out his work at the site to conform to the architectural and structural conditions, to avoid all obstruction, to conform to details of installation supplied by the manufacturers of the equipment to be installed, and thereby to provide an integrated, satisfactorily operating installation. D. Locations of Electrical Devices: The electrical plans show diagrammatically the locations of the various electrical outlets and apparatus and the method of circuiting and controlling them. Exact locations of these outlets and apparatus shall be determined by reference to the general plans and to all detail drawings, equipment drawings, roughing -in drawings, etc., by measurements at the building, and in cooperation with other sections, and in all cases shall be subject to the approval of the Architect. The Architect reserves the right to make any reasonable change in location of any outlet or apparatus before installation (within 10 feet of location shown on drawings) or after installation if an obvious conflict exists, without additional cost to the Owner. E. Space Requirements: The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper fitting of his material and apparatus into the space. Should the particular equipment which any bidder proposes to install require other space conditions than those indicated on the drawings, he shall arrange for such space with the Architect before submitting his bid. Should changes become necessary 03860296/96 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL 16000-1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 — on account of failure to comply with this clause, the Contractor shall make such necessary changes at his (the Contractor's) own expense. F. Working Drawings: The Contractor shall submit working scale drawings of all his apparatus _ and equipment which in any way varies from these specifications and plans, which shall be checked by the Architect before the work is started, and interferences with the structural conditions shall be corrected by the Contractor before the work proceeds. G. Order of Precedence: Order of precedence shall be observed in laying out the conduit in order to fit the material into the space above the ceiling and in the chases and walls. The installation shall be coordinated with the work of all other trades. The following order shall ` govern: 1. Items affecting the visual appearance of the inside of the building such as lighting fixtures, outlets, panelboards, etc.Coordinate all items to avoid conflicts at the site. -- 2. Lines requiring grade to function such as sewers. 3. Large ducts and pipes with critical clearances. 4. Conduit, water lines, and other lines whose routing is not critical and whose function would not be impaired by bends and offsets. H. Equipment Connections: Conduits serving outlets on items of equipment shall be run in the _ most appropriate manner. Where the equipment has built-in chases, the lines shall be contained therein. Where the equipment is of the open type, the lines shall be run as close as possible to the underside of the top and in a neat and inconspicuous manner. I. Exceptions and Inconsistencies: Exceptions and inconsistencies in plans and specifications shall be brought to the Architect's attention before the contract is signed. Otherwise, the _ Contractor shall be responsible for any and all changes and additions that may be necessary to accommodate his particular apparatus, material, or equipment. J. Intent of Drawings and Specifications: The Contractor shall distinctly understand that the work described herein and shown on the accompanying drawings shall result in a finished and working job, and any item required to accomplish this intent shall be included whether specifically mentioned or not. K. Examination of Drawings and Specifications: Each bidder shall examine the rawings and Specifications for the General Construction. If these documents show any item re. uiring work —' under Division 16 and that work is not indicated on the respective Electrical drawings, he shall notify the Architect in sufficient time to clarify before bidding. If no notification is received, the Contractor is assumed to require no clarification, and shall install the work as indicated on the General Plans in accordance with the specifications. 1.03 DIMENSIONS A. General: Before ordering any material or doing any work, the Contractor shall verify all dimensions, including elevations, and shall be responsible for the correctness of the same. No extra charge or compensation will be allowed on account of differences between actual dimensions and measurements indicated on the drawings. Any difference which may be found shall be submitted to the Architect for consideration before proceeding with the work. _ 03860296/96 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL 16000-2 F t FLUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 1.04 INSPECTION OF SITE `11 ` ." A. General: The accompanying plans do not indicate completely the existing electrical installations. The bidders for the work under these sections of the specifications shall inspect the existing installations and thoroughly acquaint themselves with conditions to be met and the work to be accomplished in removing and modifying the existing work, and in installing the new work in the present building and underground serving to and from that structure. Failure to comply with this shall not constitute grounds for any additional payments in connection with removing or modifying any part of the existing installations and/or installing any new work. 1.05 ELECTRICAL WIRING A. Description: All electric wiring of every character, both for power supply, for pilot and control, for temperature control, for communications, etc. will be done under Division 16 of these specifications. Every electrical current consuming device furnished as a part of this project, or furnished by the Owner and installed in this project, shall be completely wired up under Division 16. Verification of exact location, method of connection, number and size of wires required, voltage requirements, and phase requirements is the responsibility of the Contractor under Division 16. If conflicts occur between the drawings and the actual requirements, actual requirements shall govern. 1.06 PROGRESS OF WORK A. General: The Contractor shall keep himself fully informed as to the progress of the work and do his work at the proper time without waiting for notification from the Architect or Owner. 1.07 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS A. General: All manufactured articles shall be applied, installed and handled as recommended by the manufacturer. 1.08 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP A. Materials: All materials shall be new unless otherwise specified and of the quality specified. r-- Materials shall be free from defects and undamaged. All materials of a type for which the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. have established a standard shall be listed by the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and shall bear their label. r B. Samples: The Architect reserves the right to call for samples of any item of material offered in substitution, together with a sample of the specified material, when, in the Architect's opinion, the quality of the material and/or the appearance is involved and it is deemed that an evaluation of the two materials may be better made by visual inspection. This shall be limited to lighting fixtures, wiring devices, and similar items and shall not be applicable to major manufacturers' items of equipment. 03860296/96 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 _ C. Transportation: The Contractor shall be responsible for transportation of his materials to and _ on the job, and shall be responsible for the storage and protection of these materials and work until the final acceptance of the job. D. Appurtenances: The Contractor shall furnish all necessary scaffolding, tackle, tools and appurtenances of all kinds, and all labor required for the safe and expeditious execution of his contract. E. Workmanship: The workmanship shall in all respects be of the highest grade and all construction shall be done according to the best practice of the trade. 1.09 PROTECTION OF APPARATUS A. General: The Contractor shall at all times take such precautions as may be _ necessary to properly protect his new apparatus from damage. This shall include the erection of all required temporary shelters to adequately protect any apparatus stored in the open on the site, the cribbing of any apparatus above the floor of the construction, and the covering of -- apparatus in the uncompleted building with tarpaulins or other protective covering. Failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with the above to the entire satisfaction of the Architect will be sufficient cause for the rejection of the pieces of apparatus in question. _ 1.10 PERMITS, FEE, ETC. A. General: The Contractor under each section of these specifications shall arrange for a permit from the local authority. The Contractor shall arrange for all utility services, including electric services. If any charges are made by any of the utility companies due to the work on this project, the Contractor shall pay these charges, including charges for metering, connection, street cutting, etc. The Contractor shall pay for any inspection fees or other fees and charges required by ordinance, law, codes and these specifications. 1.11 TESTING A. General: The Contractor under each division shall at his own expense perform the various tests as specified and required by the Architect and as required by the State and local authorities. The Contractor shall furnish all fuel and materials necessary for making tests. 1.12 LAWS, CODES AND ORDINANCES A. General: All work shall be executed in strict accordance with all local, state and national .- codes, ordinances and regulations governing the particular class of work involved, as interpreted by the inspecting authority. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final execution of the work under this heading to suit those requirements. Where these specifications and the accompanying drawings conflict with these requirements, the Contractor shall report the matter to the Architect, shall prepare any supplemental drawings required illustrating how the work may be installed so as to comply and, on approval, make the changes at no cost to the Owner. On completion of the various portions of the work the installation shall be tested by the constituted authorities, approved and, on completion of the work, the Contractor shall obtain and deliver to the Owner a final certificate of acceptance. 03860296/96 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL 16000.4 r LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 i 1.13 TERMINOLOGY A. "Furnish, Provide, Install": Whenever the words "furnish", "provide", "furnish and install," "provide and install', and/or similar phrases occur, it is the intent that the materials and equipment described be furnished, installed and connected under this Division of the r Specifications, complete for operation unless specifically noted to the contrary. E B. Materials: Where a material is described in detail, listed by catalogue number or otherwise called for, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to furnish and install the material. C. "Shall": The use of the word "shall" conveys a mandatory condition to the contract. D. "Section": "This section" always refers to the section in which the statement occurs. E. "Project": "The project" includes all work in progress during the construction period. F. Multiple Items: In describing the various items of equipment, in general, each item will be described singularly, even though there may be a multiplicity of identical or similar items. 1.14 COOPERATION A. General: The contractor for the work under each section of these specifications shall r" coordinate his work with the work described in all other sections of the specifications to the t end that, as a whole, the job shall be a finished one of its kind, and shall carry on his work in such a manner that none of the work under any section of these specifications shall be r' handicapped, hindered or delayed at any time. 1.15 COORDINATION OF TRADES A. General: The Contractor shall be responsible for resolving all coordination required between trades. For example, items furnished under Division 15 which require electrical connections shall be coordinated with Division 16 for: 1. Voltage 2. Phase 3. Ampacity 4. No. and size of wires 5. Wiring diagrams 6. Starter size, details and location 7. Control devices and details B. Ceiling Mounted Items: Items installed in/on finished ceilings shall be coordinated with the ceiling construction. The Contractor under each section shall conform to the reflected ceiling plan and shall secure details and/or samples of the ceiling materials as necessary to insure compatibility. Any device not conforming to this requirement shall be replaced by the (� Contractor at his expense. I' 03860296/96 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL 16000-5 r- LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 C. Electrical Items: All items specified under Divisions 16 shall be installed tight, plumb, level, square and symmetrically placed in relation to the work of other trades. 1.16 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. General: The Contractor for work specified under each section shall perform all structural and general construction modifications and cut all openings through either roof, walls, floors or ceilings required to install all work specified under that section or to repair any defects that appear up to the expiration of the guarantee. All of this cutting shall be done under the supervision of the Architect and the Contractor shall exercise due diligence to avoid cutting openings larger than required or in wrong locations. B. Structural Members: No cutting shall be done to any of the structural members that would tend to lessen their strength, unless specific permission is granted by the Architect to do such cutting. C. Patching: The Contractor for work under each section shall be responsible for the patching of all openings cut to install the work covered by that section and to repair the damage resulting from the failure of any part of the work installed hereunder. D. Coordination: Before bidding, the Contractor shall review and coordinate the cutting and patching required with all trades. E. Existing Surfaces: In all spaces where new work under Division 16 is installed and no other alteration or refinishing work is shown or called for, existing floors, walls and ceilings shall be restored to match existing conditions. All cutting and patching shall be done by workmen skilled in the affected trade. F. Masonry Walls: Where openings are cut through masonry walls, the Contractor under each respective section shall provide and install lintels or other structural supports to protect the remaining masonry and adequate support shall be provided during the cutting operation to prevent any damage to the masonry occasioned by the operation. All structural members, supports, etc. shall be of the size, shape, and installed as directed by the Architect. 1.17 PAINTING A. Painting for Division 16 shall be as follows: 1. If the factory finish on any apparatus or equipment is marred, it shall be touched up and then given one coat of half -flat -half -enamel, followed by a coat of machinery enamel of a color to match the original. Paint factory primed surfaces. 2. Paint all exposed conduit, boxes, cabinets, hangers and supports, and miscellaneous metal. 3. Generally, painting is required on all surfaces such that no exposed bare metal is visible. 03860296/96 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL 16000-6 r LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 _ 900-9268 l l 1.18 LARGE APPARATUS A. General: Any large piece of apparatus which is to be installed in any space in the building, I and which is too large to permit access through windows, doorways or shafts, shall be brought 1 to the job by the Contractor involved and placed in the space before the enclosing structure is completed. 1.19 INSTALLATION DRAWINGS A. General: It shall be incumbent upon the Contractor to prepare special drawings as called for elsewhere herein or as directed by the Architect to coordinate the work under each section, to illustrate changes in his work, to facilitate its concealment in finished spaces to avoid obstructions or to illustrate the adaptability of any item of equipment which he proposes to use. 'These drawings shall be used in the field for the actual installation of the work. Unless otherwise directed, they shall not be submitted for approval but three copies shall be provided r., to the Architect for his information. F 1.20 ROUGH -IN AND MAKE FINAL CONNECTION FOR EQUIPMENT A. General: The shop drawings for all equipment are hereby made a part of these specifications. The Contractor under each section of the specifications shall rough -in for the exact item to be furnished on the job, whether in another section of the specifications or by the Owner. The Contractor shall refer to all drawings and other sections of the specifications for the scope of work involved for the new equipment, and by actual site examination determine the scope of the required equipment connections for the Owner furnished equipment. B. Discrepancies: Should any of the equipment furnished require connections of a nature different from that shown on the drawings, report the matter to the Architect and finally connect as directed by the Architect. Minor differences in the equipment furnished and that indicated on the drawings will not constitute ground for additional payment to the Contractor. END OF SECTION 03860296/96 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL r F F LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 SECTION 16110 - RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS 900-9268 A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information on all items specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing. Provide manufacturer's catalog data on all conduit, conduit fittings, raceway, outlet boxes, pull boxes and junction boxes. 1.03 SCOPE A. Description: The work shall include furnishing and installing all electrical raceways, conduit, wireways, pull and junction boxes and outlet boxes, together with all fittings, supporting devices, and other accessories required. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances. B. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Deliver, store, protect, and handle products under provisions of the General Requirements. Accept delivery of conduit, raceway, pull and junction and outlet boxes on site and inspect for damage. Report concealed damage to carrier within their required time period. Protect conduit and raceway from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade protected from the weather. Provide appropriate covering. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify that field measurements are as shown on the Drawings. 03860296/96 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16110-1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 _ B. Routing of Conduit: Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough -in. Conduit routing is shown on the Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. The contractor shall verify all site conditions and shall route as required to complete the _ wiring system. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUITS A. Rigid Steel Conduit: Rigid, threaded, thick -wall; galvanized inside and outside or -' galvanized outside with a protective coating inside; UL listed and labeled according to Standard UL6; conforming to ANSI Standard C80.1; Pittsburg, Republic Steel, Robroy, Allied or approved equivalent. — B. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Steel tubing, galvanized outside and provided with a slick corrosion resistant interior coating; UL listed and labeled according to Standard 797; — conforming to ANSI Standard C80.3; Pittsburg, Republic Steel, Robroy, Allied or approved equivalent. C. Intermediate Metallic Conduit (IMC): Rigid, threaded, thin wall steel; galvanized outside ^ with protective coating inside; UL listed and labeled according to Standard 1242; conforming to ANSI Standard C80.6; Allied, Republic Steel, or approved equivalent. — D. Flexible Metal Conduit: Spirally wound with hot dip galvanized steel strips (commercial Greenfield) or interlocked aluminum construction; conforming to UL Standard UL 1 and UL listed and labeled; Triangle Conduit and Cable Company, or approved equivalent. E. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: Spirally wound with hot dip galvanized steel strips or interlocked aluminum construction as for flexible metal conduit; with polyvinyl chloride cover extruded over the exterior to make conduit liquidtight; UL listed and labeled; Electri- flex type "LA" or approved equivalent. F. PVC Conduit: Type 40 heavy wall, high impact rigid virgin polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit, conforming to NEMA Publications TC2 and TC3 and UL listed for direct burial use; Carlon or approved equivalent. - 2.02 CONDUIT FITTINGS A. Couplings and Terminations for Rigid Steel Conduit: Factory made steel threaded couplings conforming to ANSI/NEMA FBI; bushing at all boxes and cabinets, with locknuts inside and outside box or cabinet. B. Couplings and Terminations for Electrical Metallic Tubing (Compression and Set Screw Couplings): Join lengths of EMT with steel compression type couplings and connectors _ where exposed to the weather or in wet locations. Otherwise use steel, set -screw couplings and connectors. Couplings shall conform to ANSI/NEMA FBI. The connectors shall have insulated throats so as to not damage the insulation during wire pulling operations. 03860296/96 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16110-2 it r LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 l l C. Couplings and Terminations for Intermediate Metal Conduit: Same as for rigid steel conduit. I D. Couplings and Terminations for Flexible Metal Conduit: Conforming to ANSI/NEMA FBI; T & B 440 Series or approved equivalent couplings at connections between flexible and rigid conduit; T & B 3110 or 3130 Series or approved equivalent nylon insulated throat, l steel connectors at box or cabinet terminations. l E. Couplings and Terminations for Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: Conforming to ANSI/NEMA FBI; T & B 5271 Series or approved equivalent adapters at connections between flexible and rigid conduit; T & B 5331 Series or approved equivalent nylon insulated throat, steel connectors at box or cabinet terminations. i F. Couplings and Terminations for PVC Conduit: Type 40 heavy wall, high impact rigid virgin polyvinyl chloride (PVC) fittings, conforming to NEMA Publications TC2 and TC3 and UL listed for direct burial use; Carlon or approved equivalent. PVC couplings and solvent cement by the same manufacturer as the PVC conduit. 2.03 EXPANSION JOINTS IN CONDUIT A. Description: Provide conduit expansion joints with internal ground and external bonding jumper, 0-Z Type AX or approved equivalent. 2.04 WIREWAYS A. Interior Use: UL listed; enamel finished; sizes shown or required; screw covers; complete with all fittings, couplings, hangers and accessories; Square D, General Electric, or approved equivalent. B. Exterior Use: UL listed; enamel finished; sizes shown or required; removable front cover which is gasketed; weatherproof rainhood. 2.05 OUTLET BOXES A. General: Outlet boxes shall be UL listed of sizes and types specified. B. Sheet Steel Boxes: NEMA OS 1, sheet steel not lighter than No. 14 gauge, galvanized after fabrication; Raco, Steel City, Appleton or approved equivalent. C. Cast Metal Boxes: NEMA FBI, cast iron or cast alloy with threaded hubs; Crouse -Hinds, Appleton, Pyle National or approved equivalent. 2.06 PULL BOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Description: Sheet steel, galvanized inside and outside, with galvanized covers. 03860296/96 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16110-3 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 — B. Small Boxes: For boxes where the volume required is not over 100 cubic inches, use standard outlet boxes. C. Larger Boxes: For boxes where the volume required is over 100 cubic inches, use cabinets as specified for panelboards cabinets with covers of the same gauge as cabinets, secured with corrosion resistant bolts or screws. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. General: Examine surfaces to receive raceways, boxes and enclosures for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the raceway system. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. — 3.02 WIRING METHODS A. Description: All wiring of every description shall be run in conduit or electrical metallic tubing unless noted or specified otherwise. Conduits may be run exposed in machinery and electrical rooms and unfinished areas. All other conduits shall be run concealed unless _ otherwise noted. 3.03 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS A. Underground Installations: 1. Type: Schedule 80 PVC conduit. — 2. In or under slab on grade: Schedule 80 PVC conduit. 3. Minimum size: 3/4 inch. B. Outdoor Locations Above Grade: 1. Type: Rigid steel conduit. 2. Minimum size: 1/2 inch. C. In Slab Above Grade: 1. Type: Schedule 80 PVC. 2. Minimum size: 3/4 inch. — D. Wet and Damp Locations: 1. Type: Rigid Steel Conduit. 2. Minimum size: 1/2 inch. E. Dry Locations: 1. Concealed: Electrical metallic tubing. 2. Exposed within 6 feet of finished floor: Rigid steel conduit or intermediate metal conduit. 3. Exposed above 6 feet of finished floor where not subject to mechanical damage: Rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit or electrical metallic tubing. 4. Minimum size: 1/2 inch. 03860296/96 RACEWAYS AND FPITINGS 16110-4 F I LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 l 3.04 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING RACEWAYS l A. Installation: Install conduit in accordance with NECA "Standard Of Installation." Install 1 raceways, boxes and enclosures according to the manufacturer's written instructions. I B. Conduits: All exposed runs shall be installed level and square and at proper elevations, parallel to the surface of the building in a neat and orderly manner. Provide adequate j headroom. C. Bends: Install no more than the equivalent of four 90-degree bends between boxes. Make field bends with approved bending devices. Use hydraulic one-shot bender to fabricate bends in metal conduit larger than 2 inch size. Make bends and offsets so the inside diameter is not reduced. Unless otherwise indicated, keep the legs of a bend in the same plane and the straight legs of offsets parallel. Do not install bends or offsets in which conduit is crushed, deformed or otherwise injured. D. Conduit Bodies: Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction. E. Expansion Joints: Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansions and deflection where conduit crosses control and expansion joints. F. Completion: Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. ► G. Sizes: Size and install raceways so that conductors may be drawn in without injury or excessive strain. Sizes of conduits shown on the drawings are minimum sizes to be installed. I H. Connections: Use lengths of flexible metal conduit, not less than 12 inches long and not r" more than 24 inches long at final connections to all motors, generators, controls and other devices subject to movement because of vibration or mechanical adjustment. In damp or wet locations, and where installed outdoors, use liquidtight flexible metal conduit. r r G I. Connections to Recessed Lighting Fixtures: Use maximum of 6 feet flexible metal conduit at connections to recessed lighting fixtures, and elsewhere as required. Around Heat Producing Equipment: Do not install raceways within twelve inches of steam and hot water pipes, breeching and flues, except where crossings are unavoidable, and then keep raceways at least six inches from insulation on the pipe, breeching or flue crossed. Wherever possible, avoid installing raceways directly above or in close proximity to boilers and other like objects operating at high temperatures. K. Damp or Wet Locations: In damp or wet locations make every effort to avoid installing raceways in a manner which will create moisture traps. Where they must be so installed, seal both ends of raceways with an approved sealing compound to prevent "breathing" and moisture condensation within the raceways. 03860296/96 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16110-5 r` LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 — L. Protection of Raceways: Seal ends of all raceways with blank discs ("pennies"), push pennies or other approved closers during construction to prevent foreign matter from entering raceway. Do not pull any conductors into raceways until all plastering in the vicinity is completed. Swab out all raceways before pulling in conductors. _ M. Penetrations: Wherever raceways pass through floors, walls partitions, etc., carefully fill any space between the outside of the raceway and the building material to prevent passage of air, water, smoke and fumes. Filling material shall be fire resistive and, in general, similar to the basic building materials through which the raceway passes. N. Roof Penetrations: Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through suitable roof jack with pitch pocket. Coordinate location with roofing installation. O. Pulling Devices in Empty Raceways: Provide in every empty raceway, not containing conductors to be installed by this Contractor, a suitable pull line to facilitate future installation of wiring. Lines shall be free from splices and shall have not less than 12 inches of slack at each end of the pull wire. Identify each end of each line with a linen tag bearing complete information as to the purpose of the raceway and the location of its other end. All lines shall be nylon or polyethylene cord with a tensile strength not less than 200 pounds. 3.05 JOINING AND TERMINATING CONDUITS A. Joining Rigid Conduits: Join with threaded couplings. Ream out all conduit ends after r-- threading. Secure rigid conduits at panel boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes, switchboards, support boxes, or sheet metal outlet boxes by galvanized locknuts, inside and outside, with insulating bushing inside. Unthreaded set screw type couplings or connectors are not acceptable in rigid conduit systems. No running threads shall be used anywhere in conduit systems. B. Joining Electrical Metallic Tubing: Cut conduit square using saw or pipe cutter; de -burr cut ends. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings and fasten securely. C. Joining PVC Conduit: Join PVC conduit using cement as recommended by the manufacturer. Wipe PVC conduit dry and clean before joining. Apply full coat of cement to entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for twenty minutes, minimum. D. Terminations: Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align the raceway to enter squarely, and install the locknuts with dished part against the box. Where terminations cannot be made secure with one locknut, use two locknuts, one inside and one -- outside the box. Where terminating in threaded hubs, screw the raceway or fitting tight into the hub so the end bears against the wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used, align the raceway so the coupling is square to the box, and tighten the chase nipples so no threads are exposed. 03860296/96 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16110-6 F LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 l J. Above Accessible Ceilings: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches from 1 ceiling access panel or from removable recessed lighting fixture. Locate outlet boxes to allow lighting fixtures positioned as shown on reflected ceiling plan. l K. Fire Resistance: Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified. l L. Coordination: Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and backsplashes. M. Adjacent Devices: Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices. N. Masonry Boxes: Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening. O. Wall Boxes: Use flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6 inches separation. Provide minimum 24 inches separation in acoustic rated walls. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness. Use stamped steel t bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs. Install flush mounting box rwithout damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness. t P. Ceiling Boxes: Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box. Do not fasten to ceiling support wires or ceiling panels. Support boxes independently of conduit. r Q. Gang Boxes: Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box. Use gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets. 3.10 INSTALLATION OF PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Sizing: Size all pull and junction boxes in accordance with NEC, using larger sizes than required by code where job conditions so indicate. B. Mounting: Fasten all boxes securely to the building construction, independent of conduit systems. On concealed conduit systems where boxes are not otherwise accessible, set box covers flush with finished surfaces for access. r 3.11 IDENTIFICATION OF PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Branch Circuits: Each pull and junction box shall be labeled with indelible ink to indicate 7 the wiring contained inside the box. The label shall indicate the panel and circuit number of the wiring contained. B. Emergency Systems: Each pull and junction box serving emergency circuits shall be painted L red and shall be labeled with indelible ink to indicate the wiring contained inside the box. The label shall indicated the panel and circuit number of the wiring contained. r 03860296/96 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16110-9 7 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 _. C. Other System: Boxes serving other systems shall be labeled with indelible ink to indicate the wiring contained inside the box. Identify the wiring system by name (Fire Alarm, P.A., Telephone, Data Cable, Etc.). _ END OF SECTION 03860296/96 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16110-10 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 3.06 TELEPHONE AND DATA CABLE RACEWAYS A. 2-inch Trade Size and Smaller: In addition to the above requirements, install in maximum (� lengths of 150 feet and with a maximum of two 90 degree bends or equivalent. Install pull I or junction boxes where necessary to comply with these requirements. 3.07 CONDUIT SUPPORTS A. Support Spacing: Use minimum spacing as directed by National Electrical Code, but space hangers more closely where required by conditions. B. Vertical Conduit Risers: Support vertical conduits at each floor by means of riser clamps or U-bolts, clamping them to a steel channel bridging the opening in the floor. C. Individual Conduits: Support conduits running vertically or horizontally with galvanized malleable iron one hole clamps. Carry individually supported horizontal conduits 1-1/4" and larger on galvanized steel hangers. Use no perforated strap iron as hanger material. Arrange supports to prevent misalignment of conduit during wire installation. D. Above Non -removable Ceilings: Where conduits smaller than 1-1/4" are installed above metal lath and plaster ceilings or mechanically suspended dry ceilings of the non -removable type, they may be supported on ceiling runner channels. E. Above Removable Ceilings: Where conduits smaller than 1-1/4" are installed above removable ceilings, attach them to the structure or bar joists (where present) or support them on threaded hanger rods with clips. Do not use any wire to support conduits or to attach conduits to supporting members. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires. Locate conduits a sufficient distance above the ceiling to permit removal of the ceiling panels. Locate them so as not to hinder access to mechanical. and electrical equipment through the ceiling panels. r- F. Multiple Conduits: Where multiple raceways are run horizontally at the same elevations, they may be supported on trapezes formed of sections of Unistrut or approved equal angle iron or channels suspended on rods or pipes. Size trapeze members including the suspension rods for the number size and loaded weight of the conduits they are to support. Space them as required for the smallest conduit supported. Group related conduits together. Provide space on each rack for 25 percent additional conduit. 3.08 INSTALLATION OF CONDUIT IN SLAB A. General: Install nonmetallic conduit in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Route conduit from point-to-point. Install conduit in center of floor slab and leave at least 1 inch concrete cover. Do not cross conduits in slabs. B. Stub ups: Where conduit turns up out of floor slabs, change from plastic to rigid galvanized steel conduit below finished floor. Do not extend any nonmetallic conduit above finished floor. Wrap all steel conduits and fittings in slab with .020 inch thick vinyl plastic tape, 03860296/96 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16110-7 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 _ half lapped to give double thickness wrap, or use PVC coated steel conduits. Extend wrapping three inches beyond each joint and three inches above finished floor. C. Securing Conduit: Secure raceways to reinforcing rods to prevent sagging or shifting during _ concrete placement. D. Spacing Conduit: Space raceways laterally to prevent voids in the concrete. E. Protection: Protect stub -ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs. Arrange so curved portion of bends is not visible above the finished slab. F. Large Conduits: Run conduit larger than 1 inch trade size parallel to or at right angles to main reinforcement. When at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. 3.09 INSTALLATION OF OUTLET BOXES A. Usage: Provide at each outlet or device of whatever character a metal outlet box in which conduits shall terminate. Install boxes in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." Install in locations as shown on the Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections and compliance with regulatory requirements. B. Boxes recessed in construction: Sheet steel boxes. C. For Lighting Fixture Outlets: 4" octagonal by 1-1/2" minimum depth with 3/8" fixture stud for incandescent lights which are surface mounted, wall mounted or suspended. D. For Wall Switches, Receptacles and Communications Use: Use 4"x4" size with proper square cornered tile wall cover, plaster cover, or finishing plate, except where construction will not permit or the device requires a larger box. E. Wall Mounted Telephone Outlet Boxes: 4-11/16" square by 2-1/8" deep, unless otherwise noted or unless wall construction requires a smaller box. F. Boxes for Exposed Work: Cast metal boxes. Use cast fully adjustable floor boxes for installations in slab on grade. G. Boxes for Outdoors: Cast metal boxes with gasketed covers. Use cast outlet box in exterior locations exposed to weather and wet locations. H. Location of boxes: Set wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights indicated or specified in section for outlet device. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Adjust box location up to 10 feet if required to accommodate intended purpose. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only. I. Orientation of Boxes: Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified in Section 16140 - WIRING DEVICES. 03860296/96 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16110-8 900-9268 PART GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section. 9 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information on all items specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing. r C. Coordination Drawings: Submit for review complete coordination drawings showing duct l profiles and coordination with other utilities and underground structures. Include plans i and sections drawn to accurate scale. 1.03 SCOPE A. Description: The work shall include furnishing and installing all underground electrical duct and direct burial conduit and pullboxes together with all other accessories required. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances. B. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Deliver, store, protect, and handle Products to site under provisions of the General Requirements. Accept conduit on site. Inspect for damage. Report concealed damage to carrier within their required time period. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate covering. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings. 03860296/96 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DUCT 16115-1 r LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 B. Coordination: Coordinate layout and installation of ducts, manholes and pullboxes with final arrangement of other utilities as determined in the field. 1.07 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. General: Submit under provisions of the General Requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUITS A. Underground Plastic Conduit: Type 40, heavy wall, high impact rigid virgin polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit and fittings, conforming to NEMA Publications TC2 and TC3 and UL listed for direct burial use; Carlon or equivalent. B. Rigid Steel Conduit: As specified under Section 16110 - RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS. 2.02 PULLBOXES A. Cast Iron Pull Boxes: Cast iron box, and frame. Cross ribbed, heavy duty cover to r support heavy pedestrian or light vehicular traffic. Cover with non -slip checkered surface. Neoprene gasket attached to cover. Size pullbox as required by NEC. Appleton Series WSW or WST. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Underground Warning Tape: 4 inch wide plastic tape, detectable type, colored yellow with suitable warning legend describing buried electrical lines. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. General: Examine site to receive ducts and manholes for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the underground ducts and manholes. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 EXCAVATION _ A. General: Perform all excavation work required in connection with the installation of the work under this Division. After the electrical work has been installed, tested and approved, backfill all excavations with suitable material under the direction of the Architect. Include the cutting of all sidewalks, streets and other pavement and repairing the openings in them to return the surface to approximately its original condition. Perform _ all excavations of every description of whatever substances encountered and to the depths required for installation of the work under this Division. 03860296/96 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DUCT 16115-2 711, LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 B. Backfill Material: During excavation, stack material suitable for backfilling in an orderly i~ manner a sufficient distance from the banks of the trenches to prevent slides or cave-ins. Remove all excavated material not required or suitable for backfill, or waste as directed. Control grading to prevent surface water from flowing into excavations and remove any water accumulating therein by pumping. C. Grading: Use open cut grading and make trenches of the necessary width for proper installation of the lines with banks as nearly vertical as possible. Grade the bottom of C trenches accurately to provide uniform bearing and support for conduit or duct on undisturbed soil at every point along its entire length. i D. Special Conditions: Except at locations where excavation of rock from the bottoms of trenches is required, take care not to excavate below the depths required. Where rock excavation is required, remove the rock to a minimum overdepth of 4 inches below the trench depths specified. Backfill the overdepth rock excavation and all excess trench excavation to the proper level with 3/4 inch crushed rock or the equivalent in coarse gravel prior to the installation of conduit or ducts. Whenever wet or otherwise unstable soil that is incapable of properly supporting conduits or ducts is encountered in the trench bottom, remove such soil to a depth required and backfill the trench to trench bottom grade with ,., 3/4 inch crushed rock or coarse gravel or other suitable material. 3.03 BACKFILLING A. General: Carefully backfill trenches with earth, sandy clay, sand and gravel, soft shale or other approved material free from large clods of earth or stone, deposited in thoroughly and carefully rammed 6-inch layers. Do not use blasted rock, broken concrete or pavement, or large boulders as backfill material. Settling the backfill with water will be permissible and will be requirement when so directed. Re -open any trenches improperly filled or where settlement occurs to the depth required for proper compaction, then refill, mound over and smooth off. B. Beneath Pavement: Backfill open trenches across roadways or other areas to be paved as specified above except that the entire depth of trench shall be backfilled in 6-inch layers, each layer moistened and compacted to a density of not less than 95 % Standard Proctor in such manner as to permit the rolling and compaction of the filled trench together with the adjoining earth to provide the required bearing value and permit paving of the area immediately after backfilling is completed. Along all other portions of the trenches, grade the ground to a reasonable uniformity and leave the mounding over the trenches in a uniform and neat condition. C. Surface Restoration: Restore surface features at areas disturbed by excavation, and reestablish original grades except as otherwise indicated. Replace removed sod as soon as possible after backfilling is completed. Restore all areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt and other work. Restore vegetation and include necessary topsoiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding, sprigging, or mulching. 03860296/96 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DUCT 16115-3 r" C LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 3.04 OPENING AND CLOSING PAVEMENT A. General: Where excavation requires the opening of existing walks, streets, drives or other existing pavement, including "black topping," cut the pavementas required. Hold the size of the cut to a minimum consistent with the work to be accomplished. After the installation of the new work is completed and the excavation has been backfilled, patch the paving using materials to match those cut out. Take care that the patches are level with the original surfaces and thoroughly bond with them. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND PLASTIC CONDUIT A. General: Install conduit according to manufacturer's written instructions. Install at least 30 inches below finished grade unless noted to the contrary. Assemble and install raceways in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Make joints with couplings and solvent cement. Fabricate bends of 30 degrees or more with factory -made elbows, or make field bends with proper heating equipment. Bends showing signs of overheating or flattening are unacceptable. Ream ends of all conduit before joining. "Snake" plastic conduit in trench, from side to side, with a complete cycle every 40 feet to allow for expansion and contraction. Maintain this configuration during backfilling. B. Separation Between Conduits: 3 inches minimum for like services, and 6 inches minimum between power and signal ducts. C. Terminations: Where conduit turns up out of earth, or floor slabs, change from plastic to rigid galvanized steel conduit below grade and outside of such structures. Do not extend any plastic conduit above grade. Make similar change from plastic to rigid galvanized steel conduit at connections to underground pull or junction boxes. Wrap all steel conduits and fittings buried in earth as specified elsewhere herein, or use PVC coated steel conduits. D. Waterproof Wall and Floor Entrances: Install a watertight entrance sealing device with the sealing gland assembly on the inside. Anchor device into masonry construction with 1 or more integral flanges. Secure membrane waterproofing to the device to make permanently watertight. E. Pulling Cord: Install 100-pound-test nylon cord in each conduit, including spares. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND STEEL CONDUIT A. General: Install conduit according to manufacturer's written instructions. All steel conduit in earth shall be rigid galvanized steel conduit. Wrap such conduit with 0.020 inch thick - vinyl plastic tape, half lapped to give a double thickness wrap. Remove all oil, grease and dirt from conduit with a suitable solvent, and clean and dry conduit before wrapping. If conduit is pre -wrapped in the shop and then cut and joined on the job, wrap all joints on the job, overlapping pipe wrapping 3" on both sides of joints. 03860296/96 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DUCT 16115-4 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 3.07 INSTALLATION OF PULLBOXES A. General: Install cast iron pullboxes in concrete pad with 4" minimum concrete on all sides of pullbox. Set top of pullbox flush with concrete. Do not install pullbox in low areas where water may stand. END OF SECTION 03860296/96 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DUCT 16115-5 I , �. LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 SECTION 16120 - CONDUCTORS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS 900-9268 !" A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information on all items specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing. Provide manufacturer's catalog data on conductor and insulation materials. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit for review complete manufacturer's instructions. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. 1.03 SCOPE A. Description: The work shall include the furnishing of all conductors, together with all splices, connections, terminations and identification for wiring systems rated 600 volts and less. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSUNFPA 70 (National Electrical Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances. B. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify that field measurements are as shown on the Drawings. B. Routing of Wire and Cable: Wire and cable routing shown on the Drawings is approximate unless dimensioned. Route wire and cable as required to meet Project Conditions. Where wire and cable routing is not shown, and destination only is indicated, determine exact routing and lengths required. f - ` " 03860296/96 CONDUCTORS 16120-1 f LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUCTORS (600 VOLTS AND UNDER) 900-9268 A. Type: Soft drawn, annealed copper, UL listed, rated at 600 volts, continuous without weld, splice or joint, uniform cross-section, free from flaws, scale and other imperfections. No. 8 and larger shall be stranded; No. 10 and smaller shall be solid. B. Insulation: Branch circuits shall have type THHN or THWN-2 insulation, temperature rated 90 degrees C, unless the type is specifically designated or specified. Service feeders shall be type THWN-2. Feeder circuits shall be Type THWN-2. C. Circuits Subjected to High Temperatures: Type THHN or THWN-2 conductors, temperature rated 90 degrees C, for wiring in proximity to boilers, and for motors and devices subject to high temperature because of high ambient temperature or convection or radiant heat. D. Lighting Fixture Conductors: Type and size approved by the NEC for the purpose. E. Manufacturers: Okonite, Triangle, Anaconda, Simplex or approved equivalent. 2.02 JOINTS AND SPLICES A. Stranded Copper Conductors: UL approved solderless bolted pressure connectors or compression connectors. All connectors shall be of proper sizes to match conductor sizes. All compression connectors shall be applied with properly sized dies and tools. Split -bolt connectors are not acceptable. B. Solid Copper Conductors: UL approved solderless bolted pressure connectors; or UL approved electrical spring connectors make. All connectors shall be of proper sizes to match conductor sizes. Split bolt connectors are not acceptable. 2.03 COLOR CODING A. General: Use standardized color -coding of conductors throughout. All color coding shall be continuous for the entire length of the conductors, and shall be permanent and readily distinguished after installation. In cases where the specified colors of insulated wire and cable are unavailable, such conductors shall be color -coded, as specified above, by means of slip-on colored plastic sleeves or plastic tape at all pull boxes, support boxes, outlet boxes, panelboards, and other terminal and splicing points. B. Neutral and Grounding Conductors: Neutral conductors shall be white or natural grey. Grounding conductors shall be green, or green with one or more yellow stripes. C. 208 Volt System: Phase conductors shall be black, red and blue for phases, A, B, and C respectively in the 208 volt system. 03 860296/96 CONDUCTORS 16120-2 r t; �►. LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 k PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. General: Examine raceways and building finishes to receive wires and cables for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 WIRE PULLING 900-9268 A. Preparation: Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire. Pull no conductors into conduits until all work of a nature which may cause injury to conductors is completed. B. Pulling Lines: Provide suitable installation equipment for pulling conductors into raceways or conduits. Use ropes of polyethylene, nylon or other suitable material to pull in conductors. Attach pulling lines to conductors by means of woven basket grips or by pulling eyes attached directly to conductors. C. Multiple Wires in a Raceway: All conductors to be installed in a single conduit shall be pulled in simultaneously. D. Cable Lubricant: Use an Underwriters' listed cable pulling compound for building wire No. 4 and larger. All cable lubricants shall be UL listed, and shall be certified by their manufacturer to be non -injurious to the insulation on which they are used. E. Existing Conduit: Remove existing wire from raceway before pulling in new conductors. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING WIRE (600 VOLTS AND UNDER) A. General: Install conductors as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and the NECA "Standard of Installation." B. Feeders: Run all feeders their entire length in continuous pieces without joints or splices, �.., insofar as practicable. Make joints in branch circuits only where circuits divide as shown E on drawings. Such joints shall consist of one through circuit to which shall be spliced the tap circuit. f E C. Branch Circuits: Not more than one power or lighting circuit shall be installed in a single conduit, except that one 3-wire circuit or one 4-wire circuit consisting of 2 different phase wires and a common neutral or 3 different phase wires and a common neutral may be installed in a single conduit. This provision shall not prohibit the installation in a single conduit of all conductors of a circuit with three- and four-way switching. D. Dedicated Neutrals: Where indicated on the drawings, branch circuits shall be installed with dedicated neutrals in a single conduit. 03860296/96 CONDUCTORS 16120-3 r LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 r E. Wiring at Outlets and Switches: Install with at least 12 inches of slack conductor at each outlet and wall switch. F. Terminations: Connect outlets and components to wiring and to ground as indicated and instructed by manufacturer. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, according to equipment manufacturer's published torque -tightening values or as specified in UL Standard 486A. G. Sizes: No wire shall be smaller than No. 12 except for signal or control circuits, and except for individual lighting fixture taps as permitted by the National Electrical Code. H. Receptacle and Motor Branch Circuits: No. 12 conductors unless noted or scheduled otherwise. I. Home runs on 120 volt, 20 ampere Lighting Branch Circuits: Where length of run from panelboard to first lighting outlet exceeds 75 feet use No. 10 conductors; otherwise use No. 12 conductors. J. Different voltages in same raceway: Power and Lighting circuits of different system voltages (e.g. 208Y/120 and 480Y/277 volts) shall not occupy the same conduit. K. Emergency Lighting and Power Conductors: Run in conduits separate from all other wiring. L. Joints and Splices: Make joints and splices only where necessary and only at outlet boxes and pull boxes. All joints shall be mechanically and electrically secure. After a joint or splice is complete, insulate it with rubber tape, and friction tape to make the insulation of the joint or splice equal to that of the conductor. In lieu of this, vinyl plastic tape may be used if applied in at least four layers (half lapped in two directions), with all larger splices, terminals, sharp corners and voids being first protected by application of insulating putty. M. Wet Locations: Conductor splices in wet locations shall be made in accordance with the conductor manufacturer's recommendations. N. Identifying Tags: Non-ferrous; stamped to clearly identify each circuit. Securely fasten tags to all cables, feeders and power circuits in pull boxes, lighting, power and distribution panelboards, etc. O. Bundling Conductors: Bundle all conductors in panelboards, cabinets and the like, using marlin twine lacing or nylon straps made for the purpose. Bundle conductors larger than No. 10 in individual circuits. Bundle smaller conductors in larger groups. P. Cable Supports and Boxes: Install cable supports and boxes for all vertical conductors in accordance with National Electrical Code requirements. Boxes shall be of heavy galvanized steel plate construction, not less than No. 10 USS gauge, riveted to an angle iron frame. Removable box covers shall be secured with corrosion -resistant screws. For cables without a metallic sheath, cable supports shall be of the split wedge type which clamps each conductor firmly and tightens due to the weight of cable. For cables with 03860296/96 CONDUCTORS 16120-4 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 metallic sheath, a basket weave or equal type of support shall be provided as approved by the cable manufacturer. END OF SECTION 03860296/96 CONDUCTORS 16120-5 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS 900-9268 A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information on all items specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing. Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and configurations. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit for review complete manufacturer's instructions. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product. 1.03 SCOPE A. Description: Furnish and install in suitable outlet boxes, the wiring devices indicated, complete with lamps, coverplates, etc. All shall be properly connected to conductors so as to be operable. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances. B. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: The catalog numbers listed herein are generally of Hubbell manufacture. Equivalent devices of Pass and Seymour or General Electric are also acceptable. Leviton brand devices are not acceptable. 03860296/96 WIRING DEVICES 16140-1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 B. Specification Grade:: All wiring devices shall be "Specification. Grade", and shall be UL listed. 2.02 COLORS A. Ivory/Brown: All devices shall have an ivory finish where mounted in walls finished in light colors and a brown finish where mounted in walls finished in dark colors. B. Emergency Systems: All wiring devices which are connected to the emergency power system shall have a red color. Otherwise, devices shall have a color as specified above. 2.03 WALL SWITCHES (20 Ampere) A. 20 Ampere Wall Switches: For all loads: 1. Single pole wall switch: Hubbell HBL1221. 2. Three-way wall switch: Hubbell HBL1223. 3. Four-way wall switch: Hubbell HBL1224. 4. Pilot -lighted switch: Hubbell HBL1221PL. 2.04 RECEPTACLES A. 20 Ampere Receptacles: 1. Duplex: 20 ampere, 125 volt, 2 pole, 3 wire grounding duplex: Hubbell No. 5362 (NEMA 5-20R). 2. Isolated Ground Duplex: 20 ampere, 125 volt, 2 pole, 3 wire, grounding, isolated ground duplex: Hubbell No. IG-5362 (NEMA 5-20R). 3. Ground Fault Current Interrupter: 20 ampere, 125 volt, 2 pole, 3 wire grounding duplex with self-contained ground fault circuit interrupter: Hubbell No. GF-5362 (NEMA 5-20R). B. Dryer Receptacle: 30 ampere, 125/250 volt, 3 pole, 4 wire, grounding: Hubbell No. 9430A (NEMA 14-30R) with No. S723 plate and No. 9432C plug (NEMA 14-30P). C. Oven Receptacle: 50 ampere, 125/250 volt, 3 pole, 4 wire, grounding: Hubbell No. 9450A (NEMA 14-50R) with No. S723 plate and No. 9452C plug (NEMA 14-50P). 2.05 WEATHERPROOF DEVICES A. Duplex Receptacles: Provide the specified device in FS box with a gasketed cast aluminum coverplate having a self closing gasketed lift cover. Hubbell No. 5206WO. B. GFCI Receptacles: Provide the specified device in FS box with a gasketed cast aluminum coverplate having a self closing gasketed lift cover. Hubbell No. WPFS26. 2.06 COMMUNICATION DEVICES A. Wall Mounted Telephone Outlet: Shall consist of an outlet box as specified under Section 16110 - RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS with adaptor. Coverplates will be furnished by 03860296/96 WIRING DEVICES 16140-2 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900A268 the Telephone Company. Where an outlet is shown, and it does not receive a telephone instrument, install a blank coverplate. 2.07 COVERPLATES A. General: Provide coverplates for all wiring devices, telephone, signal outlets and other kindred devices. B. Stainless Steel For Flush Mounted Devices: Coverplates in finished spaces shall be 0.040" stamped satin stainless steel Sierra Electric Corporation "S-Line" or approved equivalent. In unfinished or machinery spaces plates shall be smooth plastic to match devices which they cover. Sierra "P-Line" or approved equivalent. C. Surface Mounted Devices: Zinc -coated sheet metal with rounded or beveled edges, of same size as boxes, for indoor use; cast alloy plates with gaskets for outdoor use. D. Weatherproof Devices: Die cast aluminum with spring loaded gasketed covers to close automatically when plugs are removed. Stainless steel springs. UL listed for use in damp locations and wet locations, cover closed. Orient device to maintain watertightness. Sierra 4500 series or approved equivalent. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Outlet Boxes: Verify that outlet boxes are installed at proper height. Coordinate mounting heights with the Architectural elevations. Coordinate mounting heights with the Architectural baseboard height. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates. B. Floor Boxes: Verify floor box locations and that floor boxes are adjusted properly. C. Circuit Wiring: Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Outlet Boxes: Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface. Clean debris from outlet boxes. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." Install devices plumb and level. B. Switches: Install switches with OFF position down. 03860296/96 WIRING DEVICES 16140-3 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 C. Wall Dimmers: Install wall dimmers to achieve full rating specified and indicated after derating for ganging as instructed by manufacturer. Do not share neutral conductor on load side of dimmers. D. Receptacles: Install receptacles with grounding pole on top. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal. E. ` Coverplates: Install wall plates when painting is complete. Use jumbo size plates for outlets installed in masonry walls. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas, above accessible ceilings, and on surface mounted outlets. F. Adjacent Devices: Group adjacent devices under single, multigang wall plates. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Wiring Devices: Inspect each wiring device for defects. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation. Verify that each receptacle device is energized. Test each receptacle device for proper polarity. Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper operation. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. General: Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level. 3.06 CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION A. Inside Coverplate: At each wiring device identify the panel and circuit number to which the device is finally connected in indelible ink. 3.07 MOUNTING HEIGHTS A. General: Where mounting heights are indicated on the drawings, the device shall be installed with the centerline of the device at the indicated height. In general, devices which are shown to be installed at counters or other millwork shall be installed above the counter or millwork, unless noted. Wall switches shall be installed on the strike side of the door as finally hung. Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, or directed by the Architect, install devices at the following heights. 1. Wall Switch: 48". 2. Receptacle: 24". 3. Telephone Outlet: 24". 4. Wall Dimmer Switch: 48". 5. Fire Alarm Visual .Devices: lowest point of 80" or 6" below ceiling. END OF SECTION 03860296/96 WIRING DEVICES 16140-4 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 SECTION 16180 - EQUIPMENT CONTROLS AND WIRING SYSTEMS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS 900-9268 A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit manufacturer's data and drawings on all equipment items according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information on all items specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit for review complete manufacturer's instructions. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product. 1.03 SCOPE A. Description: The work shall include all labor, material, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to equipment wiring and control as shown on the drawings and/or as specified herein. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances. B. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify that field measurements are as shown on the Drawings. B. Location of Equipment: Verify locations of equipment and location of electrical connections prior to installation. Equipment locations are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensions are indicated. Locate as required to complete wiring system. 03860296196 EQUIPMENT CONTROLS AND WIRING SYSTEMS 16180-1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 r. 1.06 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. General: Submit according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. As built Drawings: Accurately record actual locations of equipment and electrical connections. 1.07 COORDINATION A. General: Coordinate work under provisions of the General Requirements. Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, and manufacturer's instructions for equipment furnished under other sections. Determine connection locations and requirements. B. Sequence of Construction: Sequence rough -in of electrical connections to coordinate with installation schedule for equipment. Sequence electrical connections to coordinate with start-up schedule for equipment. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ELECTRICAL MATERIALS A. General: Provide electrical equipment and materials as specified under other sections of this Specification. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. General: Verify conditions according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Connections: Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring, and energization. C. Thermostats: Verify the location of all thermostats in the field. 3.02 EQUIPMENT WIRING A. General: Connect complete for operation all items of heating, air conditioning, plumbing, kitchen, laundry and laboratory equipment, and all other electrical devices furnished by the Owner or under other Divisions of the specifications. B. Locations: Outlets of various types have been indicated at equipment locations, but no indications of exact location or scope of the work are shown on the drawings. Refer to the Owner and to the various Contractors for the work under the other Divisions for the scope of connections to equipment furnished by them and for the exact locations of all items. Request of the Owner and the aforementioned suppliers and contractors all rough -in 03860296/96 EQUIPMENT CONTROLS AND WIRING SYSTEMS 16180-2 r t r► LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 drawings required for proper installation of the electrical work, in ample time to permit preparation of the drawings and thus avoid delays on the job. C. Disconnect Switches: Where disconnect switches or circuit breakers are not provided integral with control equipment for motors and other electrical appurtenances, provide and install all disconnect switches required by the National Electrical Code and/or indicated. 3.03 KITCHEN EQUIPMENT i A. General: Do not rough -in conduits or wiring for kitchen equipment until exact equipment locations have been laid out and approved by the Owner. After approval, provide conduit stub -ups and equipment connections at the exact to ations shown on those drawings. F% 3.04 TEMPERATURE CONTROLS A. General: Completely connect for operation all items for temperature controls which require electrical connections, furnishing all wiring, conduit and labor. 3.05 PACKAGED AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT A. General: Connect each packaged air conditioning equipment with a fused disconnect switch mounted on the unit or on a wall adjacent to the unit. 3.06 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS A. Manufacturer's Instructions: Make electrical connections in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions. B. Connections: Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquidtight flexible conduit with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations. C. Wiring: Make wiring connections using wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures encountered in heat producing equipment. D. Receptacles: Provide receptacle outlet where connection with attachment plug is required by the manufacturer. Provide cord and cap where field -supplied attachment plug is indicated. E. Strain Relief: Provide suitable strain -relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and equipment connection boxes. F. Devices: Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices as indicated or as required. G. Interconnections: Provide interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment where indicated or required. END OF SECTION 4 03860296/96 EQUIPMENT CONTROLS AND WIRING SYSTEMS 16180-3 90 t I LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 SECTION 16195 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and 1` Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this " section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials according to the Conditions of the �a Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. P B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information on all items specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing. Provide manufacturer's catalog data for nameplates, labels, and markers. 1.03 SCOPE A. Description: The work shall include furnishing and installing identification of electrical materials, equipment and installations. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS f^ A. Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSIINFPA 70 (National Electrical Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances. �- B. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. r PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 NAMEPLATES AND LABELS A. Nameplates: Electrical equipment shall be identified by the attachment of engraved nameplates constructed from laminated phenolic plastic, at least 1/16" thick, 3-ply, with white surfaces and black core. Engraving shall be condensed gothic, at least 1/4" high, � appropriately spaced. Nomenclature on the label shall include the name of the item or equipment served utilizing the equipment names shown on the drawings. B. Labels: Embossed adhesive tape, with 3/16 inch black letters on white background. Use only for identification of individual wall switches and receptacles. AP- 2.02 WIRE MARKERS A. Description: Split,sleeve or tubing type wire markers. 4` 03860296/96 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16195-1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 B. Locations: Each conductor at panelboard gutters, pull boxes, outlet and junction boxes, and each load connection. C. Legend: 1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number as actually installed. 2. Control Circuits: Control wire number indicated on shop drawings. 2.03 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE A. Description: 4 inch wide plastic tape, detectable type, colored yellow with suitable warning legend describing buried electrical lines. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Cleaning: Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels. 3.02 APPLICATION A. Equipment: Install nameplate and label parallel to equipment lines. Secure nameplate to equipment front using adhesive. Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on panelboard that is recessed in finished locations. B. Underground Conduit: Identify underground conduits using underground warning tape. Install one tape per trench at 3 inches below finished grade. 3.03 EQUIPMENT A. General: All electrical equipment shall be identified by name utilizing engraved nameplates. Equipment to be labeled shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Panelboards. 3.04 CONTROL DEVICES A. General: All electrical control devices shall be labeled to indicate the device served. All electrical control devices shall be labeled regardless of proximity to the equipment served. Electrical control devices to be labeled shall include but not limited to the following: 1. Contactors. 2. Motor Starters. 3. Relays. 4. Disconnect Switches. 5. Timeswitches. END OF SECTION 03860296/96 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16195-2 Fa OM LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 SECTION 16400 - ELECTRICAL SERVICE PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section. 1.02 SUB=ALS A. General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information on all items specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing. C. Utility Drawings: Submit for review Utility Company prepared drawings. 1.03 SCOPE A. General: The work shall include all labor, material and equipment for the complete electrical service from the power company service point to the building service entrance equipment. The Electrical Contractor shall provide and install an electrical service of the size indicated on the drawings. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Utility Company Requirements: Perform Work in accordance with Utility Company written requirements. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances. B. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. 1.06 UTILITY FEES A. General: All service requirements shall be verified with the Power Company prior to the bid date and all additional costs (if any) shall be included in Contractor's bid price. 03860296/96 ELECTRICAL SERVICE 16400-1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 �- 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify that field measurements are as shown on the Drawings. B. Location of Service Transformers: Verify locations of service transformers prior to excavating for installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 UNDERGROUND PLASTIC CONDUIT A. Description: As specified under Section 16115 - UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DUCTS. 2.02 UNDERGROUND STEEL CONDUIT A. Description: ` As specified under Section16115 - UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DUCTS. 2.03 SECONDARY SERVICE CONDUCTORS A. Description: As specified under Section 16120 - CONDUCTORS. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. General: Verify conditions according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Equipment: Verify that service equipment is ready to be connected and energized. 3.02 PREPARATION A. General: Make arrangements with Utility Company to obtain permanent electric service to the Project. B. Coordination: Coordinate location of Utility Company's facilities to ensure proper access is available. 3.03 SERVICE CONNECTIONS A. Underground Service from pad mounted transformer: The Utility Company (LP&L) will provide and install a pad mounted transformer assembly where shown. Provide and install a reinforced concrete pad for the transformer of the size and configuration as directed by the Power Company. Furnish and install service entrance conductors in conduit from the building, underground to the transformer assembly. Leave sufficient slack in the conductors at the transformer to facilitate connections by the Power Company. 03860296/96 ELECTRICAL SERVICE 16400-2 - z s d LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 3.04 METERING A. All by the Utility Company (LP&L) at the pad mounted transformer: All metering for Utility Company billing will be done by metering equipment furnished and installed by the Utility Company in the pad mounted transformer housing. 3.05 SYSTEMS OF WIRING A. 208Y/120 volt, 3 phase, 4W system: 1. Electrical Service: Combined 208Y/120 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire, 60 Hz. service for lighting and power. 2. Power Feeders: 208 volts, 3 phase, 3 or 4 wire as noted. 3. Lighting Feeders: 208Y/120 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire. 4. Branch Circuits: 2, 3, or 4 wire as is most convenient for the contractor or as required to properly serve the load. 3.06 LOAD BALANCING A. General: The contractor shall carefully balance his electrical loads between the various phases. When the facilities are under use at their heaviest loading periods, tests shall be run on the "hot" conductors in each feeder to a panel and any unbalance shall be corrected to a point that no conductor load shall be more than 5 % high or low (maximum unbalance of 10%) in amperes. 3.07 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING A. General: As specified under Section 16115 - UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DUCTS. 3.08 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND PLASTIC CONDUIT A. General: Install as specified under Section 16115 - UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DUCTS. 3.09 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND STEEL CONDUIT A. General: Install as specified under Section 16115 - UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DUCTS. 03860296/96 END OF SECTION ELECTRICAL SERVICE 16400-3 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 �.., SECTION 16441 - CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECT SWITCHES f PART1 GENERAL E 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section. I. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. t ' B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information on all items y specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing. Provide switch ratings, enclosure type and dimensions. C. Manuals: Submit for review all operation and maintenance manuals for items specified herein. 1.03 SCOPE R . A. Description: Provide all labor, material, equipment, and service necessary for and incidental to the complete electrical distribution system. 1 '• 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS �r- A. Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National Electrical eCode) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances. r— 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as r suitable for purpose specified and shown. B. General: Deliver, store, protect, and handle Products to site according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Accept delivery of disconnect switches on site and inspect for damage. Report concealed damage to carrier within their required time period. Protect from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade protected from the weather. Provide appropriate covering. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify that field measurements are as shown on the Drawings. ' 03860296/96 CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECT SWITCHES 16441-1 r LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 B. Location of Disconnect switches: Verify locations of disconnect switches prior to installation. Disconnect switches are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensions are indicated. Locate as required to complete wiring system. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Description: NEMA KS 1, Type HD heavy duty, enclosed load interrupter knife switch. Handle lockable in OFF position. Switches shall be unfused unless noted otherwise; quick make, quick break. All motor circuit switches shall be horsepower rated. �- B. Enclosures: Provide disconnect switches in NEMA 3R enclosures if exposed to the weather; elsewhere in NEMA 1 general purpose enclosures unless special enclosures are " required. C. Fuse clips: Designed to accommodate NEMA FU1, Class RK1 fuses. D. Auxiliary Poles: Where disconnect switches are used to disconnect starters, provide auxiliary poles in switches as required to disconnect all auxiliary control circuits in starters. E. Manufacturers: Switches shall be of General Electric, ITE/SIEMENS or Square D manufacture, equivalent to General Electric Type TH quick make, quick break switches. 2.02 TUMBLER SWITCHES A. Description: Where space does not permit use of the above specified switches, such as within weatherproof fan housings, etc., use suitable horsepower rated tumbler switches as unfused disconnects; General Electric Type RB or approved equivalent. r PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Installation: Install disconnect switches level and plumb. -- B. General: Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and NECA "Standard of Installation." C. Connections: Connect disconnect switches to wiring system and to ground as indicated and as instructed by the manufacturer. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws 1 and bolts according to equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values or as specified in UL Standard 486A. r. 03860296/96 CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECT SWITCHES 16441-2 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 D. Fuses: Install fuses infusible disconnect switches. Apply adhesive tag on inside door of each fused switch indicating NEMA fuse class and size installed. END OF SECTION Go r 03860296/96 CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECT SWITCHES 16441-3 r k ,.., LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 SECTION 16450 - GROUNDING AND BONDING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification sections, apply to the work of this section. L02 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information on all items specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing. Provide data for grounding electrodes and connections. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit for review complete manufacturer's instructions. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency t . specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation and installation of exothermic connectors. D. Field Test Reports: Submit for review Contractor's Field Tests of installation. Indicate overall resistance to ground and resistance of each electrode. 4� 1.03 SCOPE r A. Description: Furnish and install the various grounding systems outlined herein in accordance with the National Electrical Code. r-. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 1. A. Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances. i, ` B. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. / 1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 1~ A. General: Submit under provisions of the General Requirements. I B. As -built Drawings: Accurately record actual locations of grounding electrodes. s 03860296/96 GROUNDING AND BONDING 16450-1 I LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ROD ELECTRODE A. Ground Rods: 3/4 inch diameter by 10 feet long copper clad steel ground rod. B. Manufacturers: Ground rods shall be as manufactured by Blackburn or approved equivalent. 2.02 MECHANICAL CONNECTORS A. Pipe Clamps: Cast Bronze, heavy-duty, sized to match water pipe, as manufactured by Blackburn Series J or approved equivalent. B. Structural Steel Connectors: Copper clad steel, 3/4" diameter by 5" minimum grounding lug, as manufactured by Burndy Type GSTUD-HY or approved equivalent. Weld lug to structural member. C. Rod Clamps: Cast of high strength corrosion resistant copper alloy, UL listed for direct burial, as manufactured by Blackburn Number JAB 34H or approved equivalent. 2.03 EXOTHERMIC CONNECTIONS A. Exothermic Connections: Molds, welding metal, tools, and all accessories shall be from the same manufacturer. All connections shall be made as directed by the manufacturer's instructions. Molds shall not be altered in the field. Exothermic connections shall be made by the CADWELD or approved equivalent process. 2.04 CONDUCTORS A. Material: Stranded copper as specified in Section 16120 - CONDUCTORS. B. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Size to meet NFPA 70 (NEC) requirements. 2.05 GROUNDING WELL COMPONENTS A. Well Pipe: 8 inch diameter by 24 inch long concrete pipe with belled end. B. Well Cover: Cast iron with legend "GROUND" embossed on cover. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SERVICE AND EQUIPMENT GROUNDING A. General: Provide adequate and permanent service neutral and equipment grounding in accordance with the National Electrical Code, and subject to the following additional 03860296/96 GROUNDING AND BONDING 16450-2 �.. LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 I t requirements. Size grounding conductors in accordance with National Electrical Code 1 Tables 250-94 and 250-95. B. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Connect the service ground and equipment ground to a r" common point within the metallic enclosure containing the main service disconnecting ' means. From the common point of connection of the service ground and equipment ground, run in conduit a combined service and equipment grounding electrode conductor without joint or splice to the grounding electrode system as described below. c. C. Grounding Electrode System: The following items shall be bonded together by the ^ grounding electrode conductor to form the grounding electrode system. . 1. Metal Underground Water Pipe: Connect to the main water service pipe with an approved bolted pressure clamp. Clean all contact surfaces thoroughly before r" connection, to assure good metal to metal contact. Where a dielectric fitting occurs on water main, connect the grounding conductor to the street side of the fitting. Bond the metallic conduit to the grounding conductor at each end. Provide and ;-, install with ground clamps a No. 3/0 copper jumper conductor around the water ' meter. 2. Metal Frame of Building: Connect to the effectively grounded structural steel frame of the building with a copperclad steel grounding lug as specified welded to the steel member. Connect to the grounding electrode conductor with an approved compression connection. 3. Concrete -encased Electrode: Connect to a 1/2' minimum steel reinforcing bar located in the concrete foundation or footing in contact with earth for a minimum of twenty feet with a #4 copper conductor by means of an exothermic weld connection. Extend the conductor and connect to the grounding electrode conductor with an approved compression connection. D. Supplemental Grounding Electrode: Supplement the grounding electrode system with an additional electrode which shall be 10' long by 3/4 inch diameter copperclad steel ground rod. Bond the supplemental grounding electrode to the service equipment ground with #6 copper conductor. r� i 3.02 GROUND RODS A. General: Locate ground rods a minimum of one rod length from each other and at least one rod length away from any other grounding electrode. Interconnect ground rods with bare #6 copper conductors buried at least 24 inches below grade. Connect bare cable ground conductors to ground rods by means of exothermic welds except as otherwise indicated. Make these connections without damaging the copper coating or exposing the steel. Drive rods until tops are 6 inches below finished floor or final grade. B. Ground Wells: Install ground rods in ground wells where indicated on the Drawings. 3.03 GROUNDING BUILDING STEEL A. General: The building structural steel frame shall be grounded to the building service grounding electrode, using the conductor size specified in National Electrical Code Section 03860296/96 GROUNDING AND BONDING 16450-3 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 250-94(a). The grounding conductor shall be connected to building steel using a grounding lug as specified above welded to the building steel. 3.04 GROUNDING RACEWAYS A. General: Assure the electrical continuity of all metallic raceway systems, pulling up all conduits and/or locknuts wrench tight. Where expansion joints or telescoping joints occur, provide bonding jumpers. Where flexible metallic conduit is employed, provide a green -insulated grounding jumper installed in the flexible conduit. Install a separate green -insulated conductor in each non-metallic conduit. Provide grounding bushings on all service and feeder raceways terminating within switchboards, motor control centers, panelboards, cabinets, and all other enclosures. Provide grounding conductors from such bushings to the frame of the enclosure and to the ground bus or equipment grounding strap. Size grounding conductors in accordance with NEC Table 250-95. 3.05 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS A. General: Provide a separate, green -insulated copper grounding conductor, with insulation of the same rating as phase conductors, for each feeder and for each branch circuit indicated. Install the grounding conductor in the same raceway with the related phase and neutral conductors, and connect the grounding conductor to pull boxes or outlet boxes at intervals of 100 feet or less. Where paralleled conductors in separate raceways occur, provide a grounding conductor in each raceway. Connect all grounding conductors to bare grounding bars in panelboards, and to ground buses in service equipment to the end that r there will be an uninterrupted grounding circuit from the point of a ground fault back to the point of connection of the equipment ground and system neutral. Size all of these grounding conductors per NEC Table 250-95. 3.06 CONNECTIONS r A. General: Make connections in such a manner as to minimize possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible. 1. Use electroplated or hot tin coated materials to assure high conductivity and make contact points closer in order of galvanic series. 2. Make connections with clean bare metal at points of contact. 3. Coat and seal connections involving dissimilar metals with inert material such as red lead paint to prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces. B. Exothermic Weld Connections: Use for connections to structural steel and for underground connections. Install at connections to ground rods. Comply with _ manufacturer's written recommendations. Welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable. C. Terminations: Tighten grounding and bonding connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with manufacturer's published torque tightening values or to values specified in UL 486A and 486B. 03860296/96 GROUNDING AND BONDING 16450-4 I t k fi LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 D. Compression Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide the correct circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by the manufacturer of the connectors. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on the ,ground conductor. 03860296/96 END OF SECTION GROUNDING AND BONDING 16450-s t F.. LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 SECTION 16470 - PANELBOARDS PART1 GENERAL r t 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and 1 Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information on all items specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing. Provide complete catalog data and drawings on all items of equipment. C. Shop Drawings: Submit for review complete Manufacturer's Shop Drawings. Submit shop drawings of each panelboard for review before commencing fabrication. Drawings shall indicate number, size, interrupting rating and type of circuit protective devices; dimensions, gauges and type of construction of cabinets, size and material of main bus and lugs, and any other pertinent information necessary to determine compliance with the drawings and specifications. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit for review all operation and maintenance manuals for items specified herein. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product. 1.03 SCOPE A. Description: Provide all labor, material, equipment, and service necessary for and incidental to the complete electrical distribution system. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances. B. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. C. Main Panelboard: The building main panelboard shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories as suitable for "Service Entrance Equipment." 03860296/96 PANELBOARDS 16470-1 r- LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 _ .. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Deliver, store, protect, and handle Products to site according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Accept delivery of panelboards on site and inspect for damage. Report concealed damage to carrier within their required time period. Deliver panelboards in factory fabricated water resistant wrapping. Protect panelboards from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade protected from the weather. Provide appropriate covering. Store and protect in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Handle panelboards carefully to avoid damage to material components, enclosure and finish. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify that field measurements are as shown on the Drawings. B. Location of Panelboards: Verify locations of panelboards prior to installation. Panelboards are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensions are indicated. Locate as required to complete electrical distribution system. 1.07 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. General: Submit according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. As -built Drawings: Accurately record actual locations of panelboards. r PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PANELBOARDS A. Panelboard Cabinets: Furnish and install cabinets to serve the various panelboards, of sizes as required to house the panelboards. Cabinets shall be rigidly constructed of sheet steel of gauges conforming to Underwriters' Laboratories Inc. requirements; comers overlapped or welded; edges turned over to receive trim. Cabinet fronts shall be cut from single sheet of not less than No. 12 gauge cold rolled sheet steel; fastened in place by adjustable trim clamps which will allow plumbing; same size as the cabinet box if surface mounted; size to overlap the box a minimum of 3/4" on all sides if flush mounted. B. Enclosures: Enclosures shall be NEMA Type 1, 3R, 4X or 12 as indicated on the Drawings or as required. _ C. Cabinet Doors: Provide each door with a substantial flush, cylinder tumbler lock and catch. On doors more than 48" high provide a combination three point catch and lock with T-handle. Provide each lock with two keys, with all locks keyed alike. Provide with metal directory frame mounted inside each panel door. r 03860296/96 PANELBOARDS 16470-2 �,. LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 I 6 b D. Cabinet Finish: All back boxes shall be galvanized; all exposed metal, including fronts, primed and finished in gray lacquer. E. Multiple Sections: Where a lighting and appliance panelboard contains more than 42 a branch overcurrent devices, the assembly shall consist of two or more separate boxes ' bolted together and covered by a common multiple door front; each box containing not more than 42 branch overcurrent devices. ,r- ,, F. Branch Circuits: Where a circuit protective device is scheduled as a "spare", provide the device complete for operation. Where such a device is scheduled as a "space" or "space r only", provide proper space and all necessary connectors for future installation of the size { of device scheduled. Where a breaker or switch is scheduled to serve a "future" load, provide the device complete for operation. Branch circuit breakers shall be fully .; interchangeable without disturbing adjacent units. Connect all circuit interrupting devices with sequence phasing. G. Copper Panelboard Bus: Provide each panelboard with copper busbars. Provide each panelboard with a separate equipment copper grounding bus bar bonded to the panelboard cabinet. Where indicated on the drawings provide panelboards with an isolated copper grounding bus bar insulated from the panelboard cabinet. 2.02 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS A. General: Panelboards shall have the number and size of bolted -in circuit breakers as scheduled, with main circuit breakers or lugs only on the mains as scheduled. B. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: Bolted in circuit breakers as described in Section 16475 - CIRCUIT DISCONNECT AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES. C. Manufacturers: Panels shall be of General Electric, ITE/SIEMENS or Square D manufacture only, equivalent to the General Electric panels listed below. 1. Panelboards for 208 or 240 volt Service: General Electric Series A, Type AQ with type THQB, THHQB or TXQB circuit breakers as required. D. Door in door construction: Provide cabinet front with door in door. One door over .. interior and additional door over wiring gutters. 2.03 CIRCUIT BREAKER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS A. General: Panelboards shall have the number and sizes of bolted -in circuit breakers scheduled on the drawings, with main circuit breakers or lugs only on the mains as scheduled. Circuit breakers shall have minimum RMS symmetrical ampere interrupting ratings as scheduled on drawings; no subfeed breakers shall be permitted. Provide circuit breakers as scheduled on the drawings. 00` B. Manufacturers: Panelboards shall be of General Electric, ITE/SIEMENS or Square D i manufacture only , equivalent to the General Electric Type AQ, Type AE or Spectra Series r 03 M96/96 PANELBOARDS 16470-3 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 Panelboards determined by the system voltage and by the sizes and types of circuit A breakers scheduled on the drawings. C. Main Circuit Breaker: 1. Molded Case Thermal Magnetic Trip: Main circuit breakers shall be molded case with thermal magnetic trip as described in Section 16475 - CIRCUIT DISCONNECT AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES. D. Branch Circuit Breakers: 1. Molded Case Thermal Magnetic Trip: Branch circuit breakers shall be molded case with thermal magnetic trip as described in Section 16475 - CIRCUIT DISCONNECT AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Install panelboards in accordance with NEMA PB 1. 1, NECA "Standard of Installation", and the manufacturer's written instructions. Install panelboards plumb. Install recessed panelboards flush with wall finishes. B. Ground Fault Protection: Install panelboard ground fault circuit interrupter devices in accordance with installation guidelines of NEMA 289, "Application Guide for Ground r Fault Circuit Interrupters." C. Height: 6 feet to top of panelboard; install panelboards taller than 6 feet with bottom no more than 4 inches above floor. D. Filler Plates: Provide filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards. r E. Circuit Directory: Provide a neatly typewritten circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Revise directory to reflect circuiting changes required to balance phase loads. Identify branch circuits with room numbers to match those finally posted on doors. Cover directory with transparent sheet plastic. F. Circuit Labels: Provide engraved plastic nameplate to identify the circuits on each distribution panelboard. G. Nameplates: Provide engraved plastic nameplates on each panelboard to identify the panelboard name, voltage and upstream power source. H. Emergency Systems: Provide an engraved plastic nameplate on each panelboard to identify the electrical system serving the panelboard (Normal or Emergency). I. Spare Conduits: Provide spare conduits out of each recessed panelboard to an accessible location above ceiling. Minimum spare conduits: 5 empty 1 inch. Identify each as SPARE. 03860296/96 PANELBOARDS 16470-4 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 • OW.#! . J. Grounding: Ground and bond panelboard enclosure according to Section 16450. K. Connections: Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including grounding connections, in accordance with manufacturer's published torque tightening values or as specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.02 ADJUSTING A. _ Load Balancing: Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder; rearrange circuits in the panelboard to balance the phase loads to within 10 percent of each other. Maintain proper phasing for multi -wire branch circuits. END OF SECTION 03860296/96 PANELBOARDS 16470-5 1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 SECTION 16475 - CIRCUIT DISCONNECT AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section. 1:02 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information on all items specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing. Provide data sheets showing electrical characteristics including time -current curves. C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit for review all operation and maintenance manuals for items specified herein. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include all operation and maintenance manuals. 1.03 SCOPE A. Description: The work shall include all labor, material, equipment, and service necessary for and incidental to the complete electrical distribution system. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances. B. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. 1.05 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. General: Provide maintenance materials according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. 1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS A. General: Furnish under provisions of the General Requirements. 03860296/96 CIRCUIT DISCONNECT AND OVERCURRENTN PROTECTIVE DEVICES 16475-1 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MOLDED CASE THERMAL MAGNETIC TRIP CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Description: NEMA AB 1, molded case, one, two and three pole, with integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole, UL listed. _ Two and three pole circuit breakers with common trip and single operating handle. Handle ties between breakers are unacceptable. Circuit breakers shall have the voltage and trip rating scheduled or indicated on the Drawings. B. Operation: Operating mechanism shall be over center, trip free, toggle mechanism with quick -make, quick -break action with positive handle indication. C. Trip Elements: Thermal magnetic trip element calibrated for 40 deg. C. ambient temperature. D. Terminations: Terminations for 10-30 ampere breakers shall be UL listed for use with 60 degree C. or 75 degree C. conductors. Terminations for breakers 35 ampere and greater shall be UL listed for use with 75 degree C conductors. E. Interrupting Rating: Circuit breakers shall have minimum RMS symmetrical ampere interrupting ratings as scheduled on drawings. F. Breakers 250 Amp Frame and Greater: Circuit breakers with frame sizes greater than 250 amperes shall have adjustable magnetic trip elements which are set by a single adjustment, push to trip button and reverse connection capability. G. Switching Duty: UL listed SWD for switching duty, 15 and 20 ampere single pole, suitable for 120 volts ac fluorescent loads. H. HACR Listing: UL listed as HACR type, 120/240 volt, 15-60 ampere, one, two and three pole, to serve heating air conditioning and refrigeration equipment. Provide circuit breakers UL listed as Type HACR for air conditioning equipment branch circuits. I. HID Lighting Circuits: Circuit breakers serving HID lighting circuits shall be specifically designed for HID circuits. J. Accessories: Provide circuit breakers with switching neutral, shunt trip, ground fault current interrupters, or remote controlled operators as scheduled on the drawings. K. Motor Circuit Protectors: Where indicate on the Drawings or Specified elsewhere provide molded case circuit breaker with integral instantaneous magnetic trip element in each pole. END OF SECTION 03860296/96 CIRCUIT DISCONNECT AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 16475-2 -- 1" I `... LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 I SECTION 16481 - MOTOR CONTROLLERS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information on all items specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing. Provide catalog sheets showing voltage, controller size, ratings and size of switching and overcurrent protective devices, short circuit ratings, dimensions, and enclosure details. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product. 1.03 SCOPE A. Description: The work shall include all labor, material, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to motor wiring and control as shown on the drawings and/or as specified herein. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances. B. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Deliver, store, protect, and handle Products to site according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Accept delivery of motor controllers on site and inspect for damage. Report concealed damage to carrier within their required time period. Protect from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade protected from the weather. Provide appropriate covering. 03860296/96 MOTOR CONTROLLERS 16481-1 r LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify that field measurements are as shown on the Drawings. B. Location of Motor Controllers: Verify locations of motor controllers prior to installation. Motor controller locations are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensions are indicated. Locate as required to complete wiring system. 1.07 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. General: Submit according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. As -built Drawings: Accurately record actual locations of motor controllers. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MOTORS A. General: All motors will, unless otherwise noted, be furnished under other Divisions of the specifications, or will be furnished by the Owner. Where motors are mounted integrally with items of equipment, they will be erected in place with such equipment ready for electrical connection; such erection is not a part of the work under this Division. Where motors are to be installed as separate items, their foundations, anchor bolts and other provisions necessary to their erection will be provided as a part of the work of the Division under which they are furnished; their erection and final setting are a part of the work of this Division, and shall be done by specially skilled millwrights or similar craftsmen. 2.02 MOTOR CONTROLLERS A. Manufacturers: Motor Controllers shall be of Furnas, General Electric, Westinghouse, Square D or approved equivalent manufacture with the proper enclosures. B. General: Coordinate the features of each motor controller with the ratings and characteristics of the supply circuit, the motor, the required control sequence, the duty cycle of the motor, drive, and load, and the pilot device, and control circuit affecting controller functions. Provide controllers that are horsepower rated to suit the motor controlled. C. Enclosures: For individually mounted controllers and control devices, comply with NEMA Standard 250, "Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)." Provide enclosures suitable for the environmental conditions at the controller location. Provide NEMA Type 1 enclosures except as otherwise indicated or required. 03860296/96 MOTOR CONTROLLERS '16481-2 I- r 7 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 r� 2.03 MANUAL MOTOR CONTROLLERS A. Manual Motor Controller: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose Class A manually operated, fill -voltage controller with overload element, red pilot light, field convertible auxiliary r contact, and push button operator. B. Fractional Horsepower Manual Controller: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose Class A manually operated, full -voltage controller for fractional horsepower induction motors, with thermal overload unit, red pilot light, and toggle operator. F" C. Motor Starting Switch: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose Class A manually operated, full -voltage controller for fractional horsepower induction motors, without thermal overload unit, with red pilot light and toggle operator. D. Thermal Overload Protection: Melting alloy or bi-metal strip with inverse time characteristic. Provide with heaters or sensors in each phase matched to nameplate full load current of the specific motor with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle. Provide all three phase starters with three overload elements, one per phase. E. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6; Type 1 or 3R as required or as shown on the drawings. Where the starter is installed in public areas, it shall be in a recessed box with a stainless steel coverplate. 2.04 MAGNETIC MOTOR CONTROLLERS A. General: All motor starters (controllers) and control equipment shall be furnished and installed under this Division of the specifications. The starters and control equipment shall conform with the schedule on the drawings if applicable. B. Full Voltage Non Reversing Controllers: NEMA ICS 2, AC general purpose Class A magnetic controller for induction motors rated in horsepower. C. Contacts: Contacts shall open each ungrounded connection to the motor. All contacts shall be replaceable without removing power wiring or removing starter from panel. �. D. Coil Operating Voltage: 120 volts, 60 Hertz. f' E. Solid State Overload Protection: Solid state current sensing, heaterless, control power inductively acquired from motor load current, ambient insensitive, NEMA Class 10, 20 or 30 as required by the load, 2:1 full load current adjustment, with thermal memory, manual reset, tripping accuracy plus or minus 2 percent, short-circuit self-protection, phase loss protection trips within 3 seconds of phase loss conditions. Furnas ESP, no substitutions. F. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 or 3R as required or as shown on the drawings. 03860296/96 MOTOR CONTROLLERS 16481-3 r LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 _ 2.05 MOTOR CONTROLLER FEATURES A. General: Provide pushbutton stations, pilot lights and hand -off -automatic switches in all starters. Provide auxiliary contacts on starters to accomplish interlocks and control as specified in Division 15 or as noted elsewhere. Starter disconnecting means shall have auxiliary contacts to disconnect all control circuits when the starter is disconnected. B. Auxiliary Contacts: Provide auxiliary contacts on starters to accomplish interlocks and control as specified in Division 15 or as noted elsewhere. NEMA ICS 2, two each field convertible contacts in addition to seal -in contact. C. Cover Mounted Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 2, heavy duty type. D. Pilot Device Contacts: NEMA ICS 2, Form Z, rated A150. E. Pushbuttons: Unguarded Recessed type. F. Indicating Lights: Incandescent type. G. Selector Switches: Rotary type. r-. H. Relays: NEMA ICS 2. I. Control Power Transformers: Equip each starter unit with a control power transformer, 120 volt secondary, 60 va minimum. Provide fused secondary, and bond unfused leg of secondary to enclosure. 2.06 COMBINATION STARTER DISCONNECTS A. Combination Controllers: Starter units shall be combination starter and non -fused switch units in common enclosure as scheduled on the Drawings. Provide means for locking disconnect handle, and means for defeating cover interlock. B. Non -Fusible Switch Assemblies: Non -fusible switch shall be as described in Section 16441 - CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECT SWITCHES. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Preparation: Verify that surface is suitable for controller installation. Do not install controller until building environment can be maintained within the service conditions ,r required by the manufacturer. B. General: Install enclosed controllers where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Install enclosed controllers plumb. 03860296/96 MOTOR CONTROLLERS 1 16481-4 r LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 C. Wall Mounting: For control equipment at walls, bolt units to wall or mount on light weight structural steel channels bolted to the wall. Mount 5 ft, to operating handle. D. Floor Mounting: For controllers not located at walls, provide freestanding racks fabricated of structural steel members and light weight slotted structural steel channels. Use feet consisting of 3/8 inch thick steel plates, 6 inches square, bolted to the floor. Use feet for welded attachment of 1-1/2 inch by 1-1/2 inch by 1/4 inch vertical angle posts not over three feet on centers. Connect the posts with horizontal lightweight slotted steel channels and bolt the control equipment to the channels. E. Overload Elements: Select and install overload heater elements in motor controllers to match installed motor characteristics. F. Nameplates: Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 16195 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION. G. Motor Data: Provide neatly typed label inside each motor controller door identifying motor served, nameplate horsepower, full load amperes, code letter, service factor, and voltage/phase rating. H. Connections: Tighten connectors, terminals, bus joints, and mountings. Tighten field connected connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values or as specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 03960296/96 END OF SECTION MOTOR CONTROLLERS 16481-5 i LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 k SECTION 16500 - LIGHTING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information on all items specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing. Include manufacturer's catalog data and drawings on all interior and exterior lighting fixtures with separate sheet for each fixture, assembled by Luminaire "Type" in alphabetical order, with the proposed fixture and accessories clearly labeled. Ballast and lamp data shall accompany fixture submittals. Submit dimensioned drawings and performance data including coefficients of utilization, candela distribution, spacing to mounting height ratio, efficiency and visual comfort probability. Furnish scale drawings, catalog data, samples of finish, distribution curves, and any other data required by the Architect/Engineer for every type fixture. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit for review complete manufacturer's installation instructions. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance instructions for each product. 1.03 SUBSTITUTIONS A. General: Where a lighting fixture has been scheduled on the drawings by manufacturer's r name and catalog number, it has been done in order to establish a standard. Any ` substitution to the scheduled lighting fixture shall be of equal or better quality. No substitution shall be made without the review of the engineer, who will be the sole judge of equality. It is the contractor's responsibility to submit sufficient data for review by the Engineer. If requested by the engineer, the contractor shall provide samples of each proposed substitution for review. Should a substitution be unacceptable to the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide the originally specified lighting fixture. 03860296/96 LIGHTING 16500-1 i' LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 r. 1.04 APPROVAL OF SUBSTITUTIONS A. General: The contract will be on the basis of materials scheduled on the drawings without consideration of possible substitute of "or -equal" items. Application for the acceptance of substitute lighting fixtures will not be considered until after the effective date of the agreement. Submit requests for substitute materials under provisions of the General Conditions and the General Requirements. Approval for lighting fixture substitution shall not be given prior to the bid opening. 1.05 CATALOG NUMBERS A. General: All features specified or scheduled for fixtures shall be provided, even if the catalog number given in the specifications or schedule lacks the required numerals, prefixes or suffixes corresponding to the features called for. 1.06 SCOPE A. Description: The work shall include all labor, material, equipment and services necessary for and incidental to the complete lighting system as shown on the drawings and specified _ herein. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances. B. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Deliver, store, protect, and handle products according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Accept delivery of lighting fixtures on site and inspect for damage. Report concealed damage to carrier within their required time period. Protect lighting fixtures from degradation by storing above grade protected from the weather. Provide appropriate covering. Lighting fixtures shall remain in factory protective shipping cartons until installation. 1.09 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Locations: The drawings are schematic and only indicate the approximate location of lighting fixtures. The precise location of lighting fixtures shall be coordinated with the architectural reflected ceiling plan and other architectural features. B. Recessed Lighting Fixtures: Verify that there will be sufficient headroom for the installation of recessed lighting fixtures prior to ordering lighting fixtures. Verify ceiling system type and provide suitable plaster ring or frame if required. 03860296/96 LIGHTING 16500-2 01LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 '~ 1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS I A. General: Provide extra materials according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division '+ 1 Specification Sections. Deliver extra materials in factory packing. t PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 INTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES A. General: Provide and install a lighting fixture on each and every lighting outlet shown. Furnish fixtures in accordance with the designations on the drawings and as specified herein. Should any designations be omitted on the drawings, furnish fixtures of the same type as used in rooms of similar usage. 2.02 EXTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES A. General: All exterior mounted lighting fixtures shall be UL listed for wet locations where installed in direct contact with weather and UL listed for damp locations where installed protected from weather. 2.03 ELECTRONIC FLUORESCENT BALLASTS f . A. General: Electronic ballasts shall be constructed of discrete or integrated electronic components and shall have a minimum frequency of operation of 20 kHz and shall operate without visible flicker. Ballast shall be UL listed Class P, CSA certified and sound rated "A". Ballast shall have a minimum power factor of 95 % and an maximum lamp current crest factor of 1.6. Input current total harmonic distortion shall be 10 % maximum. Ballasts shall maintain constant light output with input voltage variations of plus or minus �^ 25%. Ballast shall have a sequenced start progression which first heats cathode filaments and then ignites the lamp. Ballasts shall withstand line transients as defined in ANSI/IEEE C62.41, Category A and shall comply with FCC Rules and Regulations Part 18, for non -consumer equipment. B. Ballasts for T8 Rapid Start Lamps: Ballasts shall have the following maximum ANSI input watts when used with F32T8 "Octron" lamps. Ballasts shall be Advance Mark V IC, Motorola Rapid Start or approved equivalent. 1. One Lamp: 31 watts. 2. Two Lamp: 61 watts. 3. Three Lamp: 95 watts. 4. Four Lamp: 121 watts. 03860296/96 LIGHTING 16500-3 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 2.04 FLUORESCENT LAMP EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY 900-9268 A. Rapid Start Lamps: Emergency fluorescent power supplies shall consist of a high -temperature, maintenance -free nickel cadmium battery, a charger, and electronic circuitry in one case. Provide a solid-state charging indicator light to monitor the charger and battery, and a double pole test switch. The emergency ballast shall be capable of operating one 40 watt T8 or T12 lamp a minimum of 90 minutes producing a minimum of 1100 lumens. The unit shall consume 4 watts of input power and have 24 watt-hour battery capacity. The unit shall be UL listed for installation either inside or on top of the fixture, warranted for five years from date of purchase. 2.05 HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE (HID) BALLASTS A. Description: All interior HID lighting fixture ballasts shall be encased and potted and shall have automatic thermal protection. Outdoor HID ballasts shall be coil and core type. HID ballasts shall be high power factor, minimum 90%. Ballasts shall comply with ANSI C82.4. B. Metal Halide: Peak -lead autotransformer, high power factor for all wattages. 2.06 ACRYLIC LENSES A. 0.125 Inch Lenses: Wherever acrylic lenses are specified or noted, the material used shall be virgin acrylic with a minimum nominal thickness of 0.125 inches. Only KSH brand lenses shall be acceptable. 2.07 INCANDESCENT LAMPS A. General: Fully equip each fixture with a full set of new lamps at the completion and acceptance of the work; lamps shall be of the best grade, and of the ratings and types scheduled on the drawings or as required by the lighting fixture manufacture; General Electric, Phillips, Sylvania or approved equivalent. B. Incandescent A Lamps: Medium base, inside frosted unless scheduled or recommended otherwise by the fixture manufacturer. Lamps shall be 120V, 750 hour minimum.. 2.08 FLUORESCENT LAMPS A. General: Fully equip each fixture with a full set of new lamps at the completion and acceptance of the work; lamps shall be of the best grade, and of the ratings and types scheduled on the drawings or as required by the lighting fixture manufacture; General Electric, Phillips, Sylvania or approved equivalent. B. T-8 350OK: Rapid start, T-8, 3500K, 32 watt, 2850 initial lumens, 82 CRI, 20000 hour minimum with 3 hours per start equal to GE F32T8/SP35/RS. 03860296/96 LIGHTING 16500-4 i LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 2.09 HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE (HID) LAMPS A. Metal Halide: Phosphor coated "E" or "BT" lamp. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION 900-9268 A. Installation of Interior Fixtures: Outlet box locations shown for fluorescent fixtures are diagrammatic. Locate boxes to coincide with stem hangers where such occur. Fixtures shall be level, square with the general construction and securely attached according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Lay -in Type Fixtures: Locate recessed ceiling luminaries as indicated on reflected ceiling plan. Center the fixtures in ceiling grids. Wire the fixtures using concealed outlet boxes accessible through ceiling panels. Install conductors in flexible metallic conduit from box to fixture. Fixtures shall be securely fastened to the ceiling framing member by the use of four UL listed clips. Support luminaries larger than 2 x 4 foot size independent of ceiling grid. Install recessed luminaries to permit removal from below. C. Fixtures in Plaster or Gypboard Ceilings: Provide a suitable plaster ring or frame for each fixture recessed in a plaster or gypboard ceiling. D. Surface Mounted Fixtures: Fixtures shall be installed flush with the ceilings. Install surface mounted luminaries plumb and adjust to align with building lines and with each other. Secure to prevent movement. For lay -in ceilings install a structural member to span two tees and attach the fixture to the structural members. Do not suspend fixtures from lay -in ceiling panels. E. Continuous Rows: Where fixtures are installed in a continuous row, the row shall be straight and plumb. Lens shall be aligned in all planes and no part of the lamp shall be visible. F. Pendant Mounted Fixtures: Install suspended luminaires using pendants supported from swivel hangers. Provide pendant length required to suspend luminaire at indicated height. G. Fixtures Mounted to Exposed Grid: Where fixtures are mounted to an exposed grid ceiling, the fixtures may be clipped to the ceiling grid provided the attachment holds the fixture flush, level, and secure, otherwise use bolts or screws to secure fixture to ceiling grid. Where they cannot be centered on a grid, install a structural member to span two tees and attach the fixture to the structural members. H. Wall Mounted Fixtures: Install wall mounted luminaries, emergency lighting units and exit signs at height as indicated on Drawings or as scheduled. Coordinate the locations with architectural wall elevations and with architectural features. I. Exit Signs: Install surface mounted exit signs plumb and adjust to align with building lines and with each other. Secure to prevent movement. 03860296/96 LIGHTING 16500-5 I LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 J. Accessories: Install accessories furnished with each luminaire. K. Connections: Connect luminaries to branch circuit outlets provided under Section 16110 - RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for temperature conditions within luminaire. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. L. Lamps: Install specified lamps in each luminaire. - M. Firestopping: Install recessed luminaries using accessories and firestopping materials to meet regulatory requirements for fire rating. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General: Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection and operation. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. General: Aim and adjust luminaries as indicated or as directed. B. Exit Signs: Position exit sign directional arrows as indicated. 3.04 CLEANING A. General: Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials. Remove dirt and debris from enclosures. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. Clean finishes and touch up damage. 3.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. General: Relamp luminaries that have failed lamps at Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 03860296/96 LIGHTING 16500-6 7 �,.. LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 t SECTION 16721 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS G' 1IT" - . : A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information on all items specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing. Provide electrical characteristics and connection requirements. The contractor shall submit complete documentation for the Fire Alarm/Life Safety System showing the Model Number, type, rating, size, style, Manufacturer's Names, and Manufacturer's Catalog Data Sheets for all items to ensure compliance with these specifications. C. Shop Drawings: Submit for review a complete riser diagram and layout of the entire Fire Alarm / Life Safety System, showing all interconnect wiring and equipment. Provide annunciator layout and system wiring diagram showing each device and wiring connection required. D. Test Reports: Submit for review Manufacturer's test data. Indicate satisfactory completion of required tests and inspections. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit for review complete manufacturer's r instructions. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, ' preparation, installation, and starting of products. F. Operation Data: Submit for review all operation and maintenance manuals for items specified herein. Include the following in the operation and maintenance manuals: 1. Complete typewritten operating instructions. 2. Wiring diagrams for the control panel with all terminals identified. 3. A parts list for the system identifying the components with ordering numbers. 4. A plan showing conduit size and routing, number and size of conductors and locations of all devices. 5. Maintenance and repair procedures. ` 03M96/96 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16721-1 i LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 1.03 SCOPE A. General: Provide and install a complete and operating 24 VDC, closed circuit, electrically supervised, zone annunciated fire alarm and detection system with emergency battery backup as shown on the drawings and described herein. It is the intent to obtain a complete system which will operate as described herein, and all equipment necessary for such operation shall be provided whether or not each item is enumerated herein or described on the drawings. The system shall include but not be limited to all control panels, power supplies, signal initiating devices, audible and visual alarm devices, conduit, wire, fittings, and all accessories required to provide a complete operating system. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Code Requirements: The equipment and installation shall comply with.the current applicable provisions of the following standards: 1. NFPA 70 National Electric Code, Article 760. 2. NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code. 3. Local and State building codes. 4. All requirements of the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction. 5. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 6. Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA) B. UL Listing: The system and all components shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. for use in Fire Protective Signaling Systems under the following standards as applicable: 1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. General: Submit according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. As -built Drawings: Record actual locations of initiating devices, signaling appliances, and end -of -line devices. Record actual wiring diagram. 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. Installer: Company specializing in installing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. The fire alarm installing firm shall be the authorized dealer of the manufacturer and shall be duly licensed in the State of Texas under Senate Bill 925. That firm shall maintain a staff of qualified technicians capable of installing and servicing the system. They shall also maintain a stock of parts and components used in the system. 1.07 GENERAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS A. General: All equipment and material shall be new and unused, and listed by Underwriter's Laboratories for the specific intended purpose. All control panel components and field peripherals shall be designed for continuous duty without degradation of function or 03860296/96 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16721-2 r„ LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 performance. All equipment covered by this specification or noted on Installation Drawings shall be the best equipment suited for the application and shall be provided by a single manufacturer or be recognized and U.L. listed as compatible by both manufacturers. 1.08 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. General: Furnish service and maintenance of fire alarm system for one year from Date of Substantial Completion. 1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS A. General: Furnish according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Keys: Provide six keys of each type. C. Smoke Detectors: Provide three of each type of automatic smoke detector. 1.10 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (HARDWIRED) A. General: Complete, zoned, noncoded fire detection and alarm system with manual and automatic alarm initiation. B. Signal Transmission: Hardwired, using separate individual circuits for each zone of alarm initiation. 1. Initiating Circuits (Class A): The system shall be wired as a Style D (Class A) system throughout for signal initiating circuits. 2. Alarm Circuits (Class A or B): The system shall be wired as a Style Z or Y (Class A or B) system for audible alarm circuits. 1.11 SYSTEM OPERATION ... A. Noninterfering: Zone, power, wire, and supervise the system so a signal on one zone does not prevent the receipt of signals from any other zone. All zones are manually resettable from the Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) after the initiating device or devices are �.., restored to normal. Systems that require the use of batteries or battery backup for the programming functions are not acceptable. B. Priority of Signals: Accomplish automatic response functions by the first zone initiated. i Alarm functions resulting from initiation by the first zone are not altered by subsequent alarms. The highest priority is an alarm signal. Supervisory and trouble signals have second- and third -level priority. Signals of a higher level priority take precedence over signals of lower priority even though the lower -priority condition occurred first. Annunciate all alarm signals regardless of priority or order received. r- 03860296/96 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16721-3 f"' LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 C. General Alarm: The actuation of any alarm initiating device shall cause the following events to immediately occur: Audible/Visual Signals: Sound all audible devices continuously and flash all associated visual signals. 1. FACP General Alarm: Indicate the general alarm condition at the FACP 2. FACP Zone Identification: Identify the device that is the source of the alarm (or its zone) at the FACP. 3. Exit Signs: Flash all exit signs. 4. Air Unit Shutdown: Transmit signal to building mechanical systems to initiate shutdown of all air handling units over 2000 CFM by zone. D. System Trouble Detection: When a trouble condition is detected by one of the system initiating or indicating circuits, the following shall immediately occur: 1. FACP System Trouble: Indicate system trouble at the FACP. _ 2. FACP Audible/Visible Signal: Activate a local sounding device in the FACP which is distinct from the general alarm sound. Manual acknowledge function at FACP silences audible trouble alarm; visual alarm is displayed until initiating failure or _ circuit trouble is cleared. 3. Trouble Indication: Indicate the device or zone with the trouble condition. If the trouble condition is caused by module failure, power trouble, or ground fault, the _ corresponding trouble indication on the FACP shall operate. E. Control Switch Operation: Switches provide capability for acknowledgement of alarm; supervisory, trouble,and other specified signals at the FACP; and capability to silence the local audible signal and light a light -emitting diode (LED). Subsequent zone alarms cause the audible signal to sound again until silenced in turn by switch operation. Restoration to normal of alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions extinguish the associated LED and cause the audible signal to sound again until the restoration is acknowledged by switch operation. F. Walk Test Operation: Walk test mode shall test initiating device circuits and indicating device circuits from the field without returning to the panel to reset the system. Upon activation of an initiating device, the controlled outputs shall operate for approximately four seconds with circuits that were selected under walk test. Inducing a trouble into the initiating circuit shall activate the controlled outputs shall activate and remain activated until the trouble is cleared. Inducing trouble into the indicating circuit shall activate the -- particular circuit and pulse the circuit at a one second on/off rate until the trouble is cleared. An alarm indication, and a trouble indication shall operate upon completion of each circuit test. _ G. Alarm Verification Operation: Smoke detection for a zone with alarm verification causes the following: 1. Alarm Indication: Audible and visible indication of an "alarm verification" signal at the FACP. 2. Verification Sequence: Activation of a listed and approved "alarm verification" sequence at the FACP and the detector. 3. Alarm Initiation: Initiate general alarm if the alarm is verified. 03860296/96 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16721-4 �., LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 ti 4. Alarm Cancellation: FACP indication cancellation and system reset if the alarm is not verified. H. Waterflow Operation: Waterflow switch operation initiates a non silenceable general alarm. I. Sprinkler Valve Tamper Switch Operation: Sprinkler valve tamper switch operation causes or initiates the following: r 1. FACP: A supervisory audible and visible "valve tamper" signal at the FACP. J. History Mode Operation: The system shall be able to store and display the last 255 system events which have occurred. K. Loss of Primary Power: Loss of primary power at the FACP shall cause the following indications: 1. FACP: Sound trouble signal and illuminate emergency power light when the system is operating on an alternate power supply. L. FACP Alphanumeric Display: Displays plain language description of alarms, trouble signals, supervisory signals, monitoring actions, system and component status, and system commands. 1.12 SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. General: Only FACP equipment and peripheral field devices have been shown on the Drawings. Specific and complete wiring between control equipment and peripheral equipment has been deleted for clarity. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL (FACP) A. General: Comply with UL 864, "Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems." Control panel shall be Notifier BE500 or approved equal. B. Flush Enclosure: Modular flush wall mounted enclosure. Wall thickness shall be verified for proper thickness. C. Cabinet: The back box and door shall be constructed of 16 gauge steel with provisions for electrical conduit connections into the sides and top. The door shall provide a key lock and shall include a glass or other transparent opening for viewing of all indicators. Arrange panel so all operations required for testing or for normal care and maintenance of the system are performed from the front of the enclosure. If more than a single unit is required to form a complete control panel, provide exactly matching modular unit enclosures. Accommodate all components and allow ample gutter space for interconnection of panels as well as field wiring. Identify each enclosure by an engraved, red laminated, phenolic resin nameplate. Lettering on the enclosure nameplate shall not be r- 03860296/96 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16721-5 r". is LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 _ less than 1 inch high. Identify individual components and modules within the cabinets with permanent labels. D. Control Modules: The FACP shall be modular in structure for ease of installation, maintenance, and future expansion. The FACP shall be provide with the proper number and types of modules to serve all zones, indicating devices and functions as indicated on the drawings. Local, visible, and audible signals notify of alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions. Each type of audible alarm has a distinctly different sound. _ E. Systems: Alarm and supervisory systems are separate and independent in the FACP. The alarm initiating zone boards in the FACP consist of plug in cards. Construction requiring removal of field wiring for module replacement is not acceptable. F. Indicating Lights (Hardwire System): Provide individual LED devices for each zone. An LED test switch for each FACP section illuminates all LED devices on the section of the control panel. Manual toggle test switches or push test buttons do not require a key to operate. Alarm and supervisory signals light a red LED of the associated zone. Trouble _ signals an amber LED for the associated zone. G. Resetting (Hardwire System): Provide the necessary controls to prevent the resetting of any alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal while the alarm or trouble condition still exists. H. System Power Supply: Comply with UL 1481 "Power supplies for Fire Protective _ Signaling Systems." The main power supply for the FACP shall be integral to the control panel itself, and shall be adequate to serve control panel modules, remote detectors, remote annunciators, door holders, smoke dampers, relays, and alarm signaling devices. Include battery operated emergency power supply with capacity for operating system in standby "- mode for 24 hours followed by alarm mode for 15 minutes. Input power shall be 120 VAC, 60 Hz. The power supply shall provide an integral variable rate battery charger which will automatically inhibit the deep discharge of the system standby batteries, and shall be protected against the accidental reverse polarity connection of the standby batteries. The main power supply shall continuously monitor all field wires for earth ground conditions, and shall have the following LED indications: 1. Negative Ground Fault LED 2. Positive Ground Fault LED 3. Battery Fail LED -- 4. AC Power Fail LED I. Instructions: Printed or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a Lexan plastic or glass cover in a metal frame. Install the frame in a location observable from the FACP. Include interpretation and appropriate response for displays and signals, and briefly describe the functional operation of the system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions. 2.02 ALARM INITIATING DEVICES A. Manual Fire Alarm Station: Comply with UL 38, "Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes." Manual fire alarm pull stations shall be semi -flush mounted, non -coded, non-breakglass 03860296/96 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16721-6 i �.. LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 t type, equipped with key lock in order that they may be tested without operating the handle, and so designed that after an actual activation, they cannot be restored to normal except by key reset. An operated station shall automatically condition itself so as to be visually detected, as operated, at a minimum distance of 100 feet, front or side. Manual stations shall be constructed of die formed, satin -finished aluminum, with operating instructions provided on the cover. The word FIRE shall appear on three sides of the Manual Station in letters one half inch in size or larger. Stations shall be suitable for surface mounting on matching backbox, or semi -flush mounting on standard single gang box or switchplate. B. Automatic Heat Detector: Comply with UL 521, "Heat Detectors for Fire Protective r^ Signaling Systems." Automatic heat detectors shall be combination rate of rise and fixed P temperature rated at 135 degrees F for areas where ambient temperatures do not exceed 100 degrees, and 200 degrees for areas where the temperature exceeds 100 degrees, but f" does not exceed 150 degrees. Automatic heat detectors shall be low profile, ceiling mount type with positive indication of activation. The rate of rise element shall consist of an air chamber, a flexible metal diaphragm, and a factory calibrated, moisture -proof, trouble free vent, and shall operate when the rate of temperature rise exceeds 15 degrees F. per minute. The fixed temperature element shall consist of a fusible alloy retainer and actuator shaft. Automatic heat detectors shall have a smooth ceiling rating of 2500 square feet. ~ C. Photoelectric Area Smoke Detectors: Comply with UL 268, "Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems." Photoelectric smoke detectors shall be optical type using an LED light source. Each detector shall contain a visual status and alarm indicator, remote LED output and a built-in test switch. Detector shall be provided on a twist -lock base that allows for mounting to a 4" outlet box. The detector shall have a nominal sensitivity of 3.0% as measured in a U.L. smoke box. Calibration sensitivity and r performance test shall be performed without smoke. The detector shall not alarm when f, exposed to air velocities of up to 3000 feet per minute. D. Carbon Monoxide Gas Detectors: Carbon monoxide gas detectors shall be 120 volt, UL listed, equal to ASAHI Electronics Model No. COS-200. .-• E. Duct Mounted Smoke Detectors: Comply with UL 268A "Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications." Provide duct mounted smoke detectors in the air ducts of air conditioning units where indicated on the drawings. Detectors shall be ionization or photoelectric type r.. as indicated on the Drawings and as specified above. Duct smoke detectors shall be provided with visual alarm and power indicators, and a reset switch. Each detector shall be installed upon the air duct, with properly sized air sampling tubes. F. Duct Detector Remote Test Station: Where indicated on the Drawings provide duct detectors with remote test station and alarm LED which indicates the alarm status of the associated smoke detector. For detectors located in roof mounted air conditioning units, install the remote test stations flush in the ceiling directly below or as close as possible below the roof mounted air unit. For detectors mounted inside the building spaces, mount the remote test stations on the wall or ceiling near the detector. Provide each test station with a typewritten label indicating the unit that the detector resides in. Provide each duct i detector with auxiliary contacts for air unit control interface. r— t 03860296/96 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16721-7 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 2.03 ALARM INDICATING DEVICES A. Combination Audio/Visual Units: Comply with UL 464, "Audible Signaling Appliances" and UL 1638, "Visual Signaling Appliances." The audio section of the unit shall have a minimum sound output of 100 DB at 10 feet and a current draw of 105 MA or less. Provide unit in standard red color and with mounting hardware to accomplish mounting indicated in the specifications and on the drawings. The visual section of the unit shall have a minimum of 75 candela and meet or exceed the requirements of the Americans _ With Disabilities Act (ADA). Mount the audio/visual unit as indicated on the drawings. B. Visual Only Units: Comply with UL 1638, "Visual Signaling Appliances." The visual section of the unit shall have a minimum of 75 candela and meet or exceed the requirements of the Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA). Mount the visual only units as indicated on the drawings. 2.04 AUXILIARY DEVICES A. Waterflow Switches: Comply with UL 346, "Waterflow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems." Waterflow switches shall be installed in sprinkler pipes to signal fire detection and control systems or auxiliary indicators when flow occurs. Water flowing in _ the pipe shall deflect a vane in the switch and cause a contact closure. B. Supervisory Switches: Supervisory switches shall be installed on sprinkler cut-off valves to indicate the closing of the valve. The switch shall be mounted on the valve actuator arm and test in a notch filed in the valve stem. If the valve stem is moved it shall force the actuator arm out of the notch thus causing the switch to operate. The switch shall be rated at 7.5 amps for 24 volts. 2.05 FIRE ALARM WIRE AND CABLE A. Fire Alarm Power Branch Circuits: Building wire as specified in Section 16120 - BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE. B. Initiating Device and Indicating Appliance Circuits: Power limited fire protective signaling cable, copper conductor, 300 volts insulation rated 105 degrees C. C. Plenum Cable: Power limited fire -protective signaling cable classified for fire and smoke characteristics, copper conductor, 300 volts insulation rated 105 degrees C, suitable for use in air handling ducts, hollow spaces used as ducts, and plenums. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Installation of the fire alarm/life safety system shall be in strict compliance with manufacturers' written recommendations and NFPA Standards. Consult the manufacturers control panel and peripheral equipment installation manuals for all wiring diagrams, 03860296/96 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16721-8 t: �., LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 k t schematics, physical equipment sizes, etc. before beginning system installation. Refer to the riser/connection diagram for all specific system installation/termination/wiring data. B. Mounting: All equipment shall be attached to a non load -bearing wall, and shall be held firmly in place. Fastening and supports shall be adequate to support the required load, and provide a safety factor of five. All fire alarm devices shall be flush mounted in the walls that they are located on with the exception of existing block wall construction. In this case, devices shall be mounted in surface mounted boxes and shall be fed with surface mounted raceway via the shortest exposed path. All surface boxes and raceways shall be in accordance with Section 16110 - RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS of these specifications. C. FACP: FACP will be mounted with the top of panel not more than 6 feet above floor level. The FACP shall be flush mounted in the wall with the exception of the panel being installed on an existing block wall or when located in a non-public space such as an equipment room or janitor's closet. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to final coordinate the proper wall thickness of new walls containing FACP's. D. Manual Stations: Install manual station in recessed backboxes with operating handle 48 inches above finished floor. E. Audible/Visible Signal: Install audible and visual signal devices the lower of 80 inches above finished floor or 6 inches below ceiling. F. Water Flow Detectors and Valve Supervisory Switches: Connect for each sprinkler valve station required to be supervised. G. Conduit and Boxes: Provide complete wiring and conduit between all equipment in separate conduit, maximum 40% full. Conduits of proper size shall be installed from the control panel equipment to field devices. All field devices shall be mounted upon U.L. listed electrical junction boxes. Conduit shall not enter the FACP, or any other remotely mounted control panel equipment or backboxes, except where conduit entry knockouts have been provided by the factory. H. Junction Boxes: All splices in field wiring shall be made in U.L. listed electrical junction boxes. All electrical junction boxes shall be labeled as "Fire Alarm System" with decal or other approved markings. I. Power Circuit: The FACP shall be connected to a separate dedicated branch circuit, maximum 20 amperes. This circuit shall be labeled at the main power distribution panel as FIRE ALARM. FACP primary power wiring shall be 12 AWG. The control panel cabinet shall be grounded securely to an equipment grounding conductor. Conduit shall enter into the FACP backbox only at those areas of the backbox which have factory r conduit knockouts. J. End -of -line Devices: Mount end -of -line device in control panel. r - 03860296/96 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS . 16721-9 r LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 — K. Connections: Make conduit and wiring connections to door release devices, sprinkler flow _ switches, sprinkler valve tamper switches, fire suppression system control panels, duct smoke detectors and any other devices as required. L. Automatic Detector Installation: Conform to NFPA 72E. Install ceiling mounted detectors not less than 4 inches from a side wall to the near edge. Install detectors located on the wall at least 4 inches but not more than 12 inches below the ceiling.. For exposed solid joist construction, mount detectors on the bottom of joists. On smooth ceilings, install detectors not over 30 feet apart in any direction. Install detectors no closer than 5 feet from air registers. 3.02 WIRING INSTALLATION A. Wiring Method: Install wiring in metal raceway according to Section 16110 - "RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS." Conceal raceway except in unfinished spaces and as indicated. B. Wiring Within Enclosures: Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to the sides and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train the conductors to the terminal points with no excess. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced or interrupted in any _ enclosure associated with the fire alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to the wiring diagrams of the system. Make all connections with approved crimp on terminal spade lugs, pressure type terminal blocks, or plug connectors. C. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull or outlet boxes, cabinets, or equipment enclosures where any circuit tap is made. D. Conductors: Unless otherwise specified within the installation manual of the specific equipment being used, all field wiring shall be minimum #16 (solid) or #14 type, and shall be approved for use as fire alarm cable. Cable shall be the type listed for Fire Alarm/Life Safety use and shall be installed per NEC Article 760. E. Color Coding: Provide fire alarm circuit conductors with insulation color coded as — follows, or using colored tape at each conductor termination and in each junction box. 1. Power Branch Circuit Conductors: Black, red, white. 2. Initiating Device Circuit: Black, red. 3. Detector Power Supply: Violet, brown. 4. Signal Device Circuit: Blue (positive), white (negative). 5. Door Release: Gray, gray. 6. Municipal Trip Circuit: Orange, orange. 7. Municipal Fire Alarm Loop: Black, white. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General: Field inspection and testing will be performed according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Tests: Test in accordance with NFPA 72 and local fire department requirements. 03860296/96 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16721-10 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 3.04 FINAL SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE A. Final Test: The system will be accepted only after a satisfactory test of the entire system has been accomplished by a factory trained distributor in the presence of a representative of the authority having jurisdiction and the Owner's representative. B. As -built Drawings: The distributor will present a complete set of "as built" Fire Alarm/Life Safety system drawings, and the factory supplied Operator's Manual to the Building Owner's representative and the local AHJ. C. Service: The distributor shall make available contracted periodic system testing, maintenance, and/or calibration services. 3.05 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A., General: Prepare and start systems according to the Conditions of the Contract and. Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Factory Technician: The distributor shall provide the on -site services of an authorized, factory trained technical representative to supervise all connections and fully test all devices and components of the system during installation phase. C. Training: The distributor shall provide comprehensive training on the operation, proper use, and testing of the installed fire alarm system to the Building Owner's Representative, and the local AHJ. 3.06 DEMONSTRATION A. General: Provide systems demonstration under provisions of the General Requirements. Demonstrate normal and abnormal modes of operation, and required responses to each. 03860296/96 END OF SECTION FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16721-11 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 SECTION 16915 - LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS 900-9268 A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information on all items specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing. Provide dimensions, size, voltage ratings and current ratings. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit for review complete manufacturer's instructions. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product. D. Maintenance Data: Submit for review Manufacturer's Maintenance Instructions. Include instructions for replacing and maintaining coil and contacts. 1.03 SCOPE A. Description: The work shall include all labor, material, equipment and services necessary for and incidental to the complete lighting system as shown on the drawings and specified herein. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances. B. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Deliver, store, protect, and handle Products to site under provisions of the General Requirements. Accept delivery of equipment on site and inspect for damage. Report concealed damage to carrier within their r aired time period. Protect from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above �rade protected from the weather. r� t f 03860296/96 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS 16915-1 r w LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 1.06 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. General: Submit according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. As -built Drawings: Record actual locations of each contactor and indicate circuits controlled on project record documents. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LIGHTING PHOTOfM1E CONTROL CENTER A. Description: Furnish and install, for exterior lighting, a Photo/Time control of the seven day calendar dial type, which shall be suitable to operate mechanically held contactors. B. Time Switch: The time switch shall function to prevent energization of lighting for preset periods each day. When permitted by the time switch, photocontrol shall operate the control center to energize whenever natural lighting falls below 25 footcandles. The time switch dial shall permit different ON -OFF settings for each day of the week, with — provisions for omitting selected days. The switch shall have a spring driven reserve sufficient to operate time switch controls for at least 16 hours after a power failure. On restoration of power, switch shall transfer to synchronous motor drive and automatically rewind reserve. C. Photocontrol: The photocontrol shall be remotely installed at an outside location and shall have cadmium sulphide hermetically sealed cell. It shall be fully temperature compensated and provide a time delay of at least 15 seconds to prevent false switching. D. Manual Switches: Manual switches shall be provided to maintain lighting ON or OFF until returned to AUTO position. E. Control Circuits: The center shall have two circuits as follows: — 1. Circuit A - ON by photocontrol - OFF by time switch 2. Circuit B - ON by photocontrol - OFF by photocontrol F. Manufacturer: Photo/Time control shall be Tork T-930LE or approved equivalent, in NEMA 1 surface enclosure with externally accessible override controls, or as noted on the drawings. — 2.02 LIGHTING CONTACTORS (MECHANICALLY HELD) A. General: Lighting contactors shall be mechanically held type especially designed to switch the current to incandescent filament, fluorescent, mercury lamps, and other non -motor loads. B. Description: NEMA ICS 2, magnetic lighting contactor. 03860296/96 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS 16915-2 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 4 900-9268 C. Configuration: Mechanically held, 3 wire control. D. Coil Voltage: 120 volts, 60 Hertz or as scheduled or as indicated on the Drawings. E. Poles: As scheduled or as indicated on the Drawings. F. Contact Rating: As scheduled or as indicated on the Drawings. G. Enclosure: ANSI/NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 or 3R as scheduled or as indicated on the Drawings and as required to meet conditions of installation. H. Accessories: As scheduled or as shown on the Drawings. 2.03 REMOTE CONTROL SWITCHES (CONTACTORS) A. Description: The remote control switches shall be of the single coil, electrically operated, mechanically held type. Positive locking shall be obtained without the use of hooks, latches, or semi -permanent magnets. The switches shall be listed under UL 508. They shall be fully rated and marked for use with ballast lighting, tungsten, and general use loads. Provide the contactor with 120 volt coil and installed in NEMA 1 enclosure. B. Contacts: Main contacts shall be silver alloy and shall be self aligning with renewable from the front of the panel. The switches shall be continuously rated 30 amps at 600 volts AC and shall have an interrupting capacity of 300 % of rated current at 0.4 to 0.5 power factor. Provide the number and arrangement of contacts as shown on the drawings. C. Manufacturers: Switches shall be ASCO 917 or approved equivalent. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 OUTDOOR LIGHTING A. General: All outdoor lighting indicated to be controlled by Photocell/Timeswitch shall be set to be turned on at dusk and off at a pre-set time. END OF SECTION 03860296/96 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS 16915-3 APPENDIX Soils Boring Logs , � 1 t. s s •ti ti r s ,�s ti` .............,' � 1 IT v ri ln1n_eirs sa�aa sits+ ! S.. �i • % I f�,tFr fr/x 3" narks � ' \ t;i � �• � IIs1 Y-01 I It I ...t,.�•. .y BH #1 ,I BH #2 , TA T 111 \t/A OF ' S C. 20. 0.K, A � t am to r 1- ./ —.� •.w "" Gd+ its . -------------------------- '�--jai..—^t:a�-------�. � Figure 1 A site plan of the site for the proposed Fire Station #4, Comell & University, Lubbock, TX showing the location of bore holes (not to scale) er Tr[ W.fm wo of W-00C 3 A. xursMAN ADDITION L�tV•_,� lUOlk:f,K�MUN1'i I;5�1i tart) tmTw to 1 Z fMRTNSASf IUt Cr StC". M PMCK A llttfl[+.tit COWRY. tExt-S rt�_�szr.2L2 i ...`:.S-ti : IV z =� •s'_,—x sr--: sue - -t . i wv-r• MI.-ll'�YY �L'.• TERRA ENGINEERS, INC. LU980QK,TX STR 1272 BORING LOG i. LEST HULL Ivu. i Project: Fire Station M 4 Locati0°: Cornell & UniversityO1-16A7 Date of Drilling: Client: Parkhill Smith & Cooper. Inc. Depth of G%YC: Surface Elevation: Unknown Diameter. 17/8" Depth: 20' Boring Method: 77r272 11SA No.: Depth. p R Description USC Aloisturc Content, % IL Id [dntiG'Y. Plastic I.imlt. Plasticiry Indn Passim a 200. % SPT. Na •f alwrs per 6" 1st 2nd 3rd Remarks Y. TS As halt I" Base Material 6" 2s Hard caliche rock, Pink Tests txe not pe formed uc to i ufiieient plc *25 penetration Pen s ayey Sand w1hard caliche rock, Pinkish White *4.5" Penetration 10 Clayey Sand w/gravel, Pinkish Gray SC 19.1 49 36 13 14.2 20 24 23 15 Clayey Sand w/hard caliche rock, Pinkish SC 15.3 *25 *4.0" Penetration 20 Clayey Sand w/gravel & hard caliche SC 15.3 *25 *4.0" rock, Pinkish Penetration 25 30 35 40 45 S0 — TERRA ENGINEERS, INC. BORING LOG E EST HOL NO 2 T Project: Location: Date of Drilling. Fire Station M 4 Cornell & University 01-16-97 Client: Depth ofG% T: �Tr Parkhill Smith & Cooper. Inc. Surface Elevation: Diameter: Depth: Boring Iltethod: STR No.: Unknown 7 718^ 20' IISA I272 Depth. ft Description USC content. Moisture umit.`x Umit, Pissfidry Index 20�0. % ist Na ofBlows3rd Remarks x TS Clavey Sand Brown SC 7.3 Clayey Sand, Light Brown SC 8.2 29 14 15 49.3 1413 15 2S Gravel, Grayish White 5 Clayey Sand w/hard caliche rock, SC 6.8 23 11 12 48.2 19 23 25 Pinkish White 10 Sandy Lean Clay w/hard caliche rock, CL 7.9 30 12 18 58.1 24 *25 *5.75" Pinkish Penetration 15 Clayey Sand w/gravel, Pinkish Gray SC 20.0 41 27 14 13.1 2) *25 *5.75" Penetration 20 Clayey Sand w/gravel & hard caliche SC 9.6 *25 *5.75" rock, Pinkish White Penetration 25 30 35 40 45 50 TERRA ENGINEERS, INC. TERRA ENGINEERS, INC.